Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Chapter
BEFORE YOU START
1 USING VT STUDIO
Chapter
SCREENS &
Chapter
Chapter
5 DISPLAY
11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
Chapter
12 RESOURCE
Chapter
COMMUNICATION
13 BETWEEN PC & VT3
Chapter
SYSTEM MEMORY
14 AREA
Chapter
Chapter
16 WORKSHEET
Chapter
ETHERNET
17 CONNECTION
Chapter
18 LADDER MONITOR
DANGER Failure to observe this item causes a risk that consequently results in death or serious injury.
WARNING Failure to observe the items mentioned may result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Failure to observe the items mentioned may result in medium or minor injury.
NOTICE Failure to observe this item may cause damage to the product itself as well to other property.
Here are listed items further enriching the understanding of the main text, and the information useful to
Reference
know.
Request
(1) No part of this instruction may be reprinted or reproduced without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) In case any doubt, error or miss is found in this manual, please call the telephone number recorded on the back
of this manual.
(4) Note that KEYENCE CORPORATION shall not be liable for any influence resulting from operation of the VT
series regardless of item (3) above.
(5) We shall replace any missing or incorrectly collated pages.
Do not use the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pads or push-button switches on the
switch unit to make switches that may affect human life or lead to product damage. Also,
WARNING design a system that is adaptable to touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-
button switches on the switch unit malfunction.
• Do not touch the touch panel or touch switches with a sharp-pointed object such as a pen
or screwdriver. Doing so might scratch the touch panel or touch switches or cause them to
malfunction.
• Do not subject the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-button switches on
the switch unit to shock or impact, or touch them with more than necessary force.
NOTICE Doing so might damage them.
• Never wipe the display with paint thinner or organic solvents. Doing so might damage the
display. When wiping the display, use a soft cloth moistened with watered down neutral
detergent.
• Do not copy copyrighted fonts and image data onto this unit for use as this infringes on the
copyright.
1. Definition
1.1 "use" or "using" means to access, install, download, copy, or otherwise benefit from using the
functionality of This Software.
1.2 "This Software" means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE
grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers used
in a single business address (factory, division, office) in order to use the KEYENCE product. You will
require user registration to use the software. Without registration, only one license is available for
one computer. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only.
3. Restrictions.
3.1 Other than installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify
or add any functions to This Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble This Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on This Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise
redistribute this Software to any third parties.
5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you "AS IS" and without any warranty of any kind.
In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims, costs or any lost
profits caused by using this Software.
6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and
the copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from
KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly
upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial,
of this Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach
of any term of this Agreement.
7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of
Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of This Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the
balance of This Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and
conditions.
Chapter 5 4
This chapter describes how to display the catalog and grid, and the functions of the
DISPLAY
various tool bars that are displayed in windows.
Chapter 6
BEFORE YOU START This chapter describes how to set the color and line type in the graphic or part setting
SETTING PARTS windows, and other information you should know before you start setting other parts. 5
Chapter 7
SETTING GRAPHICS &
TEXT
This chapter describes how to set graphics and text.
6
Chapter 8
SETTING SWITCHES &
7
This chapter describes how to set switches and lamps.
LAMPS
Chapter 9
This chapter describes how to set numerical value displays, text displays, and other
SETTING BASIC PARTS
basic parts.
8
Chapter 10
SETTING METERS &
This chapter describes how to set meters and images.
IMAGES
9
Chapter 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes screen callups, loading DXF files, and other functions.
10
Chapter 12
This chapter describes some methods of creating new screens and using the list of
RESOURCE
screen callups, etc.
11
Chapter 13
COMMUNICATION This chapter describes the settings of the target VT3 models and PLC and the
BETWEEN PC & VT3 communication between PC and VT3.
12
Chapter 14
SYSTEM MEMORY This chapter describes the system memory area and how to manipulate the system
AREA memory area by the PLC.
13
Chapter 15
This section describes PLC data folder functions and how to operate the PLC Data
PLC DATA FOLDER
Folder Editing Tool.
14
Chapter 16
This chapter describes how worksheets operate, how to set worksheets, and
WORKSHEET
worksheet functions.
Chapter 17
ETHERNET This section briefly describes the Ethernet connection and how to set up the Ethernet 15
CONNECTION connection.
Chapter 18 LADDER MONITOR This section describes ladder monitor and the setting method.
16
Appendices APPENDICES These appendices list error messages and shortcut code tables. 17
18
A
Chapter 4 EDIT
4-1 Editing Graphics ............................................................................................................4-2
Operation Basics.............................................................................................................................4-2
Move ...............................................................................................................................................4-2
Scaling Graphics.............................................................................................................................4-3
4-2 Edit Functions ................................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Objects (graphics) ...........................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Individual Objects............................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Object Groups .................................................................................................................4-6
Continuously Selecting Objects ......................................................................................................4-7
Canceling Selection ........................................................................................................................4-7
Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles .............................................................................4-7
Select one from many .....................................................................................................................4-8
Select one from the Cascaded Components ..................................................................................4-8
Undo ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Redo ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Cut ..................................................................................................................................................4-9
Copy ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Paste.............................................................................................................................................4-10
Delete ...........................................................................................................................................4-10
Select all .......................................................................................................................................4-10
Search .......................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Multiple copy .................................................................................................................................4-12
Grouping .......................................................................................................................................4-14
Order.............................................................................................................................................4-15
Rotate/Flip.....................................................................................................................................4-16
Place/Align ....................................................................................................................................4-16
Screen attribute settings ...............................................................................................................4-18
Parts Attribute Settings .................................................................................................................4-19
Register part attribute as default settings .....................................................................................4-19
Changing the Switch Area ............................................................................................................4-20
Edit Callup Screen ........................................................................................................................4-20
Change Key Entry Order...............................................................................................................4-21
Option Settings .............................................................................................................................4-22
Edit Apex ......................................................................................................................................4-30
Chapter 16 WORKSHEET
16-1 About Worksheets .......................................................................................................16-2
Worksheets OverDisplay ..............................................................................................................16-2
About Worksheet Settings ............................................................................................................16-3
Worksheet Restrictions .................................................................................................................16-4
16-2 Setting Worksheets .....................................................................................................16-6
Starting Up the Worksheet Editing Tool ........................................................................................16-6
Worksheet Editing Tool Menu .......................................................................................................16-7
How to Set Cells ...........................................................................................................................16-8
About Calculation Precision on Worksheets and Data Format Conversion Rules......................16-26
About the Data Check.................................................................................................................16-28
Displaying List of Used Devices..................................................................................................16-30
Handy Functions Provided by the Worksheet Editing Tool .........................................................16-32
Importing Worksheets .................................................................................................................16-34
16-3 Worksheet System Settings......................................................................................16-36
Worksheet System Settings........................................................................................................16-36
16-4 Precautions when Handling Worksheets.................................................................16-39
Behavior When an Error Occurs during Worksheet Execution ...................................................16-39
Other ...........................................................................................................................................16-40
16-5 Worksheet Function ..................................................................................................16-41
List of Functions..........................................................................................................................16-41
ABS.............................................................................................................................................16-42
AVERAGE...................................................................................................................................16-44
CHOOSE ....................................................................................................................................16-46
COUNT .......................................................................................................................................16-52
COUNTIF ....................................................................................................................................16-54
IF.................................................................................................................................................16-57
LARGE........................................................................................................................................16-66
LARGEPOS ................................................................................................................................16-68
MATCH .......................................................................................................................................16-70
MAX ............................................................................................................................................16-75
MIN .............................................................................................................................................16-77
APPENDICES
1 Error Message Lists...................................................................................................... A-2
When starting UP/Shutting Down VT STUDIO and Opening/Closing Files .................................. A-2
Multiple Program Startups ............................................................................................................ A-3
When changing target VT ............................................................................................................. A-3
When Changing Target PLC ......................................................................................................... A-4
During Communications with VT and When Performing the Data Check ..................................... A-4
When Sending the System Program ............................................................................................. A-6
When Editing Screens .................................................................................................................. A-7
Active Edit ..................................................................................................................................... A-8
When Setting Options ................................................................................................................... A-8
When Loading DXF Format Files .................................................................................................. A-8
Operation Log ............................................................................................................................... A-9
System Setting .............................................................................................................................. A-9
When Connecting Over Ethernet ................................................................................................ A-10
Changing Display Text Strings .................................................................................................... A-10
Workspace .................................................................................................................................. A-10
Page Configuration Management ............................................................................................... A-11
Part Catalog ................................................................................................................................ A-11
During Printing or Printing of RTF Files ...................................................................................... A-12
Device Comments ....................................................................................................................... A-12
In the Simulator ........................................................................................................................... A-12
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Related ........................................................................................ A-13
Terminology
This Manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
Programmable controllers made by various manufacturers that are connected to VT3 series
PLC touch panel display.
PC Stands for personal computer.
VT5 VT5 series touch panel display.
VT3 VT3 series touch panel display.
VT STUDIO Design tool VT-H7J (Japanese version)/VT-H7G (Global version) for the VT5/VT3 series.
VT2 VT2 series touch panel display.
VT2 BUILDER Design tool VT2-H1E (VT2-H1) for the VT2 series.
VT1 Touch Panel Display VT series.
VT BUILDER Design tool VT-H7W for the VT series.
This software is used for displaying data sending/receiving information and record data receiving
VT Transfer Tool on the screen of VT3 series touch panel display.
Symbols
This Manual uses the following symbols to show menus and buttons.
Symbol Description
These are menu items. Menu items can be selected from the menu bar.
These are window names or items names.
""
These are buttons containing text that are used for executing operations or canceling in
windows, for example.
Ctrl These are keys on the PC's keyboard.
Point The system to start differs based on the VT model (VT5 Series/VT3 Series/VT2 Series) used
with VT STUDIO Ver. 6.
The system to start for each Series is as follows:
• VT5 Series : VT STUDIO (for VT5 Series)
• VT2/VT3 Series : VT STUDIO (for VT3 Series)
This manual describes the functions available to draw and edit on the VT3 Series Touchscreen Display, as well as
how to configure them and notes about the functions.
If you are using VT5 Series Touchscreen Display, please refer to "VT5 Series Reference Manual".
• When using VT STUDIO to create and edit VT2-specific files, the available functional options at the components
are the same as those provided by VT2 BUILDER Ver.3. The functions of the newly added or modified components
on VT3 cannot be used. Editing actions such as retrieving and activities editing, however, can still be performed.
For more information about adding and modifying functions, please refer to “Adding and Modifying Options”.
• To edit the VT2 files created by VT2 BUILDER with VT STUDIO, please execute “Reading VT2 Files”.
• VT2-specific data created by VT STUDIO cannot be opened with VT2 BUILDER.
• To transmit the VT2-speicific data created by VT STUDIO to VT2, you need to upgrade the system program to Ver.4.
VT1/VT2/VTS Files
VT1 and VT2 files that are read into VT STUDIO are converted into VTS files. 1
For more information, please see "3-1 File Manager".
Ο Read
VT1 files
X Write
VT STUDIO
VTS files (VT3-specific)
VT3->VT2 conversion
Ο Transmit Ο Transmit
VT2 File
After being read into VT STUDIO, VT2 files are changed into the VTS files (VT2-specific).
1 Data transmission to the VT3 series can also be performed by changing the VTS files (VT2-specific) into the VTS files
(VT3-specific).
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO
Ο Read
VT2 File
X Write
VT STUDIO
VTS files (VT2-specific)
VT2->VT3 conversion
Ο Transmit Ο Transmit
VTS File
When using VT STUDIO to create new files, first decide they are for VT3 series or VT2 series, then create VTS files.
Special attention should be paid to halfway change from VT3 to VT2 or vise versa.
"Notes about VT3 -> VT2 conversion", page 1-3
"Notes about VT2 -> VT3 conversion", page 1-4
VTS files
VTS files (VT3-specific)
(VT3-specific) VTS files
VTS files (VT2-specific)
(VT2-specific)
VT STUDIO
VT STUDIO
VT3->VT2 conversion
conversion VT2->VT3
VT2->VT3
VT3->VT2
conversion
conversion
VTS files
VTS files (VT2-specific)
(VT2-specific) VTS files
VTS files (VT3-specific)
(VT3-specific)
Transmit
Transmit Transmit
Transmit Transmit
Transmit Transmit
Transmit
VT3 Series
VT3 Series VT2 Series
VT2 Series VT2 Series
VT2 Series VT3 Series
VT3 Series
(system program
(system program Ver.4)
Ver.4) (system program
(system program Ver.4)
Ver.4)
VT STUDIO
VT STUDIO
The memory card-specific VT2 files of VT2 (*.md1,2,3) cannot be directly read by VT STUDIO.
To rewrite with VT STUDIO, they need to changed to memory card-specific VT2 files (*.md4).
Read
Memory card-specific VT2 files
(*.md1,2,3)
X Write
VT STUDIO
Transmit
Read Write
VT STUDIO
Transmit X Transmit
Other
X Read
VT2 BUILDER
X Write
Memory card-specific VT2 files
(*.md4)
VT2 Series
(System program Ver.4)
Point The following data created in VT STUDIO Ver.2, Ver.3 or Ver.4 or later versions cannot be
opened in Ver. 1.
• Data sent from PC to VT
• The image data written into the memory card
User Privileges
To use VT STUDIO, It is necessary to get the following rights.
For Windows other than XP: "Standard User" or above
For Windows XP: "Power User" or above
How to Install
The following describes how to install into PC by taking the configuration of the following drives as examples. 1
If the driver letters in your current PC differ from the following, specify the drive to install the software according to the
Point Only the user with "Administrator" right can log in.
2 Insert "VT STUDIO system disk (disk1)" into the DVD on the PC.
The installation program is started with the autorun function on PC.
Otherwise, select the "Run" in the Start menu and enter "e:\Startup.exe" in the "Run" dialog box, then click "OK".
Items Description
VT STUDIO Ver.7G Install VT STUDIO Ver.7G
Remote COM Port Tool
Install Remote COM Port Tool Ver.5G and Remote Ethernet Too l G *1.
Ver.5G
Installing VT STUDIO
1 Installation of VT STUDIO
1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO
Reference When installing VT-H7G (Global version), you will be asked to select the language in which to install
VT STUDIO.
Select a language (Japanese, English or Chinese (simplified)) and click "OK".
2 After reading the contents of License Agreement, select "Agree Terms of License Agreement(A)" and click "Next(N)>"
4 When asked whether to install the Clip Art Illustration into the hard disk, click "Yes" if necessary.
Click "No(N)", and go to step 5.
In addition, even if the Clip Art Illustration is not installed, you can still use it by directly referring to DVD.
1
6 Visualize the copying status of files.
Click the [OK] button to continue installing the remote communication port.
1 The Remote COM Port Tools (Remote COM Port Tool and Remote Ethernet Tool) will be installed if you selected
"Remote communication port tools" in the installation program.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO
3 The copy status of Remote COM Port Tool files is displayed in a graph.
1
Precautions When Using USB
1 Start up Windows XP, and log in as an Administrator, computer administrator or a user having rights for
changing system settings.
2 Connect the USB port on VT3 to the USB port on PC with a USB cable.
"New hardware found" is displayed, and the “Add Hardware Wizard“ is displayed.
When using Windows XP Service Pack3, select "No, don't connect this time" radio button, and click "Next(N)>"
button.
3 Select "Install from a list or specific location "radio button and click "Next(N)>" button.
1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO
4 Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations", and check the "Include the following location:"
checkbox. Next, enter "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G\VT3\USB" and click "Next(N)>" button.
Point "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G" in this step is the directory where VT STUDIO was
installed. Rewrite this directory according to the operating environment.
Installation is started.
MEMO
1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO
Edit Window
The following describes the VT STUDIO Edit window.
Tool bar
Workspace
(Screen/system setting/
device comment list )
Tool bar
Item Description
Displays the name of the currently open file and type (page No., global window No., printer form
Title bar
No., base/window) of screen.
Menu bar Displays the menu.
Tool bar Displays available tools. Faintly displayed tools are currently unavailable functions.
Displays the screen currently being edited. Parts, device No. display and label display can also
be placed outside of this display frame (green area). Fully exposed parts (excluding memo and
Edit window
Animation display) are not sent to VT3 and memory card as display data . (not displayed in
VT3, nor saved into memory card).
To display the part catalog/screen catalog file selected. This can be configured in the Edit
Catalog window window by dragging and dropping (press and hold the left key of the mouse and move the
cursor to the desired position, then release the left key).
Displays the key state and a description of the function.
Status bar
When an object is selected, its type, position, size and label are also displayed.
The following operations are possible on the
"Screen" tab:
• Viewing the configuration of screens made
for each page
• Making new screens
Workspace
• New form screen
The following operations are possible on the
"System Settings" tab:
• VT system settings • Trend graph system settings
• Editing alarm system settings and alarm details • Editing messages
• Registered character of Windows font • Setting of device sending
• Editing PLC Data Folder Data • Worksheet System Settings
The property window is displayed when a part is selected, and is used for setting graphic
Property window
attributes and for setting the nameplate and style of switches/lamps.
Search result list The list shows the search results.
Text string list The list shows the text strings used in parts.
Device comment list The list shows the read-in device comment.
Operating log list The list shows the read-in operating log.
Docking navigator
If dragging the windows of workspace, catalog and search result lists during self-defining of edit screen,the docking
navigator for designating the configuration site will be displayed.
If dragging and dropping on the docking navigator, the window is combined with the designated position.
Type of docking navigator Description
Autohide
The workspace, catalog and search result lists are only displayed where necessary.
Click the toggle icon shown on top right corner when combined with workspace, catalog and search result lists on top,
bottom, left and right of edit screen.
Icon Description
Workspace, catalog and search result lists are shown as labels on top, bottom, left and
right of edit screen. Just move the mouse onto the label, or click the label for display.
POWER indicator
Vertical screen
POWER indicator
Point • The POWER lamp of VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/V7R is on the top right of the landscape screen
(normal).
• There is no POWER indicator for VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
• For VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), the power terminals on back are downward.
Screen Configuration
Screens made using VT STUDIO are managed by page No.
Each page comprises the base screen and window screen (local window), each of which is saved separately. There
is also a window screen (global window) that does not belong to a page, and that is separate from the base screen
and the window screen.
2
There is also a printer form screen that is exclusively for printing forms that is not displayed on VT3 in addition to the
G000
G001
G999
Numeric keypads, keyboards, etc., can be used in common on multiple pages by placing them in the global window.
1234 1234
9876 9876
2 Note, however, that eight screens sometimes cannot be displayed simultaneously depending on the size of the
screen data and other restrictions.
Screens in global windows can be swapped.
SCREENS & WINDOWS
Though global window numbers can be set within the range G000 to G999, the number of screens that can actually
be made fluctuates depending on the relationship between the size of each screen data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Number of screens that can be made", page 2-8
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
[Example] To change the display of global window ID0 currently displayed from global window No.G000 to
G010.
Point • When many parts (switches/lamps, basic parts, graphs/meters, etc.) that read devices on
the PLC are placed on a global window, updating (display refreshing) of these parts slows
down. When making a screen in which many parts are placed, use base and local
windows.
• When unit monitor and device monitor are displayed in global window, the followings are
used through special operation of main screen:
• Software monitor: Global window ID6;
• Device monitor: ID7; Global window ID7
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 5 System Mode"
Printer form screens can be set within the range from page No.P00 to P15.
However, note that the number of screens that can actually be made
fluctuates depending on the relationship between the size of each screen
data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Screen data", page 2-16
Screen ID
A "screen ID" is an individual name that is set to the base screen, window screen, and printer form screen.
When a new screen is made, the following defaults are automatically assigned to the screen:
Base/local windows
Base: B
@0000_B Window 1㧦1
Window 2㧦2
Window 3㧦3
Page No.
Global window
@G000_W
Global window No.
@Pn00_P
Page No.
*1 The maximum number of screens that can be created is 1024 (bases + local windows + global windows + printer
form screens). (For example, if 1024 base screens are created, window screens and printer form screens cannot
be created.). However, the number of screens that can be created varies depending on the size of each screen
data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Screen data", page 2-16
*2 Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
* The maximum number of screens that could be made on VT1 was 1024 (bases + windows (1 to 3)).
However, that the number of screens that could be made fluctuated depending on the size of each
screen data and VT1 memory capacity.
Screen size
The screen size is fixed to the VT3 screen size, and cannot be changed.
The size of windows (local and global) can be changed within the allowable range of the VT3 screen size.
Grid size of switch can be changed as follows.
VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8/V7/V7R/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A: 16 x 16 dot
VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A): 8 x 8 dot
The size of printer forms is determined by the printer model setting.
"11-5 Form Printing"
@0000_1
64 dots
Title bar 48 dots Title bar
32 dots
Window frame display space of 1 dot in width is required around the window.
In the case of 3D frame displays, a display space of 3 dots in width is required.
: Resizes screens in the vertical direction. The cursor changes to this when you move it to roughly the center
of the thick pink frame.
: Resizes screens in the horizontal direction. The cursor changes to this when you move it to roughly the
center of the thick pink frame.
: Resizes screens in the vertical and horizontal directions. The cursor changes to this when you move it to
roughly the corner of the thick pink frame.
: Changes the position of the window screen. The cursor changes to this when you move it on the window
frame.
Method Base
Touch switch • Switch
• System Memory Area
PLC ladder program • Function control by devices
• global function control
Alarm message option settings • Alarm display
Reference Page switching is possible even while the following functions are executing
• Saving recorded data to Memory Card (alarm logs, trend graph data)
• Saving to operating log memory card
• Saving worksheet data to memory card
• PLC data folders (transferring comments)
• BMP file switching
• Form printing
Point Operation sometimes differs depending on the conditions when page switching is executed
by the following methods.
Switch Check : When page is switched by touch switch
PLC : When page is switched by PLC through functional control and Global function
• When there are parts with On switch (the cross-key specifying switch, display switch, key
SCREENS & WINDOWS
entry parts and switch functions are not released) (including OFF delay of switch
expansion function)
Touch switch / PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed after completion of
operation.
• When there is a switch (momentary reset) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
Touch switch / PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed after completion of
operation.
• When multiple functions (ticket printing, hard copy, alarm log printing, and video
capturing) are requested at the same time and the requirements are not processed yet,
printing or video capturing is performed.
Switch Check : Page switching is impossible before startup of printing or writing to
memory card (display “SW switching page inhibited”).
PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed before startup of
printing or writing to memory card. While page switching is pending,
operations by touch switches are not possible.
@0000_1
Window screen
Moving windows
Press the touch switch for "Move", then touch the screen at the position that needs to be moved.
@0000_1
@0000_1 @0000_1 2
@0000_1 @0000_1
Reference On the VT1, only the overlapping order of windows 1 and 2 could be swapped. Window 3 was fixed to
be displayed at the front at all times.
Closing windows
The "Close" button can be set so as not to be displayed in the screen attribute settings.
Setting the "Close" button
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
@0000_1
Reference On the VT1, when the window 3 screen for the currently displayed page No. was displayed, display was
canceled, and the VT1 was forcibly interrupted with the window 3 screen for the specified page No.
Display of window 3 displayed as the interrupt window can be turned OFF only from the
Point
system memory area.
Display cannot be turned OFF from switches or function controls by devices.
Reference The following functions enable ON/OFF of window display even during execution.
• Saving recorded data to Memory Card (alarm logs, trend graph data)
• Saving to operating log memory card
• Saving worksheet data to memory card
• PLC data folders (transferring comments)
• BMP file switching
• Form printing
Operation sometimes differs depending on the conditions when window display ON/OFF is
Point
executed by the following methods:
Touch Switch : When a window display is turned ON/OFF by a touch switch
PLC : When the window displays ON/OFF from PLC through functional control and
Global function control of system memory area or devices;
Touch switch/PLC : The window displays ON/OFF by touch switch or PLC
• When there are parts with On switch (the cross-key specifying switch, display switch, key
entry parts and switch functions are not released) (including OFF delay of switch
expansion function)
Touch switc / PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed after
completion of operation.
• When there is a switch (momentary reset) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
Touch switch/PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed after
completion of operation.
• When simultaneous execution of multiple functions (form printing, hard copy, printing of
alarm logs, video capture) is requested, and there is a print execution (hard copy, printing
of alarm log) or video capture during unprocessed requests
Touch Switch : Window displays cannot be turned ON/OFF until printing is started or
writing to Memory Card is started ("Cannot change window" is
displayed).
PLC : Window display ON/OFF is made pending until printing is started or
writing to Memory Card is started, after which window display ON/OFF is
automatically executed. While window display ON/OFF is pending,
operations by touch switches are not possible.
2-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens
Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• When opening “insert window display” during global window display process, the
followings are shown if exceeding the number of devices, screen data capacity, number of
key-entry parts and repetitive data capacity.
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.
Reference On the VT1, if display of window 3 was turned ON when the "Initial display" checkbox was not marked
in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, window 3 was displayed fixed at the front at all
times, and window 1 and window 2 were displayed overlapping the base in the order that display was
turned ON.
If the "Initial display" checkbox was marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings,
window 1, window 2 and window 3 were displayed overlapping the base in that order immediately
after page switching.
Screen Management
Screens that you have made are saved to a single file categorized by base screen, local window screen, global
window screen, and printer form screen.
Used when it is possible to copy to the screen created on other pages, or import into the screen of other VTS/VT2 files.
Screens that you have made can also be copied to or deleted from workspace.
"Workspace", page 5-15
Point For the restrictions when creating VT2 series screen, refer to “VT2 Series Reference
Manual”.
Point The maximum number of pages that can be created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data
cannot actually be made. The number of screens that can be created sometime is lower than
1024, depending upon data capacity and VT3 memory capacity of different screens.
VT3 memory capacity
"Screen data", page 2-16
Restrictions
Single-page restrictions
The following table shows the restrictions that apply to devices and control objects that can be set in individual pages.
For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Total of Base + Local Window Total of Global Window, Interrupt Window
Reference data Max. 2048 devices Max. 1024 devices
PLC devices Max.1536 (including system device) Max. 768 devices
Number of control
Max. 1024 devices Max. 512 devices
objects
Key entry parts Max. 256 devices Max. 256 devices
Overlapping data Max. 48 Kbytes Max. 48 Kbytes
Screen data Max. 128 Kbytes Max. 64 Kbytes
Point • Repetitive data capacity contains repetitive data capacity for position control (graphics
attribute control and Animation display).
• System devices indicate the devices set in “System Setting of VT Series”, “System Setting
of Trend Graph”, “System Setting of Alarming”, “System Setting of Worksheet”, “Form
Screen (Trigger Bit Device for Printing)”, “Global Function Control” and “Device Transfer”.
However, the “Number of Devices” excludes the trend sampling device of expansion trend
and alarming detection device of expansion alarm.
Single-screen restrictions
Item Max. number
Overlapping objects 192
Indirect reference devices 64
*1 The following calculation is performed on multiple switches/lamps (switches, lamp switches, lamps) that are
set to N state parts.
(1) 1
(2) Number of lamp parts x 1
(3) Number of parts (switches, lamp switches) with switch extended functions x 1
(4) Number of parts (switches, lamp switches) having one switch function x 1
(5) For switches and lamp switches having two or more switch functions, total of (number of switch functions +
1) objects for each part
*2 (6) Sum of switch functions set at top, bottom, left and right
*3 (7) Total number of switch functions setup in 8 function switches.
The number of control object can be confirmed through “Resource(R)”-> “Data check(D)”-> “Current page(P)”.
"12-9 Data Check"
Numerical display, Text display, Message display, Alarm display, Trend graph, XYgraph
2
SCREENS & WINDOWS
The number of key entry objects can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)”.
"12-9 Data Check"
Overlapping data
When objects are placed overlapping on the screen, data for identifying and drawing overlapping of objects is generated.
The size of overlapping data can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)” or “All
data(A)”.
"12-9 Data Check"
Screen data
The size of VT3 screen data varies according to whether or not addon memory (OP42253) is mounted.
Model Without Addon Memory With Addon Memory (16 Mbytes)
VT3-X15 28 Mbytes 44 Mbytes
VT3-S12/S10/V10 12 Mbytes 28 Mbytes
VT3-V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) 12 Mbytes -*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/
Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A 4 Mbytes -*1
Reference
Objects Number of Devices *1 data
When Data length is 1 word 1
Basic 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
When Data length is 1 word +2
2
When input range is set at non-
numerical. 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
With key input, but without setting When Data length is 1 word +1
change notification +1
When Data length is 2 words *2
SCREENS & WINDOWS
+2
Numerical When Data length is 1 word
value With key input
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
display When Data length is 2 words *2
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Display range is ON 2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Enable changes to settings is ON +1 +1
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
When ASCII/shift JIS is set Number of text string bytes/2+1
Basic 1
When UNICODE is set Number of characters+1 *5
When Key entry/Barcode When ASCII/shift JIS is set +(Number of text string bytes/2+1)
entry is ON and Notify +1
changes to settings is OFF When UNICODE is set +(Character data+1)*5
Text When Key entry/Barcode When ASCII/shift JIS is set
display entry is ON and Notify 0 +1
changes to settings is ON When UNICODE is set
When Enable changes to settings is ON +1 +1
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
When Specify text color by device is ON +1 +1
Basic 0 1
Message When Specify block No. is External +1 0
display When Notify cursor position is ON +1 +1
When Specify text color by device is ON +1 +1
Alarm When Notify cursor position is OFF 0 0
display When Notify cursor position is ON 1 1
Video Internally 0
Channel 1
display Externally 1
Specify No. 1 1
Updating cycle is
designated internally 0 1
Frame updating Cycle Updating cycle is
Specify designated externally 1 1
Frame exit notification 0 +1
Specify No. +1 +1
Animation Point Internally 0 +1
display specification Cycle
Externally +1 +1
Specify
Position
control Move exit notification 0 +1
X-axis direction +1 +1
Position Y-axis +1 +1
XY-direction +2 +2
Display Display control is effective +1 +1
control Allowable operation is effective +1 +1
When Data length is 1 word 1
Basic 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
When Input range is setting other than a When Data length is 1 word +2
numerical value 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Meters When Data length is 1 word +2
(bar graph/ When Display range is ON +2
pie chart/ When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
fan) When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Scale is ON 0 +2
0
2
numerical value When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Y-
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x
number of display data x 2
4+Number of graphs x 2
2
axis Number of graphs x
When Data length is 2 words *2
2 Execute PLC
When Record specify method is Specify No.
(internal) 0 +1
When Record specify method is Specify No.
data folder +1 +1
(external)
SCREENS & WINDOWS
(real-time, length is 1
batch word graphs
sampling), +1 x number of
Per single variable (A to E)
XY- When Data graphs
diagram(real- length is 2 +2 x number of
time, batch words *2 graphs
sampling)
When Data
length is 1 +1
Other than word
Per single variable (A to E) +1
the above When Data
length is 2 +2
words *2
*1 The relationship between device settings (numerical values, PLC devices, indirect references, cells) and the
values for the number of devices in this table is as follows:
(1) When value is set : 0(not number of device for that worksheet, but calculated by 0).)
(2) When a PLC device is set : Number of devices value in this table
(3) When an indirect reference is set: Number of devices value in this table + 1
(4) When a calculation is set : Calculation depends on the number of variables (A to E) used in the
calculation formula. Calculation is performed by the number of devices
2
2 If switching function “switch”, lamp switch and cross-key are additionally added, the total number of devices for
indirect reference set in various switches is calculated separately.
Number of
SCREENS & WINDOWS
Number of
Objects Function Number of Devices Detailed Setting
Devices Used
Input range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
Input range(Y-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
Display range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
XYgraphs
(Real-time/batch
sampling/worksheet
sharing)
Display range (Y-axis)/upper and lower limit*1
Alarm range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1
2
2 2
Alarm range(Y-axis)/ upper and lower limit*1 2
*1 When only upper or lower limit is set, the consumed number of devices is (value of number of consumed devices
in that worksheet)/2.
Point • The number of images indicates the number of image data items in the VT3 files. Images
having the same image data content are counted as one image as a duplicity check is
performed.
• When text string replacement display function is used, the accumulated number of images
is equal to the number of ID for the profile file and nameplate (switch, lamp,Nstate
lamp,Nstate components).
2
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
SCREENS & WINDOWS
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Wallpaper Amplified Q5M(W)A
display VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
Image
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Centralized Q5M(W)A
display
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Parallel Q5M(W)A
Wallpaper Image
display
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
Other parts 0 images
The number of images can be confirmed by "Resources(R)" -> "Data check(D)" -> "All data(A)".
"12-9 Data Check"
*1 The number of available images may vary depending upon the contents and size of images.
New(N)
File(F) -> New(N) Ctrl + N
Important VT STUDIO you cannot be make screens for the VT1 series. To make screens for the VT1
series, use VT BUILDER.
1 Either select "File" -> "New" from Menu in that order, or click the button .
Before you create a new file, the "VT model settings" window for setting the hardware is displayed.
Setup the hardware in which the data that is created is to be applied. The "VT model settings" window is always
displayed when VT STUDIO is started up, and "New" is selected to create a new file.
VT model of screen to be created is set in that window.
VT/PLC model settings can also be changed while files are being edited.
Select according to the sequence of "Resource(R)"-> "VT model settings(V)", "Resource(R)"->"PLC model settings(P)".
Reference Number of dots in the display panel for each VT3 model
Open
File(F) Open(O) Ctrl + O
1
3 Either select "File" -> "Open" from Menu in that order, or click the button
The "Open Files" window is displayed.
.
FILES & PRINTING
2 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T)*1 Select the type of file. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*.*.vu*)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 VTS file names are as follows:
VT STUDIO Version File Name
Ver.1 *.vs1/*.vu1
Ver.2 *.vs2/*.vu2
Ver.3 *.vs3/*.vu3
Ver. 4 or later *.vs4/*.vu4
All VTS files (for VT2/VT3 Series) can be read in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, files may only
be saved as VTS files in Ver. 4/Ver. 3/Ver. 2 formats.
Point • To open VT files (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4, *.vt5, *.vz5) created in VT1 (VT BUILDER),
open by "Load VT1 files".
• When opening VT2 files (*.vd1, 2, 2u, 3, 3u, *.vx1, 2, 2u, 3, 3u) created by VT2(VT2BUILDER),
click "read VT2 files".
Reference Click "move" button to move the folder in the pull-down menu.
Previous folderPrevious used folder
Current folder or fileFile in current open folder
Screen sample folderFolder for storing screen sample
Default FolderDefault Folder
Last used folderLast used folder
Auto-backup files
The file name is "! auto-backup file 0.vs4" for individual startup; the backup file name created previously is "! auto-
backup file 0.vs4", and those created subsequently are "! auto-backup file 1.vs4" for multiple startup.
If VT STUDIO ends in error, the message "VT STUDIO did not end successfully at last file edit. Load backup file?" will
be displayed the next time that VT2 BUILDER is started up. Click the "Yes" button to read auto-backup files.
When the updating time of auto-backup file is set, select sequentially the menu "Edit(E)" -> "Item Setting(I)",
and then set in "file" tab of "item setting" window.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
1 Select "File" -> "Load VT2 files" from Menu in that order.
Confirmation message is displayed.
2 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VT2 file (*.vd*.*.vd*u.*.vx*.*.vx*u)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Loads the file to be edited when editing VT1 files (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4, *.vt5, *.vz5) created in VT BUILDER
on VT STUDIO.
3 1 Select "File" -> "Load VT1 files" from Menu in that order.
Confirmation message is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING
3 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VT1 file(*.vu*.*.vz*)"
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
About compatibility
Item Description
Multiple switches
Multiple lamp
These are divided into individual parts at conversion.
switches
Multiple lamps
Numerical value
These are divided into individual parts at conversion.
tables
Parts
Alarm display
When "Line mode" is set to 2-lines display and "Number of display lines" is set to odd-
number in the alarm display in the VT1 file, the "Number of display lines" in the VTS file
becomes even-number and is reduced by one line. For example, if the number of
3
display lines is set to five lines in the VT1 file, the number of display lines becomes four
Point Parts placed outside of the display frame (green area) are sometimes moved, when imported
to VT2 BUILDER.
Close
File -> Close
Save
File(F) -> Save(S) Ctrl + S
Saves the screen that has been edited under the same file name as the current file name.
To leave the data before the changes were made, select "Save as" or "Compress and save" described below.
3 Point • When "Save" is selected, data before changes are reflected will be lost.
• The name of newly created file is "Unititled.vs4" by default.
• "Save as" is automatically selected as the save option for newly made files even if "Save"
FILES & PRINTING
is executed.
• "Save as" will be displayed when saving files in VT STUDIO Ver.3 or lower format. Execute
"Save as" and "Compress and save" when saving in "**.vs3/*.vu3/.vs2/*.vu2" format.
Saves files under a name different from the current file name. To do this, select "File" -> "Save as" or "Compress and
save" from Menu in that order.
Newly created screens are always saved by "Save as". Enter the file name at "File name" in the "Save as" window.
Item Description
Save in(I)*1 Select the drive and folder to save the file.
File name(N) Enter the file name. The extension name becomes vs4 or vu4.
Select VTS (*.vu4/*.vs3/*.vs2) / VTS compressed files (*.vu4/*.vu3/*.vu2).
Files of type(T) Files saved in "*.vs3/*.vu3, *.vs2/*.vu2" format can be opened by VT STUDIO Ver.3, Ver.2. VTS
file will be saved after compression when VTS compressed file (*.vu4/*.vu3/*.vu2) is selected.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 The directory to save the file can be set at "VTS file save folder" on the "File" tab in the "Option settings"
window that is displayed by "Edit" -> "Option settings".
Point • If added functions are in use in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions, files cannot be saved in
*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/*.vu2 formats.
"12-9 Data Check", Page 12-46
"A-4 Adding and Modifying Options", Page A-23
• The file in "*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/*.vu2" format will be exported when saved in "*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/
*.vu2" format.
Import
File -> Import(I)
1 Select File(F) -> Import(I) from the menu, or click the button.
The "Open import file" window is displayed.
2 Select the folder containing the VT file and file name to be imported.
Item Description
File position(I) Select the driver disk and folder where the file to be opened is located.
File name(N) Select the file name to be opened.
File type(T)*1 Select the file category. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*,*.vu*)".
Move(M) Click [Move] button, move to existing folders, and recent folders.
*1 VTS file name is shown below.
VT STUDIO Version File name
Ver.1 *.vs1/*.vu1
Ver.2 *.vs2/*.vu2
Ver.3 *.vs3/*.vu3
Ver.4 or later *.vs4/*.vu4
All VTS files can be read in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, files may only be saved as VTS files
in Ver. 4/Ver. 3/Ver. 2 formats.
3
FILES & PRINTING
Item Description
Import result To display PLC model information of import source file.
Select the PLC model for the edited file. Execute "PLC_A" -> "PLC_B" or "PLC_B" -> "PLC_A".
Import source
If MultiTalk is selected, only importing "PLC_A" or "PLC_B" is OK.
This is displayed when station No. is set up in PLC model settings and a station No. can be
selected.
Details settings
Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.
3
(1) (2)
Screen
(1) (2)
Item Description
To display screens list of import source. Select a page. To select multiple screens, press Shift
and hold the "Shift" key and click the mouse.
(1) Import result Click the button or double click to open the Preview screen.
Click the button to switch between listing display and thumbnail display.
To display screens list of import destination. Select a screen.
To select multiple screens, press Shift and hold the "Shift" key and click the mouse.
Use the "All(L)" option in the right-click menu to select all pages.
3 (2) Import source Click the button to switch between listing display and thumbnail display. Select "All
screens" to display all the pages (Page 0 to 8999).
To change import location, use the "Move(M)" option in the right-click menu or drag and drop to
FILES & PRINTING
other page.
Add selected page to the import destination. Import location is set up in "Import destination
setting" window.
VT system settings
To be used for import source screen, and only importable items can be checked.
Other settings
Check import sources and specify the import destination.
When importing, any used ID or setting No. in the current screen data will be skipped automatically. Import
destination can be manually changed.
Point In case existing VT system settings or other are imported in the edited screen data, the
overwrite confirmation window will be displayed.
Reads VT files for the Memory Card currently saved to Memory Card.
1
3 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Read from Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
The "Read from Memory Card" window is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING
2 Select the drive containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be read and the file name.
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the Memory Card drive containing the VT file used for the Memory Card.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) *1 Select "VT file (*.ms*.*.md*) for memory card" from files of type.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 The file names of VT files for memory card are shown below.
Software Version VT Model File Name
Ver.1 VT2 VTEDT*.md1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 BUILDER Ver.2 VT2 VTEDT*.md2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.3 VT2 VTEDT*.md3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.1
VT3 VTEDT*.ms1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.2
VT3 VTEDT*.ms2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.3
VT3 VTEDT*.ms3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.4 or later
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Point • VT2 files (VTEDT*.md4) for memory cards written using VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions
cannot be read by VT STUDIO Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver.1.
• VT files (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) for Memory Card created on VT1 cannot be read directly on VT
STUDIO. Open the VT file in VT BUILDER, save it as a VT file (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4,
*.vt5, *.vz5), and then open it in VT STUDIO.
1 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Write to Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
The "Write to Memory Card" window is displayed. 3
Item Description
Saved as screen data that can After being selected, they are saved into the memory card as screen data that can be
be loaded*1 automatically loaded.
Select the Memory Card drive at the write destination.
Folder*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the folder can be set in the "Select Folder"
window.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
File No. Set the file No. (0 to 9) of the VT file for the Memory Card.
File name Displays the name of the VT file for the Memory Card to be written.
Copy system program When this checkbox is marked, the system program is also written to Memory Card.
*1 For the details of automatic loading, see "Autoload", page 3-16.
*2 The folder to save the file can be set at "VT file for memory card save folder" on the "File" tab in the "Option
Settings" window that is displayed by "Edit" -> "Option settings".
Point • When writing into the memory card, the path to the driver of memory card must be
designated since VT files for memory card shall be read from the path of memory card.
• VT files (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) for VT1 Memory Cards cannot be written by VT STUDIO.
• The system program of VT2 cannot use VT2 of Ver.1 to 3 to read VT2 files (VTEDT*.md4) for
memory card that are created by VT STUDIO. Send the system program to rewrite the VT2
system program to Ver.3. Also, VT2 files (VTEDT*.md1, VTEDT*.md2) for VT2 BUILDER
Ver.1 or Ver.2 Memory Cards cannot be written in VT2 BUILDER Ver.4. Meanwhile, VT2 files
(VTEDT* . md1,2,3) for memory card of VT2 BUILDER Ver.1 to 3 cannot be created in VT
STUDIO.
• VT3 files (VTEDT*.ms4) for memory cards written using VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions
cannot be read by a VT3 deploying system program Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver.1. Execute system
program transmission and overwrite the VT3 system program with Ver. 4. Also note that
VT3 files (VTEDT*.ms3/ms2/ms1) for VT STUDIO Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver. 1 memory cards cannot
be written in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions.
• Up to ten VT files for Memory Cards can be written to the Memory Card. The number of
files that can be written to Memory Card changes according to the size of the screen data.
3
Autoload
FILES & PRINTING
If Autoload is used when VT3 host computer is switched on, it's possible to automatically read the screen data and
system program already saved in Autoload file folders in the memory card.
Point • The files in Autoload file folders will be overlapped whenever the screen data for Autoload
is written into the memory card.
• If the memory card that has saved Autoload files is always inserted onto VT3 host
computer, Autoload will be executed whenever switching-on.
• Autoload isn't executed in the case of conflict between screen data for autoload and the
type of VT3.
• Please don't switch off VT3 during the system program is sent. Otherwise, it will damage
the VT3 system and prevent normal operation of the VT3.
• When screen data is read from Memory Card, the screen data that was saved on VT3 will be
lost. At the same time, the historic alarm data, trend graph data(real-time) , XY-graph
NOTICE data(real-time) and operating log will be lost. Save data on VT STUDIO or Memory Card as
required.
• If the system program is sent, the saved screen data, historic alarm data, trend graph
data(real-time), XY-graph data(real-time), PLC file folder data, operating log and setting
data in system mode will be deleted.
Verifies the screen data currently being edited with the VT file for the Memory Card saved on Memory Card.
1 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Verify with Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
"The "Verify with Memory Card" window is displayed. 3
2 Select the drive containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be verified and the file name.
Point • In the case of conflict of printing trigger bit device of form screen, VT system settings may
differ from each other, so does the screen data.
• In the case of conflict of worksheet, the worksheet may differ from screen data.
Compares the screen data currently being edited with the currently saved VTS file.
FILES & PRINTING
1 Select "File" -> "Compare with VTS file" from Menu in that order.
The "Compare with VTS file" window is displayed.
2 Select the files (file folder) and file names of VTS files to be compared.
Item Description
Look in(I) Selects the drive and folder to which the VTS file to be compared is saved.
File Name(N) Selects the name of the VTS file to be compared.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*,*.vu*)"
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Point • In the case of conflict of printing trigger bit device of form screen, VT system settings may
differ from each other, so does the screen data.
• In the case of conflict of worksheet, the worksheet may differ from screen data.
Read operating logs and VT3 files for memory card saved with VT3 series.
The operating logs can be checked by VT STUDIO.
Reference • Save operating log into memory card in VT3 system mode
VT3 Series Hardware Manual, "5-11 Memory Card"
3
• Save operating log into memory card
Item Description
*2 "Open file" window is displayed after clicking this button. Select the operating
Operating log File selection
logs to be read.
VT3 files for
After selection, read VT3 files for memory card together with the operating logs.
VT3 files for memory card
memory card*1 "Read from memory card" window is displayed after clicking this button.
Select
The selected VT3 file for the Memory Card is read.
*1 Under VT3 system mode (memory card - log data), the screen data and operating log are saved into
memory card at the same time. When selecting the operating log in the memory card, VT3 files for
memory card (VTOPL0.ms4) will be automatically selected.
*2 Up to 10 files can be read simultaneously. If several files have been read, the operating logs will be
properly incorporated and displayed. If new operating log is to be read, the operating log already read will
be cleared.
1 Select [File(F)]→[Ladder monitor data verification(J)]→[Internal ROM and ladder project(L)] from the menu in
order.
3 2 Select the ladder project verifying with internal memory (ROM) and click "OK" button.
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series>
FILES & PRINTING
Item Description
KV STUDIO currently being started To verify with the project of currently started KV STUDIO.
KV STUDIO Project To specify and verify the project of KV STUDIO.
1 Select [File(F)]→[Ladder monitor data verification(J)]→[Memory card and ladder project/memory card(M)] from
the menu in order.
2 Select the ladder monitor data in verification source and the data in verification destination, and click "OK"
button
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 and KV Nano Series>
3
Item Description
Select a drive To specify drive and select ladder monitor data when checked.
Verification Drive To select the memory card drive.
source (Ladder To display the drive and folder of memory card. The folder is "drive
monitor data) Folder name":\VTLDR.(e.g. the folder is D:\VTLDR when drive of memory
card is D.)
KV STUDIO currently being started To select the project of currently started KV STUDIO.
Verification
3 target (Ladder
project/Ladder
KV STUDIO Project
Ladder project
To select the project of KV STUDIO.
To select ladder project.
monitor data)
Ladder monitor data To select ladder monitor data.
FILES & PRINTING
File Log
File -> File log
The last four edited files are memorized and displayed as a file log. When the log of the file to be edited is selected
from the "File" menu, the file is opened and can be edited,
Exit
File -> Exit
Print Settings
File -> Print settings
Set the print items in advance to print screens after they have been made.
1
3
Select "File" -> "Print settings" from Menu in that order.
The "Print settings" window is displayed.
Common
Item Description
Select and check the item to be printed from "Cover", "VT system settings", "Global function
Print items switch", "Trend graph", "Alarm", "Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function
control", "Worksheet (settings)", "Page configuration" and "Screen".
Print start page No. Set the starting page number to be printed at the lower part of paper.
Select either to directly output to the printer and print, or save the print image as a rich text
Output to
format file (RTF file).
Print preview Displays a preview of the selected print target.
Printer settings Sets the printer to be used.
Print Executes printing.
3
FILES & PRINTING
Cover setting
Item Description
Date When this checkbox is marked, the date is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the date.
Date Font size Sets the font size (8 to 36) for the font.
Text string Sets the text string for the date.
Current date Today's date is set to the text string when the "Current date" button is clicked.
Title When this checkbox is marked, the titleis printed on the cover.
Title
Font name
Font size
Sets the font name for the title.
Sets the font size (8 to 72) for the title.
3
Text string Sets the text string for the title.
VT system settings
Print is possible only when the VT3 handy Series are used.
No settings are required when global function switch is printed.
Trend Graph
Item Description
Trend graph list Select the ID (0 to 3) of the trend graph to print.
Select all All IDs in the trend graph list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Alarm
Item Description
Alarm list Select the ID (0 to 3) of the alarm to print.
Select all All IDs in the alarm list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Print items Select the target item to print.
Message
Windows font
No special setting items are required when printing the settings of Windows font.
Print the comment and number of characters of registered words in Windows font.
Device transfer
3
FILES & PRINTING
Item Description
Device sending list Select device sending No. to be printed.
Select all Click "select all" button, and select all No. in the list.
No special setting items are required when printing the global function control.
Print the settings of global function control in "Global function control".
"12-7 Global Function Control"
Worksheet (settings)
3
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"
Item Description
Print items Select the target item to print.
Screen
3
FILES & PRINTING
Item Description
Screen list Select the screen to print.
Select all All screens in the screen list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Print target screen Select the screen to print from base/window/printer form.
Print items Select the target item to print.
Label *1 When this checkbox is marked, labels are printed.
Device No. *1 When this checkbox is marked, device Nos. are printed.
Memo *2 When this checkbox is marked, memos are printed.
Reverse black-and white When this checkbox is marked, black-and-white is reversed and printed when
tones printing "Screen" in black-and-white.
Print window over base When this checkbox is marked, windows 1, 2 and 3 are printed overlapping the
base screen. Global windows are not overlapped.
Print
When this checkbox is marked, the outside of the display frame (green area) is
screen
Print entire edit screen also printed when printing "Screen".
settings Outside of the display frame is printed white.
Reflect screen size When this checkbox is marked, the printed result reflects the screen size.
State No. Switches the display state No.
Print Preview
File -> Print preview
Point The print preview screen is not displayed if no print items are selected at "Print settings".
The print items set at "Print settings" is automatically executed.
Print
File -> Print Ctrl + p
Point • Before you execute printing, check whether or not the printer settings are correct. If these
settings are not correct, click the "Printer settings" in the "Print settings" window and
correct the settings.
• Printing is not executed if a print item is not selected at "Print settings". The print items
set at "Print settings" is automatically executed.
Display images of screens are saved as Windows bitmap (BMP) files or JPEG files.
This feature is useful for pasting and editing saved files in Microsoft Word, and making job instruction sheets or User's
Manuals.
Item Description
Enter the drive and directory (folder) name for saving the display image file of
Output destination folder
the screen.
File format Select the format to save the file in.
Screen list Select the screen for outputting to file.
Select all All screens in the screen list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Select the screen to be output to file from base, windows 1, 2 and 3, global
Target screen
3 Label *1
window, and printer form.
When this checkbox is marked, the label is displayed on the screen image.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, the device No. is displayed on the screen
Device No.
FILES & PRINTING
image.
Memo *2 When this checkbox is marked, the memo is displayed on the screen image.
When this checkbox is marked, the outside of the display frame (green area) is
Display entire edit
Display also printed when output-ting "Screen" to file. Outside of the display frame is
screen
printed white.
contents of
Reverse black- If file output is selected under black-and-white mode, the files are output after
screen andwhite tones black-and-white is reversed.
images State No. Switches the display state No.
EDIT
This chapter describes operations such as moving, scaling, deleting, copying
and rotating drawn graphics, text and parts.
Operation Basics
Basic operation is as follows:
3 Align the mouse cursor with the item on the icon menu, and click.
Move
In addition to graphics, switches/lamps and basic parts, meters/graphs, device Nos. displayed for these, and labels
can also be moved. The following describes how each of these objects is moved.
Reference • In the case of text, paint graphics, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/ graphs, align the mouse
over the object and drag. In the case of straight lines or line graphics, align the mouse over the line
and drag.
• When objects are selected, the objects are moved in 1 dot increments if click cursor key
.
• When objects are selected, the types, position, size and labels of selected objects will be displayed
in the status bar. Therefore, adjust slightly when aligning and sizing.
• If the setting of “as per grid” is temporarily cancelled when moving parts, the setting of “as per grid”
will be contrary to current setting after pressing key .
That’s to say, if selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be cancelled temporarily after pressing key
; if not selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be effective temporarily after pressing key .
Moving switches
Switch areas move interlocked with objects when an object to which a touch switch such as lamp switch or switch is
moved.
To move only switch areas, select the lamp switch or switch, and select "Edit" -> "Change switch area" from Menu to
change the switch area.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20
Switch
Drag
Switch
Switch Switch
Drag
4
Reference • The grouped objects, selected groups and continuously selected objects can be moved in a single
EDIT
operation.
• The display of device Nos. and labels also move at the same time when moving objects such as
switches, lamps and basic parts.
Scaling Graphics
In addition to graphics, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs can also be scaled (enlarged or reduced).
The following describes how each of these objects is scaled.
2 Align the mouse cursor with the selection handles in the direction to scale the graphic, and drag.
Mouse cursor
Reference • Numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm displays, and bitmap text can be
scaled up to 8X in both the horizontal and vertical directions in integer multiples.
• Numerical value displays containing 1-byte can be reduced to 1/4X in the vertical direction.
• When stroke fonts are set to numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, and alarm
displays, stroke fonts can be scaled from 2X or higher in 1dot increments.
• When objects are selected while pressing key, if clicking cursor key , the scaling
of objects can be executed based on upper left corner of objects.
• The aspect ratio of objects is held if the object is scaled with the key held down.
• If dynamic edit shall be closed during scaling, select "View(V)" -> "Dynamic edit(Q)" buttons from the
menu, or click button in that order.
•When "Enable smoothing resize function", appearance of the following components will not be
influenced, even if they are zoomed in or out.
· Switch · Indicator switch · Indicator
· Numerical value display component · Text display component · Info display component
· Alarm display component · Bar-shaped image meter · Round image meter
· Fan-shaped image meter
Scaling switches
Switch areas are scaled interlocked with objects when an object to which a touch switch such as a lamp switch or
switch is scaled.
To scale only switch areas, select the lamp switch or switch, and select "Edit" -> "Change switch area" from Menu to
change the switch area.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20
4
Switch
Switch
EDIT
Drag
Switch Switch
Drag
Outline
Drag
Outline
When a text string has been enlarged in the vertical direction
The font size is determined according to the size dragged in the horizontal direction.
Outline text is automatically placed at the center of the size dragged in the vertical direction.
Outline
Outline
Drag
2 Align the mouse cursor with the selection handles in the direction to scale the graphic, and drag.
EDIT
Reference • When multiple objects are selected, if the selected objects contain a numerical display, text display,
message display, alarm display and bitmap text, they can be scaled only in integral multiples. If
stroke font, image font and Windows font (excluding bitmap font) are set, theyíre automatically
adjusted to the size similar to the scaling ratio.
• When multiple objects are selected, if the selected objects contain parts set with outline font or
Windows font, theyíre enlarged to font size128 (72 for VT2) if the font size exceeds the upper limit128.
• When objects are selected while pressing key, if clicking cursor key , the
scaling of objects can be executed based on upper left corner of objects.
ABCDEFG ABCDEFG
Drag from start
point to end point.
You can select all objects within a specific area by dragging across the desired objects in such a way that they are all
enclosed. The selection frame is displayed around all objects in the dragged area.
Point Group selection is not possible when the cursor is dragged over a paint graphic (drawn
graphic whose "Plane attribute" checkbox is marked) or an image. In this case, only paint
graphics or images are moved.
If groups are selected when drawing graphics or the objects prior to the pictures, drag by
pressing key .
Click
Align the cursor with the next object to select, and click while holding
down the on the PC's keyboard.
4
EDIT
Click with
held down.
Canceling Selection
Cancel selections as follows when multiple objects are selected:
Selection handle
a b a
a b a
Scale in horizontal and vertical
directions. To scale at the
Scale in vertical direction. same scaling ratio, drag with
the key held down.
Select one object at a time in order from multiple selected objects. This feature is handy when you want to select one
object from among multiple overlapping objects. You can also select one object at a time from all objects by using
this feature together with "Select all".
Reference When "Select one of multiple parts" is performed, judge which objects are selected from the status bar
display.
4
1 Select the multiple graphics.
EDIT
Reference When "Select one from the cascaded components" is executed, the object in selected status can be
determined from display of the status bar.
1 Press " Ctrl + Shift " and click mouse at the same time.
For the cascaded objects that have been selected, the type, position, size and label of the foremost object will be
displayed on the status bar.
2 Press " Ctrl + Shift " and click mouse at the same time.
• The information of the selected objects is displayed on the status bar in turn.
• When the object you want to select is displayed, the selection frame and selection mark are displayed around that
graphic to indicate that it is selected.
Ctrl Ctrl
+ +
Shift Shift
+ +
4
Click Click
EDIT
Ctrl + Shift + Click
Undo
Edit(E) -> Undo(U) +
Redo
Edit(E) -> Redo(R) +
Cut
Edit(E) -> Cut(T) +
Copy
Edit(E) -> Copy(C) +
Copies the selected object. Copied objects can be placed on screen by the "Paste" operation described below.
Reference • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, the selected multiple
objects can be copied in a single operation.
• Copying of only device Nos. and labels is not possible.
• Select position to be pasted through mouse cursor when pasting to the same pages with copy
source.
• The part will be pasted to the same coordinate with that of copy source part when pasted to different
page with that of copy source.
Paste
Edit(E) -> Paste(P) +
4 • Compoments are pasted to the same coordinates as the configured coordinates of components of
copy source when pasting to the page different from the copy source.
EDIT
Delete
Edit(E) -> Delete(D)
Reference • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, the selected multiple
objects can be deleted in a single operation.
• If you have deleted an object by mistake, you can restore the deleted object to its original state by
selecting "Edit" -> "Undo" ( + key) immediately after the “Delete” operation.
Select all
Edit(E) -> Select all(L) +
Search
Edit(E) -> Search(X) +
Search parts from screen data that match the specified conditions.
EDIT
Item Description
Not specify To search from all parts and settings in the search range.
Specify the bit device to be searched. When the number of devices is set to 2 or above, the
specified leading device will be taken as the start of the search range and the specified number
Bit device of devices will be searched.
When this option is checked, only the leading device will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple devices.
To specify the word device to be searched. When the number of devices is set to 2 or above, the
specified leading device will be taken as the start of the search range and the specified number
Word device of devices will be searched.
When this option is checked, only the leading device will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple devices.
Unsetting device Only unsetting devices will be searched.
To specify the device comments or character strings contained in the device comments to be
Device comments
searched.
To specify the worksheet cell or ID to be searched. Cells that are referred by parts, settings, and
cell, but are not set up can also be searched.
Worksheet
When this option is checked, only the leading cell will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple cells.
Character string To specify the character strings contained in the parts and settings to be searched.
Reference In case the part, to which PLC device is set up, is selected, the Search key will be used as the PLC
device of this part in the Search windwo being displayed.
Item Description
Check this option in case of searching screen and select the pages, windows, or parts (category
Screen
4 System setting
and function) to be searched.
Check this option in case of searching system settings and select the system settings to be
searched.
EDIT
Reference In case the part, to which PLC device is set up, is selected, the Search key will be used as the PLC
device of this part in the Search windwo being displayed.
Multiple copy
Edit(E) -> Multiple edit(W) + +
Copies multiple selected objects taking the top left of the copy source objects as the reference point.
Item Description
Number of X-axis Set the number of copies to be made in the X-axis (horizontal) direction.
copies *1 Y-axis Set the number of copies to be made in the Y-axis (vertical) direction.
Select how multiple copied objects are to be placed.
Clearance/interval Clearance:Specify by the clearance between objects.
Interval: Specify by the interval between objects.
Interval *1 Set the clearance or interval in the X-axis (horizontal) direction as
X-axis
a number of dots.
Set the clearance or interval in the Y-axis (vertical) direction as a
Y-axis
number of dots.
When this checkbox is marked, the target (reference) device set
Increment decrement of device No.
to switches/lamps or basic parts is automatically incremented
during multiple copy.
4
X-axis priority In the case of increment\decrement of device No, X-direction priority.
EDIT
Direction
Increment Y-axis priority In the case of increment\decrement of device No, Y-direction priority.
decrement Auto The device No. is automatically incremented.
of device No. Increment
Specify Increment\decrement of device No. according to specified number.
number/
decrement Number
If “increment number” is “specified”, increment number(1 to
number increments/
65535)\decrement number(-65535 to-1) is set.
decrement
*1 Multiple copy cannot be set in the case of a number of copies or interval that will result in the multiple copied
objects protruding from the edit window. In this case, the following error message will be displayed.
*2 When a cell is set for the target (reference) device, the device will be incremented regardless of the direction
and number of increments settings.
Point • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, multiple copy of
the selected multiple objects is performed in a single operation.
• Multiple copy is not possible by a number of copies or interval that will result in the
multiple copied objects protruding from the edit window.
• "Number of selected objects x number of copies in X-axis x number of copies in the Y-axis"
can be set as the number of multiple copies as long as it is within 256 copies.
• Multiple copying of only device Nos. and labels is not possible.
C2 D2 E2 F2
C3 D3 E3 F3
C4 D4 E4 F4
Grouping
Group
4 Point • Grouped multiple objects can be moved, deleted, copied, and cut in a single operation as
they are handled as a single object.
EDIT
• Graphic attribute controls cannot be set again after a graphic to which graphic attribute
control has been set is grouped with other graphics.
Ungroup
Point Graphics to which graphic attribute control has been set after grouping cannot be ungrouped
unless all graphic attribute controls have been disabled.
Regroup
Point • Grouped multiple objects can be moved, deleted, copied, 1and cut in a single operation as
they are handled as a single object.
• Graphic attribute controls cannot be set again after a graphic to which graphic attribute
control has been set is grouped with other graphics.
Order
Move to front
EDIT
Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to the back(K) + +
Move forward
Move backward
Rotate/Flip
Rotate
Rotates the selected graphic by 90° in the clockwise direction. Rotate in a clockwise direction.
Lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles and ellipses, arcs, fans and bitmap texts can be rotated.
4 Point • Switch/indicator, basic component, meter/graph, memo, image, decoration frame and
screen call etc. can not be rotated.
EDIT
Point The following functions cannot be reversed even if they are reversed "right and left" or "up
and down" .
• Angle and direction of nameplate
• Grouped components selected together with other components
• Grouped components (A) further grouped together with other components
Place/Align
Edit(E) -> Place/Align(N) +
Multiple selected objects can be aligned to the left/right/top/bottom or center, or arranged at even intervals.
Reference The icons on “Place/align” window can also be selected from control/edit tool bar.
Middle
circumscribing rectangle of multiple selected objects.
EDIT
Arranges all selected objects so that the spacing
Align along the center line in the horizontal direction of
Vertically each object is uniform with respect to the currently
selected objects.
Align the left edge of all selected objects with the left
Align left edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple selected
objects.
Align Place all selected objects such that the left and right
Horizontally centerlines of various objects are equally spaced.
Sets the attributes of base screens, window screens and form screens.
1 The "Screen attribute settings" window is displayed so that you can set the screen attributes.
Display the "Screen attribute settings" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Screen attribute settings(M)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
4 • By selecting the screen to edit on the "Screen" tab in the workspace, opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button, and selecting "Screen attribute settings(A)"
• By double-clicking the screen to edit at the "Screen" tab in the workspace
EDIT
Changes the settings of switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs, and drawn graphics to which graphic
attribute controls have been set.
1 Select the switch/lamp, basic part, or meters/graphs whose settings you want to change.
2 Either select "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order, or click the button .
The setting window for the respective object is displayed. The window that is displayed varies according to the object
that is selected. Display the setting window of various objects using either of the following methods. 4
• Double click the objects.
EDIT
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"
• Double click the lines of the object parts in the search results list.
Any part in the screen can be easily registered as the default value of part creation.
1 Select the parts to be registered as default value (graph, switch, lamp switch, lamp, outline text, bitmap text,
and numeric value display).
2 Select Edit(E) -> Register part attribute as default settings(Q) from the menu.
Alternatively, you can select "Register part attribute as default settings(Q)" from right-click menu.
Point A part containing the following settings cannot be registered as default settings.
• Graphs for which Graph Attribute Control is set up
• Switches/lamp switches/lamps in free style
• Outline text using a Logo
• Numeric value display using free style in the image
Changes the switch area (area that functions as the switch) of lamps switches, switches, key entry parts and other
parts.
Normally, switch areas are automatically set matched to the size of the object. The following describes the procedure
for manually changing the switch area.
4 2 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Change switch area(A)" from the menu, and click button.
The switch area can also be changed by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Change
EDIT
switch area(A)".
3 Drag from the start point to the end point of the switch area.
The switch area is changed.
Point • Switch areas cannot be changed when multiple objects are selected or grouped.
• If moving objects after altering the switch area, the switch area is automatically changed
into moving object position of objects.
You can edit the source callup screen placed on the screen currently being edited.
2 Either select "Edit(E)" "Edit callup screen(Y)" from Menu in that order, or open Menu by clicking the right
mouse button and select "Edit callup screen(Y)".
The screen of the calling party is in edit state.
Alter the key entry order of parts with key entry settings (numerical display, text display, message display, alarm
display, trend graph, XY-image).
Point • To distinguish parts, be sure to set individual labels to parts before you start to change the
key entry order.
• When "Alter key entry order" window is displayed, the parts even with labels set as hidden
will also be displayed.
4
1 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)" from Menu in that order.
EDIT
The "Change key entry order" window is displayed.
2 Select the label whose key entry order is to be changed, and click the " "/ " " buttons to change the key
entry order.
0 1
1 2
2 0
Option Settings
Edit(E) -> Option settings(I)
Once option settings are set, the settings are stored held in memory even if VT STUDIO is quit.
File
Sets the default folder for saving the VTS file in advance.
4
EDIT
Item Description
VTS file save folder Sets the default folder for saving VTS files to.
VTS file for memory card
File Sets the default folder for saving VT files for Memory Card to.
save folder
User part catalog folder Save user-defined part catalogue file and set up the default of folder.
Save auto backup file into the following folders after checked.
For Windows other than XP: "C:\Users\ (User’s name)\My Documents\
KEYENCE\VTS4E"
Auto back up For Windows XP : "C:\Documents and Settings\ (User’s name)\My
Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E"
File name is "! Auto backup file 0.vs4"*1.
Sets the timing (1 to 120 minutes) that the auto-backup file is updated.
*1 When multiple programs are started up, the last backup file to be created becomes "AutoBackup1.vs3".
DISPLAY
Set in advance the coefficient of font size of nameplate, the font size of label\device No., initial settings of memo and
display/hide of Num key for automatic adjustment.
EDIT
Item Description
Sets the font size coefficient (in range 10 to 200%, in 5% increments) when
Nameplate font size coefficient during
the nameplate font size is set to Autosize. The larger the coefficient that is
auto-sizing
set, the larger the font size becomes, and the larger the text becomes.
Font size of label Sets the font size (6 to 72) for displaying the label.
Display of label/
device No. Font size of device
Sets the font size (6 to 72) for displaying the device No.
No.
Font name Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Font size Sets the font size (6 to 72) of the text string to draw.
Memo initial
Text color*1 Selects the text color of memos.
settings
Background color *1 Selects the background color of memos.
Frame color *1 Selects the frame color of memos.
Display numeric keypad *2 Sets display/hide of numeric keypads.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 For details on numeric keypads, refer to the description on the following page.
If the selection of "Display Num key" is cancelled, the window of "Num key" will not be displayed
when executing the menu of entry value. Enter the numerical value on the keyboard of your personal
computer.
Numerical values can be entered within the range 0 to 9 in the case of decimal values and within the range 0 to F in
the case of Hex values.
Item Description
- Enters the minus sign.
. Enters the decimal point.
BS Deletes the numerical value to the left of the cursor.
CLR Deletes all entered numerical values.
Close Closes the "Num Key" window.
Parts attribute
Default line type, plane color, and text color when drawing graphics and text can be set in advance.
Graphics
Set the default graphic attributes for lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles/ellipses, arcs, and fans.
4
EDIT
Item Description
Line attribute When this checkbox is marked, line type, line color and arrow can be set.
Line type*2 Selects the line type.
Line
attribute *1 Line color*2 Select the line color.
Select from "None/Start point/End point/ Both ends" for the arrow setting.
Arrows
This setting is enabled only for straight lines and continuous lines.
Plane When this checkbox is marked, the inside of the graphic is filled and the graphic is turned into a paint graphic.
Plane attribute This can be set only for rectangles, polygons, circles/ellipses, and fans.
attribute
Plane color*2 Select the color of the plane.
When this checkbox is marked, the four corners of the rectangle are rounded. This can be set
Chamfer
Chamfer only when drawing rectangles.
Radius Set the corner radius at this item.
Start angle
Arc/Fan *3 Sets the start/end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. This can be set only for arcs and fans.
End angle
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*2
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, an outer frame line is attached when drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/
ellipses, arcs, and fans.
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*3 Start/end angle
"7-1 Setting Graphics"
Style
Sets the default style of switches and lamps.
Item Description
Style Selects the switch theme/style (/type).
Switch Color Selects the switch color.
Part size To set up the size of switch part.
Style Sets the lamp switch theme/style (/type).
Lamp switch Color Sets the lamp switch color.
Part size To set up the size of lamp switch part.
Style Sets the lamp theme/style (/type).
Lamp Color Sets the lamp color.
Part size To set up the size of lamp part.
Device ON display Displays the state when the lamp bit device of the lamp switch and lamp is ON. 4
EDIT
Nameplate
Sets the default nameplate setting items.
Item Description
OFF nameplate/ON To select OFF/ON for the nameplate to be set up for default value. Switch and N state lamp use
nameplate OFF nameplate settings as the default value.
Font name Set the font name of the text string in the nameplate.
Font size Set the font size of the text string in the nameplate.
Kerning Set the spacing between characters.
Position Set the placement position of the nameplate.
Set the spacing between the nameplate and lamp switch when "Position" is set to Top, Bottom,
Interval
Right or Light.
Auto-size Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color*1
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment
Outline text
Sets the default outline text setting items.
4
EDIT
Item Description
Font name Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Rotate Select rotation angle for words from rotating towards right 0º/90º.
Direction Select the text direction from "Horizontal/Vertical".
Font size Set the font size of the text string to be drawn.
Kerning Set the spacing between characters.
Auto-size To adjust font size/character spacing automatically based on the part size settings.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text Decoration
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color*1
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment
Bitmap text
Sets the default bitmap text setting items.
EDIT
Item Description
Text color Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Shadow color*1
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK*1
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Size (V) Set the size of text strings in the vertical direction to multiples of 1/2X or within the range 1X to 8X.
Size (H) Set the size of text strings in the horizontal direction to multiples within the range 1X to 8X.
Rotate Rotates text strings clockwise by (0, 90, 180 or 270) deg.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Numerical display
To set up the default of setting items in numerical display.
Item Description
Style Select the style to be used for display from "Basic/image frame".
Frame²
Color Select the color system of image frame.
Background
Cursor color Set the cursor color when image frame is used.
Select the fonts to be used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/Windows
Font *1
font/Extremely small font".
Text
Style This item is displayed when image font is selected. Select the style of image font.
Color Selects the color.
Part size To set up the size of numeric value display part.
Device comments/Workspace
4
EDIT
Item Description
Display device comment When setting device after selection, device comment is displayed
beside device No. nearby deviceNo.*1
Specify device So device can be selected
In case of checked, device comment is displayed in the drop-
from device comment in the
down list during device setting.*2
drop-down list
Set up parts from the When setting device after selection by dragging and dropping in
device comment with Make selected items flicker the device comment list, the items selected in the setting window
the drag&drop operation will blink.*3
When generating multiple devices by dragging and dropping in
the device comment list, select the priority of directions for parts
Direction alignment in “X-direction/Y-direction”. In addition, after multiple
Generate parts from devices are generated, set whether or not generate after returning
to the next line/column, or the number.
the device comment
Clearance of parts Set the spacing of parts.
with the drag&drop
Parts size Set the size of switch, lamp and lamp switch.
operation
Part size settings on When this option is checked, the default value set for all parts will
priority have the priority for creation.
>>Part attributes To display "Part attributes" tab.
*1 Device comment displayed beside device No.
Reference For the details of device comment list, see "List of Device Comments", page 11-41 refer to
“Device comment list”
Other
EDIT
Item Description
Close part catalog after When this checkbox is marked, the "Part Catalog" window is
placing part. closed after the parts are placed.
Automatically select part When selecting parts after selection from the parts icons in
catalog when configuring menu bar or tool bar, the displayed types will vary from the
Part Catalog parts. selected parts.
Set the style change function
Model replacement function can be used after selection.
to Eabled*1
Change the character When this option is checked, the character attributes of
attribute of nameplate nameplate will subject to style change.
After import screen catalog, select whether to display the
Screen catalog Display the import result
import result on "Search Result List" window.
When this checkbox is marked, select the resize reference
Outline text/ Bitmap
Resize reference point point from "Center/ Top left point/Center of left edge" for when
text
the outline text or bitmap text strings are changed.
Enable change to the device
When this checkbox is marked, the device No. can be
No. using the intelligent
Intelligent mouse changed by the intelligent mouse.
mouse.
settings
Scroll edit screen on VT When this checkbox is marked, the edit window can be
STUDIO. scrolled on VT STUDIO.
If selected, the components can be zoomed in/zoomed out
Enable "Smoothing resize" function enabled
without changing the appearance when the components
(VT3 series only)
resizing.
For the details of mode replacement function, see "Part Catalog", page 5-2 refer to “type”
Point Sometimes the intelligent mouse cannot be used depending on the mouse driver and version
of OS. Please cancel the selection in the case of abnormal operation.
Edit Apex
Edit apex
4 The selection frame is displayed around the selected continuous line or polygon.
EDIT
3 Click the button on the tool bar. Apices can also be edited by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button and selecting "Edit apex".
Handles are displayed at the apices of the selected continuous straight line or polygon.
4 Align the cursor with the handles of the apices to be edited and drag.
Drag
5 Either click the button on the tool bar, or cancel selection of the graphic to quit editing of apices.
DISPLAY
This chapter describes how to display the catalog and grid, and the functions
of the various tool bars that are displayed in windows.
Part Catalog
View(V) -> Part Catalog(C) F7
Frequently used parts, such as switch lamp, numerical value display and numerical key, and commonly used images
such as basic graphics, arrow, symbol and balloon, etc, are registered to the Part catalog of VT STUDIO.
1 Either select "View(V)" -> "Part Catalog(C)" from the menu, or click the button.
This switch displays/hides of the "Part Catalog" window.
5
DISPLAY
Item Description
Catalog Selection of catalog
Selects the Part catalog file. Set the Part catalog file name after clicking the Part
File selection catalog replacement button.
Color system Selects the color.
New Part catalog Creates a new Part catalog file.
Rename Part catalog Renames the Part catalog file.
Name Sets (changes) the name of the currently selected part.
Delete Deletes the currently selected part.
Close Part catalog after
If the button is pressed and held, close "Part catalog" window after placing parts.
placing part. *1
Automatic selection of catalog If the button is pressed and held, the Part catalogs displayed may vary with the
when placing parts.*1 selected parts when selected from the parts icons of menu bar or tool bar.
Effective/ineffective switching
If the button is pressed and held, the style change function is effective.
of style change function.*1
This is used to decide whether
nameplate character The character attribute of nameplate will be changed if this button is pressed during the
attributes are changed at the style change.
time of style change. *1
Select the display size for the part from magnification/display all/ suitable for window
Zoom
width.
Individual ON/OFF The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
graphics attribute control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the
display of device preview display settings.
The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
Device ON display
graphics attribute control ON state are displayed.
The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
Device OFF display
graphics attribute control OFF state are displayed.
State No. Switches the display state No. of N state lamps.
Display text string ID witches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc.
Point All settings are saved when switches/lamps, basic part, meters/graphs, etc. are registered as
parts to the Part catalog. Note, however, that devices must be reset when parts have been
placed on files to which a target PLC different from the target PLC at registration is set.
Reference The graphics catalogs in VT STUDIO and VT BUILDER (basic image, arrow, symbol and balloon) are
incorporated into the part catalogs.
DISPLAY
Dragging
Dragging
Point If it is impossible to register to system Part catalog files, please recreate the Part catalog files
and register the parts to them.
User-defined
User-defined file logged in advance is opened first when logging part in Part catalogue window.
5
Item Description
New catalog file To new a Part catalog file in the user-defined folder.
Download Use Internet Explorer to open the home page for Part catalog download.
DISPLAY
Select folder To select the folder for saving Part catalog file.
1 Make the parts to which the types shall be changed in a selected state in edit screen.
• If the parts selected in edit window and Part catalog window have the same category, the type will be change.
• If multiple parts are selected in edit window, only the parts of the same category with those selected in Part catalog
window will be changed in batch.
• If grouped parts or worksheet parts are selected, the types of grouped parts and parts in the worksheet will be
changed in batch.
• For the parts selected in Part catalog window, the types can be changed only when a single part is registered to the
Part catalog. However, the types cannot be changed when grouped or multiple parts are incorporated and
registered to Part catalog.
• In type replacement function, the setting items related to appearance, such as color and images, will be copied.
However, some items cannot be copied depending upon the parts. Please check the settings after type
replacement function is used.
• The size of parts cannot be copied.The parts with changed types will be reset based on original size of parts.
However, when the settings of Windows font are copied, the size of fonts will also be copied, so the size of parts
may vary with the size of fonts.
Screen catalog
View(V) -> Screen catalog(F)
Special screens for various equipment connected, as well as menus, bit monitors, word monitors, alarm log, and
tread graphs used frequently are registered in the screen catalog of VT STUDIO.
1 Select “View(V)” -> “Screen catalog(F)” from the menu, and click the button.
To display/hide the "Screen catalog" window.
DISPLAY
Item Description
Category Select the category of screen catalog.
Download Use Internet Explorer to open the home page for screen catalog download.
Preview
Preview is possible in the "View mode" window.
Double click the "Screen list" button to display screens list. Switch to the "Screen catalog preview" window.
For more information, refer to "View Mode", page 5-28.
5
DISPLAY
Reference • In case no screen file is opened, please set up VT model and PLC model before import.
• When MultiTalk settings exist in the screen or PLCs whose station No. is setup are contained, the
"PLC model settings" window will be displayed. Please select an import destination.
If auto replacement of device is available for screen catalog due to integration with KV STUDIO, the "Import - KV
STUDIO integration" window will be displayed.
Item Description
Current KV STUDIO Integrate with the current KV STUDIO.
KV STUDIO project Specify one project in KV STUDIO and then integrate the same.
Unit configurations in VT STUDIO. To use unit configurations saved in the screen file of VT STUDIO.
Not to integrate with KV STUDIO Import without integration.
Device comments Check this option to read the device comments.
Read the buffer memory
Check this option to read the buffer comments of expansion unit. Only for
comments of expansion
KV STUDIO Ver.5.5 or higher.
Read unit.
settings Read the comments of Check this option to read the comments of internal device (MW/MB) and
internal device/link device link device (LNW/LNB) on VT.
Unit configurations
Read unit configurations when KV STUDIO Ver.6 or higher is used for
integrating with "Current KV STUDIO" and "KV STUDIO project". 5
In case any item is overwritten, the following window is displayed.
DISPLAY
3 Confirm the overwrites, and click the "OK" button if no problem.
In case of details setting, or in case a message in red color is displayed due to, for example, duplicated devices,
please click the "Detailed settings" button.
For more information about advanced settings, See "Import", page 3-9.
5 After import is completed, window will be displayed, select whether to display the import result.
Select "Yes", then "search result list" window will display the import result.
Tool bar
View(V) -> Tool bar(T)
5 The tool bar is displayed by marking the checkbox of the tool bar to be
displayed.
DISPLAY
Standard
Item Description
New Creates a new file.
Open Opens existing files.
Save Saves edited files.
Import Import screens and system settings from the existing screen data.
Cut Cuts the selected object.
Copy Copies the selected object.
Paste Re-places the copied object on screen.
Undo The previous operation is undone.
Redo Redoes the operation undone by the "Undo" button.
Print Prints the screen of the currently edited file or lists.
Add or Remove
Select the buttons to be displayed.
buttons
Screen
Specification of page No., global window No. and printer form page No. to edit, and specification of base/window
screens can be performed by button operation. New pages can also be made by button operation.
Item Description
New screen Creates a new base screen, window screen or printer form screen.
5
Screen attribute Sets the attributes (e.g. background color) of the base screen, window screen or printer form
settings screen.
Calls up a specified existing page No. global window No., or printer form screen page No.
Page No., Page comment
DISPLAY
Next page Calls up an existing next page.
Previous page Calls up an existing previous page.
Acfive Edit
Switch active edit Eabled/disabled.
Eabled /disabled
Previous screen Return to the previous screen. This operation can be performed for 20 times.
Edit base Sets the base (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 1 Sets window 1 (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 2 Sets window 2 (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 3 Sets window 3 (screen) ready for editing.
Page configuration
Displays the "Page configuration management" window.
management
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons
Switch/Lamp
Item Description
Switch Place switches.
Lamp switch Place lamp switches.
Lamp Place lamps.
N state lamp Place N state lamps.
N state parts Place N start parts.
Cross-key Place cross-key(only VT3-V7R)
Function switch Configure function switch. (Only for the VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G))
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons
Parts
Press the buttons to configure the basic parts (numerical display, text display, message display and alarm display),
bar graph meter, trend graph/meter.
Item Description
Numerical value display Places numerical value displays.
5
Text display Places text displays.
Message display Places message displays.
Basic part
Graphics
Item Description
Line Draws straight lines.
Continuous lines Draws continuous straight lines.
Rectangles Draws rectangles and paint rectangles.
Polygons Draws polygons and paint polygons.
Graphics
Control/Edit
Setting of part attributes, swapping the order (front/back) of selected objects, and alignment of multiple selected
objects can be operated by buttons.
Item Description
Select one of
Select one object at a time in order from multiple selected objects.
mulfiple parts
Select parts
Parts Attribute
Selects objects. 5
Changes the settings of switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs.
Settings
DISPLAY
Graphic attribute
Sets the graphic attribute controls to drawn graphics, outline text, bitmap text, and images.
controls
Change switch area Changes the switch area.
Rotate Rotates selected drawn graphics clockwise in 90 deg. increments.
Flip horizontal Flips selected object(s) horizontally.
Flip vertical Flips selected object(s) vertically.
Edit Apex Edits the apices of selected straight lines, continuous straight lines and polygons.
Move to front Moves the selected object to the front.
Move to back Moves the selected object to the back.
Move to front Moves the selected object forwards.
Move backward Moves the selected object backwards.
Group Groups multiple objects into a single object.
Ungroup Ungroups a grouped object to the original multiple objects.
Place/Align Aligns multiple selected objects.
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons
View
Item Description
5 Enlarge display
Reduce display
Enlarges the display of the edit window.
Reduces the display of the edit window.
Display
Select display magnification for edit window.
DISPLAY
magnification
Set grid Sets the grid display spacing and color.
Individual display The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics attribute
ON/OFF control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the preview display settings.
All devices display Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
ON devices in graphic attribute control are ON in the edit window.
All devices display Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
OFF devices in graphic attribute control are OFF in the edit window.
State No. Switches and displays the state No. of N state lamps and N state parts in the edit window.
Switches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc. in the edit window.
Display text string ID
Displays the screen (base, window 1, 2 and 3), interrupt window, and global window on the
Overlap other screen
same page as the screen currently being edited overlapped.
View Mode Displays the "View mode" window.
Screen "Screen" window is displayed in workspace.
System setting "System setting" window is displayed in workspace.
Seach result list Display seach result list
Text string list Display text string list
Device comment list Display device comment list
Operating log list Display operating log list
Part catalog Displays the Part Catalog window.
Screen catalog Display the "Screen catalog" window.
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed.
buttons
Position/Size
Start X coordinate Start Y coordinate End X coordinate End Y coordinate X-axis size Y-axis size
Item Description
Displays the start x coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
Start X coordinate
numeric value, the object moves in the X direction.
Start Y coordinate
Displays the start y coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
numeric value, the object moves in the Y direction. 5
Displays the end x coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
DISPLAY
End X coordinate numeric value, the object moves in the X direction, and the object is resized in the X direction.
The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the end y coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
End Y coordinate numeric value, the object moves in the Y direction, and the object is resized in the Y direction.
The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the X direction size of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a numeric value, the
X-axis size
object moves in the X direction, and the object is resized in the X direction. The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the Y direction size of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a numeric value, the object
Y-axis size
moves in the Y direction, and the object is resized in the Y direction. The start coordinates do not move.
(0,0)
(Start X coordinate, start Y coordinate)
Y-axis size
X-axis size
(End X coordinate, end Y coordinate)
Communications
Item Description
Send all data Sends edited screen data and PLC data folder data to the VT3.
Different-send screen
Send the changed screen data to VT3.
data
Receive all data Receives screen data or PLC data folder data saved to the VT3 on the PC.
Compare all data Verifies the data on the VT3 with the data currently being edited on the PC.
All Data Check Perform data check for all data.
Communications settings Perform setting related to communication
Serial port Enable communication via VT3 with serial interface.
USB Enable communication via VT3 with USB interface.
ETHERNET Enable communication via VT3 with Ethernet.
Remote COM port tool Start Remote COM port tool.
Display/hide buttons Select the buttons to be displayed
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-13
5-1 About Various Display Functions
Guideline
Display/hide guideline and display position for the guideline can be selected.
Items Description
Display/hide Switch to display/hide for guideline.
Left Align display guideline on the left of configurated objects.
Right Align display guideline on the right of configurated objects.
5 Top
Bottem
Align display guideline at the top of configurated objects.
Align display guideline at the bottem of configurated objects.
Center width Align display guideline at the center of object width.
DISPLAY
Center height Align display guideline at the center of the configured object height.
Status bar
View(V) -> Status bar(B)
Point • Double click the VT model to display the "VT model settings" window.
• Double click the PLC vendor and model to display the "PLC model settings" window.
Workspace
This switch displays/hides of the work space.
The workspace contains the following contents.
• Screen • System settings • Find result list
• Text string list • Device comment • Operating log
Screen
This panel allows you to view the configuration of screens made on each page, and to perform copy, delete and other
editing operations on the screens you have made.
5
DISPLAY
Item Description
New screen Opens the "New screen" window to make a new screen.
Screen attribute
Opens the "Screen attribute settings" window to change the attributes of the specified screen.
settings
Copy Copies the specified screen.
Paste Pastes the copied screen to the specified base screen, window screen, or form screen.
Deletes the screens on the specified pages, and moves the deleted screens to Trash. Screens
Delete
you have deleted are moved to Trash.
When "Open Import File" is opened, the file containing the screen to import is selected, the
"Page configuration management" window is displayed. The screen list is divided into two
Import screen *1
parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the lower screen
list. Copy the screen ID from the screen list of import files, and paste it to the upper screen list.
Switch display Switches between the list display and image display.
Page configuration
Displays the "Page configuration management" window.
management
Switch display Changes the type of screen, page No. (global window No.), comments, etc.
Link copy Makes a link for the copied screen. This item cannot be used on form screens.
Clear trash Completely deletes screens in Trash.
*1 "Importing screens", page 12-55. To import system settings, select File(F) -> Import(I) from the menu.
Right click menu, and add the following operations.
Item Description
Unfold all Unfold the selected items.
Fold all Fold the selected items.
The same operations can be performed from Menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
Point • The window screen cannot be copied and pasted to base screen, nor base screen be copied and
pasted to window screen. (Pasting between local windows and global windows is possible.)
• Copying and pasting between the Printer form screen and regular screens(base screen, window
screens) is not possible. (Copying and pasting between printer form screens is possible.)
Page No.
Screen ID
switched and displayed corresponding to position of the cursor. In addition, edit window can be
activated by pressing "Enter" when cursors are aligned.
• Move "Screen ID" by dragging and dropping
"Screen ID" can be moved to any position by dragging and dropping in workplace.
Change page
Individual change of screen ID/global window No.
Select "Change page(G)" from the right-click menu of screen ID (the global window No.) to display the "Change
page" window.
• The page No. of screen will be changed when the page is changed via screen ID.
• The global window No. and local window can not be changed when page is changed via screen ID of global
window.
• Only the page No.of form screen will be changed when page is changed via screen ID of form screen.
• After page is changed, for the components (Page Switch (page No. specifying), Local window display, global
window display) referring page to be changed , a window for confirming whether the change is followed will be
displayed. If you select "Yes", then the above settings will also be changed along with the page change operation.
Trash
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash. Screens in Trash can be re-used by copy-and-paste. The screens in Trash
can be completely deleted by clicking "Clear trash" in the menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button. 5
Up to ten of the latest deleted screens remain in Trash.
DISPLAY
System setting
Set up the "VT system settings", "Global function switch (only for VT3-
V6H(G)/Q5H(G))", "Device comments", "Trend graph", "Alarm",
"Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function control",
"PLC data folder", "Worksheet ", and "Ladder monitor".
The seach result list can also be displayed using the following methods.
• Select "Edit(E)"->"Find(X)" from the menu.
• Open the menu with right mouse button, and select "Seach(H)".
• Open the menu with right mouse button, and select "Seach result list(I)".
Item Description
To select the list page. The import result is displayed upon the completion of a screen
Page(P)
catalog or normal import.
Target range Selects the window to be displayed as a list.
Window(W)
Import result To display import result upon complete of screen catalog or normal import
Display system settings Check this option to display system settings.
Seach(S)*1 Display "Seach" window after clicking.
After clicking, display the setting window of selected parts in the list. When selecting the
Change settings(T) parts of multiple types, *3 parts attribute settings can be edited in batch.
When selecting screen attribute, display "screen attribute setting" window.
Display “Device batch change” window after clicking. The devices selected in the list can
Batch change devices(D)*4 be changed in batch.
Screen/system settings*2 Display the page number.
Screen ID Display screen ID.
5 Coordinate*2
Description*2
Display the coordinate of configuration.
Display the types of parts.
DISPLAY
Extract text string data from screen data to display in the list. You’re allowed to edit text string on the displayed "Text
string list" window. The screen can be edited in edit window under the list window.
5
Item Description
DISPLAY
Page(P) Select the page displaying text string.After that, display after filtering.
Window(W) Select the window displaying text string. After that, display after filtering.
Parts(S)*1 Select the parts showing text string. After that, display after filtering.
Copy Copy the selected cell and text string.
Paste Paste the copied cell and text string.
Search Display "Search/replace in the text string list" window.
Import Display “import to text string list” window, and select the files of text string list to be imported.
Export Display “export to text string list” window, and export the displayed text string list to the files.
Display text string list. If selecting parts on the list, the edit window will be switched to the page or window
Text string list
placed with selected parts, and the parts are selected.The text strings can also be changed on the list.
Multiple ON(N)*3 To set the "Multiple" check for selected part to ON in a batch form.
Multiple OFF(O)*3 To set the "Multiple" check for selected part to OFF in a batch form.
*1 The selectable parts are bitmap text, outline text, nameplate (switch, lamp, lamp switch, N state parts, N state
lamp), alarming parts (state display character strings, item names) and screen attributes (screen ID).
*2 The text files of CSV format or UNICODE can be imported/exported.
Export the text strings of all parts in the screen data.
*3 Multiple ON/OFF is available only in the right-click menu of character string list.
Reference If double-clicking the text strings on the text string list, the cursor blinks, and the text strings can be
edited. The changed contents on the list will be reflected into parts on edit screen. In addition, the
changed parts on edit screen will also be reflected into the contents on list.
"Search" "replace"
Items Description
Input the text string to be searched or the text string before replacing. Even for character strings
Search text string(T)
that contain line feed, line feed will also be included in the search.
Input the text string after replacing. After replacement, if the character string needs to contain
Replace text string(W)
line feed, Alt + Enter may be used for line feed of the replaced character string.
Rearch direction(D) Select the seach/replace direction.
Replace all(A) Batch replace the text strings as objects.
Individually replacement for the text strings as objects. When you don't want to replace it, click
Replace(R)
"Search next", and the cursor will move to the next text string.
Search next(N) Search as the specified direction of "Search direction".
Close(C) Close the "Search/replace text string list" window.
Reference In the "Text string list" window, after you click " Ctrl + F " or " Ctrl + H " with any item selected, the
selected text string will be listed in the "Search text strings", and the "Search/replace in the text string
5 list" will be displayed.
DISPLAY
If the exported files are imported again, please edit only the text strings set in the parts.
The following functions can be realized by reading into VT STUDIO the device
comment used in ladder diagram program:
• Look up device comment during device setting.
• Find in device comment.
• Look up device comment from find result list.
• Set parts (nameplate and device settings) from device comment list.
• Generate parts (switch, lamp, lamp switch, numerical display, text
display, outline fonts) from device comment list.
• The unit enables filter display.
(For KV-7000 Series or KV-5500/5000/3000 Series PLC models
5
incorporating KV STUDIO Ver. 6.0 or later unit architecture data.)
DISPLAY
* KV-7000 Series supports KV STUDIO Ver. 8 and later versions.
The operating log files to be saved into memory card as CSV files or UNICODE text files are read into VT STUDIO, which
are used to find screen data and check the log.
Switch grid/Grid
Switch Grid
Grid
Set grid
View(V) -> Set grid(R)
Sets the grid that is used as the reference point for aiding you in making screens in the edit window.
Item Description
Set the horizontal and vertical grid spacing in the edit window as a number of dots. Set the spacing
Grid spacing in the vertical direction as the Y coordinate, and the spacing in the horizontal direction as the X
coordinate. The setting range is 1 or more in both and X and Y directions. The default is "X=4, Y=4".
Grid color *1 Select the grid color.
Set the grid spacing to the same size (X=2 and Y=2 for VT3-W4 series, otherwise X=16 and Y=16)
Switch grid size
as the switch grid.
When this checkbox is marked, drawing and movement of objects is aligned with the grid in the edit window.
Snap to grid When snap to grid is set to ON, graphics are drawn aligned to the grid. In the default setting, this checkbox
is marked.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Point When grid spacing is set to "X=1, Y=1", the created screen cannot be checked.
Reference If the setting of “as per grid” is temporarily cancelled when moving parts and zooming, the setting of
“as per grid” will be contrary to current setting after pressing key .
That’s to say, if selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be cancelled temporarily after pressing keya; if
not selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be effective temporarily after pressing key .
Guide line
View(V)->Guide line(I) ->Display/Hide(S)
->Left(L)
->Right(R)
->Upper(T)
->Lower(B)
->Center of width (W)
->Center of height(H)
5
Guide line
DISPLAY
Point When "as per grid" and guide line in the grid settings are selected, the reference line is at
priority.
Switch Area
View(V) -> Switch area(A)
Switches display/hide of switch areas having touch switches such as lamp switches and switches.
The switch area represents the effective area as touch switch.
"6-2 About Touch Switches"
Switch area
Scale Display
Zooms (zoom in/zoom out) the display screen. Zoom out the display when viewing an overview of the entire display screen
or when the object is moved over the entire display area, and zoom in the display when the graphic is to be drawn in detail.
Zooming by menu:
Select "View(V)" -> "Zoom display(M)" from the menu, and select the zooming
ratio.
8 types of magnification are available: 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200%, 300%,
5 400%, display all.
Resize according to edit window size when set to display all.
DISPLAY
Reference • Objects are enlarged referenced to the center of the object if the displayed is enlarged with the object selected.
• zooming is also impossible by key + mouse roller
Point It is impossible to scroll edit window when executing the following functions.
• When dragging component and window
• When changing component size by dragging
• When selecting the created component from the menu bar or the tool bar and determining
its size
• When changing switch area
• When coping/pasting a component within the same page No. and determining the pasting
destination
• When apexes are determined for a polygon component
• When selecting cells of a form for a form creation component
• When using the auto-fill function for a form creation component
Edit base
A "base" is the screen that is always displayed when the page is switched.
Select the base as follows when placing graphics or text on bases for editing.
1 Either select "View(V)" -> "Select edit screen(E)" -> "Base(B)" from the menu, or click the button.
The button is pressed, and the base can be edited.
Point The button will remain pressed if the page you are making contains only the base.
Clicking this button again will not change this state.
For details on editing graphics and text you have made, refer to the respective descriptions below.
DISPLAY
A "window" is the screen that is displayed overlapping the base.
To edit windows 1, 2 or 3, select windows 1, 2 or 3 as follows.
For details on editing graphics and text you have made, refer to the respective descriptions below.
5
DISPLAY
Point The screen to overlap will be displayed on the background plane. Please confirm on VT3 if
displayed images differ from actual display.
Reference •When "Overlap other screen" is selected during execution of "Overlap other screen", "Overlap other screen" will be
released.
•When "Overlap other screen" is selected with " Shift " key pressed during execution of "Overlap other screen", the
"Overlap other screen" window will be displayed.
Active Edit
View(V) -> Active edit(Q) +
Label
View(V) -> Label(L) F8
Switches display/hide of labels that are attached to drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/
graphs, and graphic attribute controls are set in the edit window.
Labels are used for displaying or printing a list of drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/
graphs, and graphic attribute controls are set.
Label default settings
Entering labels
Labels can be changed as desired from the default settings. Enter labels as follows:
DISPLAY
Device No.
View(V) -> Device No. (D)
Displays/hides device Nos. set to drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/graphs, and graphic
attribute controls placed in the edit window have been set.
Also, the "Parts settings" window is displayed by double-clicking the device No. displayed in the edit window. In this
window, the type of target (reference) device and device No. can be set.
Memo
View(V) -> Memo(O)
Reference • The lamp and lamp switch will be displayed according to ON/OFF settings on ìnameplateî labels of “attribute”
window.
• Screen attribute control is displayed according to preview display settings on “Screen attribute control”
window.
View Mode
View(V) -> View mode(V)
Displays the screen in the View mode. The View mode is used for confirming the display image of the edited screen
on the VT3 and the output image in printing of the printer form.
5
DISPLAY
Item Description
Save the displayed menu as lattice (BMP) file or JPEG file.
Initial value of the file name is as follows.
Basic menu/local window: <File Name> <Page No (.4 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
Save image on the Example: VT3 menu 0000.bmp
Global window : <File Name> <Global window No (.G+3 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
menu Example: VT3 menu G000.bmp
Form menu : <File Name> <Page No (.P+2 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
Example: VT3 menu_P00.bmp
Ctrl + S may also be used to execute the same operation.
Page No. Calls up a specific existing page No.
Next page Calls up an existing next page.
Previous page Calls up an existing previous page.
Zoom in display Enlarges the display screen to a higher display ratio.
Zoom out display Reduces the display screen to a lower display ratio.
Switch ON display Displays the state in which a switch and lamp switch touch switch is touched.
Individual ON/ The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics
attribute control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the preview display
OFF settings.
Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
Device ON display
devices in graphic attribute control are ON in the edit window.
Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
Device OFF display
devices in graphic attribute control are OFF in the edit window.
Handy display*1 To switch the display of handy series.
Backlight color
Switch to display backlight color.
switch *2
State No. Display after switching the status number of Nstate lamp and Nstate parts.
witches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc.
Display text string ID
Window 1 Switches display/hide of window 1.
Window 2 Switches display/hide of window 2.
Window 3 Switches display/hide of window 3.
Global window Switches display/hide of the global window.
5-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
5-1 About Various Display Functions
Item Description
Displays the "Global window to display" window when the "Settings" button is clicked. Set the
Settings
global window to be displayed.
Exit View mode Closes the "View mode" window.
Item Description
Profile display disable To display the profile of VT3 handhold series.
Profile display enable Not to display the profile of VT3 handhold series.
Back display To display the back view of VT3 handhold series.
Handy display settings To setup the status of hardware switch and LED.
DISPLAY
Button switch options include Red, Yellow, Grey, and None.
Reference If form screen is displayed in View mode when thermal printer is used, the screen is displayed in black
and white colors as in the same case of actual output.
MEMO
5
DISPLAY
Color selection
To set a color, click color selection buttons such as "Line color", "Plane color", "Frame color", "Background color", and
"Text color" ( ) in the part setting window.
Color palette
This is used when setting color models other than the VT3-Q5M/W4M(A)/W4G(A) as the target VT. You can choose
6 your desired colors from total 78 colors in the palette. In addition, you can also adjust colors with RGB (4096 colors).
16-level Palette
Used to set VT3-Q5M (32 levels) in the target VT.
Black-and-white palette
Used to set VT3-Q5M (black and white) in the target VT.
Advanced settings
When the "Advanced" button is clicked, the color palette closes, and the "Line attribute settings" or "Plane attribute
settings" window is displayed.
In the advanced settings, you can make decorative settings such as patterns.
"Line Attribute Settings", page 6-5
"Plane Attribute Settings", page 6-6
BLK
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6 Light dotted
Heavy dot
1 dot wide
2 dot wide
Light dash 1 dot wide
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Advanced settings
The "Line attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button.
In the advanced settings, you can make decorative settings such as patterns and graduations.
"Line Attribute Settings", page 6-5
Touch Switches
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Item Description
Plane color Plane Color*1 Select the color of the plane.
Pattern type Select from 16 pattern types.
Pattern Plane Color 1/Plane
Select the color of the plane.
Color 2 *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*1
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Preview Displays a preview of the plane or background you have set.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Point Only visible touch switches are valid as switches of base screens when window screens are
displayed.
@0000_1
Fonts
Text Codes
Base screen Window screen
Device
Setting of
Number of touch switches Devices
The following table shows the maximum number of touch switches that can be placed in a single screen. Indirect reference
Calculation
Model No. H x V = Max. Number of Touch Switches Number of Display Panel Dots
VT3-X15 64 x 48 = 3072 1024x768 dots
VT3-S12/S10 50 x 38 = 1900 800x600 dots
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R 40 x 30 = 1200 640x480 dots
VT3-V6H(G) 80 x 60 = 4800 640x480 dots
VT3-Q5H(G) 40 x 30 = 1200 320x240 dots
VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/
20 x 15 = 300 320x240 dots
Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 40 x 16 = 640 320x128 dots
Point The above number of touch switches sometimes cannot be placed in a single screen due to screen
restrictions.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Mode The grid size of touch switch The configuration of touch switch
16 dots
16 dots
VT3-X15/
S12/S10/
V10/V8/V7/
16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots
Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/ 16 dots
Q5M(W)/
Q5T(W)A/
Q5M(W)A
Touch switches can be set to any size of integer Take the grid size (16 x 16 dots) in the above
multiples taking the above touch switch as the base diagram as reference to configurate components.
6 size.
2 dots
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
8 dots
VT3-
V6H(G)/
Q5H(G)/ 8 dots
8 dots
W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/ 2 dots
W4G(A) 8 dots
The size of a touch switch in the above figure is the Take the smaller grid
min. size, and size can be changed in vertical and size (2 x 2 dots) than that in the above diagram (8 x 8
horizontal direction in 2-point unit. dots) as reference to configurate components.
Point It is necessary to set switch area manually in "Switch zone change" when the grid size of
switch/indicator switch in VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4 series is set to 16 points or less.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20
Though half of the touch switch protrudes outside of the switch area on its lower side of the screen, the switch area is
valid. Therefore, for a model with a display area of 800 x 600 points, up to
50 (vertical) x 38 (horizontal)=1900
touch switches can be configured on one screen.
"Number of touch switches", page 6-7
Switch Area
The area where a touch switch is set on screen is called the "switch area".
To display a switch area, select "View(V)" -> "Switch area(A)" from the menu.
When a touch switch is placed overlapping another switch in a single screen (base, local window, global window) as
shown in the following figures, the switch in the foreground functions.
Switch 2 Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 1
Point If a switch area is changed when a prompt, alarm, or direction chart is displayed, "Use
Scrollbar Directly" and "Select a Prompt Line Directly" etc. cannot be used. Do not change
the switch area for these parts.
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
The following basic parts and meters/graphs can be set as key entry parts:
• Numeric value display • Alarm Display
• Text Display • Direction Chart
• Message Display • XY Chart
*1 Prompt display, alarm display, direction chart, and XY chart don't have Entry Mode.
*2 With Numeric value display and Text Display, Active Mode can be switched to Display Mode and Entry Mode.
Point Only one key entry part can be set to the Active mode or Entry mode in one screen.
The frame blinks in the Active mode even if the frame color is set to transparent.
The background color becomes the preset color in the Entry mode even if the background
color is set to transparent.
Reference The frame in the Active mode and the cursor blinking speed in the Entry mode can be changed.
System blinking speed
"VT System", page 12-12
Switching modes
There are two ways of switching key entry parts from the Display mode to the Active mode: either by using VT3 touch
switches, or by storing numerical values for key entry order to devices on the currently connected PLC.
Reference "Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed", page 6-11
"Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices", page 6-17
Reference With the VT1, the "Key entry parts (initially active)" function could be set only to base screens.
Base screen
(1) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute settings" window is not marked, all
key entry parts are in the Display mode.
(2) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute settings" window is marked, the key
entry parts having the smallest key entry order after the page is switched and displayed are in the Active mode.
(3) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked for both the base and local windows, and "Initial
display" is set to the local window, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on the local window are
in the Active mode.
(4) When page switching occurs, the Active mode or Entry mode is canceled. 6
Reference • "Initial display" can be set only on the local window. Type
(1) When a window for which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked in the "Screen attribute Text Codes
settings" window is displayed, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on that window are in the Device
Active mode, and the Active mode for key entry parts on the base screen is canceled.
Setting of
(2) When multiple windows to which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked in the "Screen attribute Devices
settings" window are displayed simultaneously, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on the
Indirect reference
frontmost screen are in the Active mode.
(3) When a window for which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is not marked in the "Screen attribute Calculation
settings" window is displayed, the active state before the window is displayed is held.
(4) When the overlapping order of windows is swapped, active states will not change.
(5) Even if a window is moved, the Active mode or Entry mode setting of key entry parts on windows is held.
(6) Even if other windows are turned ON/OFF, the Active mode or Entry mode setting of key entry parts on windows is
held (excluding (1) above).
(7) When a window in which an Active mode or Entry mode key entry part is placed is turned OFF, the Active mode or
Entry mode is canceled.
777 777
END END
To switch to a key entry part in the Active mode when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen, use "Move
entry destination" key entry switches or selection of key entry parts by switches.
777 7
1234 1234
Reference • To return to Display Mode, pressing “OK” to leave the frame empty. Key Entry Parts
Numeric value display Parts
Fonts
"Parts", page 12-21
• Do not change to the Display mode with the "Enter" key pressed. Text Codes
Indirect reference
Calculation
Switching to the Active mode from the Entry mode, or to the Display mode from
the Active mode (canceling entry)
Touching the "Cancel" key entry switch cancels entry or operation, and switches the Entry mode to the Active mode,
or switches the Active mode to the Display mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.
Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart don't have Entry Mode.
1234 1234
The Active mode switches to the Display mode when a key entry part for which "Select by switch" set to ON is in the
Active mode and that key entry part is touched.
"Select by switch" ON (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)
END END
Point When the following is set on alarm displays, message displays, and trend graph parts,
attention must be paid when changing the Active mode to the Display mode. For details, refer
to the settings for each respective part.
Alarm displays : Select message line directly, and operate scroll bar directly
"9-4 Setting Alarm Displays"
Message displays : Select message line directly, and operate scroll bar directly
"9-3 Setting Message Displays"
Trend graphs : Operate scroll bar directly
"10-3 Setting Trend images"
Fonts
Text Codes
Touching "Move entry destination
(Display mode) (+1)" sets the key entry order = 2 text Device
Machine A
Machine B display to the Active mode. Setting of
Devices
(Display mode) 12345 CANCEL ENTER
END
Indirect reference
Frame blinks Text display
(Active mode) Calculation
Point • Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction
Chart, and XY Chart. If there are multiple objects having the same key entry order on
screen, the key entry order of these objects is not guaranteed. To correct the key entry
order, change by selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)".
"Change Key Entry Order", page 4-21
• The number of key entry parts that can be placed in a single page is restricted. If key entry
objects are placed on screens exceeding this limit, an error will occur when the data check
is performed. If an error occurs, reduce the number of key entry parts.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
"12-9 Data Check"
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
In the above figure, the message display in the Display mode (entry disabled state) is immediately switched to the
Active mode regardless of the key entry order by touching it directly as the "Select by switch" checkbox is marked.
Text display in the Active mode is switched to the Display mode.
1 Either select "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "Other(O)" from the menu, or select "Other" from
"VT system settings" on the "System Settings" tab on the workspace.
2 Mark the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox, and set the target word device.
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6 12 to 14
11 :Global window ID6
12 :Global window ID7
Reserved (unusable)
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
6
Creating PLC ladder programs
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1: Window 1 Fonts
2: Window 2
Text Codes
3: Window 3
4: Interrupt window Device
[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "100" currently placed on the base screen to the
Active mode (Decimal numerical value "100" is expressed as "64(H)" in Hexadecimal.)
# 0064
DM0000
[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "10" currently placed on window 3 to the Active
mode (Decimal numerical value "10" is expressed as "A(H)" in Hexadecimal.)
"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.
6
****
ޓMOVޓ
#8000
DM0000
[Example] To switch to the Active mode by touching a key entry part to which "Select by switch" is set
No Active mode key entry parts Active mode Color and Line
Type
Touch Switches
Device
Setting of
Devices
Write
Indirect reference
Specify (PLCψVT) 8000(H) 0001(H) 0001(H)
Calculation
A
Write
A When the numerical value is written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device from the PLC after
in the figure above, mode switching by PLC device is given priority, and the mode written on the PLC is
switched to immediately after the Active mode is switched to by selection by switches. For this reason,
mode switching by touch switches will no longer be possible if numerical values are continuously
written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device when mode switching is performed on the PLC
device.
No Active mode key entry parts Active mode Reset to Display mode
Write Read
Specify 8000(H)
8000(H) 0001(H) 8000(H)
(PLC->VT)
6 Notify
Write Write
To prevent mode switching by touch switches from being disabled when switching the mode by PLC devices, write
the numerical values to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device when the write conditions are satisfied.
[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "10" currently placed on the base screen to the
Active mode (Decimal numerical value "10" is expressed as "A(H)" in Hexadecimal.)
"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.
Outline fonts
• Can be used for outline texts and switch, lamp labels.
• Outline fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
Bitmap fonts
• Bitmap font can be used in bitmap text and key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message
6
displays, alarm displays, and scales on meters/ graphs)
• Bitmap fonts can be set only in integer multiples of 16 dots.
• When bitmap fonts are enlarged, edges appear rougher or more jagged.
Stroke fonts
• Stroke fonts can be used in key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm
displays).
• Stroke fonts can be set in 1-dot increments within the range 24 to 96 dots.
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
• About 8,000 characters as defined in ASCII/Shift JIS Classes 1 and 2 can be displayed.
Windows Fonts
• Stroke fonts can be used in key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm
displays). To display a text, its font should be registered. If an unregistered font is used, a bitmap font is displayed. Color and Line
• The display picture ID can be used in the title bar. Type
• Max 64 fonts are available. A font with a different name or font size will be treated as a different font. A font with a Device
different color and style will not be treated as a different font.
Setting of
Devices
Image Fonts
Indirect reference
Reference Stroke fonts are provided by the Chinese JIS Code Table (JIS First-level Code Table and JIS Second-
level Code Table)
Kanji JIS Code Tables can be browsed by selecting "Help" and "Text code table(SJIS)" from Menu.
Point • Compared with bitmap fonts, stroke fonts may appear different in places.
• Text is not displayed as a stroke font when making screens.
• Stroke fonts cannot be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Reference • Respective text code tables can be browsed by selecting from Menu in the following order:
"Help(H)" -> "Text code table(SJIS)"
"Help(H)" -> "Text code table(UNICODE)"
• VT1 can use ASCII and Shift JIS code.
• When VT3 is used within China, it is necessary to transfer corresponding GB2312 fonts to the VT3
unit.
"System Program", page 13-17
6 About UNICODE
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
UNICODE is a new character code made to unify the major character codes throughout the world into one.
Alphabet characters, symbols, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, and other languages can be used. Note that some text
codes are not available.
You can choose a supporting UNICODE in the steps "Help (H)" -> "Text Code Table (UNICODE)". Check these text
codes before use.
Reference With UNICODE, Kanji characters used in Japan, China, Taiwan, and Korea are unified. "Unified" here
means that the same code is assigned to Kanji characters whose shape is judged to be the same.
For this reason, the shape sometimes differs in Japanese fonts and with fonts from other countries.
For example, with the character "gu", the South-East corner in the enclosure at the top is inverted
horizontally in the character that is in current use in China.
To use UNICODE, please first display it on the screen for confirmation.
Point All UNICODE text is expressed in two bytes. (Even 1-byte UNICODE text is expressed using two
bytes.)
Fonts
Series-connected with PLC V: TPLC1: N-connection (Ethernet, thermoregulator, etc.)
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
<Device Type> <Device No.>_ <PLC_A/B> <Device Type> <Device No.>_ <Station No.>_ <PLC_A/B㧪
Reference The displays of an internal device and Link device don’t include <Station No.>and <PLC_A/B>.
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
For example, when DM0000-01 is set to the lamp bit device of a lamp, the lamp lights (in the case of an A contact)
when the state of bit 1 of DM0000 becomes 1 (ON).
Cautions when the device No. is specified in the format in (2) and word device bit specification is used
When DM0000-07 is turned ON by a touch switch
Serial communications
0 1 2 3 4 5
KV-16AR
5ch
500 501 502 504
PLC
24V-OUT-OV C3 C4 503 505 OUT
VT3 Series
PLC DM0000
The value of DM0000 is read from the PLC in word units.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VT3 DM0000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
If DM0000-15 or
6
DM0000-14 turns ON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VT3 DM0000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PLC DM0000
In the case of a PLC on which device Nos. are displayed in the format in (2), the VT3 reads up to 16 bits of data Touch Switches
collectively in a single operation from the PLC, changes the bits specified in the word device, and writes the 16 bits
Key Entry Parts
collectively to the PLC as the data format is not supported in the word device bit specification. For this reason, even if
Fonts
there is a change in the value of the word device the previous state is sometimes returned to.Pay attention to this fact
when using the VT3. Text Codes
Device
Two devices are provided for VT3 internal memory, VT internal devices and VT link devices. The following table Indirect reference
Reference • VT link devices have been newly added from VT2. In VT3, functions of devices are extended to bar
code readers.
• VT3-KL communications using VT link devices
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 7 KL Link"
VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices share common memory. Likewise, VT link bit devices and VT
link word devices also share common memory.
With VT internal devices and VT link devices, a 5-digit device No. is set to bit devices, and a 4-digit device No. is set
to word devices.
The following shows the relationship between bit devices and word devices in VT internal devices and VT link
6 devices.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MW001C
MBO01C0
MBO01C1
MBO01C2
MBO01C3
MBO01C4
MBO01C5
MBO01C6
MBO01C7
MBO01C8
MBO01C9
MBO01CA
MBO01CB
MBO01CC
MBO01CD
MBO01CE
MBO01CF
VT Internal Device
MW0070 to MW007B Numerical value display saved data (UNICODE) Touch Switches
MW007C to MW007D The lower limit of value display *5
Key Entry Parts
MW007E to MW007F The upper limit of value display *5
MW0080 to MW00BF Text display saved data (UNICODE) Fonts
MW00D3 PLC _A station No. (16 to 31) connection setup Indirect reference
MW00D4 to MW00D7 Reserved
Calculation
MW00D8 PLC _B station No. (0 to 15) connection status
MW00D9 PLC _B station No. (0 to 15) connection setup
MW00DA PLC _B station No. (16 to 31) connection status
MW00DB PLC _B station No. (16 to 31) connection setup
MW00DC to MW00FF Reserved
Internal Free Device
MW0100 to MW0FFF Free
(3840 words)
Point • VT internal devices cannot be manipulated (read/written) directly from a PLC. Internal
devices, however, can be read-out/read-in in the device transmission and PLC data folders.
"12-6 Device Transfer"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
• All VT internal devices are cleared (reset to zero) when the VT3 is turned OFF or screen data is sent to the
VT3.
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
Reference On the VT1, "VT internal free device 512 words + VT internal special device 256 words" were
available.
On the VT3, however, "VT internal free device 3840 words + VT internal special device 256 words"
are available.
R/W
Device No. Description Data Format Range
Attribute
General serial /Ethernet-specific system
MW0000 to MW000F - - -
storage areas (MT compatible mode)*1
MW0010 Date/Time "year" Unsigned decimal Lower two digits: 0 to 99 R/W
MW0011 Date/Time "month" Unsigned decimal 1 to 12 R/W
MW0012 Date/Time "day" Unsigned decimal 1 to 31 R/W
MW0013 Date/Time "day of week (number)" Unsigned decimal 0 to 6 R/W
MW0014 to MW0015 Date/Time "day of week (Kanji character)" Shift JIS code Sun to Sat R
6
MW0016 to MW0017 Date/Time "day of week (English character)" ASCII code Sun to Sat R
MW0018 Date/Time "hours" Unsigned decimal 0 to 23 R/W
MW0019 Date/Time "minutes" Unsigned decimal 0 to 59 R/W
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
*1 General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (MT compatible mode): in VT1, the system storage
area for general serial communications.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (VT mode) : the newly added mode in VT2.
To use VT-command ASCII/Binary mode, select either of these modes in "System memory area" in the VT system
settings, and set the system memory area.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (VT mode): the initial number is always MW0040.
Details about the General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas
Chapter 23 General Serial/Ethernet Communication, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections
Manual.
Point • When using the general serial/Ethernet communications, do not use internal special
devices other than the general serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas,
internal timer, numerical value display memory, and text display memory.
• Reserved zone cannot be used.
*2 For details, read the following. In addition, you can also refer to additional PLC connection setups • connection
6
status in the VT main unit system.
Touch Switches
Device No. Description 1 (ON) 0(OFF)
Key Entry Parts
MB001C0 Printing Printer unusable Printer usable
MB001C1 Reserved - - Fonts
MB001C6 Page switching mode Bit page switching Switch by page switching (leading No. +8)
Indirect reference
Memory Card is inserted in Memory Either the Memory Card is not inserted
MB001C7 Memory Card usable state Card slot, and Memory Card slot cover in the Memory Card slot, or the Calculation
is closed. Memory Card slot cover is open.
MB001C8 Window 1 display state Window 1 display Window 1 hide
MB001C9 Window 2 display state Window 2 display Window 2 hide
MB001CA Window 3 display state Window 3 display Window 3 hide
MB001CB Window 1 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CC Window 2 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CD Window 3 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CE Reserved - -
MB001CF Interrupt window display state Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window
6 MB001DF Reserved - -
VT2 MultiLink Communication errors: only for the master (MW00C1) Read only.
MB00D00
PLC_A Station No. 0 PLC
connection status
Station No. 0 PLC is linked with
VT3
Station No. 0 PLC is not linked
with VT3 6
PLC_A Station No. 1 PLC Station No. 1 PLC is linked with Station No. 1 PLC is not linked
MB00D01
PLC_A Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Status (MW00D2) Read Only Calculation
PLC_B Station No. 0 PLC Station No. 0 PLC is linked with Station No. 0 PLC is not linked
MB00D80
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 1 PLC Station No. 1 PLC is linked with Station No. 1 PLC is not linked
MB00D81
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 2 PLC Station No. 2 PLC is linked with Station No. 2 PLC is not linked
MB00D82
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 14 PLC Station No. 14 PLC is linked with Station No. 14 PLC is not linked
MB00D8E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 15 PLC Station No. 15 PLC is linked with Station No. 15 PLC is not linked
MB00D8F
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Status (MW00DA) Read Only
There are two types of VT internal free devices, VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices. Text Codes
The internal bit devices are the devices that are assigned to MB. The internal word devices are the devices that are Device
assigned to MW.
Setting of
Devices
VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices share common memory.
Indirect reference
A 5-digit device No. is set to VT internal bit devices, and a 4-digit device No. is set to VT internal word devices.
Calculation
Link Device
VT link devices are for communicating with external equipment. 4352 words LNW0000 to LNW10FF are provided for
VT link devices.
6 LNW0090 2(LNB00902)
3 to F
Receive lamp R
(LNB00903 to Reserved -
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
LNB0090F)
LNW0000 to
LNW10FF LNW0091 to LNW00BF Reserved Reserved -
Bar code data
LNW00C0 reading length R
(byte)
Bar code reading
0(LNB00C10) R/W
end notice bit
LNW00C1 1 to F For bar codes
(LNB00C11 to Reserved -
LNB00C1F)
Bar code data
LNW00C2 to LNW10C1 storage area R
(4096 characters)
LNW10C2 to LNW10FF Reserved Reserved -
Reference • In VT3, link devices are extended to LNW10FF. (in VT2, they are extended to LNW00FF)
• VT3-KL communications using VT link devices
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 7 KL Link"
Point • VT link devices cannot be manipulated (read/written) directly from a PLC. Internal devices,
however, can be read-out/read-in in the device transmission and PLC data folders.
"12-6 Device Transfer"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
• When the VT3 power is turned off or screen data is transmitted to VT3, link devices are
cleared out (0).
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
• Reserved zone cannot be used.
Use VT link devices having the "R" attribute only for reading.
PLC devices
6
Indirect reference
Worksheet cell
Numerical constant
PLC devices
Color and Line
Type
Touch Switches
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Item Description
Num: Numerical constant Select this item to set constants.
Select this item to set devices (data memory, I/O relay, auxiliary relay, timer, counter,
PLC: PLC device
etc.) for the PLC to connect and VT3 internal device/link devices.
Indirect: Indirect reference Select this item to set indirect references.
Calc: Calcuration Select this item to set calculations.
Cell: Worksheet cell Select this item to set worksheet cells.
For details on each item, refer to the explanations on the following pages.
Setting Methods
1 Select the desired items to set from the device setting field.
The items selected in the device setting field are displayed.
2 When "Num: Numerical constant" is selected, enter the numerical value (constant).
When "PLC device", "Ind: Indirect reference", "Calc: Calculation", or "Cell: Worksheet cell" is selected, click the
"Browse" button or calculation formula to the side of the device setting field.
The "Device settings" window is displayed.
PLC device
This item describes an instance where the data type is PLC device.
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6 Data type
Item
Displays "PLC device".
Description
PLC No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1:N) connection.
PLC device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Data length Select the data length from "1 word/2 words".
Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD/Hex/Float".
Mode Select the mode from "A contact/B contact".
Number of data Set the number of devices as an ascending number from 1 to be used.
Device explanation Displays an explanation, for example, of the input range of devices to be set.
Internal device help For internal devices of VT, see the PDF file.
Point When MlultiTalk is used, internal devices and link devices are only displayed in PLC A.
The items that are displayed vary according to the parts that are set.
Item Description
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1:N) connection.
PLC device Set the target word device.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, the text string is handled as a UNICODE text string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper byte and lower byte of the text string
Swap upper/lower bytes
to be stored is swapped.
Indirect reference
This item describes an instance where the data type is indirect reference.
Normal When MultiTalk is used
An "Indirect reference" is a method of adding the content (value) of an index device to the device No. of a base
device to specify the device No. targeted for processing.
6
Calculation
This item describes an instance where the data type is calculation.
Normal When MultiTalk is used
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Set the calculation formula using variables and operators. The result of the calculation formula is reflected in the
Device
preset part.
Fro details of calculation, see Setting of
Devices
"6-9 Calculation"
Indirect reference
Calculation
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Item Description
Data type Displays "Indirect reference".
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
Station No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1 : N) connection.
Base device Base device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Hex/Float".
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
Station No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1 : N) connection.
Index device
Index device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Displays an explanation, for example, of the input range of devices
Device explanation
to be set.
Base device
Value of index device Reference device
Device Number of words
1 0 DM00000
1 1 DM00001
1 2 DM00002
DM00000
2 0 DM00001/DM00000
2 1 DM00003/DM00002
2 2 DM00005/DM00004
As we can see from the above table, the address is offset based on the number of the base device.
To offset the address only based on the value of the index device and not based on the number of words of the base
device, select "Resource(R)" -> "VT Main Unit Setup (S)" -> "Parts (B)" from the menu.
6
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Base device
Value of index device Reference device Indirect reference
Device Number of words
1 0 DM00000 Calculation
1 1 DM00001
1 2 DM00002
DM00000
2 0 DM00001/DM00000
2 1 DM00002/DM00001
2 2 DM00003/DM00002
The values of 100 data memories from DM00000 to DM00099 are displayed sequentially five memories at a time on
five numerical value displays.
Display example
6
DM00000 10000
DM00001 10002
DM00002 10004
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
DM00003 10006
DM00004 10008
DM00005 10010
10000 DM00006 10012
10002
DM00095 10190
10004
DM00096 10192
10006
DM00097 10194
10008 DM00098 10196
DM00099 10198
10000 to 10008 :Numerical value display (called numerical value displays (1) to (5) in order from the top)
:Switch (word set: data addition)
:Switch (word set: data subtraction)
Touching the / switch increments/decrements the device No. five Nos. at a time and displays the numerical value.
In the above example, the values of the index device are added/subtracted five values at a time each time a word set
function switch is touched to change the device (reference word device in the numerical value display) that is
referenced.
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
DM5
10 DM5
1234
DM10
DM10
Read 5678
DM10 5678
• When using indirect references, do not set the value of an index device that will exceeds the allowable device
range (device range stored internally on the PLC).
• If indirect referencing fails, the previously referenced value is displayed, and the message "Reference Device
Address Error" is displayed in the error display at the bottom left of the screen.
• If indirect referencing fails for the first time, the value of the base device is displayed, and the message "Reference
Device Address Error" is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
• If the value of an index device for a part to which an indirect reference has been set is changed, and writing is
performed to the reference device in the time up till when that changed is recognized by the VT3 (time is required
for the VT3 to recognize changed values in index devices as communications is performed serially between the
VT3 and the PLC), writing cannot be performed to the correct reference destination. (In other words, changes in
the index device values are not reflected.)
For example,
Switch (1): Switch to which word set function "indirect reference" is set
Switch (2): Switch to which word set function (changes value of index device of switch (1)) is set
The change on switch (2) is not reflected even if switch (1) is touched immediately after switch (2) is touched.
• Up to 64 indirect reference devices may be located per screen.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Type of Calculation
Calculations are categorized into the following three types:
• For regular screens: Single-number/read calculations
• For regular screens: Multiple-number/read calculations
• For regular screens: Single-number/read calculations
For details on calculations, refer to the following description.
Read calculations
These are used in reference device settings, for example, for parts or graphic attribute controls.
The result of having performed a calculation on the value of a PLC device is used as the value of reference devices in parts
and graphic attribute controls, for example. 6
Read calculation setting example
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Indirect reference
Calculation
Write calculations
Write calculations are used only on "Write word device" settings in numerical value display.
The result of performing a calculation on a numerical value entered on a numeric keypad on a numerical keypad is
written to a PLC device.
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
There are two types of read calculations, single- and multiple-number, depending on the number of data items.
Only single-number calculations apply to write calculations.
When the device setting of each part is either a single word or a single bit, the calculation is a single-number calculation,
and when the device setting is a multiplenumber word, the calculation is a multiple-number calculation.
Single-number calculations
Used in the operations of the parts (not including Direction Chart, XY Chart) and graphical attribute controls.
For example, in a numerical value display
The result of A x B is
Value of PLC device: A Calculation: A x B
displayed on the VT3.
Multiple-number calculations
Only used in the operations of direction charts and XY charts.
In trend graphs (real time)
Setting Calculation
This section describes how to set calculations.
How to open the "Device settings" window (calculation)
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Indirect reference
Value entered by numeric keypad in (single-number/write calculation) numerical value display
Calculation
Operator
6
Classifications Functions *1 Symbol
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6 • If the variable in the calculation formula contains even one float (real numbers), the precision becomes Float.
• If the variable in the calculation formula does not contain a float (real numbers), but contains even one item of
signed data, the precision becomes 2-word signed decimal.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
There are other rules in addition to the above for handling bits in calculations.
Point A calculation formula conversion error will occur if calculation formulas are described in a
data format that is not supported.
Data format (1) (data format set for each variable in calculation formula, data format of parts to which
calculations are set)
• 1-word unsigned decimal
• 1-word signed decimal
• 1-word BCD
• 2-word unsigned decimal
• 2-word signed decimal
• 2-word BCD
• Float real number
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
Data format (2) (calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on VT3)
• 2-word unsigned decimal
• 2-word signed decimal
• Float
Conversion rules
Either of the following rules is applied during data conversion.
(1) Data format (1) Data format (2)
(data format set to each variable in calculations) ->(calculation precision when calculations are processed
internally on VT3)
Conversion rule (1) when referencing data (variables) of data format different from calculation
precision
How to handle values of variables in calculation processing
Calculation Precision
Data Format of Variable 2-word unsigned 2-word signed
Float
*1 A calculation error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data format.
Point Pay attention to the effective digits when the calculation precision is a Float.
Conversion rule (2) when the calculation precision differs from the data format of the write word
device
How the result of calculation is handled on write word devices
Calculation Precision
written to a word device 2-word unsigned
2-word signed decimal
Data Format decimal Float
*1 A calculation error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data format.
*2 Incrementing of digits is ignored when 9999 (99999999 when manipulating two words) is exceeded.
*3 A calculation error occurs when the result of calculation is a minus number.
The result is as follows depending on the preset calculation precision and data format of write word devices.
Example 1 When the calculation precision is 2-word unsigned decimal, and the setting of the data format of the
write word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result 100000 (decimal) = 186A0 (Hex)
-> Write result 34464 (decimal) = 86A0 (Hex)
Example 2 When the calculation precision is 2-word signed decimal, and the setting of the data format of the
write word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result -40000 (decimal) = FFFF63C0 (Hex)
-> Write result 25536 (decimal) = 63C0 (Hex)
Example 3 When the calculation precision is Float, and the setting of the data format of the write word device in
the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result 10.254
-> Write result 10
6
When the data format of the write word device is converted to from the calculation precision,
Reference The result is as follows depending on the preset calculation precision and data format of reference
word devices.
Example 1 When the calculation precision is 2-word signed decimal, and the setting of the data Color and Line
format of the reference word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned Type
Example 2 When the calculation precision is Float, and the setting of the data format of the Fonts
reference word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal Text Codes
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
Cautions in Calculations
10 / 3 = 3 10 % 3 = 1
-10 / 3 = -3 -10 % 3 = -1
10 / (-3) = -3 10 % (-3) = 1
-10 / (-3) = 3 -10 % (-3) = -1
0-1= 4294967295
2-word unsigned decimal 4294967295+1= 0
1/0= Division by Zero
-2147483648-1= 2147483647
2-word signed decimal 2147483647+1= -2147483648
1/0= Division by Zero
-3.40282347x1038- Calculation Error The allowable numerical
3.40282347x1038+ Calculation Error value range is exceeded.
Float real number -1.17549x10-38+ Calculation Error The value was considerably
1.17549x10-38- Calculation Error small close to 0.
1/0= Division by Zero
To only display the calculation result on the VT3, there is no need to unmark the key entry checkbox and set the next
write word device, set as follows:
Alternatively, to enter value "3" resulting from unit conversion on the numeric keypad after touching that numerical
value display, and then set the value of PLC device: DM00000 to (3000)
Write word device : DM00000 (Set also the data length and data format.)
Calculation
Calculation formula
: Mark this checkbox.
: X *1000 (inverse of previous calculation) 6
Touch Switches
Fonts
Text Codes
Device
Setting of
Devices
Indirect reference
Calculation
6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS
PLC
Polygons
Circles/Ellipses
Arc -
Fan
1 Either select from the Menu in order, or click the button on the tool bar.
• Line : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Lines"
• Continuous lines : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Continuous lines"
• Rectangles : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Rectangles"
•
7
Polygons : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Polygons"
• Circles/Ellipses : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Circles/Ellipses"
• Arc : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Arc"
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Setting Graphics
Set graphic attributes such as line type, line color and screen color for drawn graphics in the "Property" window.
1 Click the button on the tool bar, and select the graphic whose attribute is to be set.
The selection frame is displayed on the perimeter of the selected graphic.
Also, the "Property" window is displayed.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, an outer frame line is attached when drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/
ellipses, arcs, and fans.
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*3 The start angle and end angle are set as follows:
Arc
(Setting example)
End
angle
End angle 45° Start angle45°
0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 315°
Fan
(Setting example)
7 End
angle
End angle 45° Start angle 45
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 315
Image Setting
Parts(P) -> Graphics(F) -> Image(I)
Bitmap text
Reference By draging & dropping a file in an Edit screen of VT STUDIO, it becomes a figure part which can be set.
7 STYLE
Item
Select the style of the decorative frame.
Description
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left. Graphic attribute
Alignment
controls
Align center Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the center.
Align right Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the right.
Even spacing Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character spacing.
Enter the text string to be placed in the Edit window. Up to 256 1-byte characters or 128 2-byte
Text string(T) characters can be entered to a text string. When text is wrapped at the end of the line, the line
feed code is counted as a single 1-byte character.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 Only "0º/90º" can be selected when VT is VT2 series.
Effect
Select "Effect type", and select text decoration from the displayed examples.
7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Item Description
EFFECT TYPE Select the effect type from "Bordering/Shadow/3D/...".
PREVIEW Displays a preview image of the outline text at the selected effect.
To further change the text color, background and special effects from the displayed examples, set the desired items
on the "Settings" tab.
Setting
Decorative frames
Sample Display the color-filling result of the figure.
Outline text
Type Select from available color types.
Bitmap text
Background color
Select the background color.
Background
*1 Memo
Graphic attribute
controls
Color settings *1 This setting is the same as "Color settings" for "Text".
Set the color of the special effect such as "Frame color/ Shadow color/...".*2
Effect color *1
Special effects
Degree of effect Enter the degree of special effect such as "Frame width/ Depth/...".*2
7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Item Description
Set the size of text strings in the vertical direction to multiples of 1/2X or within the range 1X to
Size(V)
8X.
Size(H) Set the size of text strings in the horizontal direction to multiples within the range 1X to 8X.
Rotate(R) Rotates text strings clockwise by (0, 90, 180 or 270 ) deg.
Text color(C)*1 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Decoration(D)
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color(W)
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Enter the text string to be placed in the Edit window. Up to 64 1-byte characters or 32 2-byte
Text string(T) characters can be entered to a text string. When text is wrapped at the end of the line, the line
feed code is counted as a single 1-byte character.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Setting Memos
Parts(P) -> Text(T) -> Memo(C)
Graphic attribute
Point When the figure data edited from "PC->VT Data Transmit" is transmitted to VT3, Memo is also controls
7
Arcs - -
Line Art Graphic - -
Fans
Paint Graphic -
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Bitmap text - -
Standard - -
Outline text
Logo *1 - - -
Image *1 - - -
*1 Only display/hide blink functions.
Marking a checkbox enables a graphic control. Set the graphic control referring to the following descriptions.
Point Graphic attribute controls cannot be set when multiple objects are selected, or drawn
graphics are grouped with switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/ graphs.
Item Description
You can confirm the display state when the reference bit device is ON for drawn graphics for
ON
which graphic attribute control is set.
Preview display *1
You can confirm the display state when the reference bit device is OFF for drawn graphics for
OFF
which graphic attribute control is set.
The label "L_****" is automatically assigned as the default to drawn graphics for which graphic
Label attribute control is set. Correct this label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number
starting from 0000 is appended.)
*1 The display state of "Individual Device ON/OFF Display" depends on its ON/OFF setting. This doesn't include
the blinking control and position control.
Blink control
Makes the drawn graphic blink when the reference bit device is ON (OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).
Image
Decorative frames
Outline text
Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit Bitmap text
Reference bit device *1
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Memo
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact: Blinks drawn graphics when the reference bit device is ON and does not blink them Graphic attribute
Mode when the device is OFF. controls
B contact: Blinks drawn graphics when the reference bit device is OFF and does not blink them
when the device is ON.
Blink type Select the blink type from "Reverse color", "Display/ hide" or "Change color".
Blink speed *2 Select the blink speed "Standard/Speed 1/Speed 2".
Set blink color 1 and 2 when "Blink type" is set to "Change color".
When the plane color (line color) under the plane attributes (line attributes) in the "Property" window
Color 1
for the drawn graphic is set to pattern (Advanced "Plane attribute settings (line attribute settings)"):
To colors 1 and 2 set the colors for changing plane colors 1 and 2 (line colors 1 and 2) that are
set (as line attribute settings) in the respective plane attribute settings.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 The speed 1/speed 2 values for "Blink speed" can be changed in the "VT system".
When the color is reversed and blinks, the VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/
W4G(A) is fixed to standard (0.4 s).
"VT System", page 12-12
*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-13
7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls
Blink type
Reverse color
In the case of a line graphic
Color set as the line attribute Inverted color of color set as the
color in the "Property" window line attribute color in the
"Property" window
7
in the "Property" window line attribute color in the
"Property" window
Display/hide
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Change color
In the case of a line graphic
Color set as the line attribute Color set in the "Graphic attribute
color in the "Property" window control" window
Point Software blinking is not synchronized with hardware blinking. For example, if a drawn
graphic to which a color reverse blink is set is placed on the same screen together with a
drawn graphic to which color change blinking is set, the cycle that these graphics will blink
will not match.
Display control
Displays the drawn graphic when the reference bit device is ON (OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).
The drawn graphic is hideed when the reference bit device is OFF (ON when the Reference mode is a B contact).
Image
Decorative frames
*1 Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
Reference bit device Bitmap text
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced. Memo
Mode A contact: When the reference bit device is ON, displayed; when OFF, hideed. Graphic attribute
B contact: When the reference bit device is OFF, displayed; when ON, hideed. controls
The line type and line color of the drawn graphic can be changed and displayed when the reference bit device is ON
(OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).
7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
Reference bit device *1
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact: Changes and displays the line type and line color when the reference bit device is
Mode ON and does not change them when the device is OFF.
B contact: Changes and displays the line type and line color when the reference bit device is
OFF and does not change them when the device is ON.
Line type *2 Select the line type.
Line color *2 Select the line color.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
The plane color of the drawn graphic can be changed and displayed when the reference bit device is ON (OFF when the
Reference mode is a B contact).
Outline text
Bitmap text
Memo
Graphic attribute
controls
The text color and text decoration of bitmap text can be changed and displayed when the reference bit device is ON
(OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).
7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control.
Reference bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact : Text attributes are controlled and displayed when the reference bit device is ON and
Mode are not changed when the device is OFF.
B contact : Text attributes are controlled and displayed when the reference bit device is OFF and
are not changed them when the device is ON.
Text color*2 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Text shadow color*2
The settings are the same as "Text color".
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Position control
When this checkbox is marked, the drawn graphic is moved and displayed at the point specified by the reference
word device.
There are two ways of specifying position, direct specification and point specification. By direct specification, you
specify the relative coordinates of the position that the graphic moves to By point specification, you specify the No. of
the preset location.
Drawn graphics are moved referenced to the top left.
Running
Rectangle Circle/ellipse Bitmap text
Position
Directly specify the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3's screen as a relative coordinate in the X-, Y- or XY-axis.
7
Image
Decorative frames
Outline text
Item Description
Bitmap text
Specify position Selects "Position" as the position specify method.
Sets the control method of the display position for drawn graphics. Memo
[Example] To directly specify the display position of the X- and Y-axis relative coordinates by XY-axis control
(data format: signed decimal)
The figure below shows the display on the VT3 screen.
Position on
VT3 screen
(2) (520,220)
Position on
VT3 screen
(3) (40,400)
7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
To move the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3 screen to location (2), write the following to
the coordinate specification device:
At X-axis, 520 - 240 = 280 (X-axis relative coordinate)
Y axis, write 220-50=170 (Y axis relative coordinate) to the coordinate specified device.
Next, to move the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3 screen to location (3), write the following
to the coordinate specification device:
At X-axis, 40 - 240 = - 200 (X-axis relative coordinate)
Y axis, write 400-50=350 (Y axis relative coordinate) to the coordinate specified device.
The following table shows the relationship between the display position of drawn graphics on the VT3
screen and the value of the coordinate specification device:
When the data format of the coordinate specification device is signed (±) decimal, minus numbers are
written in 2's complement format.
About input range and display range in direct specification (conversion of values)
Values written to the coordinate specification device can be converted and drawn graphics moved by setting the input
range and display range.
Item Description
Input range Range of value to be written to coordinate specified device
Display range Range in which the display of the graphic is moved on the VT3 screen
[Example] When the value of the coordinate specification device for the X- and Y-axis relative coordinates has
changed within 0 to 1000 (data format: signed decimal)
The display of the drawn graphic moves in the X-axis from left to right from 0 to 300 (relative
coordinates).
7
(X,Y) (X+300,Y)
0 1000
Graphics
Input range
Image
Conversion
Display range Decorative frames
Bitmap text
The upper and lower limit values of the input range and display range can be set as desired within the
ranges shown in the following table: Memo
When the data format of the coordinate specification device is signed (±) decimal, minus numbers are Graphic attribute
controls
written in 2's complement format.
Item Range
Unsigned decimal 0to65535
X input range Signed decimal -32768to+32767
BCD 0to9999
X display range -799to+799
Unsigned decimal 0to65535
Y input range Signed decimal -32768to+32767
BCD 0to9999
Y display range -799to+799
Point
The display position of a drawn graphic on the VT3's screen is specified as a preset point.
7 Item Description
Specify position Select "Point" as the position specify method.
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Set the number (1 to 16) of points by which the position of drawn graphics is controlled on
Number of points
screen.
Reference word device Set the reference word device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference
*1 bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
Point coordinates Displays the coordinates of the set point No. Coordinates can be entered directly.
Delete Deletes specified points.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
The following table shows the relationship between the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3
screen and the value of the reference word device:
Image
Point How drawn graphics to which position controls are set are displayed cannot be confirmed in
VTSTUDIO. Decorative frames
Outline text
Bitmap text
Memo
Graphic attribute
controls
MEMO
7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
Setting Nameplates
Point The nameplates of lamp switches and lamps are not displayed even if screen data is sent to a
VT3 that is not communicating with a PLC.
With lamp switches and lamps whose nameplate character string changes by the ON/OFF
state of the lamp bit device, nameplates are displayed only when communications between
the VT3 and PLC is established.
Nameplates can be displayed in the center or at the top, bottom, left and right of switches, lamp switches and lamps.
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Reference When setting the nameplate of lamp switches and lamps, an image of the lamp in an ON/OFF state is
displayed at ON/OFF on the "Nameplate" tab in the "Property" window.
Mode: A contact
Style when lamp bit device is OFF Style when lamp bit device is ON
Mode: B contact
Style when lamp bit device is ON Style when lamp bit device is OFF
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color(N)*2
8
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the left.
font size and kerning of nameplates may differ with each switch/lamp. The font size may not Lamp switch
be appropriate when the nameplate position is set to a position other than the center or
depending on the style. Lamp
N state lamp
Reference • Setting the default font name and size N state parts
"Option Settings", page 4-22
cross-key
• To enable entry of nameplate character strings, select the switch or lamp and press the Enter key.
Function switch
Item Description
OFF(F)/ON(O)*1 Switches the nameplate settings between OFF and ON.
OFF=ON*1 Sets the nameplate at OFF/ON switching of lamp bit devices to the same state.
Copy ON/Copy OFF*1 Copies the nameplate setting when ON or OFF.
8 *1
Open(N) Displays the "Open Image" window for selecting the image file to place in the nameplate.
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
Specifies dithering. Dithering is used to compensate the boundary between colors when the
Dithering(D)
number of display colors has been reduced to the VT3 display colors (32768).
Gray scale(G) Converts the color information of image files to gray scale.
Displays a preview of the image after substraction color (4096), dithering or gray scale
After conversion
processing.
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame
Frame width(F)
when the image is resized.
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently. This can be
Move(M)
easily moved to the location saving the current part.
Setting Style
The style of switches, lamp switches and lamps can be changed.
Item Description
Selects the theme/style (/type) of lamp switch.
8
Style(S)
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
Lamp switch
Lamp
N state lamp
N state parts
cross-key
Function switch
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale
Gray scale(G)
image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D)
between colors stand out when substraction color is performed.
8 Frame width(F)
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame
when the image is resized.
If you click this button, a preview of the image after substraction color to the VT3's displays
After conversion
color (32768) colors, dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently. This can be
Move(M)
easily moved to the location saving the current part.
Reference The styles of multiple switches and lamps can be changed in a single operation. This is handy when
changing the styles of ten key-pad or keyboards.
3 Select the state No. whose nameplate is to be changed, and set the nameplate.
Set the nameplate to each state.
State(S)
Item Description
Displays and sets the No. of the state currently being edited.
8
Clicking this button displays the "N state lamp" window so that you can set the number of
Styles and
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Nameplates
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text. Switch
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color(W)*1 Lamp switch
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all Lamp
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
N state lamp
Align left Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment
Align center Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the center. N state parts
Point • When Auto-size is set, the font size and kerning of the nameplate are adjusted to match the
size and character string of the switch/lamp. So, when arranging multiple switches/lamps,
the font size and kerning of nameplates may differ with each switch/lamp. The font size
may not be appropriate when the nameplate position is set to a position other than the
center or depending on the style.
• Nameplates are displayed only when the PLC is communicating with the VT3.
1 Select the N state lamp whose display image in each state is to be changed.
The "Property" window is displayed.
3 Select the state NO. of the displayed image to be changed from the "List of
States", and set the displayed image to.
set the displayed image based on the states.
The states of the display image displayed in "State" are displayed for the number set
at "Number of states" in the "N state lamp" window.
"N state lamp" window
"8-5 Setting of N State Lamp"
Item Description
State(S) Displays and sets the No. of the state currently being edited.
Set number of states(E) Clicking this button displays the "N state lamp" window so that you can set the number of states.
8 Style(T)
Color(C)
Selects the theme/style (/type). When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is
nonactive.
Selects the color. When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
When this checkbox is marked, you can select the display image from Windows bitmap files or
Free style(F)
JPEG files.
Change(N)*1 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
State(L) Displays an image of each of the state of the N state lamp.
Copy in full status(A) To copy the style/nameplate setting of selected status in full status*2.
/ Swaps the style/nameplate of the currently selected state with the previous/next state.
*1 "Free style Select image" window
"Changing the style image", page 8-5
*2 The character string of nameplate isn't copied.
Setting Switches
Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> Switch(T)
Switch
Lamp switch
Lamp
N state lamp
N state parts
cross-key
Function switch
Set bit
Changes the ON/OFF state of the specified target bit device.
Item Description
Set the bit device targeted for switch control.
Target bit device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the switch mode.
Set momentary : Sets (turns ON) switch bit devices only for the duration that switch is
touched. (The device is turned OFF when the switch is released.)
Reverse bit: : Reverse ON/OFF state of target bit device by pressing the rising edge of
Switch mode switch (the state is held even the touch screen is released).
Set : Set ON state of target bit device by pressing the rising edge of switch
(the state is held even the touch screen is released).
Reset : Reset OFF state of target bit device by pressing the rising edge of switch
(the state is held even the touch screen is released).
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Reference After the form screen on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
generate a component with print start trigger bit form screen being set.
Switch page
Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page.
Item Description
Set the page switching mode.
Specify page No. :specifying page No.
Previous page : switch to the previous display page. Pages can be switched back down the
Styles and
Point Page switching bit set is executed only on set (OFF->ON). With VT3, a reset (ON->OFF) is not Nameplates
performed, so perform the reset (ON->OFF) in the PLC ladder program.
Switch
Lamp switch
Reference • After the base screen on the workpace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
generate a part with the page switching function being set. Lamp
Item Description
Select the target window. When this checkbox is marked, the window is
Window 1 to 3
targeted for display ON/OFF.
Select window
Set two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of
(X, Y)=
window screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16.
*1 The setting for specifying the window display position isnít reflected during active edit.
Point • "Specify window display position" can be set when there is only one window that displays
(turns ON) by "Select window".
• When "Specify window display position" isn’t set, the window is displayed at the position
where it was drawn.
Reference • After the screen on the workspace (window 1/2/3) is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is
possible to create a part with the local window display function being set.
• Displaying the local window using system memory area
"14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs"
• Displaying local windows using function control by devices
"Display local window", page 9-114
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
Item Description
Set whether to turn the global window display ON or OFF when the switch is
Display ON/OFF
touched.
Select
Global Global window ID Select the target global window ID (0 to 7).
window Global window No.
Close the window which
Set the global window No. to be displayed (turned ON)
After reselection, the local window placed with the switch is changed into
8
the part is placed targets of OFF state.
Point • When "Specify window display position" isn’t set, the window is displayed at the position
where it was drawn.
• Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
Styles and
actual working unit.
Nameplates
• When an interrupt window display is turned ON while a global window is displayed, the
following happens if the number of devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, Switch
Reference • After the global window on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
create a part with the global window display function being set.
• Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• Function control by devices, Global window display
"Display global window", page 9-115
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
Set word
Changes the numerical value of the specified target word device.
Item Description
Set the switch mode of the word set.
Set data : write the set-value of data set into target word device.
Add data : add the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
8 Switch mode Subtract data : subtract the set-value of data set from current value of target word device.
OR logic operation : execute OR operation of the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
AND logic operation : execute AND operation of the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
XOR logic operation: execute XOR operation of the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Point • When a numerical value that exceeds the range determined from "Data format" and "Data
length" is entered to "Set data", the upper limit value and lower limit value are set.
• When the value of the target word device exceeds the addition/subtraction range before
data addition or data subtraction, data addition or data subtraction by switches is not
executed.
Set digits
Digitally adds and subtracts the numerical values of the specified target word device.
Item Description
Set the switch mode of the set digits.
Switch mode + plus : add the set digit value of target word device onto the digit.
- minus : subtract the set digit value of target word device from the digit.
BCD 0 to 99999999
cross-key
Function switch
Item Description
Set the target word device to which character string data is to be set. Continuous word devices
starting from the target word device are used according to the number of characters to be set.
Target word device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
8 UNICODE strings *2
window.
When this checkbox is marked, UNICODE character strings are supported.
Switch upper/lower The data of the upper and lower bytes of the character string to be set to the target word device
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Point When a character string contains both half and full-width characters, consider one full-width
character as being the equivalent of two half-width characters. Up to 64 characters can be set
counting in half-width characters.
half-width characters are set as ASCII codes and full-width characters are set as Japanese shift JIS codes and
UNICODE.
Seven continuous word devices are used starting from the target word device in Example 1), ten continuous word
devices are used starting from the target word device in Example 2), and 13 continuous word devices are used
starting from the target word device in Example 3).
Null code
Example 3) entry of UNICODE (7 1-byte UNICODE characters
text stringsޓ
+ 5 2-byte characters)
Lamp switch
Touching a "Call up system screen" function switch to switch to the system mode screen.
But, the window display of device monitor and unit monitor is a Run mode screen, rather than a System mode screen. Lamp
• Device monitor screen (bit device monitor, word device monitor) N state lamp
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
N state parts
• PLC Data Folder screen
cross-key
"5-12 PLC Data Folder", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Save record data to memory card screen Function switch
The original page is redisplayed when the call up system screen is quit. However, the window state prior to switching
is not saved, but changed to initial state of that page. Also, Set "Do not close window during page switching" on
function controls by devices (global window display), and global windows that were displayed ON are turned OFF.
As call up system screens are not saved as a page switching log, pages are not returned to by switches to which the
"Previous page" page switching function is set to.
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
Select the types of system screens to be switched (device monitor/Ladder monitor/PLC data
Screen
folder/save data to memory card/unit monitor/operation log viewer/Ladder monitor).
Select the type (Bit device monitor/Word device monitor) of the device monitor to be switched
Monitor type
when "Screen" is set to "Device monitor".
PLC Select PLC when MultiTalk is used.
If this checkbox is marked when "Screen" is set to "Device monitoring", writing to devices
Write
after the Device monitor screen is switched to is inhibited.
protection
(Only monitoring of current values is possible.)
Device Monitor
8
When "screen" is "save record data to memory card", select the types of data to be saved
data to Data type
(alarm log/trend graph/operation log)
memory
card
Write
To select whether to start sensor monitor in the Read Only (write disabled) mode. N state lamp
disabled
Sensor
Display N state parts
monitor To select sensor display format (model/comments) .
format
cross-key
Display item To select sensor status as required. For example, error sensors can be displayed only.
Function switch
*1 The unit monitor can only be used when connected to KV-7000 Series, KV-5500/5000/3000 Series or
KV-1000/700 Series.
Moreover, it cannot be used as a sub-network of VT2 MultiLink.
The following considerations are required for window display of device monitor and unit monitor.
Point
• Follow the restrictions of global window.
• Maintain an ON state of window display after page switching.
• Unit monitor cannot be used by VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/
W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
• The device monitor and unit monitor can be displayed individually at the same time.
The following functions are disabled when displaying system mode screen under VT3.
(1) Monitoring of states of alarm detection devices (saving of alarm log)
(2) Capturing (sampling) data for trend graphics (real time) and XY charts (real time).
(3) Updating of system memory area (Reading of VT3->PLC, reading of PLC->VT3)
(4) Worksheets
(5) Device sending
(6) Data receiving/sending between PC (VTSTUDIO) and VT3
(7) Remote COM port tool
(8) Global function control
With (1) to (4) of the above functions, the functions are automatically resumed when display
of the system screen ends and the original page is redisplayed.
In addition, when displaying system mode screen under VT3, the expansion state (in VT
mode) and expansion display state (initial number+6, MT compatible mode) of system
memory area are in ON state.
• Device Monitor screen -> bit 0 (during display of the Device Monitor screen)
• PLC Data Folder screen -> bit 2 (during execution of the PLC data folder)
• Save data to memory card screen -> bit 1 (during display of the Save record data to
memory card screen)
8 • operation log viewer screen -> bit 4(operation log viewer screen in display)
• Backup sensor settings screen -> Bit 6 ("Backup sensor settings" screen is being displayed)
• Restore sensor settings screen -> Bit 7 ("Recover sensor settings" screen is being displayed)
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
• Sensor monitor screen -> Bit 8 ("Sensor monitor" screen is being displayed)
"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
Switches set with "Call up system screen" do not function in the following instances:
• When using the simulator to communicate with the PC and VT3.
• When "Communications with PLC" is set to "OFF" in the VT3's System mode
Even if pressing the switch of “call up system screen”under the following operations, it ís
also switched to system mode screen.
After operation is completed, the call up system screen is automatically executed.
• During execution of printing (printing of hardcopy, form printing, alarm log)
• During video capture
• During saving to Memory Card and reading from Memory Card (saving of record data to
Memory Card, PLC data folder, etc.)
• When there is a part with a switch in an ON state (finger held down and not released from a
switch, lamp switch, key entry part) (including switch extension function OFF delay)
• When there is a switch (set momentary) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
• Record date (operation log, trend chart, alarm log) receive in progress
• Screen image receive in progress
"13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data", Page 13-21
Print
The following are operations after pressing functional switch of “execute printing”.
Settings under printer with VT system setting
Description
Printer Type Output target
ESC/P Raster Printer Hard copy the screen of VT3.
ESC/P Raster 2 Memory Card *1 Save VT3 screen to memory card in Windows bitmap files or JPEG file format.
LIPS IV Raster
PictBridge
ESC/P-R Ether*2 Printer/memory card Export to printer and memory card.
ESC/Page Ether*2
Press functional switch of “execute printing” from the screen placed with
Printer alarm display parts, and execute print-out of alarm log of alarm ID from
thermal printer "alarm log printing"
Thermal printer
VT3 screen isn’t saved to memory card since only form printing is
Memory Card *1
effectively set. Alarm logs, also, are not saved on Memory Card.
Printer/memory card Execute printer/memory card alarm log printing. Saving memory card is not executed.
*1 Screen saving format is set through the memory card set by VT system.
*2 This can be used only when the VT3 series and printer are connected via Ethernet.
The VT3 system program must be Ver. 4.81 or later.
8-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
8-2 Setting Switches
Styles and
Nameplates
GHIJKL
ABCDEF
123456
N state lamp
N state parts
cross-key
VT3 unit PC
Function switch
Stop print
Printing is canceled by touching a "Stop print" function switch during printing.
Point • "Stop print" function switches are valid for all of the following operations:
• "Print" using switches
• "Print" using function control by devices
• The operations are shown below after pressing the functional switch of ”stop printing”.
Settings under printer with VT
system setting Description
Printer Type Output target
Stop print-out of VT3 operation screen (hardcopy) or form
ESC/P Raster Printer screen. But, the form screen page or hardcopy being printed
ESC/P Raster 2 will still be printed.
LIPS IV Raster- Stop memory card saving of VT3 operation screen (hardcopy)
PictBridge Memory Card or form screen. But, the form screen page or hardcopy being
ESC/P-R Ether saved will still be saved.
ESC/Page Ether Printer/
Please refer to the description of “Printer”, “Memory card”.
Memory Card
Stop print-out of form screen or alarm log. But, the form
screen page or alarm log being printed will still be printed.
Printer With screens containing multiple alarm display parts, the
alarm log is printed in order of alarm IDs. However, when
printing is canceled, the currently printing alarm IDs are printed.
Thermal printer
Stop memory card saving of VT3 operation screen (hardcopy)
Memory Card or form screen. But, the form screen page or hardcopy being
saved will still be saved.
Printer/
Please refer to the description of “Printer”, “Memory card”.
Memory Card
Video play/pause
Touching a "Video play/pause" function switch during video display to switch between play (moving image display)
and pause (still image display). Such a switch functions as a video PAUSE button.
Item Description
Select the video display channel for switching between video play display and pause display
Channel
Video capture
Styles and
If pressing the functional switch of "video capture" during video display, the video display (images) will be saved to Nameplates
N state parts
cross-key
Function switch
Item Description
Select the video display channel for performing video capture from "Video (channel 1)/Video
Channel
(channel 2)/Video (channel 3)/Video (channel 4)/RGB".
File name settings Click the button to display the memory card setting screen of VT system.
Mode*4 Select captured images from "capture in display size, capture in initial size”*3
Display date *1 When this checkbox is marked, the date/time information is displayed on the captured image.
When this checkbox is marked, an image of placed parts also is displayed overlapped on the
Overlap parts video display area during video capture.
Setting is not allowed if selecting “capture in initial size” mode.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of the image is converted to gray scale,
Gray scale *2
and the camera image is captured.
*1 "VT System Parameters", page 12-12
*2 VT3 models not displayed.
*3 The so-called initial size refers to maximum size that can be set in display area size of video display parts.
*4 VT2 models not displayed. VT2 models are captured in display size.
Point • Functions only available for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8. Other models cannot bring such
functions into play even if configuration.
The Video Unit (VT3-VD4/VD1) is required.
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Number of colors during video capture.
When “Overlap parts” is not selected : 260,000
8 When “Overlap parts” is selected
"9-5 Setting Video Displays"
: 65536
• A static picture displayed in VT3 can be captured by undertaking video capturing when the
Static Picture is selected by switching from the Dynamic Picture.
• When VT3 is used on a vertical screen, if bitmap files or JPEG files saved to memory card
by printing are opened in computer screen, they are changed into a screen after 90°
rotation.
VT3 unit PC
• When a vertical screen is used on the VT3, part of the date/time display character string
may not fit in the captured image depending on the display area size of the video display
and the date/time display setting (VT system).
• If not selecting "overlap parts", video display parts, even if not at front, can also be
captured.
• If selecting "overlap parts", video display parts are changed below in the presence of other
overlapped video displays at front.
• Overlapped video display will be captured as parts.
• Overlapped video display is in pause state during capture process.
Video Console
Key functions on consoles such as Keyence Corporations image Sensor CV series can be set, and the same
operations as those on the console can be performed on the VT3 screen while monitoring the video display.
Video display
"9-5 Setting Video Displays"
Maker
Item Description
Selects the manufacturer from "Keyence/Omron/Panasonic Electric Works (MATSUSHITA
8
DENKO)".
*1
Maker Assignable Key Functions
Set from "Input (OK)""Return""Menu Switching""Trigger""Clear/
FNC""Up""Down""Left""Right""Top Left""Bottom Left""Upper Right""Lower
Keyence
Right""Operation Mode""Setup Mode""VIEW""MENU""Back Key (LOCK)""Clear/FNC
(LOCK)""Back Key".
Omron Set from "ESC/TRIG/ENT/Top/Bottom/Left/Right/SHIFT".
Panasonic Electric
Works Co. Ltd.
Set from "ENTER/A/B/C/Top/Bottom/Left/Right".
(MATSUSHITA DENKO
Corporation)
Styles and
Nameplates
Reference With a Panasonic Electric Works Co. Ltd. (MATSUSHITA DENKO Corporation) model, to set the switch
Switch
for the "Top left" key, for example, set two functions "Left" and "Top" to a single switch by adding
switch functions. Lamp switch
N state lamp
Point • About compatible models
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual N state parts
• For details on the console function, refer to the manual for the respective manufacturer. cross-key
• VT3 Functions only available for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8. Other models cannot bring such
functions into play even if configuration. Function switch
Item Description
Display character
Selects the display character string ID from "0 to 7 Default".
string ID
Restart VT3
Resets the VT3 (to the state when the power is turned ON).
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Key entry
Normally, the ten key-pad or keyboard currently registered to the Part catalog is used. The user can use this function
to create individual ten key-pads or keyboards.
Item Description
Select the part ("Numerical value display/Text display/Message display/Alarm display/Trend
Key entry destination
graph") to perform key entry to.
Key functions Set the key entry functions.
For details on key function, see the descriptions for each key entry destination below.
Lamp
Reference When the MS (copy) switch is pressed, the key entry is converted to a UNICODE character string and
saved to VT internal special devices (MW0070 to MW007B). When the MR (paste) switch is pressed, N state lamp
8 Move entry
destination(+1)
Move entry
Cancels the current text display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part that
has the next higher orderin the key entry order.
Cancels the current text display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part that
destination(-1) has the next lower orderin the key entry order.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Move entry destination When this touch switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously
forward active key entry part becomes active.
Reference When the MS (copy) switch is pressed, the key entry is saved in UNICODE to VT internal special
devices (MW0080 to MW00BF). When the MR (paste) switch is pressed and the copy destination is
set to ASCII/Shift JIS, the key entry is automatically converted to ASCII/Shift JIS.
Text display
Memorized as
UNICODE Automatically
X X X X
converted
UNICODE
Page scroll back*1 Scroll the page to the direction opposite to the deviation direction. Lamp switch
Move cursor forward *1 Moves the cursor in the deviation direction.
Lamp
Move cursor back*1 Moves the cursor to the direction opposite to the deviation direction.
Move entry Terminate the current trend chart part or XY chart part, and move to the key entry part with the N state lamp
destination(+1) key entry order being increased by 1.
N state parts
Terminate the current trend chart part or XY chart part, and move to the key entry part with the
Move entry destination(-1)
key entry order being decreased by 1. cross-key
Move entry destination When this switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously active key
forward entry part becomes active. Function switch
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
VNC No. To set up the VNC server No. (0 to 3) for key entry.
To set up key-entry functions ("Character/Esc/F1 to F12/Home/End/Insert
/Delete/full-width/Half-width/BackSpace/Tab/Enter/PageUp
/PageDown/////PrintScreen/Left SHIFT ON
Key function
/Left SHIFT OFF/Left CTRL ON/Left CTRL OFF/Left ALT ON
/Left ALT OFF/Right SHIFT ON/Right SHIFT OFF
/Right CTRL ON/Right CTRL OFF/Right ALT ON/Right ALT OFF").
To specify the characters that can be entered when "Character" is selected as the key function.
Character
(Available characters are 0x20 to 0x7E in the ASCII code).
Point When there is no VNC display part on the screen, no entry will be possible even if VNC key
switch is touched.
Point Only PLC models that support extended command communication can be used.
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual
Switch
Point • Extended command communication function will be executed in the sequence of request
receiving. Lamp switch
• If the following extended command communication request is received, the next Lamp
communication cycle will be executed after the current extended command
communication is completed. N state lamp
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
Communication time To specify the communication time of released command (switch ON, switch OFF).
To specify an target PLC.
PLC/Station No.
Enabled only for Multitalk or PLC model whose station No. is setup.
Command To select a command to be released.
Send To display send parameters.
Receive To display receiving parameters.
No. To display parameter No.
Parameter To display parameter name.
To display setting data. Double click to select "Numeric value", "PLC device", or "Indirect
reference". If "PLC device" or "Indirect reference" is selected, the specified device value will be
Data sent as part of the command and the received command is saved in a specified device.
"6-7 Setting of Devices", Page 6-37
"6-8 Indirect Reference", Page 6-43
Min value To display min settable value.
Max value To display max settable value.
To assign device or indirect reference in successive number to parameter of selected row. This
Assign successive No.
is possible only when device is set up to "PLC device" or "Indirect reference".
Reference • For command details, refer to VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual.
• Extended command communication of function control by devices
"Extended command communication", page 9-138
(M0), 1100 (M10) and 1200 (M20) on the PLC by the bit set function. Function switch
Set the switch setting for setting the internal relay to switch 3 to be executed last.
Correct setting
Switch Setting Switch of "Setting 1" Switch of "Setting 2" Switch of "Setting 3"
Switches 1 1100 (M10) reset 1000 (M0) reset 1000 (M0) reset
Switches 2 1200 (M20) reset 1200 (M20) reset 1100 (M10) reset
Switches 3 1000 (M0) set 1100 (M10) set 1200 (M20) set
Set the switch setting for setting the internal relay to switch 3 to be executed last.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-33
8-2 Setting Switches
Wrong setting
Switch Setting Switch of "Setting 1" Switch of "Setting 2" Switch of "Setting 3"
Switches 1 1000 (M0) set 1000 (M0) reset 1000 (M0) reset
Switches 2 1100 (M10) reset 1100 (M10) set 1100 (M10) reset
Switches 3 1200 (M20) reset 1200 (M20) reset 1200 (M20) set
When switches are set as shown in the above table, and internal relay 1100 (M10) or 1200 (M20) is ON
when switch of “setting 1” is pressed, setting of internal relay 1000 (M0) is executed before these internal
relays are reset. For this reason, a state occurs in which two or more internal relays in 1000 (M0) and 1100
(M10) or 1200 (M20) are simultaneously ON.
Reference When writing to PLC data memory by the word set function
Successive arithmetic operation is not performed even if multiple switch functions for writing to the
same device are set.
Successive processing in order "setting of numerical value '1000'" followed by "addition of numerical
value '200'" is not executed even if data setting (set data ="1000") is set to switch 1 and data addition
(set data = "200") is set to switch 2, and the switches are pressed. For this reason, numerical value
"1200" is not written tothe word device.
In this case, as addition of numerical value "200" is the latter processing in the execution sequence,
the numerical value obtained by adding "200" to the original value of the data memory is written to the
8
word device.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
Disables switch operation when the inhibit bit device is ON (OFF when the mode is set to B contact).
Interlock
Even if the switch is touched, the buzzer does not sound, and the image is at the setting of touch switch
OFF. When the inhibit bit device is ON (OFF when the mode is set to B contact) after a touch switch is
touched, regular switch OFF processing is performed when the touch switch is released.
8
Interlock
Inhibit bit Set the bit device on which switch operation is inhibited when the "Interlock" checkbox is marked.
ON delay If the "Press twice" checkbox is marked, the ON delay is enabled when the touch switch is first
touched. The ON delay does not function when the touch switch is touched the second time.
If the "Interlock" checkbox is marked, switch operations are disabled when the inhibit bit device turns ON
(OFF when the mode is set to the B contact) during the ON delay after the touch switch is touched.
Delay time Set ON delay time in 0.5s (0.5 to 15.0s). Styles and
Nameplates
Set the time that switch operation continues for after the touch switch is released. Operation is the
same during the OFF delay when the touch switch is continuously touched. The display image Switch
during operation is at the setting when the touch switch is ON.
When the touch switch is touched during the OFF delay time, the OFF delay operation is performed Lamp switch
again for the delay time from when the touch switch is next released.
When page switching or window display (ON/OFF) is performed during the OFF delay time, the
OFF delay
Lamp
OFF delay OFF delay operation is continued, and page switching or window display operation is performed
after the OFF delay ends. N state lamp
If the "Interlock" checkbox is marked, regular switch OFF processingis performed after the delay
time has elapsed when the inhibit bit device turns ON (OFF when the mode is set to B contact) N state parts
during the OFF delay.
When the "Press twice" checkbox is marked, the OFF delay operation is performed after the touch cross-key
switch is released after it is touched for the second time.
Function switch
Delay time Set OFF delay time in 0.5s (0.5 to 15.0s).
Switch operation is enabled when the touch switch is touched two times continuously. Switch
operation is enabled when the switch is touched during the time set at "Acceptable time".
During the acceptable time, the display image is displayed blinking and in a hatched state.
Press twice
The wait state is canceled when another touch switch is touched duringthe acceptable time.
Press twice
Operation is reset when the touch switch is not touched during the acceptable time.
The wait time is cancelled when page switching or window display (ON/OFF) operation is
performed during the acceptable time.
When the "Interlock" checkbox is marked, the state of the inhibit bit deviceis referenced.
Acceptable Set the acceptable time for when the "Press twice" checkbox is marked in 0.5 second increments
time within the range 0.0 to 15.0 seconds (start time) through 0.5 to 30.0 seconds (end time).
Inhibit Set this item to prevent simultaneous operation with other switches. Other switches are disabled for the duration
simultaneous that a touch switch is pressed, and this switch is disabled for the duration that other switches are pressed.
pressing To enable "Inhibit simultaneous pressing", "2-touch switch" must be set to"Enabled" in the VT system settings.
Buzzer OFF On VT3 system, the buzzer is disabled when touching switch parts.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-35
8-3 Setting Lamp Switch
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
Switch bit Set the bit device targeted for switch control.
device*1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode for controlling bit devices.
Set momentary : Sets (turns ON) switch bit devices only for the duration that touch switches
are touched. (The device is turned OFF when the touch switch is released.)
Reverse bit : Reverses the ON/OFF state of switch bit devices when the touch switch
is turned ON by being touched. (The state is also held after the touch
Switch
Item Description
Change to lamp/switch*3 Converts "Lamp switches->Lamps" or "Lamp switches->Switches".
Lamp switches are automatically assigned the label "Ls_****" as the default. Correct this label
Label
as necessary. (“****” is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Part settings, styles and labels sometimes are changed.
Styles and
Nameplates
Switch
Lamp switch
Lamp
N state lamp
N state parts
cross-key
Function switch
Setting Lamps
Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> Lamp switch(L)
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
Set the reference bit device for lamp display.
Lamp bit device*1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Lamp
Item Description
8
Number of states Set the number (1 to 16) of states in which the N state lamp changes.
Point • When relays 1000 to 1002 are all OFF, the display becomes that set at "Processing out of
8 specified range".
• When two or more relays (1000 to 1002) are ON, the state corresponding to the relay having
the smallest relay number of the ON relays is displayed.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
• Relays from relay number 1003 onwards are not used as reference devices for N state
lamps.
DM1000㧩2ޓޓޓޓState 2 is displayed.
Point When DM1000 is a numerical value outside of the range 0 to 2, the display becomes that set at
"Processing out of specified range".
Point Key entry parts cannot be combined with switches/lamps when setting an N state part.
Settings
8
Switch
Lamp switch
Number of states Set the number (1 to 16) of states in which the N state part changes. N state lamp
Bit device : The display changes corresponding to the state of each bit of the reference device.
The display is used continuously for the number set to "Number of states". N state parts
Specify mode
Word device : The display changes according to the numerical value stored to the
cross-key
reference device.
Set the reference device for the N state lamp.
Reference device*1 Function switch
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode for referencing the reference device when the "Specify mode" is set to bit device.
Mode A contact : Displays the specified state when each bit of the reference device is ON (other bits are OFF).
B contact : Displays the specified state when each bit of the reference device is OFF (other bits are ON).
Select the data format of the reference device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD" when the "Specify
Data Format
mode" is set to word device.
Specify the “specify mode” to bit device when all reference bit devices of various states are in
OFF (all in ON in the case of B contact mode). Specify the “specify mode” to word device when
Processing out of
the values of all reference bit devices exceed the range o f”number of states”
specified range
Display parts of state 0 : The part of state 0 is displayed.
No display : Not displayed.
Labels "NsP_****" on N state parts are automatically assigned with initial value.
Label
Correct this label as necessary. (“****” is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )
State
Item Description
8 Parts type
State
Select the type of part from "Switch/Lamp" or "Numerical/Text display".
Displays the state No.
When "Parts type" is set to Switch/Lamp:
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
*1 For details on setting methods, refer to the description for each part.
Point Switch/Lamp
• The position of parts that are displayed and the size of parts are common in all states.
• The switch area cannot be changed for individual states.
• Parts are not swapped even if a part swap occurs while a switch is held down. Parts are
swapped after you release your finger from the switch.
• When an OFF delay is set by a switch extended function, parts are not swapped even if a part
swap occurs while the OFF delay is being executed. Parts are swapped after the OFF delay is
completed.
• Parts are swapped when a part swap occurs during an interlock, ON delay, simultaneous
pressing (between the 1st and 2nd switch press) by a switch extended function.
Item Description 8
State(S) Displays and sets the No. of the state currently being edited.
Switch
Lamp switch
Lamp
N state lamp
N state parts
cross-key
Function switch
• When relays 1000 to 1002 are all OFF, the display becomes that set at "Processing
Point
out of specified range".
• When two or more relays (1000 to 1002) are ON, the state corresponding to the
relay having the smallest relay number of the ON relays is displayed.
• Relays from relay number 1003 onwards are not used as reference devices for N
state parts.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-43
8-6 Setting N State Parts
S
[Example] When the "Number of states" is set to 3
Specify mode: Word device
Reference device: PLC devices data memory DM1000
Parts type: Numerical/Text display
When the following is set:
DM1000 = 0 The part (numerical value display) of state NO. 0 is displayed. 1234
Point When DM1000 is a numerical value out of the range 0 to 2, the display becomes that
set at "Processing out of specified range".
Setting of cross-key
Parts(P) -> Switch/lamp(S) -> Cross-key(C)
Point • The cross-keys are only available with functions of VT3-V7R. They’re not operated in other
models.
• Only a single cross-key is placed separately on screen (base, window 1, 2, 3 and global
window).
Only a single cross-key functions even if multiple cross-keys are placed.
• Please place Cross-key in the display frame of edit window.
• Cross-key is not displayed in VT3 system. Styles and
Nameplates
Switch
Lamp
N state lamp
N state parts
cross-key
Function switch
Execute setting using “add”, “delete”, "up" and "down" buttons. Switch functions can be set separately on top, bottom,
left and right buttons.
For the settable switch functions, refer to the overview of "8-2 Setting Switches". The switch functions can be
added up to 16, but no expansion functions can be set.
Reference • To assign functions common to all pages, please set up with the "Global function switch".
• Function switch settings of basic parts have a priority higher than global function switch settings.
"12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series)", Page 12-62
The following means are available to display the "Function switch" window.
• Select the part, then select "Edit(E)" -> "Part attribute settings(S)" from the menu.
• Select the part and then click the button.
• Select the part, then select "Part attribute settings(S)" from the right-click menu.
8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
Item Description
Set up ON/OFF function of each function switch.
Settings The functions to be set is the same as the switch part.
"8-2 Setting Switches", Page 8-9
System settings To display the "Global function switch" in the system settings.
Reference F1, F2, F5, and F6 can also be used for external output.
Point No functionswitch is displayed in VT3. In case this is not configured in the display
frame of VT3, no data can be sent to VT3.
9
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-2
Setting
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
Set the word device to be targeted for numerical value display.
Reference word device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Data length words" is set, use two continuous word devices. Of the data formats, "Signed decimal"
is handled in 2's complement format.
Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Hex/Float*2. Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's
complement format.
Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) of numerical values to be displayed. When the
Number of display digits data format is set to "Signed decimal", add one extra digit for the sign. To display the
decimal point, add one extra digit for the decimal point.
Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted referenced to the
Decimal point position *3
lowermost digit. To not insert a decimal point, set "0".
When zero suppress (below) is set to "ON", select the direction that display shifts from
Shift display
"Shift to right/Shift to left".
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, "+" is displayed for plus numbers in the numerical
Display +
value display.
After selected, prefix and suffix (half-width 16 characters) are shown in numerical
Prefix/suffix
value display.
Prefix/suffix
This item is displayed when image font is selected.
Setting *10
"Image font" window is displayed.
Item Description
Style Select the style to be used for display from "Basic/image frame".
Frame color *4 Select the frame color.
When this checkbox is marked, the frame color is set to transparent. With this setting,
Hide frame
the drawing speed slows down.
Frame² Background
Style
This item is displayed when image font is selected.
Select the style of image font. 9
Color Selects the color.
Write word device *7 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device Numerical Value
settings" window. Display
Data length Select the data length of write word devices from "1 word/2 words."
Text Display
Select the data format of the write word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Message
Data Format decimal/BCD/Hex/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's Display
complement format.
Alarm Display
Arithmetic When this checkbox is marked, the value entered on the numeric keypad is calculated
Calculati operations according to the "Calculation formula" and the result is written to the write word device.
ons *8 Video Display
Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
Animation
Numerical value displays are automatically assigned the label "N_****" as the default. Display
Label Correct this label as necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number starting from Function Controls
0000 is appended.) Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
This is discarded.
This is discarded.
This is discarded.
(The numerical values of parts that are not displayed are discarded even if adecimal point that
exceeds the number of displayed digits is entered.)
"1.2" is written to the PLC.
12. 345
123. 4
5 digits including the decimal point are displayed. (4 numbers are displayed.)
*10 For the details, refer to "About image font", page 9-6
Reference • To set "Shift to right" at "Shift display" on the "Settings" tab and also display numerical values that
are entered on the numerical keypad in the Input mode shifted to the right
Numerical value displays/Text display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
• When underflow of floating point real number is treated as 0
Numerical value display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Item Description Function Controls
Device
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
BMP File
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open. Switching
File of type(T) Select the type of file. VNC Display
Settings
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale
Gray scale(G)
image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D)
between colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame
Frame width(F)
when the image is resized.
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
After conversion
dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently. This can be
Move(M)
easily moved to the location saving the current part.
Item Description
Style Selects the style.
Color Selects the color.
Display style Click to select the display image.
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
State Select state from "common mode/lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit".
Style Selects the style.
Color Selects the color.
After selection, it's possible to specify Windows bitmap files and JPEG files of every numerical
Free style
image.
Display currently displayed numerical images. Select numerical images to be changed in the
Numerical image
case of free style.
In the "open image" window, specify Windows bitmap files and JPEG files in prefix and suffix
images.
File Change
In the case of free style, specify Windows bitmap files and JPEG files in selected numerical
images.
Prefix and suffix display
Set the size of digits displaying prefix and suffix during numerical value display.
size
Parts Designer *1 Start Parts Designer and create digital images.
*1 "11-7 Active Edit"
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) Select the type of file.
Gray scale(G) When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D)
between colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
After conversion
Move(M)
dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
9
Point • The Minimum font is fixed as 6 x 4 pixels. Size can not be changed.
• Prefix and suffix cannot be set. If necessary, please configure outline text or bitmap text.
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Range/Alarm
Set the input and display ranges of numerical values, and alarm ranges.
The following table shows the setting ranges for the lower limit values/upper limit values of the input range, display
range and alarm range.
9
Data length Display format Setting Range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
1 word
SETTING BASIC PARTS
BCD 0 to 9999
Hex 0 to FFFF
Unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
Signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
2 word BCD 0 to 99999999
Hex 0 to FFFFFFFF
Float real number -3.40282347X1038 to 3.40282347X1038
Point The max. number of digits (including decimal point and signs) is 12 when displaying float
(real numbers) on numerical value displays.
Item Description
Set the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of numerical values to
Lower limit be displayed as numerical values.
value *4 Velue : Set a constant as the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Input range *1
PLC device/Indirect reference/caculation/cell
Upper limit : The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
value *4 calculation/cell tothe alarm range (lower limit value/upper limitvalue).
When this checkbox is marked, the display range (lower limit value/upper imit
value) of the numerical values to be displayed on the VT3 can be set. When
Display range the display range is set, the values of the reference word device are
converted for display on the VT3. If not selecting this item, the value of
Display range *2 reference word device isnít converted, and displayed by entry range.
Range*3
Value : Set a constant as display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Lower limit value*4
PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell
: The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
Upper limit value*4 calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
When this checkbox is marked, the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit
value) can be set. When the value of the reference word device exceeds the
Alarm range
alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value), the alarm can be displayed
(text color changed or made to blink) on the VT3.
Alarm range
Value : Set a constant as alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Lower limit value*4
PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell
: The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
Upper limit value*4 calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Select the frame color of the alarm display. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Frame color *6
This item cannot be selected when the Hide frame checkbox is marked on the "Settings" tab.
Select the background color of the alarm display. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Background color *6
This item cannot be selected when the Transparent checkbox is marked on the "Settings" tab.
Text color *6 Selects the text color.
Bold
Shadow
Sets the text of the alarm display to bold.
Gives the text of the alarm display a shadow so that it has a 3D effect. so that it has a 3D effect.
9
Alarm Color*5
Text Decoration
*1 [Example] When the input range was set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100 Text Display
Message
When 100 is exceeded, the numerical value Display
Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ···· indicated on the VT3 becomes +++ (blinking). Alarm Display
Numerical value display on the VT3 --- --- 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 +++ When the value is below 10, the numerical value Video Display
indicated on the VT3 becomes --- (blinking).
Animation
Display
Function Controls
*2 [Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and display Device
range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000 BMP File
Switching
10 100 VNC Display
Input range Settings
Conversion
Display range
100 1000
Numerical value display on the VT3 --- --- 100 ···· 500 ···· 1000 +++ When the value is below 10, the numerical value
indicated on the VT3 becomes --- (blinking).
*3 For details on the setting range in the range setting, see page 9-8.
Point Other than numerical values are displayed via the numerical value display in the following
instances:
"OVERFLOW" /" UNDERFLOW":
• When a value exceeding the input range is entered on the numeric keypad
• When a value exceeding the display range is entered on the numeric keypad when the display range is
set
• When the result of calculation on the calculator exceeds the number of display digits
• "- - - - - - - -":
• For example, when the value of the device on the PLC is 10000 and the number of display digits on the VT3 is
4
• When the calculation result exceeds the range of the data format for the numerical value
display
• When the cell values exceeds the range of the data format for the numerical value display
• "ERROR":
• When an error occurs in the write calculation by entry on a numerical value (for example,
when an attempt has been made to divide by 0)
• When an entry is made on the numeric keypad when the same value is set to the upper and
lower limit values of the display range
9
• When the entered numerical value exceeds the number of display digits
• When "Paste (MR)" (key input switch) is executed on a numerical value display having a
different (either HEX display, or difference other than HEX display) data format
• When the number of digits of the numerical value to be pasted exceeds the number of
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Reference The input range and display range on the VT1 are as follows:
[Example] When the input range was set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100
Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ····
Numerical value display on the VT 10 10 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 100
When the value is below 10, the numrical When 100 is exceeded, the numrical value
value indicated on the VT remains at 10. indicated on the VT remains at 100.
[Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and
display range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000
10 100
Input range
Conversion
Display range
100 1000
The numerical values of the target word devices are displayed on the VT multiplied by 10X.
Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ····
Numerical value display on the VT 100 100 100 ···· 500 ···· 1000 1000
When the value is below 10, the numrical When 100 is exceeded, the numrical value
value indicated on the VT remains at 100. indicated on the VT remains at 1000.
An alarm is displayed when the calculated numerical values exceed the alarm range (lower limit value/
upper limit value).
9-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays
Key entry
Item Description
Key entry *1 ,2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the
Key entry order *1
screen.
Key entry Select by switch *1
Animation
*1 "6-3 Key Entry Parts" Display
*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow. Function Controls
Device
*3 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" BMP File
Switching
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
VNC Display
Settings
Key entry
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the numerical value display becomes a key entry part, and numerical
values can be entered on the numeric keypad.
If a number is entered on the numeric keypad to a numerical value display in the Active mode, and the "Enter" key
entry switch is touched, the entered numerical value is written to the reference word device.
When using write word devices, the entered numerical value (calculation result when using calculations) is written to
the write word device when the "Enter" key entry switch is touched.
Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Select the numerical value Enter the number. Touching "Enter" writes
indication. the numerical value.
9
777 777 1234
Reference • To set "Shift to right" at "Shift display" on the "Settings" tab and also display numerical values that
SETTING BASIC PARTS
are entered on the numerical keypad in the Input mode shifted to the right
Numerical value displays/Text display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
• Return to display mode if no input value is confirmed.
Numerical value display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
Frame blinks (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)
777 777
END END
ON ON
B contact
OFF
OFF
9-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Select the numerical value Enter the numerical value. Touching "Enter" writes the
indication. numerical value and sets the
notified bit device.
Numerical value of
reference word device
Numerical value of
reference word device
Numerical value of
reference word device
9
Point The notified bit device is set (state changed from OFF to ON) after numerical values are
written. With VT3, a reset (ON -> OFF) is not performed, so perform the reset (ON -> OFF) in
the PLC ladder program.
If "Reset notifybit before execution" is used, the notified bit device can be reset before
sending "notify changes to settings" on VT3.
Numerical Value
Reset notifybit before execution Display
Message
Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
Notified bit device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Item Description
Select the window to display from "Auxiliary system numerical keyboard/Local window/
Window to display
Global window".
When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is selected in "Window to display",
Operation when it is
operation can be selected from "Follow the VT system setting/OK + Close window/OK +
determined *2
Move input object (+1)/only OK".
When Local window is selected at "Window to display", the respective window whose
Window 1 to 3
checkbox is marked is targeted for display ON.
9 Global window ID
Global window No.
When Global window is selected at "Window to display", select the global window ID (0 to 7).
Select the global window No. to display.
Specify window display When this checkbox is marked, the window is displayed at the specified position when the
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
• Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
Display the value stored in the selected numerical value display part.
Dispaly the input range of selected numerical value display part.
When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is used, operation can be selected from "Follow the VT system
setting/OK + Close window/OK + Move input object (+1)/only OK" when numerical value is determined.
"8-2 Setting Switches", Page 8-9
"12-4 VT System Parameters", Page 12-12
• By default, the auxiliary system numerical keyboard will use the global window ID7.
Point
"12-4 VT System Parameters", Page 12-12
• When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is used, the display position will be
adjusted automatically when "Window display position" is not specified.
• When "Key input moving" is executed using the auxiliary system numerical keyboard, even 9
if the data format (unsigned BIN/signed BIN/BCD/HEX) of the numerical display component
is different, the auxiliary system numerical keyboard will not be changed.
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Item Description
The numerical value display is previewed according to entered value.
Display value In addition, when closing the setting dialogue box by pressing "OK" button, the numerical value
is displayed on edit screen as in the preview display.
Reset Reset as a value for starting configuration.
To be more precise, the precision of float (real numbers) is 32-bit single-precision, and the number of effective digits
is as follows:
• Mantissa: (24 bits)
• Indicator: 8 bits (2- 126 to 2127)
1. x2
9 Sign (1 bit)
0= Plus
SETTING BASIC PARTS
1= Minus
Characteristic (8 bits)
00000000(00H) = Unused
00000001(01H) = -126
00000010(02H) = -125
00000011(03H) = -124
01111110(7EH) = -1
01111111(7FH) = 0
10000000(80H) = 1
10000001(81H) = 2
11111100(FCH) = 125
11111101(FDH) = 126
11111110(FEH) = 127
11111111(FFH) = Unused
Point The maximum number of digits (including decimal point and signs) is 12 when displaying
float (real numbers) on numerical value displays.
Setting
When this checkbox is marked, the frame color is set to transparent. With this
Hide frame
setting, the drawing speed slows down.
Frame\Background
Item Description
Text color*3 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text in text display to bold.
Shadow Gives text in text display a shadow so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Decoration Engraved Gives text in text display a shadow so that it looks engraved.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as
dolor *3 the text decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*3
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Text Select the fonts to be used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/
Fonts *2
Windows font".
This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in
List of available fonts
graphics data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set.
Font setting After font type and size are set in "Select font" window, the fonts will be added
to the list of available fonts.
Registered characters ID Select logon text ID.
After clicking, the text converted to Windows font logs onto edit window. Log on
Registered characters *6
the text to be used in text display.
Display entered characters with * After selection, the entered text is displayed as*.
Specify text color
When this checkbox is marked, the text color can be changed by writing the
Specify text color by device
RGB values to the target word device.
by device*4
Key/Barcode entry
Item Description
Communication with PLC is executed only one time during
9 Read only once when whiching pages *1
page switching, and the text display is updated. The display
contents are not updated since communication with PLC is
no longer executed.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Key entry When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
*3 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry
Key entry order
parts on the screen.
When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by
Select by switch *3
touching text displays.
When clicking text display after selection, the display of
windows will be opened. When the "Settings" button is
Select by switch and display window *4
clicked, the "Window to display" window is displayed so that
you can set the window whose display is to be turned ON.
Key entry *2
When this checkbox is marked, text data can be entered
Barcode entry
from the Barcode Reader.
When this checkbox is marked, entry from the Barcode
Auto apply
Reader can be automatically applied.
Barcode
entry *2 After auto applied, set
When barcode entry is confirmed automatically after
the following key entry
selection, the next key entry parts will be in active mode.
parts to activated
Barcode offset entry *6 The data acquired from barcode will be displayed from
offset after starting offset according to set byte data.
When this checkbox is marked, text can be changed by the
Enable changes to settings keyboard or barcode entry only when the enabled bit
device is ON (OFF).
Set the enabled bit device.
Enable Enabled bit device *5 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
changes to device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
settings *2 Set the mode for referencing enabled bit devices.
A contact : Text can be changed by keyboard or barcode
Mode entry when the enabled bit device is ON.
B contact : Text can be changed by keyboard or barcode
entry when the enabled bit device is OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the PLC is notified of any
Notify changes to settings
changes to the text.
Sets the notified bit device.
Notify changes
Notified bit device *5 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
to settings *2
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
When sending "notify changes to settings" after selection,
Reset notifybit before execution
execute setting again after resetting the notified bit device.
*1 When text is displayed on window, read only one time if window display is ON.
After this item is set, "Key entry", "Enable changes to settings" and "Notify changes to settings" cannot be
selected.
This item cannot be set if indirect reference is set in reference word device.
*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
*3 "6-3 Key Entry Parts"
*4 "Select by switch and display window", page 9-14
*5 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*6 The data acquired from barcode is saved into linking device(LNW00C2 to LNW10C1). LNW00C2 starts offset
according to set byte data, and displays the text from the offset.
"Link Device", page 6-36
Linking device A B C D E F
Text display D E F 9
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Key entry
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the numerical value display becomes a key entry part, and text can be
entered on the numeric keypad.
If text is entered on the keyboard to a text display in the Active mode, and the "Enter" key entry switch is touched, the
codes of entered text are written to the reference word device as ASCII code (when 1-byte characters are entered),
shift JIS code (when 2-byte characters are entered) or UNICODE (when 1-byte or 2-byte characters are entered).
When using write word devices, the entered text code is written to the write word device when the "Enter" key entry
switch is touched.
Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M ĘĖ CA Z X C V B N M ĘĖ CA Z X C V B N M ĘĖ
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK
Select text display. Enter character from keyboard. Touching "Enter" writes
the character codes.
1-byte character (ASCII code) screen example
The example below is for when the "Swap upper/lower bytes" button is not marked. The resulting text string data
9 after the upper and lower bytes are swapped is stored to the reference word device when "Swap upper/lower bytes"
button is marked.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
* (* * H)
Point The Active mode remains even if the "Enter" key entry switch is pressed in the Active mode.
To change to the Display mode when the "Enter" key entry switch is pressed in the Active
mode, set in the VT system settings.
"Parts", page 12-21
Barcode entry
After selecting "Barcode entry", the barcode data read by barcode reader connected on PORT3 of VT3 can be
directly entered into text display.
It’s also possible to enter texts from keyboard to the text display after selecting "Barcode entry".
Barcode entry is also possible when text displays are in the Active mode. Barcodes cannot be entered when text
displays are in the Display mode. Either mark the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute
settings" window, or switch the mode by the touch switch, or switch the mode by the PLC device to switch text display
to the Active mode before entering the barcode.
The data acquired from barcode is saved into linking device (LNW)(data is saved no matter if text display parts exist).
Displayed on VT3 according to the set text display.
Write to reference word device by clicking "OK" key entry switch, or by "Auto apply".
VT3
Text display
ABCDEFG Confirmation
Linking device
PLC
Barcode
9
reader Reference word device
Point Barcode input can be realized for all models other than VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/
W4G(A)/V7R. Even if the VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)/V7R is set up, the setting
will be disabled.
Auto apply
Numerical Value
After selecting “Auto apply”, barcode data read by barcode reader will be automatically written to reference (write) word Display
device. By this setting, the "Enter" key entry switch need not be touched each time that barcode data is to be read.
Text Display
Video Display
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
123AB 4F2DE 4F2DE
BMP File
Switching
Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P
VNC Display
A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
Settings
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK
Select the text display. Read the barcode. Touching "Enter" writes the character
codes to the reference (write) word
Read device.
Barcode Reader
BL Series
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK
Select the text display. Read the barcode. The character codes are automatically
written to the reference (write) word
Read device.
Barcode Reader
BL Series
When the "Enable changes to settings" checkbox is marked, changes to text using the keyboard or by barcode entry
are enabled only when the enabled bit device turns ON (OFF).
When the enabled bit device turns OFF (ON), the text display in the Active mode switches to the "Display mode" and
text cannot be entered on the keyboard or by barcode entry. (When "Barcode entry" is set to ON, and "Auto apply" is
set to ON, text codes read by the Barcode Reader also are not written.)
Frame blinks (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)
TOKYO TOKYO
Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS
BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK
Select text display. Enter character from keyboard. Touching "Enter" writes the character
codes, and sets the notified bit
device.
1-byte character (ASCII code) screen example
The example below is for when the "Swap upper/lower bytes" button is not marked. The resulting text
string data after the upper and lower bytes are swapped is stored to the reference word device when
"Swap upper/lower bytes" button is marked.
9
Notified bit device
ON
ON
* (* * H) Text Display
Message
Display
Display data Input data
Alarm Display
"n" is the leading number set to the target word device.
Video Display
Animation
Point The notified bit device is set (state changed from OFF to ON) after text code is written. With Display
VT3, a reset (ON->OFF) is not performed, so perform the reset (ON->OFF) in the PLC ladder Function Controls
Device
program.
BMP File
If "Reset notifybit before execution" is used, the notified bit device can be reset before Switching
sending "notify changes to settings" on VT3. VNC Display
Settings
Confirm execution
Preview
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
The text display is previewed according to entered text strings.
Display text string In addition, when closing the setting dialogue box by pressing "OK" button, the text is displayed
on edit screen as in the preview display.
Reset Reset as a value for starting configuration.
9
"᮹ᴀ" 2 character data "᮹ᴀ" 2 character data
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost
Leading reference word device No.+0 ᮹ ( 9 3 F A H ) Leading reference word device No.+0 ᮹ ( 6 5 E 5 H )
Leading reference word device No.+0 B (42H) A (41H) Leading reference word device No.+0 B (42H) A (41H) Text Display
Leading reference word device No.+1 (00H) C (43H) Leading reference word device No.+1 D (44H) C (43H) Message
Display
Leading reference word device No.+2 (00H) (00H) Alarm Display
Null code
Null code
Video Display
Important Do not use reference word devices that overlap system memory area.
"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
Point Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BLK Spare R G B
Bit Description
0 to 3 B (blue) Set the brightness of blue by 4 bits. (dark 0H <-->FH light)
4 to 7 G (green) Set the brightness of green by 4 bits. (dark 0H<-->FH light)
8 to 11 R (red) Set the brightness of red by 4 bits. (dark 0H <-->FH light)
12 to 14 Spare Set to 0.
15 BLK*1 0: Blink OFF, 1: Blink ON
9 Setting example
Setting Values of Target Word Device
Color
SETTING BASIC PARTS
The Kanji conversion function can be used when entering to text display parts.
Two entry modes, kana entry mode and Romaji entry mode, are supported. Only Japanese is supported in the Kanji
conversion mode.
System settings
Mark the "Text display Key entry: Kanji conversion" under "Parts" in the VT system settings.
Dictionary data can be transferred to the VT3 when PC -> VT Send data is performed and the Kanji conversion
function can be used only when this checkbox is marked.
About 300 Kbytes of screen data storage (system data) space is used for the dictionary data.
Conversion method
This section describes how to convert Kanji characters.
1 Touch a text display part to set it to the Active mode or Entry mode.
2 Press the "Kanji Mode" on the Kanji conversion keyboard placed from the Part catalog.
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Kanji Kana Kanji Romaji
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
State with reading Current input mode State with reading Current input mode
Function Controls
"か" , "ん" and "じ" entered (hiragana) "K" "A" "N" "N" "J" (Romaji) Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
4 Press one of the "/ ", "/ " or "SPACE/ " keys.
This selects the candidate.
With the candidate selected, the message "Candidate: No. of current candidate/ Total number of candidates" is
displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen.
The text string of the current candidate is displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen.
Candidate selection
5 Press one of the "/ ", "/ " or "SPACE/ " keys to search for the desired candidate.
8 Pressing the "OK" key writes the text on the text display part to the PLC device.
Candidate selection state : The candidate is currently selected in the Kanji conversion mode.
9
destination (-1))
To next part (move
To next candidate to destination (+1))
Animation
Display
"kana", "Romaji" and "Candidate" that are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen are displayed in VNC Display
Settings
Japanese in the Kanji conversion mode.
"5-1 What is System Mode", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• The Kanji conversion mode is canceled when page switching occurs during Kanji conversion.
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
• Either of the following actions is adopted when window switching occurs during Kanji conversion:
(1) Kanji conversion is continued when a part in the Active mode stays in the Active mode.
(2) Kanji conversion is canceled when a part in the Active mode is changed or disappears.
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
• The display area for text strings or candidates to be converted is the same even in vertical screens.
16 dots
Horizontal screen orientation Vertical screen orientation
16 dots
Display area
Display area
Kana Entry
9 Text string to be entered is entered by the "Hiragana" key. A "Katakana" key is currently not supported.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
[Example] 「は」+「゛」⇒「ば」
Entry of hard pronunciation mark "and soft pronunciation mark" during hiragana entry is enabled only on specific characters.
Characters for which hard Characters for which soft
pronunciation marks are allowed pronunciation marks are allowed
Romaji Entry
Enter the text string to convert using the 1-byte alphabet keys. Romaji characters can be entered using either the 1-
byte upper-case or lower-case alphabet keys. 2- byte alphabet entry is not supported.
1-byte alphabet characters you have entered are converted to hiragana according to the rules summarized in the following table.
Characters not listed in the conversion table are entered as they are.
For the double consonant, when two of the same consonants excluding "n" are entered continuously, the first
consonant is converted to the double consonant.
a I u e o
あ い う え お
ka ki ku ke ko ga gi gu ge go
か き く け こ が ぎ ぐ げ ご
sa si/shi su se so za zi/ji zu ze zo
さ し す せ そ ざ じ ず ぜ ぞ
ta ti / chi tu/tsu te to da di du de do
た ち つ て と だ ぢ づ で ど
na ni nu ne no
な に ぬ ね の
ha hi hu/fu he ho ba bi bu be bo
は ひ ふ へ ほ ば び ぶ べ ぼ
ma mi mu me mo pa pi pu pe po
ま み む め も ぱ ぴ ぷ ぺ ぽ
ya yu yo
や ゆ よ
9
ra ri ru re ro
ら り る れ ろ
wa wo nn
kya kyi kyu kye kyo gya gyi gyu gye gyo
きゃ きぃ きゅ きぇ きょ ぎゃ ぎぃ ぎゅ ぎぇ ぎょ
sya/sha syi syu/shu sye/she syo/sho zya/ja zyi zyu/ju zye/je zyo/jo
しゃ しぃ しゅ しぇ しょ じゃ じぃ じゅ じぇ じょ
Message
hya hyi hyu hye hyo bya byi byu bye byo Display
ひゃ ひぃ ひゅ ひぇ ひょ びゃ びぃ びゅ びぇ びょ Alarm Display
Video Display
mya myi my mye myo pya pyi pyu pye pyo
みゃ みぃ みゅ みぇ みょ ぴゃ ぴぃ ぴゅ ぴぇ ぴょ Animation
Display
Function Controls
rya ryi ryu rye ryo Device
りゃ りぃ りゅ りぇ りょ BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
tsa tsi tse tso Settings
つぁ つぃ つぇ つぉ
tha thi thu the tho dha dhi dhu dhe dho
てゃ てぃ てゅ てぇ てょ でゃ でぃ でゅ でぇ でょ
fa fi fe fo
ふぁ ふぃ ふぇ ふぉ
xka/lka xke/lke
ヵ ケ
同一子
xwa/lwa − (マイナス)
音繰返
ゎ ー (長音符号)
っ
ye
いぇ
9 va vi/vyi vu ve/vye vo
ヴぁ ヴぃ ヴ ヴぇ ヴぉ
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Input mode
After the switch with "Text selection" set, the set text will be displayed in sequence.
The first touch The second touch The third touch The fourth touch The fifth touch The sixth touch
߁ ߃ ߅
[Example] 「は」+「゛」⇒「ば」
When inputing hiragana or katakana, "゛" will be entered as an independent character except the following charaters
to which hard and soft pronunciation marks need to be added.
Characters for which hard pronunciation marks are allowedCharacters for which soft pronunciation marks are
allowed.
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
On the VT1, block No.0 (1) was for alarm type 0 (1) or messages. On the VT3, alarms and messages
are completely separated, and each is handled by an ID No. and block No.
9 Setting message displays
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Setting
Item Description
Set how to specify the message block No.
Internally : Set the message block No. to be displayed.
Specify block No.
Externally : Set the value of the target word device as the block No. of the
message to be displayed. Any message block No. can be displayed.
Edit messages When this button is clicked, the edit screen for the message details is displayed.
When "Externally" is selected, set the target word device for specifying the block
Specify block No.
Target word
Device *1
No. to be displayed.
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
9
Select the data format of the target word device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in Alarm Display
List of available fonts
graphics data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
Video Display
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set. After font type and size are set
Font setting
in "Select font" window, the fonts will be added to the list of available fonts. Animation
Display
Message displays are automatically assigned the label "Mb_****" as the default. Correct this
Label Function Controls
label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended.) Device
BMP File
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Switching
Point When the block No. is set to "Externally" and the data format is set to "BCD", the maximum
number of blocks that can be used is 10000 (0 to 9999).
Reference The number of display lines differs on the VT1 and VT3 as follows:
Item VT1 VT3
Number of display lines 1 to 36 lines 1 to 48 lines
9 Set feed in 0.1 mm Operating method of Machine A Set feed After checking workpiece length,
Position
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Position
• In the case of horizontal scroll, the next line is displayed when the message content of the
Point currently displayed line disappears.
• When the "Fill spaces between messages" checkbox is marked in the case of horizontal
scroll, the message content set to the message block is displayed continuously.
In the above example, to delimit messages such as "...Method of Operation Set..." as "... Method of
Operation Set...", adjust the spacing by inserting a space when editing the message. After the
message contents are displayed 1 week circularly, "position of device A" is changed as "position".
Adjust the message contents of "Device A", namely, separate by adding backspace between the end
of 1st week and start of 2nd week.
• In the case of vertical scroll, the next scroll operation starts after all currently displayed lines
disappear.
• When the "Horizontal scroll"/"Vertical scroll" checkbox is marked, themessage display
does not become a key entry part.
Scroll bar
The length of the scroll bar indicates the entire message, and the length of the position cursor indicates the ratio with
the position of the currently displayed message.
Color/image frame
9
Item Description
Background display is displayed according to the "Background color" setting. When it is not
marked, the background color is transparent. (Drawing speed slows down.)
Background color *2 Select the background color of the message display.
Use background color specified When this checkbox is marked, the background color set for line in the message Numerical Value
Data frame The frame of data is displayed after selection. If it isnot marked, the frame color is transparent. Text Display
Data frame
Frame color *2 Select the frame color. Message
Text color Selects the text color. Display
Bold Sets the text of the message display to bold. Alarm Display
Shadow Add shadow onto text for message display. so that it has a 3D effect. Video Display
Text
Engraved Add shadow onto text for message display. so that it looks engraved.
Text
Decoration Animation
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the Display
Text shadow color*3
text decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color". Function Controls
Device
Use text color specified by When this checkbox is marked, the text color set for each line in the message
BMP File
message data *3 data is used. Switching
Specify text color When this checkbox is marked, the text color can be changed by writing RGB VNC Display
by device values to the target word device. Settings
Specify text color
by device*4 Sets the target word device.
Target word
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
device *5
"Device settings" window.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*2
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "Change the style of image frame", page 9-40
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3 "Color setting mode", page 9-47
*4 "About Specifying Text Color by Device", page 9-28
*5 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-39
9-3 Setting Message Displays
Item Description
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame when the
Frame width
image is resized.
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
Gray scale(G) When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary between
Dithering(D)
colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
Frame Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame when the
width(F) image is resized.
After If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
conversion dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Key entry
Item Description
Key entry *1,2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the
Key entry order*1
screen.
When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by touching a
Select by switch*1
Key entry message display.
When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar on the touch panel can be
Control scroll bar directly*2
9
directly operated.
When this checkbox is marked, each line on a message display on the
Select message line directly*2
touch panel can be directly selected.
When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position (numerical value
*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow. Message
Display
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
Alarm Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Video Display
Preview
Item Description
The message display is previewed according to entered block No.. In addition, when closing the
Block No. setting dialogue box by pressing "OK" button, the numerical value is displayed on edit screen as
in the preview display.
Reset Reset as a value for starting configuration.
Preview internally This item is set if block NO. is internally specified. After selection, message contents of
Key entry
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the message display becomes a key entry part. Scroll up and scroll down,
and notification of the cursor position to the notified word device are possible.
When "Scroll up" and "Scroll down" key entry switches are touched, messages protruding outside of the frame can be
displayed in message displays in the Active mode. Which part of the entire message is currently displayed can be
confirmed by the scroll bar.
Reference Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
9
Scroll bar
9
outside of the frame area.
Ė
Press the Default button.
Set up the items following the Ę
on-screen instructions.
When you have finished setting up,
Frame blinks
Point To switch a message display from the Active mode to the Display mode, touch any part other Alarm Display
than the scroll bar.
Video Display
Animation
Switching from the Active mode to the Display mode when the "Select message line directly" Display
Function Controls
checkbox is marked Device
BMP File
Switching
When a message display to which "Select message line directly" is set is in the Active mode, switch to the Display VNC Display
mode as follows: Settings
Point • Do not change the switch area when "Control scroll bar directly" or "Select message line
directly" are used. Doing so might cause message displays to malfunction.
• When Windows fonts are used, if the font size is too small, the info line may be smaller than
the smallest switch area. In this case, "Directly select info line" cannot operate normally.
Write
Machine A Notified word device
Machine B CANCEL
Machine C ENTER
DM00100 1
Line No.1
Numerical value "1" is written to the notified word device when the 1st line is selected and the "Apply" key entry switch is touched.
Write
Machine A Notified word device
9 Machine B
Machine C
CANCEL
ENTER
DM00100 2
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Line No.2
Numerical value "2" is written to the notified word device when the 2nd line is selected and the "Apply" key entry switch is touched.
When Cursor position ID offset = 100 and Notified word device = DM00100
Write
Machine A Notified word device
Machine B CANCEL
Machine C ENTER
DM00100 101
Line No.1
Numerical value "101 (1 + 100)" is written to the notified word device when the 1st line is selected and the "Apply" key
entry switch is touched.
Write
Machine A Notified word device
Machine B CANCEL
Machine C ENTER
DM00100 102
Line No.2
Numerical value "102 (2 + 100)" is written to the notified word device when the 2nd line is selected and the "Apply"
key entry switch is touched.
Message List
The message list displays a list of block Nos. of multiple messages and their content. Messages can be batch-edited.
9
Item Description
Alarm Display
Reference • You can select continuous multiple block lines by clicking the block No. lines with the key
Video Display
held down.
Animation
• You can select an entire block No. line by pressing + A key. Display
• You can select non-continuous multiple block lines by clicking the block No. lines with the key Function Controls
Device
held down.
BMP File
• If you select the block No. line and drag, you can select block No. lines in the range you dragged. Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
Cut Cuts the text of the selected message content.
Copy Pastes the text of the copied message content to the specified position.
Paste Pastes the text of the copied message content to the specified position.
Delete Deletes the text of the selected message content.
Enters (imports) messages from other VTS files or text files
Import *1
(*.txt) in all blocks or block units.
Export *1 Outputs (exports) messages in block units in text file format (*.txt).
Return to message list The message list is displayed by clicking the "Return to message list" button.
Block No. Displays the block No. currently being edited. (Sets the block No. to be edited.)
Comment Displays the comment of the block No. Comments can be entered directly.
Message entry field Enter the message. Messages can be entered up to 100 digits and up to 256 lines.
When this button is clicked, the text color, text decoration and background color can be set to
Color setting mode *2
each line of the message.
Item Description
Copy *2 Copies the color setting of the selected line.
Paste *2 Pastes the copied color setting to the selected line.
Return to message list The message list is displayed by clicking the "Return to message list" button.
Text color*1 Selects the color of the text on the selected line.
Bold Sets the text on the selected line to bold.
Shadow Gives the text on the selected line a shadow so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Decoration Engraved Gives the text on the selected line a shadow so that it looks engraved.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
dolor *1 decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Background color *1
BLK*1
Select the background color of the selected line.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
9
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Reference • You can select continuous multiple message lines by clicking the message lines with the
key held down.
• You can select all message lines by holding down the + A keys simultaneously.
• You can select non-continuous multiple message lines by clicking messages lines with the
key held down.
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Importing/exporting messages
Importing messages
Copy and paste the content of message from other VTS files/VT2 files or text files(*.txt).
1 Click the "Import" button in the screen for message list or editing the content of the messages.
The "Import messages" window is displayed.
Item Description
9 File Name
Select File
Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When this button is clicked when the message to copy is in another file, the "Open Import
File" window is displayed so that you can select the file.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Reference When you are importing messages for the first time, the "Open Import File" window and not the
"Import messages" window will be displayed. After selecting files and clicking “Open(O)” button,
"Import message" window is opened.
In such case, if "block to edit" is selected in "block", "Import message" window isn’t displayed.
Reference When display text string switching function is used, display text string ID can be selected as entry
targets.
Blocks Display text string ID
All Blk All IDs
Editing block All IDs/IDs to edit
3 Select the file containing the message to import, and click the "Open(O)" button.
The "Import messages" window (file containing the message to import) is displayed.
4 Click the comment in the "Import messages" window, select the message to import, and click the "OK"
button.
If imported from other VTS files/VT2 files, block No. in "Import message" window and all contents of message will be
imported directly.
Point Messages cannot be imported directly from VT1 files. If imported from VT1 files, the following
methods are used for import.
• Open the VT1 file in VT STUDIO and then save the file as a VTS file.
• Export the file as a text file on VT BUILDER.
Exporting messages
The comment of the block No. in the screen for editing the content of messages and the content of the message can
be output (exported) to a text file (*.txt).
1 Click the "Export" button in the screen for editing the content of the messages.
The "Export Messages" window is displayed.
Reference When display text string switching function is used, display text string ID to be exported can be
selected.
Blocks Display text string ID
All Blk All IDs
Editing block All IDs/IDs to edit
Numerical Value
3 Select the file type from "text file (MBCS)(*.txt)" or "text file (UNICODE)(*.txt)".
Display
Message
The comment of the block No. or the message content in the edit screen is output as a text file. Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Set the "Specify block No." for the message display to Externally, and the "Target word device" to PLC data memory.
The message of the block No. corresponding to the numerical value written to data memory can be displayed.
Display example
Operation Method
Machine A Method of Operation
Read Target word device
Set feed in 0.1 mm increments.
After checking workpiece
length, set to specified position.
DM00100 2
Text Display
Point When a numerical value other than 0 to 32767 has been written to the target word device, the
Message
message is not displayed. Display
Alarm Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Examples of displays when selecting an item in a list to display the detailed contents
Display a list of items, and display a detailed message of the content selected from that list.
The line No. of the currently selected line is written to the PLC data memory by notifying the cursor position in message
A in the figure below, and the message corresponding to the No. of the selected line is displayed for message B by
setting that data memory to the externally specified target word device.
Display example
Detailed Detailed
Item List Description Item List Description
Machine A Machine A Machine C Method of Operation
Machine B Machine B Press the Default button.
Specify each item according to
Machine C CANCEL
Machine C CANCEL the on-screen instructions.
Machine D Machine D When you have finished
Machine E ENTER Machine E ENTER setting the items, press the
End Setting button.
Detailed
Description
Block No.13 Machine C Method of Operation
Press the Default button.
Specify each item according to the on-screen
instructions. When you have finished setting
the items, press the End Setting button.
Specify 2 as the "Block No." at Internally, and Write the line No. to PLC data memory DM00100 by
display the item list. "Notify cursor position".
If "Cursor position ID offset" is set to 10, the numerical
value to be written to the notified word device is as
follows when the line No. is selected.
Select line No.1 (machine A) -> Numerical value 11 is written.
Message display B (detailed description)
Select line No.2 (machine B) -> Numerical value 12 is written.
Select line No.3 (machine C) -> Numerical value 13 is written.
9
Set PLC data memory DM00100 that is set as "Notified word
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Up to 4 alarms can be used in an entire screen, and divided separately by alarm ID(0 to 3).
The following 2 settings are required before alarm display.
• Setting alarm displays
"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60
• Alarm system settings
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
Display item
(item name)
9 Alarm display
00/05/30 00:00:10
00/05/30 00:00:25
3
25
Confirmed
Occurred
Motor rpm drop
Horizontal table line Vertical table line Frame line Scroll bar
Alarm display
Display items : you can select the items to be displayed, or set the sequence of display items.
Sequencing condition: you can set alarm display according to time sequence or the sequence of generating
frequency.
In addition, other display settings are possible.
Please confirm the details of settings in the alarm display setting.
Setting alarm displays
"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60
Real-time display
Only currently generated alarms are displayed.
The contents of real-time alarm display are shown in table below.
Alarm has occurred
Alarm detection trigger State of trigger bit Alarm display Alarm display
Occurrence ↑, ON Display ON/Occur
Occurrence↑/recovery↓ OFF : Not display -
ON : Not display -
Occurrence↓
OFF Display OFF/Occur
Confirm of alarms - Display after setting *1 CHK/Confirm
*1 "Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
Log display
9
Point When "clearing all the same alarms" (key entry switch) by "deleting a line", the
corresponding logs are still included in the log number, though they are deleted from the log
display.
Reference In VT1, every alarm ID(0 to 1) can record up to 512 alarm logs.
"Confirmation" and "restore" are also included in log No..
The display contents of alarm are displayed according to different alarm states and levels.
Alarm state
The alarm state can be divided into "occurrence, confirmation and restore".
With three states of "occurrence, confirmation and restore", you can set text strings for corresponding display, but
also the background color and text color for various state displays.
• State display text string/color classification(background color and text color)/state display settings
"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60
• Setting of "maintain confirmation log".
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
Level
The alarm contents set in the same alarm ID can be divided according to levels(1 to 8).
After the alarm contents are divided by the degree of significance, they can be displayed orderly according to level, or
the levels are displayed by different colors (background color and text color) for easy check of alarm display.
Low High
Reference After combination of alarm state, level, background color and text color, they can be set as easily
identifiable alarm display.
1st alarm
In the case of absence of "Occurrence" state of alarm (generated alarm are in previous state of "restore"), the text
color and background color of the first alarm can be changed. The alarm contents can be highlighted as a 1st factor.
Normal alarm
9
Select the number of alarm detection device for Normal alarm
Message
Display
12345
Alarm Display
PLC
Video Display
12345
Animation
Display
Function Controls
ABCD Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Device monitoring
interval internally set on VT3: T
Extended alarm
The number of alarm detection devices when extended alarm (sequential device)
is selected.
Alarm detection can be executed by using up to 256 sequential devices.
The number of alarm detection devices when extended alarm (individual device)
is selected.
Alarm detection can be executed by using up to 256 devices.
VT3
12345
PLC
12345
ABCD
Device monitoring
interval internally set on VT3: T
Monitored target
…
…
Numerical Value
(N) T A+B (N) is updated.
B (N) Display
Text Display
Sampling speed Message
Display
Sampling speed Description
Alarm Display
Low (screen renewal Priority is given to updating of monitored target A. For this reason, the update cycle (time it
priority) takes forall devices on monitored target B to update once) ofmonitored target B is extended. Video Display
Animation
Medium
Display
Function Controls
High speed (alarm Priority is given to updating monitored target B.(The update cycle of monitored target B is short- Device
detection priority) ened.) For this reason, the time it takes to updatemonitored target A increases. BMP File
Switching
Sampling speed VNC Display
Settings
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
Please use extended alarm in case there are many devices requiring alarm detection and the monitoring cycle of
alarm detection device is very slow.
Point When there are many alarm detection devices during data recording of extended alarms, data
acquisition time (recording time) differs a lot from occurrence time of alarm (actual occurrence
time).
Setting
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
Alarm ID Select alarm ID(0 to 3)to be displayed.
Device settings *1
After clicking the button, the system setting screen of alarm will be displayed.
Message setting *1
Setting display mode of alarm.
Log display : according to the state number of alarm detection device(bit), the alarm
Display mode contents are displayed as per "sequencing conditions".
Real-time display: the alarm contents of alarm detection devices corresponding to bit
of ON(or OFF)state are displayed as per "sequencing conditions".
Select the sequencing methods of alarm contents.
Time : the last alarm content is displayed at the top.
Counting : the alarm contents with maximum cumulative number are displayed
at the top.
Sort conditions *2 Alarm No. : the alarm contents with smaller alarm No. are displayed at the top.
Level+ time : the alarm contents with higher level are collated in priority sequence,
or, collated in time sequence if within the same level.
Level+ counting: the alarm contents with higher level are collated in priority sequence,
or, collated in cumulative number if within the same level.
After selection, the alarm contents are displayed in inverse sequence according to the
Reverse
sequencing methods set in "Sequencing conditions".
Set the display digit number of alarm(1 to 100 bits). Set one character as one digit for
1-byte characters and one character as two digits for 2-byte characters.Backspace
Number of Display digit *3
shall be added when setting of date, time, state and alarm frequency. Please add
required backspace according to respective digit number.
Specify number of digits with After selection, you can set the display digit number for various display items. The digit
each display items number for various display items can be set in "Display item" tab.
*1 "Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
*2 In VT1, alarm contents for log display are displayed in time sequence; alarm contents for real-time display are
displayed in alarm No. sequence.
Item Description
Set the alarm line number(1 to 48 lines) to be displayed. Please drag the scroll bar if
Number of Display line *3 you intend to check alarm log exceeding the displayed line number up to 48.
Even-numbered lines can be only set when "line mode" selects "2-line display".
Line mode Set if an alarm is displayed in 1 or 2 lines.
Display occurrence, in one line
After selection, three states (occurrence, confirm and restore) are displayed in 1 line.
confirmation restore
After selection, alarm permits horizontal scroll automatically. The number of display
Horizontal scroll
lines at this time is fixed to one line.
When horizontal scroll is selected and this checkbox is marked, messages are displayed
Fill spaces between messages
with the spacing between messages shifted.
Vertical scroll After selection, alarm contents permit vertical scroll automatically.
Scroll bar After selection, a scroll bar will be displayed at right of alarm display.
After selection, title line is displayed. This can be set only when line mode selects 1
Show title
line display.
You can select the text used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/
Windows font".
Font *4 When this checkbox is marked, stroke font is used. Stroke front cannot be set when
the number of display digits is set to 51 or more, or the number of display lines is set to
26 or more.
This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in graphics
List of available fonts
data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set. After font type and size are set in
Font setting
"Select font" window, the fonts will be added to the list of available fonts.
State display After selection, the text strings of "Occur/confirm/restore" are displayed with full-angle
string 4 characters or 8 half-width characters.
Set the display text string for "Occurrence" state.
Occurrence
In alarm system setting, initial value for alarm trigger of alarm ID is:
"Occurrence ↑"/"Occurrence↑/recovery↓" :ON
"Occurrence↓" :OFF
9
Set the display text string for "confirmation" state.
*3 The number of display lines differs on the VT1 and VT3 as follows: Video Display
Example 1 Processing is set as "overlapping old alarms" when memory size is exceeded, and real-time alarm
display is collated according to generating sequence.
9 In case the log hasnít spilled over, it allows display as per sequencing conditions. But, when the generated alarm
hasnít recovered, but spilled over from log, the spillover alarm is displayed in alarm No. sequence.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Example 2 Processing is set as "Stop alarm monitoring" when memory size is exceeded, while log display (time
sequence) and real-time display (time sequence) are used for alarm display.
When new alarm No. 8,9 have generated and exceeded the memory size,
Log display(time sequence): log display is not updated.
Real time display (chronological order): Alarms that newly occurred are displayed.
Thick line appears.
Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time
Since log hasn’t been updated, the log display will not be updated (the logs of alarm No. 8,9 are not maintained).
During real-time display, the latest alarm is displayed in alarm No. sequence (the Occurrence frequency and time,
etc, of latest alarm No.8,9 is displayed).
Processing when memory sizeis exceeded
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
Example 3 When log display (time sequence) and real-time display (time sequence) are used for alarm display.
If alarm Nos. 2 and 5 are deleted in the log display by "Delete 1 line"
(key entry switch), etc. when alarm Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5 are not restored
9
Log display (chronological order)
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Line mode
When 1-line display mode is set, time display, alarm frequency display, state display, alarm level, word log and alarm
message are displayed in 1 line.
When 2-line mode is set, time display, alarm frequency display, state display, alarm level and word log are displayed
at upper line, while alarm message displayed at lower line.
When "Specify the digit number of various display items" are set, and line mode is set as "2-line display", display digit
number are decided by either first line or second line with bigger digit number.
Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore
9 Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00 Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore
Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:10 Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:00 03/15 12:10
Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00
Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore
Conveyor error stop Restore 03/15 12:20 Conveyor error stop Restore 03/15 12:00 03/15 12:10 03/15 12:20
Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:10
Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Cover A open
• In the case of horizontal scroll, the next line is displayed when the message content of the
Point
currently displayed line disappears.
• If "Reduce interval of message" is selected during horizontal scroll, the alarm contents set
in iMessagei of alarm system setting "Message" will be continuously displayed with 4-digit
interval.
• As shown in above-specified examples, next alarm content will be displayed after 4-digit
space is reserved for "Initial pressure drops Workpiece blockage".
• In the case of vertical scroll, the next scroll operation starts after all currently displayed
lines disappear.
• When the "Horizontal scroll"/"Vertical scroll" checkbox is marked, themessage display
does not become a key entry part.
Scroll bar
The length of scroll bar represents all alarms, and the length of position cursor represents the position and
percentage of alarms displayed.
Title line
Display items selected in "Display item" tab of alarm can be displayed at topmost section of alarm display.
Date(occur/confirm/restore) Date
Display items
Item Description
Select one ore more alarm display items, and enable them to be displayed according to selected sequence.
• Alarm message • Restored date
• Alarm state • Occurrence count *1
Select display item
• Date(occur, confirm, restore) • Alarm level
• Occurred date • Word log*2
• Confirmed date
9 Add
Select the intended items from candidate column of display items. After clicking ((add)
button, the selected items will be added to "Select display item" column.
Select the intended items from "Select display item" column. After clicking ((delete) )
Delete
SETTING BASIC PARTS
button, the selected items will be deleted from "Select display item" column.
Up/Down Switch the display sequence of display items in "Select display item" column.
Item Select items from display items of "Select display item" column.
Set the item names of various display items displayed from ìSelect display itemî column to title line.
Number of display Set the number of display digits of various display items in "Select display item" column. This can
digits be set by clicking "Setting" tab to specify the number of display digit of various display items.
Display vertical right
After selection, vertical lines will be displayed at right-hand of display items of alarm.
line of ruled line
Display date After selection, the time (YY/MM/DD) of alarm will be displayed.
Year not
After selection, year is not displayed.
displayed
Date format
4-digit display
After selection, year is displayed in 4-digit.
of year
Display time After selection, the time (hour, minute, second) of alarm is displayed.
Second not
After selection, second is not displayed.
displayed
Select the display data format of word log from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/BCD".
display format
Data Format
Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
Word log
Decimal point Set the position (0 to 6 digits) where the decimal point is inserted referenced to the
position *3 lowermost digit. To not insert a decimal point, set "0".
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
*1 The maximum occurrence frequency of alarm is 65535. This value is still maintained even if itís exceeded.
When the number of display digit of various display items is specified, "----" is displayed if the frequency
exceeds the number of display digit.
Up to 65535 is accumulated within VT3.
*2 "Option setting mode", page 9-91
When the number of display digit of various display items is specified, "----" is displayed if the log value
exceeds the number of display digit of word log.
*3 Example of setting of decimal point position
"Setting Numerical Value Displays", page 9-4
Year Month
(4-digit display) (English annotation) Date Space (AM/PM display) Time Min. Sec.
Example 06(2006) / 01(Jan) / 23 (AM) 10 : 23 : 56
Number 2(4) 1 2(3) 1 2 1 0(2) 2 1 2 1 2
of digits
Max. 22 digits
Point The alarms in occurrence state prior to switching-off will be resumed once switching-off.
Alarm (1)
9
Alarm (1): 1 count before power OFF.
Alarm (2): 1 count before power OFF + 1
Alarm (2) count at power ON.
(Alarm occurrences when the
Power cut
Text display
"Classification of alarm contents", page 9-56
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Color/image frame
Item Description
Image frame Image frame can be used after selection.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Image
Free style If this item is selected when image frame is used, the display images can be changed.
frame
Change *1 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Color Select the color system of image frame.
9
After selection, you can select the background color of alarm display. If not selected,
Background color
the background color is transparent.
Select the color specify method of background color from "don't classify color/classify
Background color
Color specify method state/classify level/classify state+level/classify item". When line mode is set to "2-line
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Text
Decorati Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text color
on Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color *3
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Title line You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Text color *3 Select the text color of title line.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Title line
Text
Decorati Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
on Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color *3
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Item Description
1st alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
Text color*3 Selects the text color.
Primary alarm*4
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color *3
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*3
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 9-40
*2 Refer to the following descriptions.
*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*4 1st alarm
"Classification of alarm contents", page 9-56
Classify state
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK Video Display
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Animation
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2 Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Classify level
Item Description
Color
Specified by Level 1 to 8 Select the background of various lines according to different alarm levels(1 to 8).
level
Basic Color Select the background color.
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
9 The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Classify state+level
Item Description
Color Set the text colors after combination of state (occur, confirm, restore) and alarm level(1
Specified by Color settings to 8). Click and select the combination of state and level, then select the text color
state/level through color setting.
Basic Color Select the background color.
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Classify item
Item Description
Color Specified by Item Select the text color of various display items.
Basic Color Select the background color.
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection.
BLK
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval. 9
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Classify state
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
Item Description BMP File
Switching
Text color Set the text color of various states (occur, confirm, restore).
Color Specified
VNC Display
Bold Sets the text to bold. Settings
Text
by state
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Decoration
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Text shadow color
The settings are the same as "Text color".
Basic Color Selects the text color.
Title You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Classify level
Item Description
Text color Select the text color of various levels (1 to 8).
Color Specified
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Decoration
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Text shadow color
The settings are the same as "Text color".
9 Basic Color
Title
Selects the text color.
You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Classify state+level
Item Description
Set the text colors after combination of state (occur, confirm, restore) and alarm level(1
Text color to 8). Click and select the combination of state and level, then select the text color
through color setting.
Color Specified
Color settings
by State/level
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color decoration.
The settings are the same as "Text color". 9
Basic Color Selects the text color.
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Classify item
Item Description
Text color Select the text color of various display items.
Color Specified
Decoration
9 Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color decoration.
The settings are the same as "Text color".
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Key entry
Item Description
Key entry *1,2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Key entry order *1 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen.
Select by switch *1 After selection, you can execute key entry by clicking alarm display.
the settings in "Option setting mode" of alarm system setting will be executed.
*2 After selection, you can select directly various lines of alarm display on the touch
Select message line directly
button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
position *2
Select the data format to be written to the notified word device from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
Cursor position ID offset Set the numerical value to be written to notified word device after alarm No. is added. Numerical Value
Display
Notify ID with each cursor
After selection, notify cursor position ID with each cursor moves.
move
Text Display
Key entry
After "key entry" is selected, they are turned into key entry parts. You can scroll up or down, clear alarm log, and
notify cursor position to notified word device, etc.
By clicking "scroll up" or "scroll down" key entry switch, all alarms in active mode that are outside of alarm display
screen range can be displayed. You can confirm which part of alarms is displayed through scroll bar.
Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
Frame blinks
(Active mode)
Scroll bar
9
ENTER
SETTING BASIC PARTS
In addition, after pressing key entry switches of "Delete 1 line", "Clear all" and "Clear the same alarms", you can
delete alarm logs selected under log display mode.
"Delete 1 line" key entry switch : delete the selected alarm logs.
"Clear all" key entry switch : delete all alarm logs.
"Clear the same alarms" key entry switch : delete all alarm logs of the same alarm No..
ً χ ً χ
08:58:46OFFSource pressure drop 08:58:46OFFSource pressure drop
ٕ ω ٕ ω
08:51:15ONSource pressure drop 08:51:15ONSource pressure drop
ENTER ENTER
08:35:21ONWater vat temperature drop DEL
08:22:15ONWorkpiece blockage DEL
Point • If "Delete 1 line" and "Clear the same alarms", the occurrence frequency will not be
cleared.
• If "Clear all", the occurrence frequency will be cleared.
• You can only perform "Delete 1 line" for "occurrence". The alarms will not be deleted even
if performing "confirmation" and "restore". But, if "1 line display of occurrence,
confirmation and restore" is set, the alarms will be deleted.
By pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, you can record the date and time of confirmed alarm logs, and save
them as alarm logs.
Select the alarm log and touch the The date and time checked for the
"Confirm" key entry switch. alarm log are memorized.
Point • After confirmed and restored alarm logs are selected, the confirmed date and time cannot
be saved even if pressing "confirmation" key entry switch.
• You can only perform "confirmation" for the latest "occurrence" of alarms. When the
"occurrence" of alarms with over two same alarm Nos. is displayed, no "confirmation" can
be executed for old "occurrence" of alarms.
When the top half (bottom half) of the scroll bar is touched, the area where the cursor is located is displayed at the
bottommost line (topmost line) of the message display, and the cursor is displayed at the topmost line (bottommost
line). (This is the same operation as when a "Page down" or "Page up" key entry switch is used.)
Numerical Value
Display
Point When the alarm mode of alarm display is switched to display mode, click the section outside
of the scroll bar. Text Display
Message
Display
Switching from the Active mode to the Display mode when the "Select message line directly" Alarm Display
When the alarm display set to "Select message line directly" is in active mode, the method of switching to display Animation
Display
mode is as follows: Function Controls
Device
• By pressing the "Cancel" key entry switch
BMP File
• By touching the line where the cursor is located Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Point • Do not change the switch area when "Control scroll bar directly" or "Select message line
directly" are used. Doing so might cause message displays to malfunction.
• When Windows fonts are used, if the font size is too small, the info line may be smaller than
the smallest switch area. In this case, "Directly select info line" cannot operate normally.
Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL
Alarm No.0
When selecting alarm No.0 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 0 is written into notified word
device.
Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL
9
Alarm No.5
SETTING BASIC PARTS
When selecting alarm No.5 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 1 is written into notified word
device.
When Cursor position ID offset = 100 and Notified word device = DM0100
Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL
Alarm No.0
When selecting alarm No.0 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 100(0+100) is written into
notified word device.
Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL
Alarm No.5
When selecting alarm No.5 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 101(1+100) is written into
notified word device.
Reference When "Notify ID with cursor moves" is selected, the numerical value of alarm No. for selected lines
will be written into notified word device whenever the cursor moves.
Preview
Item Description
Add
"Alarm preview setting" window *1 is displayed.
Add preview setting. 9
Delete Delete the selected preview setting.
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
Item Description BMP File
Switching
The content of settings will be displayed in alarm system setting(message). Select the alarm
Message VNC Display
message for preview display. Settings
State Select the alarm state for preview display.
Advanced After "Advanced settings"button is clicked, "Advance settings" window will be displayed. You can
execute preview settings of time of occurrence, time of confirmation, occurrence frequency, word
settings log and 1 time alarm.
Point The settings for preview display sometimes may differ from actual display.
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Setting Message
Setting
Specify alarm detection device for various IDs of alarm ID(0 to 3).
9
Item Description
Item Description
After clicking (Advanced setting) button, the memory size and extended alarm can be
Advanced settings
set.
Displays which blocks of the total 12 blocks of memory size are in use. After clicking
Memory size *5
(Memory size) button, you can set in "Setting alarm memory size" window.
After selection, the rate of utilization of memory size will be saved to specified device.
The value will be updated in the following cases.
Rate of consumed
of memory size *8
• In the case of change over 5%
• When memory size over alarm is opened.
• In the case of memory size of 0%, 100%.
Memory size
Memory size
After selection, the set value reached by memory size will be notified.
over alarm
Sets the notified bit device.
Notified bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Advanced settings
Device *4
settings" window.
Nofity when
memory is Set in a unit of 1%.
consumed
Processing when
Select the processing method from "Overlapping old alarm/stop alarm monitoring"
memory sizeis
when memory size is exceeded.
exceeded *7
When "Extended(specifying sequential device)/extended(specifying individual device)"
Notify end of
is selected from data acquisition mode and then selected, send the notification that
Extended alarm
reading of alarm detection device has completed 1 week.
Extended alarm
9
After selection, notified bit device will be set before next cycle of reading alarm
before execution
detection device.
Sampling Select sampling speed from "low speed(screen updating with a priority)/medium speed/
Speed *1
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Point For the alarms ("occur") exceeding logs, when "confirmation" key entry switch is
pressed, "confirmation" will be displayed in real-time display, but no log is maintained.
Thus, when the same alarm is displayed in log, the alarm isnít displayed.
Number of Devices
When "Data acquisition mode" is set to "Extended (specifying individual device)", alarm detection device can be set.
Clicking the "Device settings" button displays the "Individualdevice settings" window.
Item Description
Up/Down Change the sequence of alarm detection device.
Memory size
After clicking “Memory size” button, "Setting alarm memory size" window will be displayed.
Here, you can set the memory size of various alarm IDs (0 to 3).
Text Display
Point During PC->VT data sending, the alarm log data saved to internal memory (SRAM) of VT3 will be VNC Display
Settings
cleared.
PC->VT Send data
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
Reference During PC->VT data sending, the alarm log data saved to internal memory (SRAM) of VT3 will be cleared.
• VT3 system mode
"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Function control by devices
"Clear alarm log", page 9-124
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• "Clear all" key entry switch
"Key entry", page 8-26
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-85
9-4 Setting Alarm Displays
Message
Item Description
Alarm ID Display alarm ID (0 to 3) in edit.
Cut Cut the selected text.
9 Copy
Paste
Copy the selected text.
Paste the copied text to specified position.
Delete Delete the selected text.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
*1 Input (import) alarm in a unit of alarm ID from other VTS files/VT2 files or CSV files (*.csv), text
Import
files (UNICODE) (*.txt).
Export *1 Output (export) alarms in a unit of alarm ID from CSV files (*.csv) or text files (UNICODE) (*.txt).
Device No. Display device No. of alarm detection device.
Message entry field Input alarm contents. Up to 100 digits can be input.
*1 After clicking "Option setting mode", you can set the level, function, bit set, word value write and
Option setting mode
word log of various alarm contents.
*1 For details, see the following description.
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Import, export
Importing alarms
Alarm contents are copied and pasted from other VTS files/VT2 files or CSV files(*.csv), text files(UNICODE) (*.txt).
1 Click the "Import" button in the screen for editing alarm system settings (message).
The "Import alarms" window is displayed.
Item Description
9 File Name Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When this item is clicked when the desired alarm to copy is in another file, the "Open Import
File selection
File" window is displayed for selection of the file.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Reference When you are importing alarms for the first time, the "Open Import File" window and not the "Import
alarms" window will be displayed. To open the "Import alarms" window, select the file and click the
"Open" button.
3 Select the files containing the alarm to import, and click "Open(O)" button.
The "Import alarms" window (file containing the alarm to import) is displayed.
4 Select the alarm to import from the alarm IDs in the "Import alarms" window, and click the "OK" button.
When imported from CSV files (*.csv), text files(UNICODE) (*.txt), the message will be imported to message entry
column of alarm ID being edited.
When imported from other VTS files/VT2 files, alarm ID and alarm contents in "Alarm import" window will be
imported.
Point Messages cannot be imported directly from VT1 files. To import from a VT1 file, first execute
either of the following:
• Open the VT1 file in VT STUDIO and then save the file as a VTS file.
• Export the file as a CSV file on VT BUILDER.
Exporting alarms
The alarm contents in the screen for editing the alarm system settings (message) can be output (exported) to a CSV
file (*.csv) or an UNICODE Text file(Excel format, *.txt).
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9 Point • When CSV (UNICODE Text) files are imported, the values in the A column (device No.) are
not imported. Set the alarm detection devices on .VT STUDIO.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
• When you make a CSV (UNICODE Text) file, enter at least one character in cell A1. (in this
example, "Alarm")
• Enter the alarm content starting from cell B2.
• To import the alarm contents of VT1 files, export the alarm contents on VT BUILDER as a
CSV file, and import the CSV file on VT STUDIO.
9
Set bit *2
Sets the target bit device.
Target bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *3
settings" window.
Sets the word value (0 to 65535) to write to the target word device when the "Apply" key
*1 Level
"Classification of alarm contents", page 9-56
Numerical Value
"Setting", page 9-60 Display
Video Display
Point Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of devices, Animation
screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors. To display Display
multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an actual working Function Controls
Device
unit. BMP File
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens" Switching
VNC Display
Global window Nofity error Settings
"Other", page 12-31
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Display example
To display only ON alarms from among alarms corresponding to alarm detection relays 1000 to 1015 in chronological
order.
Alarm No.0
Alarm No.1
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Display example
To display the alarm log corresponding to alarm detection relays 1000 to 1015 in chronological order
Numerical Value
Display
How to remedy an alarm can be displayed as a message if you select the alarm for which the remedy is to be
displayed as an alarm message, and touching the "Apply" key entry switch.
The currently selected alarm No. is written to PLC data memory by "Notify cursor position" in the alarm display, and
the message (remedy) corresponding to the currently selected alarm No. is displayed as the message display by
specifying that data memory to the externally specified target word device.
Display example
The above example is for when the remedy for alarm No.1 (workpiece blockage) is set to message block No.1.
The remedy for each alarm No. is set to message displays.
Remedy for alarm No.0 -> Message block No.0
Remedy for alarm No.1 -> Message block No.1
Remedy for alarm No.2 -> Message block No.2
: :
"9-3 Setting Message Displays"
Setting example
Setting alarm displays
Write the alarm No. to PLC data memory DM00100 by "Notify cursor position".
The alarm No. can be written to the notified word device by setting "Cursor position ID offset" to 0.
When alarm No.0 (source pressure drop) is selected, numerical value "0" is written to the notifiedword device,
and when alarm No.1 (workpiece blockage) is selected, numerical value "1" is writtento the notified word device.
Cursor position ID offset "Key entry", page 9-77 9
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Reference PLC data memory values are sometimes held, and the previous remedy for the alarm is sometimes Display
Function Controls
displayed in the message display when the power is turned ON or a page is switched. Previous Device
messages can be set to not display by the following method: BMP File
Switching
• Set so that numerical value "65535" (data format: unsigned decimal) is written to the target word device
VNC Display
(specified externally) for the message by "Notify screen switching" to the screen in which the message Settings
Printing date/time
When a word log is set to the alarm display area, the word log is printed in three lines for each alarm.
Video (VGA)
Message
Video (VT1
160 x 120, 320 x 240, 480 x 360, 640 x 480, free size *3
Size of
Display
compatible)
Alarm Display
RGB (VGA) 160 x 120, 320 x 240, 480 x 360, 640 x 480, free size *3
RGB (SVGA) 200 x 150, 400 x 300, 600 x 450, 800 x 600, free size *3 Video Display
RGB(XGA) 256 x 192, 512 x 384, 768 x 576, 1024 x 768, free size *3 Animation
Display
Gray scale After selection, the color video display is converted to gray scale.
Function Controls
CV-300/100 When this checkbox is marked, video output for CV-300/100 is supported. Device
BMP File
Video displays are automatically assigned the label "Vid_****" as the default. Correct this Switching
Label label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is VNC Display
appended. Settings
*1 No normal display is possible in the case of conflict between input setting of graphics “RGB(VGA)/RGB(SVGA)/R
GB(XGA)” and actual signal input to VT3 (VGA/SVGA/XGA).
*2 The original size of the video image captured from camera is the maximum size that can be selected as the
display area size. With sizes other than the maximum, the original size will be reduced for display.
*3 About any size
Video images of original size (size of input signal) are reduced to the basic size. The size to be displayed can
be resized in 2-dot increments within the following settingranges from the basic size. When the video image has
been resized, part of the video display that is currently placed may be displayed cut from the center of the basic
size
*4 The display area sizes for horizontal and vertical screens are as follows, for example, for a 400 x 300 dots
SETTING BASIC PARTS
display.
400 300
300
400
Point • Two or more video display parts for the same channel cannot be placed in a single page.
(For example, only one video display part will function for video display evenif multiple
video display parts for channel 1 are placed on a single pageincluding windows.)
• All video display parts can be displayed simultaneously even if they are overlapped. *
* If video display parts are overlapped, VT2 and VT3 cannot be displayed due to different display.
For the details, refer to the manual of VT2.
"8-5 Setting Video Displays", VT2 Series Reference Manual
• If video display parts for video input(channel 1 to 4) and RGB input are placed in the same
screen (page, window), or in the same page *
* Video input(channel 1 to 4) and RGB input cannot be displayed simultaneously due to different
displays of VT2 and VT3. For the details, refer to the manual of VT2.
"8-5 Setting Video Displays", VT2 Series Reference Manual
• other drawn graphs, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs can be displayed
overlapping video display parts.
• When the system memory area is set to VT mode and control is in use, video cannot be
displayed if bit 8 (video input) is set to 0 (OFF). Video is displayed at all times when control
is not in use or when MT mode is set.
• Video display parts can be only placed in a coordinate with starting X and Y coordinates as
even numbers.
• When the video camera orientation is left as it is, and the VT3 is set to vertical screen, the
display is as follows. To display video correctly on a vertical screen, adjust the orientation
of the video camera.
9
Alarm Display
Reference If GIF files are dragged to edit screen of VT STUDIO, they will be set as animation display parts.
Frame
Frame indicates a series of animation plays. Multiple images in animation display are set individually.
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
Set the updating method of frame display.
Frame updating Specified cycle: update frame with specified cycle
Specified No.: update frame with specified device.
When frame updating is specified as "specified cycle", the updating cycle of frame can be set.
Updating cycle *1 Internally : Internal timer is used. Updating cycle can be set in a unit of 0.1s.
Externally : use device to specify the updating cycle.
When "Updating cycle" is set to "Externally", word device used for specifying the
Updating cycle specified device updating cycle is set.
*9 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window. The updating cycle can be specified within the range of 1 to 100 (unit of 0.1s).
The data format for updating cycle specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
When frame updating is specified as "Specified No.", the device used for specifying
Frame No. specified device *2,3 frame No. is set. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be
set in the "Device settings" window.
The data format for frame No. specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Form
decimal /signed decimal".
Display preview image and additional information of various frames. After double-clicking
the frames, the image files can be selected from "Open image". According to different
Frame image display area updating methods set in "Frame updating", additional information may differ as follows:
Updating cycle: display frame No. and playback time*4.
Specified No.: display frame No. and device value.
When frame updating is specified as "Specifying cycle", set if itís displayed cyclically
Repeat display
after all frames are displayed. Cyclic display is possible after selection.
Set the number of frame(1 to 32). When the number of frames is increased, add
Number of frame frames at the final position. When the number of frames is reduced, start deletion from
the last frame.
Insert
After clicking, insert frame before the selected frame. No insertion can be executed
when reaching the maximum number of frames (32). 9
After clicking, delete the selected frames. No deletion can be executed when reaching
Delete
*1 Stop updating frame when the value lower than 0.1s or over 10s is specified. VNC Display
Settings
*2 Selectable from “PLC device/indirect/calculation/cell”
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Frame No. is specified within the range of 0 to -1.
*4 The value of playback time is displayed only when "updating time" is set to "Internally".
*5 Selectable image formats include BMP, JPEG and GIF files.
*6 This item can be set when frame updating is specified as "Specified No.".
*7 This item can be set when frame updating is specified as "Specified cycle" without cyclic display.
*8 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Play
Item Description
During playback process, move rightward according to displayed frame No..
Slide Alternatively, display the frame of moving target when the position of slide is moved.
Preview will pause if clicking slide during playback process.
Frame Display frame No. displayed during playback process.
Repeat After selection and displaying all frames, playback is executed from the first frame.
After clicking "Playback" button, the images specified in the display frame can be
Play/Close
switched. Stop playback after clicking "Pause" button.
Scaling (frame)
If scaling is used, you can update frame No. according to the value of frame No. specified device.
BCD 0 to 9999
[Example] When the value of frame No. specified device (data format: unsigned decimal) is between 0 to 999,
after setting the point number=4, input range=0 to 999.
Position control
The animation display parts are displayed after being shifted to specified position.
Shift based on animation display parts at upper left.
Item Description
After selection, the position control can be set.
Position control Point specification: display the specified coordinate.
Direct specification: display the specified coordinate to device value. 9
Numerical Value
Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Item Description
Set the method of updating the position of animation display parts.
Point update Specified cycle : shift points with specified cycle.
Specified No. : shift points with specified device value.
Point updating is specified as "specified cycle", set the time interval shifting to the next point.
Updating cycle *1 Internally : Internal timer is used. Updating cycle can be set in a unit of 0.1s.
Externally : use device to specify the updating cycle.
When "Updating cycle" is set to "Externally", word device used for specifying the
updating cycle is set.
Updating cycle specified device
*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
The updating cycle can be specified within the range of 1 to 100 (unit of 0.1s).
The data format for updating cycle specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
When point updating is specified as "Specified No.", the device used for specifying
point No. is set.
Point No. specified device *3
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
The data format for point No. specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal /signed decimal".
Set the point number for shifting animation display parts(1 to 32). If point number is
Number of points
increased, the point number of "Point list" will also increase or decrease accordingly.
When point updating selects "Specifying cycle", set if it returns to starting point after
Repeated display
shifting to the final point. Cyclic display is possible after selection.
X-coordinate of various points is displayed. The absolute coordinate of X-direction can
X-coordinate*4
be directly input.
Y-coordinate of various points is displayed. The absolute coordinate of Y-direction can
Point list Y-coordinate*4
be directly input.
9 Device value
Time (s)
When point updating selects "Specified No.", the device value is displayed.
When point updating selects "Specified cycle", the playback time is displayed.
Inset new points before selected points. No insertion can be executed when reaching
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Insert
the maximum number of points(32).
Delete the selected points. No deletion can be executed when "point number" is a
Delete
minimum value (1), or no point is selected.
Notify end of
Set if sending end notice after shifting to the final point.
movement
When "Notify shift end" is selected, set the Notify shift end device.
Notify shift
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Notify end of end device *2
settings" window.
movement *5
Set the mode of checking Notify shift end device.
Mode A contact : when shifting to the final point, set the Notify shift end device
B contact : when shifting to the final point, set the Notify shift end device
Reset bit at start When "Notify shift end" is selected, set if resetting shift end notifybit at start of shift.
Devide points
After selection, divide the point space. After that, shift can be displayed smoothly.
equidistantly *7
Devide points When shifting after setting the division point space, shift the amount of shift for a time
Interval
equidistantly *6 (unit of dot).
Divide when
move from end
After selection, division is also possible when shifting from final point to starting point.
point to start
point
Use Scaling After selection, itís in a state of setting "input range".
Use Scaling *8
Input range Specify the input range of point No. specified device.
Processing out of specified range*8 Set if point No.0 is displayed when the value outside of input range is specified.
*1 Stop shifting when the value lower than 0.1s or over 10s is specified.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/indirect/calculation/cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*4 Point No.0 cannot be changed since itís a coordinate placed with play parts.
*5 This item can be set if no cyclic display is selected.
*6 This item can be set when point updating is specified as "Specified cycle".
*7 The coordinate of division point cannot be set when selecting "Equidistant division point space". In addition, division point
will also be displayed after the final point when selecting "Division also when shifting from final point to starting point".
*8 This item can be set when point updating is specified as "Specified No.".
9-106 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-6 Setting Animation Display
During division, equidistant division is performed after division decimal fraction is rounded up.
Thus, dot for actual shift sometimes may differ from point for alternative setting.
Point No.0 Division point 0-1 Division point 0-2 Division point 0-3 Division point 0-4
(0,0) (20,0) (40,0) (60,0) (80,0)
Point No.1
(100,0)
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
[Example] When the value of point No. specified device (data format: unsigned decimal) is between 0 to 100,
after setting the point number=3, input range=0 to 100.
9 Device value=75
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Device value=25
Point No.2 Point No.2
Device value=100 Device value=100
Position
Item Description
Direction Select the shift direction of frame from "X-direction/Y-direction/XY-direction".
X axis relative position
Set relative position specified device of X direction.
specified device *1,2
Y axis relative position
Set relative position specified device of Y direction.
specified device *1,2
Relative position specified device can be selected from "Unsigned decimal /signed
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
Sets the upper and lower limit values to be written to the X direction relative coordinate
X input range *3
*4 The lower limit value of display range is the coordinate set for editing animation display parts. Display
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Display control
Item Description
Display control After selection, display control can be set.
Bit device with OF/OFF can be set.
Display control
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Bit device *1
settings" window.
Display The mode for checking bit device can be set.
control Mode A contact : play display when bit device is ON.
B contact : play display when bit device is OFF.
9
This item can be set when frame updating or point updating is set as specified cycle.
When turn on the
When OFF is turned to ON after selection, display starts from first frame (frame No.0),
display ... .
first point (point No.0).
Operation Enabled Enabled operation can be set.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Reference Global function control has the same function as the function control by devices.
"12-7 Global Function Control"
Message
Point The function control by devices isnít displayed in VT3. If not placing into display box of VT3, Display
the function control by devices isnít sent to VT3 as data, so it doesnít function. Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
List of functions
The following table summarizes the functions that can be set in function control by devices.
Item Description
Page switching Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page.
Display local window Turns the specified local window display ON and OFF.
Display global window Turns the display of the specified global window ON and OFF.
Writes record data in the PLC data folder currently stored to internal memory (SRAM)
Execute PLC data folder or Memory Card to the PLC's devices, or writes PLC data to specified records in PLC
data folders.
Writes the record comment of the PLC data folder currently stored to internal memory
Transfer Comment of PLC Data (SRAM) or Memory Card to PLC devices.
Folder (The trigger bit device setting is not provided. This is written when the file No./record
No. is specified while the currently placed screen is displayed on the VT3.
Clear alarm log Clears (deletes) the alarm log stored to internal memory (SRAM).
Start/stop data access to specified trend ID, and clear the data of trend graph and XY
Control trend graph
graph saved in the internal memory (SRAM).
• Outputs a hard copy of the VT3 screen.
Print • Save the screen of VT3 into the memory card by Windows bitmap files or JPEG files.
• Outputs the alarm log from the thermal printer. (print alarm log)
Video play/pause Plays and pauses video when video images are displayed.
• Save video display (images) into the memory card by Windows bitmap files or JPEG files.
Video Capture • Output video display (images) from a printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or
ESC/Page.
Save the data of trend graph, XY graph and alarm log stored to memory of VT3 into
Save log data to memory card
the memory card in CSV format.
Save Worksheet data to
9 Memory Card
Saves the worksheet data on the Memory Card in CSV format.
Writes the value of the specified transfer source word device to the transfer destination
Transfer 1 word
word device.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Save operating log to memory Save the operating log stored to memory of VT3 into the memory card by CSV files or
card UNICODE text files.
Clear operating log Clear the operating log stored to internal memory (SRAM).
Extended command
Create any communication command and send/receive the same.
communication
Point The various functions set to function control by devices are executed by the trigger bit device
turning ON (OFF) when the screen in which a function control by device is placed is
displayed.
Page switching
Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page when the trigger bit device is turned ON (OFF).
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the page switching condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when the page is to be switched by the state of the trigger bit device (OFF ->
9
ON, or ON -> OFF).
Trigger
: Page switching when the device state changes to ON
: Page switching when the device state changes to OFF
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
Message
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices" Alarm Display
Reference • After the base screen on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to Video Display
create a component with the page switching function being set. Animation
Display
• Switching pages using system memory area Function Controls
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching" Device
BMP File
• Switching pages using switches Switching
"Switch page", page 8-11 VNC Display
Settings
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the local window display condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when the local window is to be displayed by the state of the trigger bit device
(OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
9
: Local window display when the device state changes to ON
: Local window display when the device state changes to OFF
When the trigger is "Up": Reset at ON -> OFF
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Down": Reset at OFF -> ON
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Select window Select the target window. When this checkbox is marked, the window is targeted for
Window 1 to 3
display ON/OFF.
Specify
window When displaying local window after selection, local window is displayed at specified
display position.
position
Specify window X-coordinate
display position specified Set the two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of window
*2 Device *3 screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16.
Y-coordinate When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
specified settings" window.
Device *3
Data Format Select the data format of the coordinate specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Point When "PLC device/cell" is selected for the coordinate specified device, and the global
window is displayed:
When the trigger is set to Up (Down), and the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), the window
display position will not change even if the value of the coordinate specified device changes.
Reference • After the screen (window 1/2/3) on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is
possible to create a component with the local window display function being set.
• Displaying the local window using system memory area
"14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs"
• Displaying the local window using switches
"Display local window", page 8-12
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
9-114 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the global window display condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
Select when the global window is to be displayed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
: OFF->ON, display global window
: ON->OFF, display global window
X-coordinate Animation
specified Display
Specify Set the two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of
window Device *3 window screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16. Function Controls
Device
display Y-coordinate When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
BMP File
position *2 specified "Device settings" window. Switching
Device *3 VNC Display
Settings
Select the data format of the coordinate specified device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format
BCD".
Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
• "2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
• Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• When an interrupt window is turned ON while a global window is displayed, the following
happens if the number of devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, size of
overlapping data, and other restrictions are exceeded:
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.
• When "PLC device/cell" is selected for the coordinate specified device, and the global
window is displayed:
When the trigger is set to Up (Down), and the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), the window
display position will not change even if the value of the coordinate specified device
changes.
• When Externally is set as the global window No. specify mode, and the global window is
displayed:
When the trigger Up (Down) is set, and the trigger bit device turns ON (OFF), the global
window screen switches when the value of the global window No. specified device
changes.
At this time, the window display position also is updated when the value of the coordinate
specified device changes if the coordinate specified device is set to "PLC device/cell".
9 • When global window display is performed for the unit monitor, the device monitor or the
system auxiliary numerical keyboard via the special operations of the unit screen:
Unit monitor: global window ID6
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Reference • After the global window on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
create a component with the global window display function being set.
• Display global window using switches
"Display global window", page 8-13
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
• When the "Do not close window during page switching" checkbox is marked
Page 0 Page 1
GW Page switched GW
The GW (global window) stays displayed. To turn the GW OFF (hide the window), turn OFF by a
switch to which the "Global window display OFF" function is set or a control function by device.
Settings
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the PLC data folder execution condition.
9
Trigger bit device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select when the PLC data folder is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit device
(OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that PLC data folder execution has ended.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-117
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices
Record
The setting items in the "Function control by devices" window change by selecting the "Record specify mode" item on
the "Record" tab in the "Function control by devices" window.
"15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)"
Item Description
Sets how to specify the record No. for writing to PLC or saving PLC data.
None : Save the data to the record with the smallest unused record No.
(This item can be set only when "Access mode" is set to "PLC to
VT".)
Specify No. (Internally): Specify by the constant set to the record No.
Record specify mode Specify No. (Externally): Specify by the numerical value stored to the record No.
specified device. This numerical value can be changed to any
value.
Specify comment: Searches for and specifies records whose record comment
matches the text string data (ASCII code, shift JIS code, UNICODE)
stored to the commentspecified device.
Record No. Specify the record No. when "Record specify mode" is set to "Specify No. (Internally)".
*1/2 Sets the word device for specifying the record No. when "Recordspecify mode" is set
Record No. specified device
to "Specify No. (Externally)."
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Data format *3 settings" window.Select the data format of the record No. specified device from
"Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Select whether to automatically create a new record and save to that record when
there is no record comment matching the text string data stored to the comment
specified device under the following conditions. (Text string is ASCII code, shift JIS
New
code or UNICODE.)
• When "Access mode" is set to "PLC to VT"
• When "Record specify mode" is set to "Specify comment"
When this checkbox is marked when "Access mode" is set to "PLC to VT", the text
string data stored to the comment specified device is saved as a record comment
Specify
when the record data is saved.If not selected (text string is ASCII code, Shift-JIS code,
comment
UNICODE), the text string is stored in a state without record comment.
This item cannot be set when "Access mode" is set to "VT to PLC".
• When "Record specify mode" is set to "Specify comment", set the word device for
storing the text string data of the comment to be searched.
• When "Access mode" is set to "PLC to VT" and "Record specify mode" is set to
9
other than "Specify comment" and the "Specify comment" checkbox is marked, set
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Point Touch switches are invalid during PLC data folder execution.
*4 The text string data of the record comment is written to a device of 16 continuous words starting from the
comment specified device.
ASCII code (1-byte characters), shift JIS code (2-byte characters) and UNICODE are used for text string data.
Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.
In the following example, "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is not marked.When the "Swap upper/lower
bytes" checkbox is marked, text string data obtained by swapping the upper byte with the lower byte is stored
to the target word device.
9
Comment specified device + 4 ݙ (ޓ93 E0H) Comment specified device + 4 ݙ (51 85H)
Comment specified device + 5 㬉 (ޓ91 A0H) Comment specified device + 5 㬉 (85 35H)
Comment specified device + 6 䍙 (ޓ92 B4H) Comment specified device + 6 䍙 (8D 85H)
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Comment specified device + 7 ᇣ (ޓ8F ACH) Comment specified device + 7 ᇣ (5C 0FH)
Comment specified device + 8 ൟ (ޓ8C 5EH) Comment specified device + 8 ൟ (57 8BH)
Comment specified device + 9 P (ޓ50H) L (4CH) Comment specified device + 9 P (00 50H)
Comment specified device + 10 C (ޓ43H) (ޓ00H) Comment specified device + 10 L (00 4CH)
Comment specified device + 11 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment specified device + 11 C (00 43H)
Comment specified device + 12 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment specified device + 12 (00 00H)
Comment specified device + 13 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment specified device + 13 (00 00H)
Comment specified device + 14 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment specified device + 14 (00 00H)
Comment specified device + 15 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment specified device + 15 (00 00H)
Point • Text codes used for text string data in record comments must be made to match
the text code on the PLC data folder editing tool.
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool", page 15-14
• With ASCII codes, a 1-byte character is one byte. However, with UNICODE, a 1-byte
character is two bytes (one word).
Notify
Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, the notified bit device is set when PLC data folder
Notify end
execution ends.
Sets the bit device for notifying end.
Notified bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *1
settings" window.
Notify end
Sets the mode for referencing the notified bit device.
Mode
Reset bit at
A contact : Sets the notified bit device when PLC data folder execution ends.
B contact : Resets the notified bit device when PLC data folder execution ends.
When this checkbox is marked, resets the notified bit device at start of PLC data folder
9
start execution.
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9 Item Description
Save to *1 Select the directory for saving the PLC data folder data from "SRAM/Memory Card".
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Sets the method for specifying the file No. of the PLC data folder data.
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. Specify the file No. (0 to 99) when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally".
Specify file
File Comment Display the file comments set to PLC data folder editing tool.
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
File No.
"Externally".
specified device
*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Sets the word device for specifying the file No.
Record No. specified device *3, 6 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Data format *4 Select the data format of the record No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Sets the word device for storing the text string data (ASCII code, shift JIS code,
UNICODE) of the record comment. A device having 16continuous words is used.
Comment write device *5, 6
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, UNICODE text strings are supported.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text string
Swap upper/lower bytes
to be stored to the comment write device are swapped.
*1 The setting will be disabled even if the VT3-W4 series is set to "Memory card".
*2 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Specify the device within the range 0 to 99 to the file No. specified device. PLC data folders will not be executed
if a numerical value outside of this range is specified.
*3 Specify the device within the range 0 to 65534 to the file No. specified device. PLC data folders will not be
executed if a numerical value outside of this range is specified.
*4 When "Data format" is set to "BCD", record Nos. 0 to 9999 can be specified.
*5 The text string data of the record comment is written to a device of 16 continuous words starting from the
comment write device.
ASCII code (1-byte characters), shift JIS code (2-byte characters) and UNICODE are used for text string data.
Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.
In the following example, "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is not marked.When the "Swap upper/lower
bytes" checkbox is marked, text string data obtained by swapping the upper byte with the lower byte is stored
to the target word device.
9
Comment write device + 12 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment write device + 12 (00 00H)
Comment write device + 13 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment write device + 13 (00 00H)
Comment write device + 14 (00H) (ޓ00H) Comment write device + 14 (00 00H)
Point With ASCII codes, a 1-byte character is one byte. However, with UNICODE, a 1-byte
character is two bytes (one word).
Point When a screen in which a function control by device is placed is currently displayed,
Numerical Value
transfer of comments is executed when the value of the file No. specified device or Display
record No. specified device changes.
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the alarm log clear condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
9 Trigger
Select when clearing of alarm log data is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
: Clearing of alarm logs is executed when the device state changes to ON.
: Clearing of alarm logs is executed when the device state changes to OFF.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Alarm ID Sets the target alarm type (0 to 3).
On the "Notify"tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of clearing alarm log.
"Notify", page 9-121
Item Description
Set the stop/start of data sampling, or bit device as a condition of data clearing.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Trigger
Select when clearing of alarm log data is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
: OFF-> ON, stop/start data sampling, or execute data clearing.
9
: ON -> OFF, stop/start data sampling, or execute data clearing.
executed. To stop data sampling, turn OFF recording after turning the VT3 ON. Message
Display
*3 On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that execution of data clear has ended
Alarm Display
only when data clear has been set to the control mode.
Video Display
"Notify", page 9-121
Animation
Display
Reference • Trend graph control by switches Function Controls
"Key entry", page 8-26 Device
BMP File
• Clear the data of trend graph and XY graph in VT3 system. Switching
"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual VNC Display
Settings
Print
Execute the following operations when trigger bit device turns ON(OFF).
Printer settings of VT system setting
Description
Printer Type Output target
ESC/P Raster Printer Hard copy the screen of VT3.
ESC/P Raster 2 VT3 screen is saved on memory card in Windows bitmap files or JPEG
Memory Card *1
LIPS IV Raster files format.
PictBridge
ESC/P-R Ether*2 Printer, memory card Output to printer and memory card simultaneously.
ESC/Page Ether*2
On the screen placed with alarm display parts, the alarm log of alarm ID
Printer will be output from thermal printer (alarm log printing) if trigger bit device
turns ON (OFF).
Thermal printer
This setting is only valid to bill printing. VT3 screen will not saved to
Memory Card *1
memory card. Alarm logs, also, are not saved on Memory Card.
Printer, memory card Execute alarm log printing. Saving to memory card is not executed.
*1 The saving format of images is set through the memory card set by VT system.
*2 This can be used only when the VT3 series and printer are connected via Ethernet.
The VT3 system program must be Ver. 4.81 or later.
Point This feature does not function even if placed on screens on other models.
• Printer output
For VT3, this can be used for the VT3-X15(D)/S12(D)/S10/V10(D)/V8/V7/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5T(W)A. A printer unit (VT2-P1/P2) or Ethernet unit (VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3) is required.
(Excluding V6H(G)/Q5H(G))
• Memory Card
For VT3, it can be used for all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A). Even if the
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is configured, the configuration will be disabled.
• When VT3 is used on vertical screen, and bitmap files or JPEG files saved on memory card
during printing are opened by computer, the images will rotate 90°.
"Print", page 8-20
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the print execution condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when printing is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit device (OFF to
ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
: Printing is executed when the device state changes to ON.
: Printing is executed when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
Reset trigger bit
the trigger.
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON ->OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
9
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of printing.
"Notify", page 9-121
Video play/pause
Playing and pausing video is performed when the trigger bit device turns ON (OFF) during video display.
Point This feature does not function even if placed on screens on other models.
Only VT3-X15(D)/S12(D)/S10/V10(D)/V8 support video display, but video units(VT3-VD4/VD1)
are required. For other models, even configuration is performed, it will be disabled.
9 Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the video play/pause switching condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Video Capture
If trigger bit device turns ON (OFF) during video display, the video display (images) will be saved on memory card as
Windows bitmap files or JPEG files by specified file No.. The saving format of images is set through memory card set
by VT system.
You can also notify that saving of the video display to Memory Card has ended.
The video display (images) can also be output using a printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page. In this
case, they are not saved to a memory card. Video capture output target is set through video set by VT system.
"Video", page 12-27
"Memory Card", page 12-25
"9-5 Setting Video Displays"
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Point For the cautions related to video capture, refer to "Video capture", page 8-23
Setting
Capture target *2, 7 After selection, it becomes the target of video capture. Animation
Display
Mode *8 Select the size of capture images from "display size capture/original size capture" *5.
Function Controls
When this checkbox is marked, the date/time information is displayed on the Device
Display date
captured image. BMP File
Switching
When this checkbox is marked, an image of placed parts also is displayed
VNC Display
Overlap parts overlapped on the video display area during video capture. Settings
This item cannot be set when "original size capture" is selected.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of the image is converted to gray
Gray scale *3
scale, and the camera image is captured.
Item Description
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving video display.
File No. specify Internally: Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally: Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. *4 Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally."
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
Specify file File No. "Externally."
specifieddevice *1, 4 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking
File name setting *6
this button. The file name for saving on memory card is set.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Only one channel can be selected when outputting from a PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page compatible
printer. If multiple channels are selected, only the smallest channel in video display will be printed.
*3 No display in VT3.
*4 The settable range of value in file No. will change depending upon the mode set in memory card in VT system
setting.
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25
*5 Original size refers to maximum size that can be set within the display area size of video display parts.
9
*6 No display in VT2.
*7 In VT2, video display and RGB cannot be selected at the same time.
*8 No display in VT2. No display in VT2. Captured by display size in VT2.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that video capture has ended.
"Notify", page 9-121
Point For VT3, it can be used for all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A). It cannot be
used for VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Record data can also be saved on Memory Card from the VT3. For details on the Memory Card, refer to the following:
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Reference The following features were confirmed as not functioning on the VT1 when Save log data on Memory
Card was executed on the VT1 (though they are functional on the VT3):
• Monitoring of states of alarm detection devices (saving of alarm log)
• Loading (sampling) of data for real time trend graphs
Setting
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that save log data to memory card has ended.
"Notify", page 9-121
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the save log data on Memory Card condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when the log data is saved on Memory Card by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
: Data is saved when the device state changes to ON.
: Data is saved when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Data type Select the type (Trend graph/Alarm log) of data to be saved on Memory Card.
Trend ID When "Data type" is "Trend graph", set the trend ID (0 to 3) to be saved.
Trend Graph
Select the data format of the data to be saved when "Data type" is set to "Trend graph"
Data Format
from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD".
Sets the alarm type (0 or 3) of the alarm log to be saved when "Data type" is set to
Alarm ID
"Alarm log".
Alarm Log
When "Data type" is set to "Alarm log", selects the type of file to save from "CSV file
File type
(MBCS)/Text file (UNICODE)".
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving on Memory Card.
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode *2 Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. *2 Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally."
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
File No.
Specify file "Externally."
specifieddevice
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
9
*1,*2
settings" window.
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
SETTING BASIC PARTS
File name setting The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking this
*3 button. The file name for saving on memory card is set.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 The settable range of value in file No. will change depending upon the mode set in memory card in VT system setting.
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25
*3 No display in VT2.
Point For VT3, all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) can be used. VT3-W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/W4G(A) can not be used.
Setting
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the saveworksheet data to memory card condition.
9
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to Alarm Display
File No.
Specify file "Externally."
specified device
*1,2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device Video Display
settings" window. Animation
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD" Display
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally". Function Controls
Device
File name setting The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking BMP File
*3 this button. The file name for saving on memory card is set. Switching
VNC Display
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Settings
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that saving of the worksheet data has ended.
"Notify", page 9-121
Point • The data (cell values) of the worksheet that was executed before Save worksheet data to
memory card was executed is saved to file.
Cell values can be rewritten from parts (switches, numerical value displays, text displays,
etc.) placed on the VT3 screen. However, values written to cells after a worksheet is
executed are not targeted for Save worksheet to memory card.
• Worksheet data is saved according to the data format set to each cell.
9 Text string shift JIS code. Other text code is saved as "•••" where is a 2-byte
space.
Special text codes (double quotations, etc.) are not displayed correctly.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Transfer 1 word
The value of the transfer source word device is written to the transfer destination word device when the trigger bit
device turns ON (OFF).
Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the transfer one word condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Trigger
Select when clearing of alarm log data is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
: Transfer one word is executed when the device state changes to ON.
9
: Transfer one word is executed when the device state changes to OFF.
Alarm Display
Point When the trigger is set to Up (Down), and the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), the value of the
original word device is written to the other word device when the value of the original word Video Display
Point For VT3, all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) can be used. VT3-W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/W4G(A) can not be used.
The operating log on VT3 system can also be saved on memory card. For details on the Memory Card, refer to the following:
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Setting
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of saving the operating log.
"Notify", page 9-121
Item Description
Set bit device as a condition of saving the operating log on memory card.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Set the saving of operating log on memory card in the case of OFF -> ON or ON -> OFF
of trigger bit device.
Trigger
Up : Data is saved when the device state changes to ON.
Down: Data is saved when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit When trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON to OFF
When trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF to ON
Clear log if saving is completed After selection, clear the operating log when saving on memory card is finished.
Clear log if saving is failed After selection, clear the operating log when saving on memory card fails.
File type Select the type of file to save from "CSV file (MBCS)/Text file (UNICODE)".
Item Description
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving on Memory Card.
Auto *2 : unused smallest file No..
File No. specify
Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode
Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally."
Specify Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
File No. specified
file "Externally."
mode
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *1
settings" window.
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking this
File name setting
button. The file name for saving on memory card is set.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 In all present file folders, itís saved to the unused smallest file No. within file folder with biggest number. If the file
folder is fully loaded, create the next file folder, and save by smallest file No..
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Set the saving of operating log on memory card in the case of OFF -> ON or ON -> OFF of BMP File
Switching
trigger bit device.
Trigger VNC Display
: OFF -> ON, execute clearing of operating log. Settings
: ON -> OFF, execute clearing of operating log.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit When trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON to OFF
When trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF to ON
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of clearing the operating log.
"Notify", page 9-121
Point Only PLC models that support extended command communication can be used.
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
To set up bit device that is necessary for extended command communication.
Trigger bit device
Click the "Browse" button to set up in the "Device settings" window.
Extended command communication is started once the trigger bit device OFF -> ON
or ON -> OFF.
Trigger
: Start extended command communication when OFF -> ON.
: Start extended command communication when ON -> OFF.
If this option is checked, trigger bit device will be reset after VT3 identifying trigger.
Reset trigger bit device Trigger "" : ON -> OFF
Trigger "" : OFF -> ON
Command To display the title of command.
Add To add new command.
Delete To delete the command of selected row.
Settings To set up the command of selected row.
Up/Down To change the executing sequence of selected commands.
A notify end device can be set up in the "Notification" tab to notify that extended command communication is over.
"Notify", page 9-121
Point • Extended command communication function will be executed in the sequence of request
receiving.
• If the following extended command communication request is received, the next
communication cycle will be executed after the current extended command
communication is completed.
• Up to 8 requests can be received.
• The functions like page switching, window switching, system screen calling, PLC data
folder execution, language switching, and data transfer, accompanied with screen
switching, will be executed after the current extended command communication is
completed.
Video Display
Reference • For command details, refer to VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual.
Animation
• Switch-based extended command communication Display
"Extended command communication", page 8-31 Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
Select the ratio used when bitmap files currently saved on Memory Card are to be
Display ratio
displayed on VT3 screen from "1/2X, 1X, 2X".
Select the save destination directory for the bitmap file currently saved on Memory
Specify directory *1
Card from "VTBMP/ VTCPT/VTIMG"
Set the method of specifying channels.
Channel Internally : specify by setting of channels.
specify mode Externally : specify by the numerical value stored to channel specified device. The
numerical value can be changed to any value.
Specify from "RGB/channel 1/channel 2/channel 3 /channel 4", when "Specify mode" is
Channel
Specify set to "Internally".
Channel *4 Set the word device used for specified channel, when "Specify mode" is set to
Channel "Externally".
specified device When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
*2 settings" window.
RGB: 0 Video: 1 to 4
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Sets how to specify the file No.
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
Specify File File No. *1 Specify the file No. when "Specify mode" is set to "Internally".
No.
File No. Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when"Specify mode" is set to "Externally."
specified device When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
*2, 3 settings" window.
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
BMP file switches are automatically assigned the label "lm_****" as the default.
Label Correct this label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from
0000 is appended.)
The switching files will be saved by a fixed file name (file folder names and file names are half-width characters) into
\VTBMP file folder, which is previously created under root directory of memory card. The directory structure and
file name may differ depending upon the mode set in memory card of VT system.
For the details, refer to "6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
*3 BMP file switching is not executed when a numerical value outside of the file No. range is specified to the file
No. specified device.
*4 In the memory card set in VT system, the mode is set as "VT3 mode". This item can be set when "VTCPT" is
selected by specified directory.
Point • Specify 24-bit (True Color) Windows bitmap file as the bitmap file to save on Memory Card.
JPEG files could use expansion name .jpg.
• JPEG files over 1024x768 cannot be read. 9
• The bitmap files have a priority in the case of same file No. for bitmap files and JPEG files.
Point • The size of BMP file switch parts set during placing must match the size of files read from
memory card.
Bitmap files are displayed as follows when their sizes differs from that of the BMP file
switch part:
Size of read bitmap file < Display size of BMP file switch part
Size of read bitmap file > Display size of BMP file switch part
9
• Bitmap files are displayed as follows when they are used on a vertical screen, and a file
SETTING BASIC PARTS
saved as a video capture or hardcopy on Memory Card is read on the VT3 screen.
Size of read bitmap file < Display size of BMP file switch part
Size of read
bitmap file
Size of read bitmap file > Display size of BMP file switch part
Display size of
BMP file
switch part
Point • When two or more BMP file switch parts are placed overlapping each other on screen, only
the BMP file switch part at the front (top) will be displayed.
(1) When BMP file switch parts are (2) When BMP file switch parts in
overlapping each other in the same different screens (base windows) are
screen (base window). overlapping each other.
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Item Description
VNC No. Specify a VNC server No. (0 to 3) to be connected.
VNC server settings To set up IP address and port No. of VNC server.
To specify the display size (320x240 dots, 512x384 dots, 640x480 dots, 1024x768
Display area size
dots, free size) on VT screen.
Scale server To scale down VNC server image (1, 1/2, 1/3).
Zoom in To scale up the VNC server image (1, 2).
If this option is checked, mouse operation will not be possible for VNC server even if
Disable touch entry
VNC display part is touched. But you can still use the VNC key switch.
Scroll bar Check this option to display scroll bar on the right and bottom of the screen.
Point • In one screen, only one VNC display part with the same VNC server No. can be displayed.
• Up to 4 VNC display parts can be displayed in one screen.
• No VNC display part can be displayed in the portrait screen.
Text Display
Message
Display
Alarm Display
Video Display
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Item Description
VNC No. Select the VNC No. to be used.
IP address Set up IP address of VNC server.
Port No.* Set up port No. of VNC server.
Advanced settings Set up timeout value and password.
* The following TCP port No. will be used for VNC server connection. So please keep it usable.
VNC No. 0: 20000 VNC No. 1: 20001
VNC No. 2: 20002 VNC No. 3: 20003
Item Description
Timeout value Set up timeout value (1 to 30s) for communication with VNC server.
9
Password Check this option to enable the Password (max 8 half-width characters).
Server image color Specify the image color of VNC server.
SETTING BASIC PARTS
Setting Meters
Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Bar image meter(B)
Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Circle meter(C)
Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Sector meter(F)
Set meters in the " meter" window. (: Bar image/Circle meter/Sector).
Display the "meter" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the meter
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right - click menu
Data
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Item Description
Set the word device to be targeted for metering.
Reference word device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When the data length is
Data length set to 2 words, two continuous words are used.
When the data format is set to Float, the data length is fixed to 2 words.
Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format BCD/Float".
Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
Item Description
Set the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of numerical values to be
displayed as a meter. When the reference word device exceeds the input range
Lower limit *3
(lower limit value/upper limit value), the display on the VT3 does not change.
Num:
Input range *2
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell:
Upper limit*3 The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell to the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
After selection, you can set the display range (lower limit value/upper limit
value) of meters displayed on VT3. When the display range is set, the values
Display range of the reference word device are converted for display on the VT3. When
this checkbox is not marked, the numerical values of the reference word
device are not converted and are isplayed at the input range.
Display range*2,*4
Num:
Lower limit *3
Set a constant as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/cell:
Upper limit*3 The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
When this checkbox is marked, the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit
value) can be set. When the value of the reference word device exceeds the
Alarm range
alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value), alarms can be displayed on
the VT3 (data color can be changed or made to blink).
Alarm range*2 Lower limit *3 Num:
Set a constant as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/cell:
Upper limit*3 The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Ideal line When this item is checked, the ideal line is displayed.
Num:
Ideal line *2 Set a constant as the ideal line (ideal value).
Ideal Value *3 PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/cell:
The ideal line (ideal value) can be changed bysetting a PLC device/indirect
reference/calcula-tion/cell to the ideal line (ideal value).
Meters are automatically assigned the following labels as the default.
10
Correct this label as necessary. (""****" " is the creation number. A number
10 100
Input range Meters
XYimages
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Item Description
Select the meter format from "Absolute value/Deviation".
Absolute value:
Displays the input range as the display range (meter start point as lower limit
Display format *1 value and meter end point as upper limit value).
Deviation:
Displays the upper limit value of the input range at both the plus and minus sides
with the lower limit value of the input range as the center of the display range.
Displacement direction *2 Select the direction of data increase from "Left -> right/right -> left/bottom -> top/top -> bottom".
Data Display pattern Select the meter display pattern from "Paint/Needle/image".
Data color *3 Select the color of the data area.
Alarm lower limit
Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower limit value.
data color*3
Data Alarm upper limit
Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
(Paint) data color*3
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it is not
Background color *3
marked, the background color is transparent.
Separate When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an alarm occurs.
Needle type Select the type of needles.
Line type *3 Select the line type of the needle.
Needle
Line color*3 Select the line color of the needles.
Lower limit Line type *3 Select the line type of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
Data Alarm
needle Line color*3 Select the color of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
(Needle)
Upper limit Line type *3 Select the line type of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
Alarm
needle Line color*3 Select the color of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it is not
Background color *3
marked, the background color is transparent.
See page 10-6 for descriptions on *1 to *3
Item Description
Style Select the display style.
Free style Change ON image/OFF image, alarm lower limit image/alarm upper limit image.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
ON image color Select the color of the data area.
Lower limit alarm Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower
image color limit value.
Upper limit alarm Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit
image color value.
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection.
Data (Image) Background color*3
If it is not marked, the background color is transparent.
Use image After selection, you can set OFF image.
OFF image color Select the color system of OFF image.
Set how many images can be displayed in bar image meters according
to display style.
Number of repetitions
Absolute value: 1 to 20
Deviation : 1 to10
Select the display modes from "Partial display/round-up display/round-
Display mode
off display".
When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an
Separate
alarm occurs.
When this checkbox is marked, the data frame of the meter is displayed.
Image frame
Data frame If it is not marked, the frame color is transparent.
Frame color*3 Select the data frame color.
Image frame After selection, the image frame can be used.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Free style When image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
Image frame
Normal color
window is displayed.
Select the color of image frame in normal state. 10
Select the color of image frame when the value falls below the lower
Lower limit alarm color
*1 The display format is as follows when the displacement direction of the bar image meter is left to right:
- side - + + side
Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit Upper lim
Input range Input range
Left -> right Right -> left Bottom -> top Top -> botto
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
ON graph
Value of reference word device
OFF graph
ON graph
Value of reference word device
The following are examples of how the images are displayed based on the setting of "display mode" and "display
mode".
Input range : 0 to 100
display mode : 10 10
Value of reference word device : 65
6.5 images are displayed since the images are displayed according to the value of reference word device.
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
7 images are displayed owing to round-up display.
XYimages
Data area
image frame
Alarm graph
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Alarm image
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Item Description
Look in Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name Select the name of the file to open.
File of type Select the type of file.
Gray scale When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering between colors stand out when Substraction Color to the VT32's display colors (32768) is
performed.
Frame width Refer to "Change style image (Circle Sector meter)", page 10-17
If you click this button, a preview of the image after substraction color to the VT3's display color
After conversion
(32768), dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Separate display
[Example] When an alarm range is set on a bar image meter
When separate display isn't set When separate display is set
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
10
Item Description
Needle type Select the type of the needle.
Line type*4 Select the line type of the needle.
Needle
Line color*4 Select the line color of the needles.
Lower limit Line type*4 Select the line type of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
alarm
needle Line color*4 Select the color of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
Upper limit Line type*4 Select the line type of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
Data area alarm
needle Line color*4 Select the color of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
(Needle)
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it
Background color*4
is not marked, the background color is transparent.
Set the scoopout ratio (0 to 90%, in 10% increments) when the center of the
Scoop out ratio
meter is to be displayed scooped out. Set this item on Circle Sector meters.
Set the start angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on circle/
Start angle*3
sector meters.
End angle*3 Set the end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on sector meters.
Style Select the display style.
Free style Change ON image/OFF image, alarm lower limit image/alarm upper limit image.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
ON image color Select the color of the data area.
Lower limit alarm
Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower limit value.
image color
Upper limit alarm
Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
image color
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it
Data (Image) Background color*4
is not marked, the background color is transparent.
Use image After selection, you can set OFF image.
Start angle*6
Select the color system of OFF image.
Set the start angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on circle/
sector meters.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
End angle*6 Set the end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on Sector meters.
Separate display*5 When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an alarm occurs.
Display mode Select the display modes from "Partial display/round-up display/round-off display".
When "round-up display/round-off display" as the display modes, you can
Division angle
set in 15× increment.
When this checkbox is marked, the data frame of the meter is displayed. If it
Frame
Frame is not marked, the frame color is transparent.
Frame color *3 Select the data frame color.
Image frame After selection, the image frame can be used.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Free style When Image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
Image frame
Normal color Select the color of image frame in normal state.
Lower limit alarm
Select the color of image frame when the value falls below the lower limit value.
color
Upper limit alarm
Select the color of image frame when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
color
Alarm After selection, alarm line or alarm image can be displayed.
Alarm/Ideal line
Style Elect the style used for alarm display from "Line/alarm image ".
Alarm
Alarm lower When this checkbox is marked, the lower limit line is displayed.
lower limit limit line
line Line type *3 Select the type of the lower limit line.
Alarm Line color*3 Select the color of the lower limit line.
(Line) Alarm
Alarm upper limit When this checkbox is marked, the upper limit line is displayed.
upper limit line
line Line type *3 Select the type of the upper limit line.
Line color*3 Select the color of the lower limit line.
See page 10-14 for descriptions on *3 to *6.
Item Description
Free style When alarm image is used, you can change the images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked,"Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
Alarm Normal color Select the color of alarm image in normal state.
(Image) Select the color of alarm image when the value falls below the lower limit
Lower limit alarm color
value.
Select the color of alarm image when the value exceeds the upper limit
Upper limit alarm color
value.
Line type *3 Select the type of the ideal line.
Ideal line
Line color*3 Select the color of the ideal line.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is
BLK*3 clicked. The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set
interval.
See page 10-14 for descriptions on *3.
*1 The display format is as follows when the displacement direction of the circle meter is clockwise:
-side
+side
Input range
Uppe
The display format is as follows when the displacement direction of the sector meter is clockwise:
10
- side
+ side
Meters
Trend image
Clockwise Counterclockwis
XYimages
Clockwise Counterclockwis
*3 The start angle and end angle of sector are set as follows:
(setting examples)
End angle
End angle 45° Start angle 4
0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 3
0°
Start angle
In image meters, the area where the set style image are displayed will increase or decrease in relation to data value.
The image can be set to any image. In addition, after "Use image" of background color is selected, OFF image can
also be set.
ON graph
Value of reference word device
ON graph
OFF graph
The following are examples of how the images are displayed based on "display mode " and "Division angle".
Input range : 0 to 360
Division angle : 15
Value of reference word device : 50
50° images are displayed since the images are displayed according to the value of reference word device.
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Image frame
Data area
Alarm image
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Alarm image
10
source image
10 dots
Meters
Statistical images
Reduce 10 dots
Trend image
10 dots XYimages
10 dots
source image
Reduce
10 dots 10 dots
Initial graph
Reduce
80 dots 40 dots
20 dots 10 dots
None
No frame width/circular frame width/scoopout ratio is set, and selected initial image is used.
Point For the data area of bar image meter, frame width of every ON image, OFF image, lower limit
image and upper limit image can be set through "Open image" window.
Scale
Item Description
When this item is checked, a scale (main scale 6 dots, auxiliary scale 3dots) is
Scale
attached around the meter (up, down, left or right).
Set the scale display position.
Bar image meter:
When the displacement direction is "Left -> right" or "Right -> left": Select from "Top/
Bottom".
Scale position
Scale position When the displacement direction is "Bottom -> top" or "Top -> bottom": Select from
"Right/Left".
Circle/sector meter:
When scoopout ratio is set: select from "external/internal".
Scale layout*1
Add to data side After selection, display the scale at data side.
Select the scale layout method from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
10
Main scale When this checkbox is marked, the main scale is displayed on the meter.
Point The scale is not displayed when a narrow scale interval is set. Either make the meter larger, XYimages
or change the scale setting.
Scale markings
Item Description
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, numerical values are displayed on the main scale.
Number of display digits Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) in numerical values to be displayed on the scale.
Decimal point position*1 Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted.
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, "+" is displayed for plus numbers in the numerical value
Display +
display.
Fonts Select the font to be used for display from "Bitmap font/Windows font".
The fonts are displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used are
List of available fonts
10 Font setting
displayed from imageics data list. Select the available fonts.
You can set the fonts not included in the list of available fonts. After the font type and
size are set through "Select font" window, add them to the list of available fonts.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Half-width/Fuf-rwidth/7-segment*4".
Select the font size of the numerical values to be displayed on the scale from "1//2X, 1X,
Text size*3, *4
or 2X".
Set the color of text on the scale for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and
Text color*2
alarm upper limit.
Set the text on the scale to bold for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and
Bold
alarm upper limit.
Gives text a shadow£¨ so that it looks engraved. Thus it has a 3D effect for each of
Shadow
Text normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Decoration Gives text a shadow£¨ so that it looks engraved. Thus it looks engraved for each of
Engraved
normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
color*2 decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*2
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Example of setting decimal position
“Setting Numerical Value Displays” page 9-4
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3
Half-width Fuf-rwidth-
Text size
characters segment
At 1/2X text size 8 x 8 dots -
At 1X text size 8 x 16 dots 16 x 16 dots
At 1X text size 16 x 32 dots 32 x 32 dots
When "Text decoration"is set 2 dots
Preview
Item Description
The meter may be displayed in preview mode according to entered value.
Display value In addition, when the setting dialog box is closed by pressing "OK" button, the meters in edit window will
be displayed under the same state with preview display.
"Reset" Reset to the value in the first time setting.
[Example] Equal intervals (Bar image meter) Equal divisions(Bar image meter)
Input range : 0 to 50000 Input range : 0 to 10000
Displacement direction: Bottom to top Displacement direction: Bottom to top
Scale position : left Scale position : left
Main scale : 10000 Main scale :2
Auxiliary scale : 2000 Auxiliary scale :5
Scale markings : Yes Scale markings : Yes
Meters
Trend image
Scale marking
40000
XYimages
5000
30000 5000 Auxiliary scale
10000 0
Set statistical images in the “ statistical image" window. ( : Bar image/Circle meter).
Display the " statistical image" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking statistical images
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from fight-click menu.
Setting
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Item Description
Set the leading word device to be targeted for the statistic image. When the
Reference word device*1 "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Data format Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Select the direction that data increases:
Displacement direction *2 Bar image :Left -> right/Right -> left/Bottom -> top/Top -> bottom
Circle meter :CW/CCW
Number of deivisions Set the number of times (2 to 8) that the image is to be divided.
Image frame After selection, the image frame can be used.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Image frame Free style When image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
Change*4 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Color Select the color system of image frame.
The frame of data area is displayed after selection. If it is not marked, the frame
Data frame
Data frame color is transparent.
Frame color *3 Select the frame color.
Data color*3 Select the color of the data area.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*3
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Statistical images are automatically assigned the following labels as the default.
Correct this label as necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number starting
Label from 0000 is appended.)
Bar image : Bs_****
Circle meter : Cs_****
Word devices are used continuously for the number of set divisions.
[Example] When number of divisions = 3
Color of data 2
Leading reference word device No. +0 Data 1
Leading reference word device No. +1 Data 2
Leading reference word device No. +2 Data 3
Color of
Leading reference word device No. +0 Data 1
data 3
Leading reference word device No. +1 Data 2 Color of data 1
Color of data 2
Data 1 Data 3
Clockwise Counterclockwise
Data 3
Data 3
Data 1
Meters
XYimages
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Scale
Item Description
When this item is checked, a scale (main scale 6 dots, auxiliary scale 3 dots) is attached around
Scale*1
the statistical image (top, bottom, left or right).
Set the scale display position.
Scale position*2 When the displacement direction is "Left -> right" or "Right -> left": Select from "Top/Bottom".
When the displacement direction is "Bottom -> top" or "Top -> bottom": Select from "Right/Left".
Main scale When this checkbox is marked, the main scale is displayed on the statistical image.
Main scale Number of
Set the number of divisions (2 to 100) on the main scale.
divisions
Auxiliary
When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale is displayed on the statistical image.
Auxiliary scale
scale Number of
Set the number of divisions (2 to 100) on the auxiliary scale.
divisions
Scale line color*3 Set the line color.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all times
10
BLK*3
on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "About scales", page 10-27
*2 This is set only in the case of statistical bar image meters.
Point The scale is not displayed when a narrow scale interval is set. Either make the image larger,
or change the scale setting.
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Scale markings
Item Description
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, numerical values are displayed on the main scale.
Number of display digits Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) in numerical values to be displayed on the scale.
Decimal point position*1 Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted.
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
Fonts Select the font to be used for display from "Bitmap font/Windows font".
The fonts are displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used are displayed
List of available fonts
from image data list. Select the available fonts.
You can set the fonts not included in the list of available fonts. After the font type and size are
Font setting
set through "Select font" window, add them to the list of available fonts.
Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Half-width/Full-width/7-segment*4".
Text size*3, *4 Select the font size of the numerical values to be displayed on the scale from "1//2X, 1X, or 2X".
Text color*2 Set the color of text on the scale.
10 Bold
Shadow
Set the text on the scale to bold.
Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. Thus it has a 3D effect.
Text
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. Thus it looks engraved.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Decoration
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
color *2 decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Display Lower limit Set the lower limit value (0 to 65535) of the display range for the scale markings.
range Upper limit Set the upper limit value (0 to 65535) of the display range for the scale markings.
About scales
100
Scale marking
50
50 Auxiliary scale
Main scale
10
Preview
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Item Description
The images are previewed according to entered value.
Display value In addition, when the setting dialog box is closed by pressing "OK" button, the meters in edit
window will be displayed under the same state with preview display.
"Reset" Reset to the value in the first time setting.
Overview
Sampling trigger
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
ψTime ψTime
Batch sampling
• When a sampling trigger is generated, the data of continuous word devices is batch-sampled to generate the trend
image.
• Eight images can be displayed for a single trend image (batch sampling).
• Only one trend image (batch sampling) can be placed in a single page (base + window).
Batch-sampled data
Sampling trigger
Worksheet Related
• When the data of a worksheet is updated, the data of continuous cells on the worksheet are batch-sampled to
generate the trend image.
• Up to eight images can be displayed in a single trend image (worksheet).
Batch-sampled data
Worksheet data
update
Trend sample device Word device (cont.) Word device (cont.) Word device (any) XYimages
1 word 32 4096 512
Number of trends
2 words 16 2048 256
Trend monitor interval Fast Slow
Influence on trend monitor interval Low Adjusted by sampling speed
Point Trend image (real time) data cannot be sampled during the following periods:
• During migration to the System mode screen
• PLC data folder currently being executed
• Data being received and sent by PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3
• Remote COM port tool being used (pause of VT3 function)
Normal trends
When data length of 1 word is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 32 images can be sampled. In other words, 32 images can be distributed by trend ID (0 to 3) for sampling.
When data length of 2 words is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 16 images can be sampled. In other words, 16 images can be distributed by trend ID (0 to 3) for sampling.
For example, Trend ID0: 8 images, Trend ID1: 5 images, Trend ID2: 2 images, Trend ID3: 1 images
VT3
12345
PLC
12345
ABCD
10
Device monitoring
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Extended trends
When data length of 1 word is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 4096 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 4096 samples and
displayed as a image.
When data length of 2 words is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 2048 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 2048 samples and
displayed as a image.
When data length of 1 word is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 512 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 512 samples and displayed
as a image.
When data length of 2 words is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 256 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 256 samples and displayed
as a image.
VT3
12345
PLC
12345
ABCD
10
Device monitoring
interval internally set on VT3: T
…
…
The data of all monitored targets B (B (1) to B (N)) is recorded to internal memory(SRAM) on VT3 the moment B (N) is
updated.
Data Hours
B(1) data ::XX
B(2) data ::XX This is actually the data at a moment in the past from
B(3) data ::XX time ::XX.
…
::XX
B(N) data ::XX
Sampling speed
Sampling speed
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
Use extended trends when there are many devices to be sampled, and the sampling of these devices is set to a slow cycle.
Point • When the sampling trigger is set to "VT timer (auto)," the sampling period cannot be set.
The VT3 automatically memorizes the sampling cycle.
Sampling trigger/sampling period
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
• As recording of data by extended trends is executed when all data acquisitions are
completed, the data acquisition time (recording time) does not match the time that the trigger
occurred.
Point The trend image drawing speed slows down depending on the following items:
• Number of images
• Number of display items
• Display range setting
• Alarm range setting
• Setting bold line/shadow in the line type of line chart
• Setting non-display value
Data
Common settings
Item Description
image type Select the type of trend image from "Real time/Batch sampling/Worksheet".
Number of images Set the number of images (1 to 8) to be displayed as trend images.
Number of data*1 Set the number of data to be displayed (number of image plot points) (range: 2 to 900).
The label "Tg_"****" " is automatically assigned as the default tothe trend image. Correct this
Label label as necessary. Correct this label as necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number
starting from 0000 is appended.)
*1 Set the number of data taking the dot size (e.g. 800 x 600 dots on the VT3-S12) of the unit's display panel into
consideration. To display data, one dot is required for each data, for example, number of data 800 cannot be
set for the VT3-V10 (640 x 480 dots) .
"Auto-size(image)", page 10-41
Numerical axis 2 5
Numerical axis Data 2
Data 7
Data 1
Data 1
Data 3
Item axis
Item axis 3 4 6
→ Time (real time) → Time (real time)
→ Reference word device → Reference word device
(batch sampling)
→ Reference cell (worksheet)
(batch sampling)
→ Reference cell (worksheet) 10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Item Description
Set the trend ID (0 to 3) to be displayed when the image type is set to trend image (real
Trend ID
time).
When the "Device setting" button is clicked, the system setting screen for the trend image
Device settings *1
is displayed.
10
Real time settings
Select the data length of the trend sample device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Data length
words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data
Data Format
formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Arithmetic
Calculatio When this checkbox is marked, calculations can be used for trend image data.
operations
ns*2
Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
Display mode*3 Select the display mode from "Normal/Recorder".
Set the number of data (1 to 32767) by which the image is scrolled when the trend image
Scroll pitch
is reverse-scrolled by key entry.
*1 "Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
*2 "6-9 Calculation"
*3 Display as follows.
Normal Recorder
[Example] When Number of trends = 5, Number of images (trend No. 0 to 2 selected for display) = 3, Data length = 2 words
Trend graph
Word Device Trend No.
In the above example, five (number of trends) trend data are sampled, and three (number of images: trend Nos. 0 to
2) of these are selected and displayed as trend images. Select the image (trend No.) to be displayed on the "image"
tab. Set the leading No. of the trend sample device in the trend image system setting screen.
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
Reference Trend sample device : The device used for sampling data of trend images (real time)
Set the leading device No. in the trend image syste m settings.
Number of trends : The number of data of the trend image (real time) to be sampled. For
example, when the umber of trends is set to 5, five data are sampled and
recorded to VT3 internal memory.
Trend No. : When the leading trend sample device and number of trends are set, the
trend No. is assigned in order as show nin the above example.
Number of images : Number of images to be displayed for trend image parts.
Up to eight data to be displayed as images are selected from the data, to
be sampled by the number of trends, by trend No., and are displayed on
the trend image part.
10
Trend No. 0 Trend No. 1 Trend No. 2 Trend No. 3 Trend No. 4
Meters
Statistical images
Number of graphs:
Select the data (trend No.) to be displayed as a Trend image
graph (max. 8)
XYimages
Item Description
Set the word device that is targeted for the trend image (batch sampling). A
continuous number of word devices is used for the number (number of images
Reference word device*1, *2 x number of displayitems x data length) starting from the reference word device
set here. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be
set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When
Data length
"2 words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the
10 Data format
Arithmetic
data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
When this checkbox is marked, calculations can be used for trend image data.
Batch sampling settings
Calculations*3 operations
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
-5V to +5V analog data PLC digital data Calculation Display on VT3 in required unit
"6-9 Calculation"
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Worksheets
Item Description
WS Set the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to be displayed as a image.
Reference cell Cell position Set the position of the cell to start imageic display.
Worksheet
Cell direction Select the cell alignment direction from "Row/Column".
settings
Data length The data length is fixed to 2 words when the image type is "Worksheet".
10 Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal".
[Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data = 3, Cell position = (A1), Cell direction = Column
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
No.2
[Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data = 3, Cell position =(B3), Cell direction = Column
Data of No.2 (4) (B4) (5) (C4) (6) (D4) (1) (3)
(2)
(6)
(4) (5)
No.2
Range
Item Description
Set the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of the trend data.
Lower limit value*2 Num:
Input Set a constant as the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
range *1 PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit value*2 The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell to the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value). 10
After selection, you can set the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value)
10 100
Input range
Conversion
Display range
100 1000
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
images
Common settings
Item Description
image format Select the display format of the trend image from "Line chart/Bar chart".
Select the direction in which the trend image is formed from "Left -> right/Right -> left/Bottom
Displacement direction *1
-> top/Top -> bottom".
When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar is displayed. This item can be set only in the
Scroll bar*3
case of a trend image (real-time).
Style Select the style used for display from "Base/image frame".
Frame color *2 Select the frame color.
Background color *2 Select the background color.
When this checkbox is marked, the background color becomes transparent. With this setting,
Frame/background
Transparent
the drawing speed slows down.
Lower limit alarm
Select the background color for alarm lower limit.
background color*2
Upper limit alarm
Select the background color for alarm upper limit.
background color*2
Color Select the color system of image frame.
Free style When image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
Change*4 When the Free style checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, the size of the image is automatically adjusted according to the number
Auto-size(image)
of data. When the image format is set to "Bar chart", "Auto-size (image)" is fixed to "ON".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
10
Item axis
Numerical axis
Item axis (time: in case of trend graph (real time))
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3 For the details, refer to "Scroll bar", page 10-41.
*4 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 10-42.
Scroll bar
The scroll bar can be set only for trend images (real time).
Meters
Length of scroll bar : representing the entiret trend image (realtime).
Statistical images
Length of position cursor: representing the position percentage of trend image (realtime) being displayed.
Trend image
When the "Control scnal bar directly" check-box is marked, the scroll bar
XYimages
can be directly operated by touching the scroll bar without using "Forward
scroll" or "Reverse scroll" key entry switches.
"Control scroll bar directly", page 10-51
Position cursor
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Line charts
Item Description
No. Displays the No. (1 to number of images) of the trend data to be displayed on the image.
Set the trend No. to be displayed on the image only when the image type is set to trend
Trend No.*1
image (real time).
Normal Select the line type and color of the trend image during normal operation.
Line type/
Lower limit alarm Select the line type and color of the trend image during an alarm lower limit.
color *2
Upper limit alarm Select the line type and color of the trend image during an alarm upper limit.
*1 "Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
Bar charts 10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
Bar width
Separate display
[Example] When alarm range is set to bar chart
When separate display isn't set When separate display is set
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Scale
Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, the scale of the item axis (scale line (in)) is
Scale of item axis
displayed.
Scale layout Select the scale layout from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
Scale of item axis
Interval When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval (1 to 1024).
Number of divisions
Line type/line color*1
When "Equal divisions" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale division (2 to 100).
Set the line type and line color of the scale.
10
Scale of numerical axis When this checkbox is marked, the scale on the numerical axis is displayed.
Line type/line color*1 Set the line type and color of the scale line (in).
Scale (out) When this checkbox is marked, the scale line (out) is displayed. Meters
Set the position where the scale is displayed.
Statistical images
When “Displacement direction” is set as "left -> right/right -> left": select from
Scale position "left/right".
Trend image
When "Displacement direction" is set as "top -> bottom/bottom -> top" : select
from "top/bottom". XYimages
When this checkbox is marked, the main scale (length 6 dots on outer side)
Main scale
is displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale (length 3 dots on outer
Scale (out) Auxiliary scale
side) is displayed.
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, the scale markings are displayed.
When this button is clicked, the "Scale markings settings" window appears so
Setting
that you can make settings relating to scale markings.
Normal Set the line color of the scale during normal operation.
Lower
Line Set the line color of the scale at the alarm lower limit.
limit alarm
color*1
Upper
Set the line color of the scale at the alarm upper limit.
limit alarm
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*1
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-45
10-3 Setting Trend images
Selecting which of the image horizontal and vertical axis is to be assigned as the item axis and numerical axis
Displacement direction of "Trend images" page 10-41
Scale marking
5000
Auxiliary scale
10 Main scale
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Numerical axis
30000
Numerical axis
20000 20000
10000 10000
0 0
Numerical axis
Scale (inner):
Numerical axis is displayed
at main scale intervals.
Scale (outer)
Item axis
Point The scale line (out) is displayed as a solid line on the main and auxiliary scales.
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Item Description
Number of display digits Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) in numerical values to be displayed on the scale.
Decimal point position *1 Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted.
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, "+" is displayed for plus numbers in the numerical value
Display +
display.
Fonts Select the font to be used for display from "Bitmap font/Windows font".
The fonts are displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used are displayed
List of available fonts
from imageics data list. Select the available fonts.
You can set the fonts not included in the list of available fonts. After the font type and size
Font setting
are set through "Select font" window, add them to the list of available fonts.
Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Half-width/Full-width/7-segment*4".
Select the font size of the numerical values to be displayed on the scale from "1/2X, 1X, or
Text size*2, *4
2X".
10 Text color*3
Set the color of text on the scale for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm
upper limit.
Set the text on the scale to bold for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm
Bold line
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
upper limit.
Gives text a shadow, so that it looks engraved. Thus has a 3D effect for each of normal
Shadow
Text operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Decoration Gives text a shadow, so that it looks engraved. Thus it looks engraved for each of normal
Engrave
operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
color*3 decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK*3
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Example of setting decimal position
“Setting Numerical Value Displays” page 9-4
*2
Half-width Full-width/7-
Text size
characters segment
At 1/2X text size 8 x 8 dots -
At 1X text size 8 x 16 dots 16 x 16 dots
At 2X text size 16 x 32 dots 32 x 32 dots
When "Text decoration" is set 2 dots
Key entry/cursor
Item Description
Key entry*1, 2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Key entry order*1 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen.
Key entry Select by switch*1 When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by touching trend images.
Control scroll bar When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar on the touch panel can be directly
directly operated. The scroll bar can be set only for trend images (real time).
Cursor*2 When this checkbox is marked, the cursor is displayed on the trend image.
Cursor color*3 Sets the cursor color.
10
Store When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position,date/time, image data, and
cursor data other information is stored to the target word device.
When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position is stored to the target word device.
One target word device is used.
Key entry
▲
▼
▲
▼
Start Stop Cancel Clear
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the part becomes a key entry part, and the trend image (real time) can be
scrolled to display past stored data.
If you press a "Scroll forward" or "Scroll back" key entry switch in a trend image (realtime) in the Active mode, data
(past stored data) protruding outside of the frame is displayed.
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
10 "Key entry", page 8-26
Also, if date/time storage is used, past data can be scrolled and displayed by date, time or data No. by which the data
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
was stored.
"Store date/Display control", page 10-55
If you touch a "Stop" or "Start" key entry switch, recording of data of trend images (real time) in the Active mode can
be paused or started. If you touch a "Clear all" key entry switch, all past data stored by the trend ID of trend images
(real time) in the Active mode is cleared (deleted).
Touching a "Stop" key entry switch stops sampling of trend image data, and touching a "Start" key entry switch
resumes sampling. Stop/start of trend image data sampling can also be executed by turning a bit device ON/OFF.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
"12-7 Global Function Control"
[Example]
Scroll bar
Touching the area on the left half of the scroll bar scrolls the page backwards, while touching the area on the right half
scrolls the page in the forward direction.
Point To switch the trend image (real time) from the Active mode to the Display mode, touch any
part other than the scroll bar. When a "Control scroll bar directly" key entry switch is used,
do not change the switch area. Doing so will cause operation of the trend image to
malfunction.
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Cursor
19:12 12345
Cursor
ً
ٕ
Apply
Point Even with trend images that are not displayed by display control, the cursor position, date
10 data, and image data are stored to the target word device.
"Store date/Display control", page 10-55
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
19:12 12345
Cursor
ً
ٕ
Apply
Reference In the case of trend images (real time), the time axis can be scaled. This feature is useful for viewing
the time axis scaled or for accurately positioning the cursor. This is not set in trend images. All that
needs to be done is to place a "keyentry" function switch.
"Compress time axis" key entry switch "Extend time axis" key entry switch
10
Latest data
(No.3) (No.4)
cursor position (No.0)
(No.1) (No.2)
(No.4) (No.5)
[Example] To store the cursor position and image data by a trend image of number of images = 4 and data length
= 1 word
Device No. Description Description Meters
Stores the cursor position to the target word device. Statistical images
One target word device is used.
Trend image (real time): Trend image
Stores numerical values in order of past data, for example, as 1, 2, 3 and
so forth with the latest data as No.0. (unsigned decimal: 0 to 65535) XYimages
Trend image (batch sampling):
Target word device
Data No. Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 andso forth from a low device
Leading No. + 0
number taking the smallest reference word device No. in a single image as
No.0.
Trend image (worksheet):
Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 and so forth from the smallest
cell number taking the lowest cell position in a single image (A, B, C in the
case of a row, and 1, 2, 3 in the case of a column) as "1".
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.1 (1st image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 1 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.2 (2nd image) where the
image data
Leading No. + 2 cursor is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.3 (3rd image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 3 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.4 (4th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 4 is located.
[Example] To store the cursor position, date data and image data by a trend image of numberof images = 8 and
Data length = 2 words
Device No. Description Description
Stores the cursor position to the target word device.
One target word device is used.
Target word device
Data No. Trend image (real time):
Leading No. + 0
Stores numerical values in order of past data, for example, as 1, 2, 3 and
so forth with the latest data as No.0. (unsigned decimal: 0 to 65535)
Target word device
Year "Year (lower two digits)" 00 to 99 (decimal)
Leading No. + 1
Target word device
Month "Month" 01 to 12 (decimal)
Leading No. + 2
Target word device
Day "Day" 01 to 31 (decimal)
Leading No. + 3
Target word device Day of the week
"Day of the week" 0 to 6 (decimal) (0: Sunday to 6: Saturday)
Leading No. + 4 (number)
Target word device
Leading No. + 5 Day of the week
"Day of the week" Sunday to Saturday (shift JIS code)
Target word device (Kanji)
Leading No. + 6
Target word device
Leading No. + 7 Day of the week
"Day of the week" SUN to SAT (ASCII code)
Target word device (English)
Leading No. + 8
Target word device
Hour "Hours" 00 to 23 (decimal)
Leading No. + 9
Target word device
Minute "Minutes" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 10
Target word device
Second "Seconds" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 11
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.1 (1st image) where the cursor
10
image data
Leading No. + 12, 13 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.2 (2nd image) where the
image data
Leading No. + 14, 15 cursor is located.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.3 (3rd image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 16, 17 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.4 (4th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 18, 19 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.5 (5th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 20, 21 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.6 (6th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 22, 23 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.7 (7th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 24, 25 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.8 (8th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 26, 27 is located.
Point When the cursor position is not stored, the target word device No. shifts forward by one
device.
When the date data is not stored, the target word device No. shifts forward by 11 devices.
To store image data, (number of images x data length) target word devices are required.
Set the function for storing the date/time that trend image data currently displayed in the trend image is stored to
memory.
Store date can be set only on trend images (real time). It cannot be set on trend images (batch sampling and
worksheet).
Item
Store old data
Description
When this checkbox is marked, the date/time that the oldest of the currently
10
date/time displayed trend image data was stored is stored to the target word device.
10
100 100
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
0 0
-100 -100
The lines connecting 2 points are not displayed.
2 Set the trend sample device, etc. in the trend system settings screen.
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
10
bit device.
Set the data sampling timing (1 to 32767 seconds) when the sampling trigger is set
to "VT timer (auto)". When "Logging mode" is set to extended, and "Sampling
Sampling period
trigger" is set to VT timer (auto), the sampling period cannot be set. The VT3
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Item Description
When the "Advanced settings" button is clicked, the memory size and extended
Advanced settings
trend can be set.
Displays which blocks of the total 60 blocks of memory size are in use. When the
Memory size "Memory size" button is clicked, the memory size can be set in the "Trend memory
size settings" window.
After selection, the rate of utilization of memory size is stored into the set device.
Rate of The numerical value is updated in the following cases:
consumed • In the case of change over 5%
memory size*3 • When memory size spillover alarm is ON
• When memory size is 0%, 100%
Memory size
Memory After selection, notify that memory size becomes a setting value.
over alarm
size
Notified bit Sets the notified bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device*2
Advanced settings
Sampling
speed *1
Select the sampling speed from "Low (screen renewal priority)/Medium/High (trend
sampling priority)." 10
*1 "Overview", page 10-28
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Devices Settings
When the "Logging mode" is set to "Extended (individual device)," set the trend sample device here. Clicking the
"Device settings" button to display the "Individual device settings" window.
Item Description
Up/Down Changes the order of trend sample devices.
Point When data length is 1 word, the trend sample device, such as:
DM00000, DM00003, DM00008••••
are set through uncontinuous word device.
When data length is 2 words, the trend sample device, such as:
(DM00001/DM00000), (DM00004/DM00003), (DM00009/DM00008)••••
are set through 2 continuous word devices. The trend sample devices are uncontinuously
set.
10 Memory size
The "Trend memory size settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Memory size" button.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
In this window, set the capacity to be stored for each trend ID (0 to 3).
The data capacity of trend images (real time) that can be stored on VT3 varies according to whether or not a PLC
data folder whose save destination is internal memory (SRAM) is being used.
PLC Data Folder
PLC Data Folder
Trend saving capacity (save destination: internal memory) Not
(save destination: internal memory)
Used
non VT3-W4 series 300 Kbyte 150 Kbyte
VT3-W4 series 117 Kbyte 42 Kbyte
Trend memory size divided into 60 equal parts is individually distributed among trend IDs (0 to 3).
For example,
Trend ID0 : 30 blocks (30/60)
Trend ID1 : 15 blocks (15/60)
Trend ID2 : 15 blocks (15/60)
Trend ID3 : 0 Block (00/60)
Total 60 Block (60/60)
Memory size (bytes) = (2 x data length x number of trends + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)
[Example] When non VT3-W4 series type is used, PLC data folder is not used (save address as built-in memory):
(1) When Data length = 1 word, Number of trends = 1, trend only ID0 is used (60 blocks = 300 KB)
300 x 1024 >= (2 x 1 x 1 + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)
Number of memory data = 51199 10
(3) When Data length = 1 word, Number of trends = 4096, trend only ID0 is used (60 blocks = 300 KB)
300 X1024 >= (2 x 1 x 4096 + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)
Number of memory data = 36
Point When data is transmitted by PC->VT Send data, the data of the trend images (real time) stored
on VT3 internal memory (SRAM) is cleared.
PC->VT Send data
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data" Meters
Statistical images
Reference The data of trend images (real time) stored on VT3 internal memory (SRAM) can be cleared by the
following methods: Trend image
Overview
Types of XY images
XY graph XY graph
10 Sampling trigger
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Batch sampling
• When the sample triggering occurs, read in batch data of sequential word device, and generate XY images.
• 4 images can be displayed in a XY image (batch sampling).
• Only 1 XY image (batch sampling) can be placed in 1 page (Base + window).
XY graph XY graph
Sampling trigger
Worksheet Related
• When the data of worksheet is updated, read in batch cell data of sequential worksheet, and generate XY images.
• 4 images can be displayed in a XY image (worksheet).
XY graph XY graph
10
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
When XY images (batch sampling) are displayed, only XY image parts are set.
When XY images (worksheet) are displayed, the following two items are set generally.
• Settings of XY image parts
"XY image settings", page 10-64
• Setting Worksheets
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"
XY image settings
Parts(P) -> Meter/image(M) -> XY image(X)
• Double-click XY images.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" ->"Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu
Point The ploting speed of XY images may slow down due to the following items.
• Number of images
• Number of data
• Ideal curve used
• Display range setting
• Alarm range setting
• Setting bold line/shadow in the line chart
Data
Common settings
Item Description
image type Select the types of XYimages from “real-time/batch sampling/worksheet”.
Number of images Set the number (1 to 4) displayed as XY images.
Number of data Set the number of data (plot number of images) (2 to 320) to be displayed.
Ideal curve
Ideal curve After selection, ideal curve can be used.
used
used *1
Setting *2 “Ideal curve” window is displayed.
As initial value, “XY -"****" “ is assigned automatically into XY images. Correct this label as
Label
necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Item Description
Number of data Set the number of data (2 to 320) used for creating ideal curve.
The closed curve that is set to
connect start point and end After selection, connect the starting point and end point to form a closed curve.
point
Set the word device as the ideal curve target. The set reference word device is
Reference word placed at front, and the devices corresponding to (number of data/data length) are
device *1 used continuously. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can
be set in the "Device settings" window.
X-axis/Y-axis Data length The data length and data format of X-axis and Y-axis are displayed by setting with
Data format “Data” tab.
10 Calcu
lation*2
Arithmetic
operations
After selection, arithmetic operation can be used for the value of reference word
device.
Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Trigger bit Set the bit device as trigger. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device *3 device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Setting the data reading timing.
:Rising edge
Sampling Sampling edge
:Falling edge
Trigger :Both rising edge and falling edge
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
recognizes the trigger.
Reset bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF-> ON
Line type/line
Line Select line type/fline color of ideal curve.
color*4
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*4
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "6-9 Calculation"
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*4 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
Item Description
Trend ID Set trend ID (0 to 3) displayed in the case of XY image (real-time).
When the "Device setting" button is clicked, the system setting screen for the trend
Device settings *1
image is displayed.
Select the data length of the trend sample device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Real time settings
Data length
words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data
Data format
X-axis/Y-axis
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Example 1 When Number of trends = 5, Number of images (trend No. 0 to 3 selected for display) = 2, Data length
= 1 word
X-axis data for No.1 Leading trend sample device No.+0 No.0
(1)
X-axis data for No.1 Leading trend sample device No.+1 No.1
XY graph display
X-axis data for No.2 Leading trend sample device No.+2 No.2
(2)
X-axis data for No.2 Leading trend sample device No.+3 No.3
X-axis data for No.3 Leading trend sample device No.+4 No.4
(3)
X-axis data for No.3 Leading trend sample device No.+5 No.5
In above examples, 6 trend data items (number of trends) are sampled, and 2 (number of
images: trend No. 0 to 3) are displayed as XY images.
Select the image (trend No.) to be displayed on the "image" tab.
XY graph
(1)
10 (2)
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Set the leading No. of the trend sample device in the trend image system setting screen.
"System Settings of XY image (real-time)", page 10-84
In above examples, 4 trend data items (number of trends) are sampled, and 3 (number of
images: trend No.0 to 3) are displayed as XY images.
Select the image (trend No.) to be displayed on the "image" tab.
XY graph
(1)
(2)
(3)
10
Reference Trend sample device : device for sampling of XY image (real-time) data. Set the leading device
No. in the trend image system settings.
Number of trends : the number of XY image (real-time) data for sampling. For example, Meters
when the umber of trends is set to 5, five data items are sampled and
Statistical images
recorded to VT3 internal memory.
Trend image
Trend No. : after the leading and trend number of trend sample devices, the trend
No. s, are distributed as mentioned above. XYimages
Number of images : the number of images displayed on XY image parts. In the data sampled
according to the number of trends, up to 4 XY image data items
displayed by trend No. are displayed in XY image parts.
Item Description
Set the word device as XY image (batch sampling) target. A continuous number of
Reference word device word devices is used for the number (number of images x number of display items x
*1, *2 data length) starting from the reference word device set here. When the "Browse"
button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
X-axis/Y-axis
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Data length
words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data
Data Format
10 Calculati
Arithmetic
formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
ons *3
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Set the bit device to be used as the trigger when thesampling trigger is set to "Bit
Trigger bit device*4 device". When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in
the "Device settings" window.
Set the data sampling timing when the sampling trigger is set to "Bit device".
: Rising edge
Sampling edge
: Falling edge
: Both rising edge and falling edge
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON->OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF->ON
See page 10-71 for descriptions on *1 to *4
*1 [Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data items = 3, Data length = 2 words
12(=2X3X2) sequential word devices are used for X-axis and Y-axis.
X-axis Y-axis No.
Leading reference word device No. + 0, + 1 Leading reference word device No. +0, +1 Data 1 of No.1 (1)
Leading reference word device No. + 2, + 3 Leading reference word device No. + 2, + 3 Data 2 of No.1 (2)
Leading reference word device No. + 4, + 5 Leading reference word device No. + 4, + 5 Data 3 of No.1 (3)
Leading reference word device No. + 6, + 7 Leading reference word device No. + 6, + 7 Data 1 of No.2 (4)
Leading reference word device No. + 8, + 9 Leading reference word device No. + 8, + 9 Data 2 of No.2 (5)
Leading reference word device No. + 10, + 11 Leading reference word device No. + 10, + 11 Data 3 of No.2 (6)
Y-axis
No.1
(1) (3)
(2)
X-axis
(5)
(4) (6)
No.2
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Worksheets
Item Description
WS Set the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to be displayed as a image.
X-axis/Y-axis
Reference
Cell position Set the position of the cell to start imageic display.
Worksheet cell
Cell direction Select the cell alignment direction from "Row/Column".
settings
Data length The data length is fixed to 2 words when the image type is "Worksheet".
Data format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal".
10 [Example] Number of images=2, number of data=3, cell position of X-axis= (A1) , cell position of Y-axis= (A11) ,
direction of cell=vertical
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
No.1 No.2
[Example] Number of images=2, number of data=3, cell position of X-axis= (A1), cell position of Y-axis= (A11),
direction of cell=vertical
No.1
X coordinate of (A1)(1) X coordinate of (B1)(2) X coordinate of (C1) (3)
No.2
X coordinate of (A2)(4) X coordinate of (B2)(5) X coordinate of (C2) (6)
• • •
• • •
• • •
No.1
Y coordinate of (A11) (1) Y coordinate of (B11)(2) Y coordinate of (C11) (3)
No.2
Y coordinate of (A12) (4) Y coordinate of (B12)(5) Y coordinate of (C12) (6)
• • •
• • •
• • •
Y-axis
No.1
(1) (3)
(2)
X-axis
(5)
10
(4) (6)
No.2
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Input/display range
Item Description
Set the input range of numerical value for display of XY images (lower limit value/
Lower limit upper limit value).
X-axis/Y-axis
value *2 Num:
Input range *1 Set a constant as a display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
value *2
10
calculation/cell to the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
After selection, You can set the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of
Display
XY images displayed on VT3. After display range is set, the value of trend sample
range
device is converted and then displayed on VT3.
X-axis/Y-axis
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
Display Num:
Lower limit
range*1,3 value *2 Set a constant as a display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
value *2 calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Alarm range/base
Item Description
X-axis/Y-axis Set a constant as a display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Num:
Lower limit value *2 Set a constant as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit value *2 The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Alarm
10
Alarm range *1
X-axis/Y-axis
lower When this checkbox is marked, the alarm lower limit line can be displayed.
Alarm lower limit line
*4 [Example] The deviations of ideal value and actual value of X=50, Y=50 are displayed through dispersion
pattern.
The images can be observed more clearly through display of base line.
100
Benchmark
line
50
0 50 100
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
images
Item Description
image format *1 Select the image format of XY images from “Line chart/dispersion pattern”.
Style Select the display style from “Base/image frame”.
Frame color *2 Select the frame color.
Background
Select the background color.
color *2
10
When this checkbox is marked, the background color becomes transparent. With this
Transparent
Frame/ setting, the drawing speed slows down.
background Alarm
background After selection, you can set the background color in the case of alarms.
*1 The display images of line chart and dispersion pattern are shown below.
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
(5,15)
10 10
0 0
-10 -10
-10 0 10 -10 0 10
Scale
Item Description
Scale of X-axis/Y-axis After selection, scale is displayed on X-axis/Y-axis.
Scale layout Select the scale layout method from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval on the
Interval
main scale.
Main scale
Number of When “Equal divisions” is selected at “Scale layout”, set the scale division number
10
divisions on the main scale (2 to 100).
When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval on the
Interval
Auxiliary auxiliary scale.
scale Number of When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale division number
Scale (out) When this checkbox is marked, the scale line (out) is displayed.
The position of scale is to be displayed
X-axis: “Bottom/base/top”
Y-axis: “Left/base/right“
Scale position
Light chain
Bottom/top/left/right: the scale is displayed along bottom/top/left/right of data frame.
Base : the scale is displayed on base line.
When this checkbox is marked, the main scale (length 6 dots on outer side) is
Main scale
displayed. Meters
Scale (out) When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale (length 3 dots on outer side) is
Auxiliary scale Statistical images
displayed.
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, the scale markings are displayed. Trend image
When this button is clicked, the "Scale markings settings "window opens so that
Setting XYimages
you can make settings relating to scale markings.
Normal Set the line color of the scale during normal operation.
Line color
Lower limit
Set the line color of the scale at the alarm lower limit.
alarm
Upper limit
Set the line color of the scale at the alarm upper limit.
alarm
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*1
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
5000
Auxiliary scale
Main scale
10 20000 20000
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
10000 10000
0 0
Scale line(inner):
numerical value axis is
displayed at the interval
on main scale.
Scale line(outer)
Point The scale line (out) is displayed as a solid line on the main and auxiliary scales.
10
Meters
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
Key entry
Item Description
Key entry*1 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Key
Key entry order *1 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen.
entry
Select by switch *1 When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by touching trend images.
*1 For the details of every item, see "6-3 Key Entry Parts" .
10 Reference • After pressing “Stop”, “start” key entry switches, you can temporarily stop/start data storage of XY
images (real-time) in active mode.
Pressing “Clear all” key entry switch, you can delete (clear) all old data stored in trend ID of XY
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
• The stop, start and clearing of data sampling of XY images can also be executed by bit device in
ON(OFF) state.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
"12-7 Global Function Control"
After selection, the date/time stored with newest XY image data is stored to the target word device.
This can be set only in the case of XY image (real-time).
Item Description
Store old date/ After selection, the date/time stored with newest XY image data is stored to the target
time word device.
Store old date/
10
Set the word device to which the date/time is stored. In the case of an internal word
time*1 Target word device, set (VT internal free device MW0100 onwards). A device having 12
device *2,3 continuous words is used. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Trend image
XYimages
XY image Precautions
• The data format of the reference word device (in the case of batch sampling) is set to BCD, and the value of the
reference word device is treated as "0" when it is an illegal value as a BCD value.
• The data format of trend sample device (in the case of realtime) is set to BCD, and the value of the trend sample
device is treated as “0“ when it is an illegal value as a BCD value.
• When a calculation is set, the value is treated as "0" when a calculation error occurs.
• It’s treated as “0“ when the value of reference cell (in the case of worksheet) is outside of the data format of XY
images.
For the details of settings, please read after converting "Trend images” in "Trend image (real time) System
Settings", page 10-57.
Relationship of system settings between XT image parts, trend image parts and
trend images
System setting
VT3
Internal
10
memory
Sampling data
Display through
parts
Statistical images
Trend image
XYimages
The sampling data is displayed as XY graphs The sampling data is displayed as trend
(real-time) on XY graph parts graphs(real-time) on trend graph parts
MEMO
10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES
OTHER FUNCTIONS
11-7 Active Edit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-32
11-8 Multiple Program Startups ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-35
11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes •••••••••••••••••• 11-36
11-10 Device Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-38
11-11 Operation Log ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-44
Call Up Screen
Parts(P) -> Call up screen(G)
12345 ABCD
The pictures
to be displayed 67890 EFGH
Draw in 100 pages with the common part as the source call-up screen.
11 1 page drawing Overlapped after 100 pages are called up.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
12345 12345
67890 + 67890
ABCD ABCD
EFGH + EFGH
About nesting
Screens can be nested up to three levels (four layers).
RUN AUTO MANUAL RUN AUTO MANUAL RUN AUTO MANUAL RUN AUTO MANUAL
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
About editing callup screens
You can edit the source callup screen placed on the screen currently being edited.
Click the screen callup to select it, and either select “Edit(E)” -> “Edit callup screen(Y)” from Menu in that order, or
open Menu by clicking the right mouse button and select “Edit callup screen(Y)”.
"Edit Callup Screen", page 4-20
1 Either select "Parts(P)" -> "Call up screen(G)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.
Item Description
Screen ID Select the screen ID of the screen to call up.
11 Select image
Displays the "Select screen" window for selecting the screen tocall up by a display image
of the screen.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Point • The Call up a Screen screen can only be moved, and cannot be enlarged or shrunk.
Movement of screen callups is possible in switch grid size (16 x 16 dots) units. Screen
callups cannot be moved in such as way that they will protrude from the editscreen.
• When a screen callup has been moved, objects that protrude outside of the display frame
are not displayed on the VT3. Though base screens can be called up to window screens,
objects that protrude outside of the window frame are not displayed on the VT3.
• Screens cannot be cyclically browsed in the following instance. When screen A (self
screen) is called by screen callup to screen A in which you are about to place a screen
callup
• When a screen A to which a screen callup is about to be placed is called to another screen
B, the screen cannot be browsed cyclically also when screen B is called up to screen A.
• The background color and wallpaper of the screen are not called up.
• Objects containing screen callups cannot be registered to the part catalog file.
• Screen callups cannot be used in printer forms.
• Printer forms cannot be called up from regular screens (base screen,window screen).
1 Either select "Parts(P)" -> "Load DXF file(D)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.
2 In the "Open DXF File" window, specify the name of the file and folder(directory) containing the DXF file to be
loaded.
Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the DXF file to be loaded.
File Name(N) Select the name of the DXF file to be loaded.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Select the type of file. Select "DXF file (*.dxf)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Set the size and conversion of text, points and hatching in the "DXF Load
Conditions Setup" window.
Item Description
Select whether to load DXF file by Graphic size ($EXTMIN,$EXTMAX) or by Drawing size
Size
($LIMMIN, $LIMMAX).
Text string conversion OFF When this checkbox is marked, text strings are not loaded.
Dot conversion OFF When this checkbox is marked, dots are not loaded.
Hatching conversion OFF When this checkbox is marked, hatching is not loaded.
5 Click the "OK" button to place the file at a size to fit the VT3's screen size.
7 Data is loaded in a grouped state. To change each of the graphic elements of the group, ungroup the data.
"Ungroup", page 4-14
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-5
11-2 Load DXF file
Point • Only DXF files in the AutoCAD R12 (made by Autodesk, Inc.) format can be loaded.
• This doesn't apply to Autocad R13J or above. Note, however, that only ELLIPSE (ellipse)
data can be loaded. To generate DXF files in versions AutoCAD R13 or later, specify "R12
format" by the file write command.
• Text in DXF files is handled as VT STUDIO bitmap text. Also, text isloaded at 1X size in
both the horizontal and vertical directions. Only ASCII/shift JIS text can be loaded.
• The line changing code only supports CR+LF. LF only is not supported.
• Objects made on display OFF layers cannot be loaded.
• XY plot area ranges ($EXTMIN/$EXTMAX) and XY paper size ranges ($LIMMIN/$LIMMAX)
cannot be loaded correctly unless they have been correctly set.
• 3D data cannot be loaded as the Z-axis coordinates are ignored.
• When a "Screen data size exceeded" error occurs during transfer of screen data or during
a data check, this indicates that the upper limit of the screen data size that can be edited on
a single page is exceeded. Ungroup the ata, and cut the loaded graphics to reduce the size
of the screen data.
Graphic conversion
DXF File VT STUDIO
LINE (segment) Lines
11 POINT (point)
POLYLINE (polyline, donut, spline, ellipse,polygon, rectangle)
Straight line (start and end points arethe same)
Continuous lines
TRACE(Thick Line), SOLID(Pattern Fill) Polygons
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Point • The display position sometimes shifts due to coordinate conversion errorin the graphics.
• POINT (point) data is converted with the start and end points as the same straight line.
• POLYLINE (polyline, donut, spline, ellipses, polygons and rectangles) are converted after
the coordinates of VERTEX (apices) data following arejoined by a continuous straight line.
Data whose number of VERTEX(apices) exceeds 100 points is converted after being
divided at each 100 points. When VERTEX (apices) data continuously becomes the same
coordinate, subsequent coordinates are omitted. Also, the POLYLINE width is not
converted.
• Small size ARC (arc) data (such as corner radii) is converted to straight lines.
• The TEXT (text) angle of rotation is converted to the angle closest to 90º. Text size is 1X in
both the horizontal and vertical directions. Only %%d (º),%%c (Ø), %%p (±), %%% (%), and
%%*** (***: decimal ASCII text string) are converted as special characters. %%O (overline)
and %%U (underline)are not converted. Text strings exceeding 64 characters are converted
after being divided at each 64 characters. Divided text strings, however, areplaced with a
deviation of several dots.
• ATTRIB (attributes) data is converted in the same way as TEXT (text).
• DIMENSION (dimensions) data is converted after breaking down the various graphics to
individual graphics by verifying the BLOCK sections from the block graphic name.
• INSERT (graphic insertion) data is converted after breaking down the block graphic defined
to BLOCK sections into individual graphics. Though the angle of rotation and number of
lines and rows are converted, the scale isnot converted. These graphics are not converted
when block graphics from other files are inserted or when other files are verified.
Item Description
Number of
Sets the number of lines (1 to 50) in the table.
lines
Number of
Sets the number of digits (1 to 50) in the table.
digits
Click the start point where the table is to be made in the Edit screen, and drag to the end point.
Start point
Drag
End point
Reference • The table is placed so that the intervals between frame lines and table lines, andthe interval
between table lines are equal in each of the horizontal and vertical directions.
• The lines and corners of tables are grouped. To change the intervals between lines or graphic
attributes, first ungroup the table.
"Ungroup", page 4-14
"7-1 Setting Graphics"
Make a Table
Parts (P) -> Table(A)
Item Description
Number of lines Sets the number of lines (1 to 30) in the table.
Number of Columns Sets the number of columns (1 to 30) in the table.
From the edit window, click the start point of the table to be made, and drag to the end point. A table is successfully
made.
Each grid in the table is called a cell.
Start Point
Drag
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
End Point
Move a Table
When a table part is selected, the line and column numbers are displayed.
To move a worksheet, select the worksheet and then drag and drop the “ “ on the top left.
Anchor
Resizing worksheet
To resize a worksheet , drag the 8 anchors in the worksheet part.
No drag, resize, and drop of the table is required. Please wait until the following window is displayed. Select "No
change to the size of registered part" to keep the size of parts unchanged.
Select a Cell
To select a cell, click it (the cell is highlighted).
All cells in a selected column can be selected by clicking the column No.
Click a line number, all the cells in the line are selected.
Double-click the upper left corner of the table, all the cells are selected.
Item Description
Width/height auto
Automatically adjust the width of a column or height of a line.
adjustment
Width/height equally
Equally set the width of all the columns or the height of all the lines in a table.
adjustment
Copy To copy the selected row.
Paste To paste the copied row to the selected row.
Add last row *1 Add a line beneath the last line.
Insert row *1 Insert a line on the top of the selected line.
Insert copied row To insert the copied row on the top of the selected row.
Delete row Delete the selected line.
Add last Column *1 Add a column behind the last column.
Insert Column *1 Insert a column on the left of the selected column.
Insert copied column To insert the copied column on the left of the selected column.
Delete Column Delete the selected column.
*1 When the upper limit of the dimensions and number (1152x896) of lines and columns is reached, you cannot
insert a line or column.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
When the mouse cursor is moved between two adjacent line numbers and column numbers and on a style line, the
cursor becomes .
The width and height can be adjusted by dragging.
When double-clicking, the width and height can be automatically adjusted.
No drag is required. Please wait until the following window is displayed. Select "No change to the size of registered
part" to keep the size of parts unchanged.
Table Attributes
When a cell is selected, the “Attributes” window is displayed. The following operations can be executed.
• The grid line of the selected cell can be selected.
• The background color of the selected cell can be selected.
• The targets in the selected cell can be configured.
Item Description
Line type *1 Select the grid line types.
Line color *1 Select the colors of the grid line.
Pattern The grid line of the selected cell can be made with the selected line types and colors.
Outer Frame
An outer frame and inner grid lines are made for the selected cell.
+ Inner Lines
11
Outer Frame An outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Inner Lines The inner grid lines are made for the selected cell.
None Delete all the grid lines of the selected cell.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
The Up Line
Cell Line of the Outer The up grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Frame
The Down
Line of the The down grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Outer Frame
The Left Line
of the Outer The left grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Frame
The Right
Line of the The right grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Outer Frame
By checking it, you can select the background colors. If not selected, the
Cell Background
Cell background color is transparent.
Background Background
Select background colors.
color *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*1
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align Top
Align Middle
Align bottom
Alignment incell The selected multiple targets in the cell can be aligned left, right, and middle.
Align left
Align Center
Align right
Register a Part
Drag and drop the part to the desired cell.
Select " Register a Part". You can also register a part by moving it and then immediately releasing it.
When the "Not Register" option is selected, this part is only overlapped on the table.
Change registration
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
To register a registered part in other cell, drag the part to the top of the cell to be registered and do not release the
mouse. A moment later, the above window will appear.
Select the "Change registered cell" to change the registered cell.
Undo a Registration
Drag a registered part out of the worksheet and do not release the mouse. A moment later, the above window will
appear.
Select "Unregsiter part" to cancel the registration.
You can un-register a part by cutting-pasting it.
Delete a Part
To delete the registered part in the cell, select the cell, and press the key.
Auto Fill
You can use the auto fill function by registering the part to a cell.
The little square display at the lower-right corner of the selected cell is called fill handle.
If you bring the mouse pointer over the fill handle, the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair pointer.
To copy the contents of the cell to an adjacent cell, or make the parts with successive numbers, you can drag the fill
handle.
Drag
Fill handle
Reference Double-clicking the fill handle, the parts registered in the cell are selected.
Copy/Paste a Cell
You can copy ( + )and paste ( + ) a selected cell.
When being pasted, the contents, grid lines, and background colors are copied.
When being pasted outside the cell, the contents + straight lines + quadrilateral are copied (the grid lines are
dissolved into straight lines while the cell background is dissolved into a quadrilateral).
Notes
• For a part that is registered in the cell, it, even outside the frame (the green area), can also be transferred to VT3
together with the picture data.
• The table parts can also be used by the VT2 models. Under the following circumstances, however, they are grouped
together after being dissolved into straight line + quadrilateral (cell grid line -> straight line, cell background ->
quadrilateral).
•Receive picture data from the VT2 unit
•Read from Memory Card.
Form Printing
When a print start trigger bit device turns ON, the pre-prepared printer forms can be output (saved on Memory Card) to a printer.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
target VT.
When VT3-Q5M is set in the target VT, black and white colors or grey scale are used for the
form picture (determined by the number of colors of the target VT). When the grey scale is
used, the printout is grey. When black and white colors are used, the printout is black and
white totaling 2 colors.
• Screen callups cannot be used in printer forms.
"11-1 Call Up Screen"
• Printer forms are saved as part of screen data, and printer form data is transferred to the
VT3 by PC->VT Send data. However, printer form datais not displayed on VT3 screen as this
screen data is for printing.
• About the functional limitations on the parts in the form picture.
"Restrictions on part functions in printer forms", page 11-17
• In the case of thermal printers, white text or lines may not be properly formed or disappear
if placed on black backgrounds. Check the printing results on an actual printer.
• The "ESC/P-R Ether" and "ESC/Page Ether" printer types can only be used when the VT3
series and printer are connected via Ethernet. The VT3 system program must also be
Ver. 4.81 or later.
Reference • An output image of an edited printer form can be confirmed in the View mode.
"View Mode", page 5-28
• Screen IDs of printer forms and number of forms that can be made
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
• After the form screen on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
create a component with the print start trigger bit of the form screen being set.
11
Screen size
Printing Direction Paper Size
Width (dots) Height (dots)
Vertical A4 708 960
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Horizontal A4 960 708
Printing Direction
ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster 2,
LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge,
ESC/P-R Ether, or ESC/Page Ether Thermal Printer
Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
A
A
A
A
Single-density Double-density
screen size screen size
24 to 1008 dots
Paper width 80 mm
Memory Card
• The form size varies according to the printer settings. (The screen size is the same as that when a printer is used
merely when the output destination is a Memory Card and not a printer.)
• Each page is saved in the VTRPT folder in Memory Card as the bitmap or JPEG format. The picture format is set
with Memory Card in the VT system.
• Printer forms saved on Memory Card cannot be displayed by "Viewer" on the VT3.
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Printer forms saved on Memory Card cannot be displayed by BMP file switching.
Animation Display
undertaken with Frame o marking the start of printing.
• When the position control is “Specify by Do”t and dot update is “Specify by
Period”, all the options in the "Position Control" tab are invalid. Print in NO.0.
11
• When the position control is “Specify by Dot” and dot update is “Specify
OTHER FUNCTIONS
by Number”, printing is undertaken from the start dot number.
• When the position control is “Specify Directly”, printing is undertaken
from the start position.
• Options in the "Display Control" tab are invalid.
Function control by devices All setting items are invalid (not printed even if placed))
BMP file switching All setting items are invalid (always printed in gray even if placed))
Meters (bargraph, pie
None
chart, Fan)
Statisticalgraphs
None
(bargraph, circle)
• "Scroll pitch" setting is invalid.
Meters/Graphs • "Sampling trigger" setting is invalid. *1
Trend Graph
• All the options in the "Key and Bar Code Entry" tab are disabled.
• "Store Date and Time of Old Data" and "Store Date and Time of New Data" are invalid.
• "Sampling trigger" setting is invalid. *2
• The "Sampling Contact" option of the ideal curve is invalid. *2
XY graphs
• All setting items on the "Key entry" tab are invalid.
• "Store Date and Time of Old Data" and "Store Date and Time of New Data" are invalid.
*1 This item is sampled when printing is started on trend graphs (batch sampling,worksheet).
*2 The XY Chart (batch samples, worksheets) is sampled when printing begins.
For example, you can set the following four text strings to switch plates.
Display text string ID0 Display text string ID1 Display text string ID2 Display text string ID3
Next, make four switches for switching the text string, and set the "change display text string" switch function.
The switch to display text string ID0 The switch to display text string ID1 The switch to display text
string ID2 The switch to display text string ID3
Chinese Character Alphanumeric Character SymbolRoman Character
Each press of the switch for changing display text string switches the text string.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Point Total 8 text string IDs 0-7 can be displayed. It is not necessary to set up all the display text
string IDs. Set the text strings of the display text string ID forthe number of text strings to be
switched.
Set to use the change display text string function in system settings.
2 Check the "Use the display text string switching function" checkbox.
Point If you unmark a checkbox, a message confirming that the text string data of ID1 to 7 will not
be saved will be displayed.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 At "Default display text string ID", set the display text string ID to be displayed when theVT3 is started up.
To switch the display character ID in a PLC device, check the checkbox "Specify the display text string ID". Sets the
target word device. You can set comments for each text string ID if necessary.
"Changing display character strings", page 12-22
Point • When the VT3 is started up, the display text string is displayed by the default display
textstring.
• The default display text string ID can be changed in the VT system settings in thesystem
mode.
"5-3 VT System Settings", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Text/Switch/Lamp
1 From the "Attributes" windows where multiple text strings need to be set up, check the "Multiple" checkbox.
*1 Plates can be set on switches, lamp switches, lamps, N state lamps, and N stateparts.
Chapter 8 "SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS"
2 Displays the No. to set at "Display text string ID" on the "View" tool bar.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 In the "Properties" window, set the items that can be set to each display textstring ID such as font name,
size, auto-correction, pitch, and position.
Point • Regarding items other than those that can be set to each display text string ID, the Nos.
currently displayed at "display text string ID" on the "View" toolbar are displayed in gray
when they are selected to 1 to 3. This indicates that they cannot be set.
• When the "Multiple" checkbox is not marked, settings are reflected in all display text string
IDs regardless of the No. currently displayed at "display text string ID" on the "View" tool
bar.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, and set the items for the number of display text string IDs to be displayed.
Size of ID0 Size of ID1 Size of ID2 Size of ID3 Size of text string to be displayed
UP UP ▲
UP
Vertical
size of
ID3
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Justified Left alignment
Point When "Direction" is set to "Vertical", text strings are aligned so that their centers are aligned
in the horizontal direction. The vertical position of textstrings is determined by the text
alignment setting.
Screen attributes
4 Enter the text string to each ID No., and click the "OK" button.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Point Text strings cannot be set by screen ID in the printer form screen.
Message display
1 From the "Settings" tab in the "Message Display" window, check the checkbox "Use change display text
string function". To use the Windows fonts, select "Windows Fonts" from "Fonts".
The "Set Fonts" button is displayed.
2 To change the font of the display text string, click the "Set Fonts" button. Then, set the font for each text
string ID in the displayed "Select Fonts" window.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 To validate the settings, click "OK" in the "Message Display" window.
Select the program block Number to be compiled. You can set comments for each program block number if
necessary.
Next, display the text string ID, and enter message in the message line. Repeat the above steps to enter the
message for each text string.
Display text
string ID
You can check the entered messages for the List of Messages.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Point When the Window fonts are used, the size of the displayed message is determined by the
widest font of the display text string ID.
Alarm display
1 From the "Settings" tab in the "Alarm Display" window, check the checkbox "Use change display text string
function". To display the heading line, check the checkbox "Display Heading Line".
2 When the Windows fonts are used, the "Select Fonts" window is displayed, allowing you to set the font for
each display text string ID.
To display the "Select Fonts" window, select the "Window Fonts" option from "Fonts", then click the "Set Fonts"
button.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 From the "Alarm Display" window, check the checkbox "State Display text string", then click the "Set text
strings" button.
The "Set up State Display text string" window is displayed.
4 Set up the state display text string for each display text string ID, and click "OK".
5 To display the heading line, display the "Set up Item Name text strings" window where you can set up the
heading for each display text string ID.
To display the "Set up Item Name text strings" window, click the "Set text strings" button in the "Display Items" tab.
7 Set up the alarm message contents to be displayed for each display text string ID.
"Message", page 9-86
11
Point When the Window fonts are used, the size of the displayed alarm message is determined by
OTHER FUNCTIONS
2 Select "Thermal Printer" from "Printer Models". And check the checkbox "Use change display text string
function" under the "Set up the Print Alarm Log".
The "Text string setting" button is displayed.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Reference Not only the heading, but also the alarm messages are printed for the specific text string ID.
2 From the "Switches" window, select the "Change Display text string" option from the "Functions of Switch".
3 Select the display text string ID to be displayed when the switch is pressed.
"Changes display character string", page 8-26
4 Repeat steps 1 and 3, and make switches for the number of display text string IDs to be displayed.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Edit Screen
In the edit screen, switch the No. at "Display text string ID" on the "View" tool bar.
Part Catalog
In the "Part Catalog" window, switch the No. at "Display text string ID".
11
"Part Catalog", page 5-2
OTHER FUNCTIONS
View Mode
In the View mode, switch the No. at "Display text string ID".
Print Settings
In the "Print settings" window, switch the No. at "Display text string ID" under "Print screen settings".
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Note that the following operations are performed during changing display text string. Note.
• When changing display text strings, the following parts change state to the state afterpage changing is performed:
Parts State
Numerical value
The input state is canceled. With text displays, the key entry"CAPS" settings is also
display
canceled.
Text display
Message display
The cursor and scroll positions are reset.
Alarm display
The scale of trend graphs is also reset.
Trend Graph
• When screens have been displayed by page previewer in the unit's system mode, parts to which multiple text
strings are set are printed using the text string selected by the default display text string ID.
• The parts that are set up with multiple text strings are
• After PC->VT transfer data has been performed from VT STUDIO
• The text string display selected by the defaulted display text string ID after being transferred from the System
mode to the Run Mode.
• The alarm log printing doesnít apply to the state display strings for the alarm display. They are printed with ON/
CHK/OFF.
when display text strings are changed with both the switches and PLC.
when the switch-based display text string switching and the PLC-based display text string switching are used
simultaneously, the display text string IDs specified with the switches are written into the target word devices
specified by the display text string IDs.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Target Word Device 0 1 2
Active Edit
Display(V) -> Active Edit + ,
1 Select "Display(V)" -> "Active Edit(Q)" from the menu, and click the button to
enable/disable the Active Mode.
Page switching
1 To change the page, click the icon at the lower-right corner of the target part.
Page switching.
[Example]
Set the switch on Page No. 10
by page switching Page No. 10
2 To return to the previous page, click on the ìî button or press the key.
Now you have returned to the previous page.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Closing windows
You cannot return to the previous page under the following circumstances.
• No a target picture to return to
• VT STUDIO is started
• Part Catalog
• Printer form screen
Pay attention to the following points when using the system auxiliary numerical keyboard.
• When displaying the system auxiliary numerical keyboard in the active edit area, only the frame is displayed.
• If you want to clear the system auxiliary numerical keyboard displayed in the active edit area, then it is necessary
to execute "Show(V)" -> "Cascade over other windows(P)", or switch over to other pages.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
2 Either select "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.
The setting window for the respective object is displayed. The window that is displayed varies according to the object
that is selected. To display it, double-click or right-click the menu and select "Part Attribute Settings(S)".
Example 1 Since both the quantity and sequence of the functions are the same, "bit
settings", "sub-settings", and "extensions" can be totally batch-edited.
Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: bit settings
Function: word settings Function: word settings
Extensions Extensions
Example 2 Since the quantity of function is different, only the "Extensions" can be batch-
11 edited.
Switch A Switch B
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Example 3 Since the sequence of functions is different, only the "Extensions" can be
batch-edited.
Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: word settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Extensions Extensions
Point • Picture Attribute Settings can only be selected from the list of the search results.
• Once selected from the list of the search results, parts on different pages can also be
batch-edited. For example, the numeric displays on Page 1 and 3 can be batch-edited.
Example 1 Select the first function of Switch A: bit settings. And select the second function of Switch B. And
batch-edit them.
Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: word settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Extensions Extensions
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Example 2 Select the first function of the switch: bit settings and the third function of the switch: bit settings.
And batch-edit them.
Switch
Function: bit settings
Function: word settings
Function: bit settings
Extensions
Select the first function of the switch: bit settings and the third function of switch: bit settings. And batch-
Example 3
edit them.
Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: lamp switch
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Extensions Extensions
1 From List of Search Results, select the switch functions of the parts (switches, lamp switches) to be
changed.
"Seach result list", page 5-17
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Item Description
PLC If MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set station numbers for the Ethernet(1:N) and thermoregualtor connections.
Number of Device Comment Display the captured pieces of device comments
Device Comment load Capture device comments.
Device Comment clear Delete the captured device comments.
2 Select the PLC from which you capture device comments, and select the "Capture Device Comments" button.
The contents displayed in the "Capture Device Comments" window vary depending on PLCs.
PLC Manufacturers PLC *1 Capture Device Comments
KV-7000 Series (Serial)
KV-7000 Series (KV-LM2*V)
KV-7000 Series (Ethernet) Used with KV STUDIO
KV-7000 Series (Serial) <XYM> (applicalble to KV STUDIO Ver.8 or later)
KV-7000 Series (KV-LM2*V) <XYM>
KV-7000 Series (Ethernet) <XYM>
KV Nano Series [KV-N*] Used with KV STUDIO
KV Nano Series [KV-N*]<XYM> (applicalble to KV STUDIO Ver.7 or later)
KV-5500/5000/3000/KV-L2*V
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)
Used with KV STUDIO
KV-5500/5000/3000(Ethernet)
Keyence Corporation (applicable to KV STUDIO Ver 4.00 or
KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V<XYM>
later)
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)<XYM>
KV-5500/5000/3000(Ethernet)<XYM>
KV-1000/700, KV-L20*/21V
KV-1000/700 (KV-LM20*/21V)
KV-1000/700 (Ethernet)
KV-L20 (VT multi-link) KV STUDIO
(Equivalent to KV STUDIO Ver.3.03 or
KV-10/16/24/40, KV-P16
later)
KV-1000, KV-L20*/21V<XYM>
KV-1000 (KV-LM*20/21V)<XYM>
KV-1000(Ethernet)<XYM>
A Series CPU Direct
AnA Series CCU Link
AnN Series CCU Link
QnU series CPU direct link
QUTE series CPU direct link
Q Series (A mode) CPU direct link
Q Series (A-mode) CCU Link
VT-L16CA (A-mode) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC (Equivalent to GX-Developer Ver.8)
Q Series (Q mode) CPU direct link
CORPORATION. (Only GX-Works2 simple projects can be
Q Series (Q-mode) CCU Link
11
supported)
Q Series (Ethernet)
QnA Series CPU Direct
QnA Series CCU Link
OTHER FUNCTIONS
FX Series
FX1N/2N Series
FX3USeries
FX Series CCU Link
All the thermoregulators and transformers,
Peripherals *2 Serial
etc. connected with the VT3 series
Other than the above The target PLCs other than the above External files
*1 It is also the case when "By DT" is selected.
*2 For more information, please see the following parts in the "VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection
Manual".
"Chapter 18 Connect with the Thermoregulators"
"Chapter 25 Connect with the Peripherals"
In the "Open file" dialog box, click the "Move" button on the right bottom,
select the "Device comments" folder, then you can use the device
comments for each model.
Item Description
KV STUDIO Currently used KV STUDIO Capture device comments from the targets in the currently used KV STUDIO.
United KV STUDIO Targets *2 Capture device comments from the specified KV STUDIO targets.
MITSUBISHI Capture device comments by specifying WCD files outputted from GX-
WCD Files
ELECTRIC Developer.
Item Description
Capture the device comment files that are registered in the peripherals
Serial Auto Register
of VT STUDIO.
External Files *1 Capture device comments from CSV or text files.
Load internal device/link device Load the comments of internal device and link device of VT3.
*1 For the details, refer to "Create External Files", page 11-40, "Capture External Files", page 11-40.
*2 When version of KV STUDIO is Ver.5.5 or older, the buffer memory comment of the expansion unit must be loaded.
[Example]
Point For the device type and device number, please observe the following precautions when
creating external files.
• For the device type, please use the text strings displayed in the Device Settings window of
VT STUDIO to describe.
• Please do not leave out the zeros in the device number.
• For example, please do not set DM00123 to DM123, please use DM00123.
• Please use half-width characters to describe device types and device numbers.
11
Capture External Files
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Item Description
Delimiter Select the delimiter from "Comma/Tab".
Start Line Set up the line from which the device comments are captured.
Set up device column Specify the device and comment column of the external files and capture.
Device setup
Capture comments by specifying the comment column of the external
methods Front device
devices. Configure the captured comments starting from the specified device.
Device Column Specify a device column.
Comments Column Specify a comment column.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Item Description
PLC If MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set station numbers for the Ethernet(1:N) and thermoregualtor connections.
Loading *1 Capture device comments.
Item Description
To display units meeting the criteria.
Unit
(When unit configuration information of KV STUDIO Ver.6.0 or higher are read)
Device Set up the devices to be displayed.
The content displayed in the search list can be further compressed via the device
Compress and find(F)
No. or device comment.
Only display comments registered device(S) Only the devices that are registered with a device comment will be displayed.
Overview *3 Display the read device comments and No..
Set up text string (T) when dropping When outline text is created, please set up the content of the text strings created.
Options Clicking it, and "Set up the Options" window is displayed*2.
*1 For the details, refer to "Loading Device Comments", page 11-38
*2 for more information, please see "Set up the Options-Device Comments", page 4-28.
*3 When loading device comments with KV STUDIO United, the device numbers and device comments used in
the ladder diagram program are displayed in the upper case.
1 From List of Device Comments, select the device comment used to create the part and drag it to the
compiling window.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Reference • You can create multiple parts at one time by dragging multiple device comments from List of Device
Comments to the window. (Up to 100 devices can be selected simultaneously.)
Set up the part spacing when multiple parts are created.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
• When drag-and-dropping, if the created text string is a device No., then " DEV " will be displayed at
the cursor position; if the created text string is a device comment, then " CMT " will be displayed at
the cursor position; If the created text string is both a device No. and a device comment, then
" DEV CTM " will be displayed at the cursor position.
• When "Text string set at drag-and-dropping" is set to "Device comment" or "Device + device
comment", a device No. will be set for the components that are not created via the devices with
comments registered.
1 From List of Device Comments, select the device comment to be set as the part and drag it onto the part in
the compiling window.
The window holding the device and base plate options is displayed.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Point • For N state lamps and N state parts, the settings of the current state number are selected.
"Display Tool Bar - State Number", page 5-12
• When the base plate is set with the display text string switching function, the settings of
the current display text string ID are seleted.
"Display Tool Bar - Display text string ID", page 5-12
Overview
Work Records are the time-based log information of the VT3 panel touching or page switching operations which are
stored in the memory card for later reference.
Example
1234
Numeric value display: Yes
Message: yes
11 • Memory card
• Operation record viewer
OTHER FUNCTIONS
• According to the controls of the devices - save operation records in Memory Card.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
• Global Controls - save operation records in Memory Card
"12-7 Global Function Control"
• VT3 system mode
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
OTHER FUNCTIONS
page 11-44, "Operation program receive", page 13-23
5 From VT STUDIO, confirm the operation records while view the painting data
Please refer to "List of the Operation Log", page 11-47
2 Set up the record objects from the system setting screen for the operation log.
Item Description
Operation Log If checked, the functions of Operation Records are enabled.
Operation Enabled If being checked, settings can be made for the operations.
Operation Enabled Operation Enabled Bit
Enabled bit device can be set.
Device *1
11 Rate of consumed of
memory size *2
Memory size over alarm
If being checked, the use rate of the memory capacity is saved in
the set word devices in the 1% unit.
After selection, the set value reached by memory size will be notified.
Notified bit device *3
OTHER FUNCTIONS
1 From the menu, select "View(V)" -> "Work Space(W)" -> "List of Operation Records(G)".
The List of Operation Records is displayed.
Item Description
Filed Loading*1 Capture CSV or text operation record files.
Start If being checked, the contents of the list can be compressed in the date and time.
END Set the start date/time and end date/time.
If being checked, marks can be set up manually.
Date/time Display the date and time of the operations.
*4
Display Page Display the number of the page to work with.
List
Category *2 Display the list of operations.
Item *2 Display the operation items.
Details *2 Display item details.
Add Marker *3 Display the "Mark Settings" window.
Remove All Clear all the marks.
Up Move the cursor to the next marked record upward.
Down
Introduce Display
Move the cursor to the next marked record downward.
Only display the marked records. To undo, click again.
11
*1 Please refer to "Operating Log File Loading", page 3-19
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Among the files in List of Operation Records, the Memory Card-specific VT3 files cannot be captured.
*2 For the details, refer to "The contents recorded in the operation records", page 11-51
*3 For more information, please see the "Mark Settings", page 11-48
*4 The individual columns in List of Operation Records can be replaced after the left checkboxes are unchecked.
Mark Settings
You can find a desired record from the captured records and mark it.
A marked record is checked from the left checkbox, and its background becomes red.
Item Description
The selected parts The selected parts are marked.
Catalog The records that are in conformity with the checked catalog are marked.
Specify Display Page Marked in the record page.
Condition Select from ìbit device/word device/device comment/noneî. When this device is set
Device
up in the part or system settings, it is marked.
The Relation Between the Contents of the Operation Log and Memory Capacity
Table of Contents
Displayed window 28
System screen call-up - request 24
System screen call-up - execute 24
Run mode transfer 20
Run mode end
System mode transfer-request
20
20
11
System mode transfer-execute 20
OTHER FUNCTIONS
System mode end 20
Printer 20
Memory Card Printer-request
Execute printing 24
Stop print 20
Memory Card save - request 28
Memory Card save - execute 28
form printing - request 24
*1 When the size is not a multiple of 4, use a multiple of 4 as the size value.
Table of Contents
Request failed 20
11
communication
Send error 24
Error response 24 + number of characters x 2
Warning response 24 + number of characters x 2
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Receive error 24
Write warning 24
Send command 24 + command length
Receive command 24 + command length
11
(only when the "Chart Data" of the "Cursor
Graph data " "
Information Storage" is checked).
Keycode
Trend ID " " Select XY Chart and press the Clear All button
XY graphs:
Operate the parts other than XY Chart (real time) as XY graphs
Clear all
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Invalid Operation
the above said
Trend ID " " Select XY Chart and press the Stop button
XY graphs:
Operate the parts other than XY Chart (real time) as XY graphs
Stop Invalid Operation
the above said
Trend ID " " Select XY Chart and press the Start button
XY graphs:
Operate the parts other than XY Chart (real time) as XY graphs
Start Invalid Operation
the above said
Alarm ID " " Select an alarm part and press the delete a line
Alarm: Alarm No. " " switch
Alarm display
Delete a Line Operate the parts other than the alarm part (real
Invalid Operation
time) as the above said
Alarm ID Select an alarm part and press the Clear All switch
Alarm:
Operate the parts other than the alarm part (real Alarm display
Clear all Invalid Operation
time) as the above said
Alarm ID " " Select an alarm part and press the Clear All the
Alarm: Alarm No. " " Same Alarm
The same alarm Alarm display
CLR Operate the parts other than the alarm part (real
Invalid Operation
time) as the above said
Alarm ID " " Select an alarm part and press the OK key validating
Alarm No. " " the entry.
Alarm: Confirm Alarm display
• "Record acknowledgement log" is not checked
Invalid Operation • To acknowledge other alarms
Select an alarm part and press the OK key (only
Alarm ID " "
when the "Cursor position notice" or "To Control with
Alarm: Apply Alarm No. " " Alarm display
confirmed functions" is checked)
Invalid Operation Conform to the above but no alarm is displayed
Message: Select an message part and press the OK key Message
Cursor position" "
Apply (only when the ìCursor position noticeî is checked) display
Table of Contents
with SWITCH
• Press the Global Window Display switch DEVICE
*1 When setting a non-existing global window to Display ON, the "Succeed" record is saved.
*4 Any "part" of the "Succeed Display" contains "*".
*5 Any "part" of the "Succeed Move" contains "*".
Table of Contents
Request
• When the call-up switch that is set with the non-
writable device monitoring and unit monitoring
System Screen (device monitoring/ unit system screens is pressed.
monitoring) non-writable • When special operations are needed to display the
device monitoring and unit monitoring (except the
window display)
When the system screens other than the device
system screen "*2" monitoring and unit monitoring screens are called
Call up system up.
screen -
System Screen (device monitoring) Writable
Execute
System Screen (device monitoring) Non- When the device monitoring screen is called up.
writable
Run mode
- Transferred to the run mode. -
transfer
Run mode end
System mode
transfer-request
-
-
End the run mode
When special operations are needed to transfer to
the system mode.
-
-
11
System mode Transfer to the system mode (except system screen
OTHER FUNCTIONS
- -
transfer-execute call-up)
System mode
- End the system mode -
end
Table of Contents
• Switch
• When the Execute switch of the printer is pressed • The controls
• To execute print through the device control that are
Print Request - functionality/global control functionality enabled
• To execute print from the system memory area with SWITCH
DEVICE
Succeed Data type (trend chart, alarm log/ When the following Memory Card saving actions are
worksheet) successfully completed.
• Saving trend charts on Memory Card -
ID" " • Saving alarm logs on Memory Card
File No. " " • To save worksheets in Memory Card
Succeed Data type (operation record) When operation records have been successfully
-
File No. " " saved in Memory Card
Fail Data type (trend chart/alarm log/
Memory Card- worksheet) • Memory Card is not inserted
Execute • Fail to save data in Memory Card (Memory Card is -
ID" " full)
File No. " "
• Memory Card is not inserted
Fail Data type (operation record) • Fail to save data in Memory Card (Memory Card is -
11
File No. " " full)
• Memory Card is not inserted
Fail Data type (operation record) • Fail to save data in Memory Card (Memory Card is -
full)
OTHER FUNCTIONS
form printing -
Page No. " " To execute form printing through a form contact bit -
request
Succeed Page No. " " form printing is successfully completed
form printing -
form printing is terminated due to an printer error or -
execute Fail Page No " "
Memory Card error
when bit setting switches (set/reset/bit reverse/
Write Value "ON/OFF"
Bit write issue instant reset) are pressed Switch
Fail An error happens when wirting
Device
Table of Contents
11
System Control
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Operation
- Start to record operation records -
record start
• Stop recording the operations
Operation • Set up the "Operation Record Stop" when the
- memory capacity is exceeded, and the operation -
record end
records are overflowed.
Power supply
ON
Operations
- Turn the power VT3 to ON. -
continue to be
recorded even
being disabled.
Operation Excessive operations are recorded in the operation
record buffer - records of the device control functionality/ global -
over flowed control functionality, which are saved in Memory Card.
A When an communication error occurs (please note
communication - that it takes a specific amount of seconds to record a -
error occurs communication error)
When an communication error is removed (please
Communication
- note that it takes a specific amount of seconds to -
error return
remove and record a communication error)
Table of Contents
Connect VNC
VNC No.[ ] In case of successful connection with VNC server -
server
Disconnect VNC
VNC No.[ ] In case of disconnection with VNC server -
server
Time
synchronization - When a time synchronization request was received
VNC key switch
- Request
Time When the execution of time synchronization
Success
synchronization completed normally
- Execution Failure When the execution of time synchronization failed
Time repair -
- When a time repair request was received
Request
When the execution of time repair completed
Time repair - Success
normally
Execution
Failure When the execution of time repair failed
*3 When using the PLC to change the display text strings, the functions of the switches are not specific even the
switches are used to change the display text strings.
Point Even for the device monitoring and unit monitoring screens in the system mode, the records
in "Window Display Requests" and "Display Windows" are still kept.
11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
RESOURCE
12-9 Data Check•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-46
12-10 Batch-change Device ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-52
12-11 Screen Configuration Management •••••••••••••••••12-53
12-12 List of Screen call •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-58
12-13 Ladder Monitor Data••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-59
12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series) •••••12-62
New Screen
Resources(R) -> New screen(N) + +
Display the "New screen(N)" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "New screen(N)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking "New screen" under "Screen", "Global window" or "form screen" on the "Screen" tab in the workspace
• By selecting the screen to edit in the workspace, opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting
"New screen"
Item Description
Select the type of new screen to make from "Screen (Basic, Window 1/2/3)/Global
Screen type window/form screen."
* Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
Sets the page No. (global window No.) of the new screen tomake in the following ranges:
screen(Basic, Window1/2/3) : 0 to 8999
Page No. (window No.)
Global window :G000 to G999
form screen :P00 to P15
Sets the comment of the specified page No. (window No.) using up to 12 1-byte
Comment
characters or six 2-byte characters.
Sets the type (Basic, Window 1 to 3) of the new screen to make when the screen (Basic,
Window Window 1 to 3) is selected at "Screen type". Sets the type of newly created screens
(Basic/Windows 1 to 3).
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Screen ID *1 Sets the ID numbers specific to each screen.
Key entry parts (active as When this checkbox is marked , the key entry parts having the lowest keyentry order are
default) set to the Active mode during page switching and window display.
Background color *2 Set the background color of the screen.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks
Background setting
BLK*2
at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Use wall paper "Wall paper setting" button is displayed after selection. So, wall paper function can be used.
By clicking "Wall paper setting" button, you can open "Wall paper setting" window and set
Wall paper setting *4
the wall paper.
Backlight setting *6 To set when using VT3-W4M(A)/W4G(A). Set up backlight color.
When this checkbox is marked for the window screen (windows 1 to 3),the window screen
Initial display
(windows 1 to 3) is displayed from the beginning during page switching.
Window frame When this checkbox is marked, the window frame is displayed.
Display 3D frame When this checkbox is marked, the window frame is displayed in 3D.
Title bar *3 When this checkbox is marked for the window screen, the title bar is displayed.
Title bar (large) *3 When this checkbox is marked for the window screen, the title bar (large) is displayed.
Window settings
Close button *3 When this checkbox is marked for the window screen, the close button is displayed on the title bar.
Available Windows
After selection, screen ID of title bar is displayed as Windows fonts.
fonts*5
This is displayed when Window fonts are used. The fonts to be used in graphics data are
List of available fonts
displayed in the list. Then, you can select desired fonts.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set. When the font types and sizes are set
Font settings
through "Font selection" window, they are added to the list of available fonts.
Bar/frame color *2 Sets the color of the title bar/frame.
Text color *2 Sets the color of the screen ID that is displayed on the title bar.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks
BLK*2
at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 The defaut value of screen ID can be obtained automatically. This can be changed as desired using up to 16
1-byte or 8 2-byte characters.
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3 The screen ID is displayed on the title bar. Also, by attaching a title bar, the window screen can be moved,
displayed at the front or closed.
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5 12
Move Screen ID Move to front Close
RESOURCE
@0000_1
Window screen
Point The "Close" button is hideed when window 3 is used as an interrupt window.
Reference • The initial activities of key entry parts can only be set through Basic screen in VT1.
• Screen settings can be changed in the screen attribute settings even if you are halfway through
making the screen.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
Item Description
You can make sure how the wall paper already set is display on VT3 system. By dragging
Preview display and dropping the image files to the preview display, the wall paper can be set as a free
style.
Setting format: Select from "Gradation/image".
Gradation Type Select the types of gradation.
Gradation
Color 1/Color 2*1 Selects the color.
Style Select the style of wall paper. When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
Color Selects the color. When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
Free style *2 You can change the images available in the wall paper.
Change "Open image window" is displayed after "Free style" is selected.
Select from "Enlarged display/centralized display/parallel display".
Image Enlarged display : the selected bitmap files are enlarged or reduced and then set
into wall paper according to the screen size.
12 Display position *3
Centralized display : the initial size of selected bitmap files is maintained and
displayed in the center of screen. However, the excessive part
shall be cut if the read-in bitmap files are larger than the screen.
Parallel display : the selected bitmap files are displayed in parallel starting from
RESOURCE
Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, PLC relays can be set at screen switching, or numerical
values can be written to data memory.
Notify screen switching When the Basic screen or window screen is displayed, any bit devices (1 bit) on the
PLC can be set, or a constant can be written to any word device (up to four continuous
word devices).
Sets the default to be written to the word device. When "Notify only" is set, the
Notify screen switching
Notification bit device is only set and defaults are not written to the word device. When
Number of word writes
"Number of word writes" is set, defaults are written to the word devices continuously for
the number set from the default word device at screen switching.
Sets the bit device to be set at screen switching. When the "Browse" button is clicked,
Notification bit device *1
the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the start word device when defaults are written to the word device. This item can be used
Default word device *1 continuously for the number set at "Number of word writes". When the "Browse" button is
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the data format to be written to the default word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format
Leading+0
decimal/BCD/Hex". "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
RESOURCE
Leading+3
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*2 The word device to write defaut value is supported below.
The following table shows the setting ranges of defaults that are written:
Point "Notification bit device" is set (OFF -> ON) when the screen in question is switched to, and is
reset (ON -> OFF) when a different screen is switched to.
Notify screen switching settings can be changed in the screen attribute settings even if you
are halfway
Advanced settings
Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, set the password and security level. The screen is
Password
hideed if the password satisfying the security level is not entered.
Password
Example 1 B B
W1 "W/" W1 "W/"
Touch the title bar to move
W2 "W/O" W1 to the front. W2 "W/O"
Example 2 B B
W1 "W/" W1 "W/"
W2 "W/"
Open W2.
W1 "W/"
W2 "W/O"
12
RESOURCE
Point When you return to the original display screen after executing a system screen callup,
windows are re-arranged, and the window containing the enabled switches may change.
Reference Advanced settings can be changed in the screen attribute settings even if you are halfway through
making the screen.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
When the printer is ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster2, When the printer is a thermal printer
LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge,
ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether
Item Description
Screen ID Sets the ID numbers specific to each screen.
File name setting By clicking the button, the memory card setting screen is displayed in system settings.
Set bit device as printing conditions of form screen. When the "Browse" button is
Print trigger bit device *1 clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
After VT3 is triggered and identified, trigger bit device is reset.
Print Direction Select the printing direction of form screen from "Vertical/horizontal".
Other Printer Color Mode Select color printing of form screen, or black-and-white printing.
than
thermal When "Color" is selected from "Printer color mode", printing quality can be selected from
Print Quality
printer *2 "High-speed/standard".
Screen Width: When "Horizontal" is set in "Printing direction", the width is set (288 to 1008: times of 24).
Size Height: When "Vertical" is set in "Printing direction", the width is set (24 to 1008: times of 24).
12 Thermal
printer Double density
printing
Double density printing is executed after selection.
Paper cutting The paper is cut when the form screen is printed after selection.
RESOURCE
Notify end Notify bit device is set when the form screen printing finishes after selection.
Sets the bit device for notifying end. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference
Notify Notify bit device *1
bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
end
Reset notify bit
The bit device for notifying end is set when the form screen printing starts after selection.
before execution
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*2 ESC/P raster, ESC/P raster 2, LIPS IV raster, PictBridge
VT Model Setting
Resource (R)->VT model setting(V)
Set the target VT to create screen.
Item Description
Series
Select VT series and models to be used.
Model
Display the color number of selected models. When VT3-Q5M is selected, you can select from "2
Color guality
-color black/white/32-gray scale".
Addon memory Mark this checkbox to use addon memory .
Vertical screen Mark this checkbox to support vertical screens.
RESOURCE
VT3 -> VT2: <file name for VT3> _VT2. <extension name> extension name: vs*/vu*
Reference For the horizontal screen of VT2->vertical screen of VT3, the file names are changed below.
<File name for VT2>_VT3 vertical. <extension name> extension name: vs*/vu*
Precautions when changing from other series rather than VT3-W4 to VT3-W4.
Pay attention to the following points when changing the model of VT3 series from a model other than VT3-W4 to a
model of VT3-W4.
• All the functions not applicable to VT3-W4 series, such as form screen, barcode input etc, will be initialized.
• When capacity of the PLC data folder is above 75k bytes, it is not possible to make change if errors occur.
• All the components with stroke font set will be changed to bitmap font.
• When volume of the buzzer is set to "High", "Medium" or "Low", it will be changed to "High".
• PLC connection port is disabled.
• Communication speed will change to 115.2kbps when exceeding the speed of 115.2kbps.
• All devices set to PLC_B with MmltiTalk will become unset devices.
• The selected status of "Bar code" for "VT system setting" can be removed by selecting it.
Precautions when a model of VT3-W4 series is changed to a model other than VT3-W4
Pay attention to the following points when changing the model of VT3 series from a model of VT3-W4 to a model
other than VT3-W4. (VT3 handhold series excluded)
• When the set switch area is below 16 x 16 pixels, it will be initialized to the default switch area (16 x 16 pixels).
• Initialize backlight color setting
• Change PLC connection port to Port2. (Port4 when using Megalink)
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-9
12-2 VT Model Setting
Size is reduced according to the horizontal Size is enlarged according to the horizontal width, and
width, and lower part of the screen is exposed. lower part of the screen changes to blank status.
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Vendon Select PLC Vendons and models to be connected. Click "Confirm connection" to
Series *1 display PLC connection manual of vendor selected.
Port Select the ports to be connected.
Target PLC_A
Use XYM
When selected, devices use XYM notation. (XYM notation compatible models only)
notation
By DT After selected, connection with VT3 will be established via DT. (communication via DT)
MultiTalk function *2, 3, 4 MultiTalk can be used after selection. Set target PLC_B.
Vendon Select PLC Vendons and models to be connected. Click "Confirm connection" to
Series *1 display PLC connection manual of vendor selected.
Port Select the ports to be connected.
Target PLC_B *4
Use XYM
When selected, devices use XYM notation. (XYM notation compatible models only)
notation
By DT After selected, connection with VT3 will be established via DT. (communication via DT)
Port details *3 The service condition of ports can be confirmed through "Port details" window.
*1 For more information about selecting a Series for a target PLC, see
PLC Connection Manual.
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series 12
RESOURCE
*2 For details and notes about MultiTalk function, see "Chapter 4 Operation and Unit Functions", VT3 Series
Hardware Manual.
*3 It does not display when VT is VT2 or VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A) series.
*4 It can not be set when VT is VT2 or VT3-V7R/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) series.
Point • MultiTalk function can not be used by VT3-V7R/W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
• After create menu and change target PLC, display the following validation dialog box.
Please validate, change device setup as required, then change PLC type. If device setup is
not changed when PLC type is changed, sometimes device setup will become unset.
• When MultiTalk is applied, the following PLCs shall be used and set to target PLC_A.
(1) DB router
(2) 2-port Function
(3) Remote COM tool
(4) VT Through communication
(5) Window display of unit monitor and device monitor Basicd on special screen
operations.
"Chapter 4 Operation and Unit Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual.
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Item Description
Return to edit screen Return to edit screen from the setting screens of VT system.
12 VT System
Resource(R)->VT system setting(S)->VT system(V)
RESOURCE
Item Description
This item is for setting the page number of the screen that is initially displayed
Initial Page No.
after the power is turned ON.(0 to 8999)*1
Page No. Specify Format Select the specify format of page No. from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Set the delay time of rising edge of VT3 when the power is turned ON. (0 to
System Startup Delay
120s)
If VT3 isnít operated after exceeding the setting time, back light is protected by
Back Light OFF Start Time
turning OFF automatically. (0 to 120m) *2
Buzzer Volume Set the volume of buzzer within VT3.
VT 2-Touch Switch *5 Set if 2-touch switches are pressed simultaneously.
System Alarm buzzer Set if VT3-V7R alarm buzzer is used.
Set if the active mode of VT3-V7R Grip switch or Grip switch is used.
Alternation : switch valid/invalid of cross-key and touch switch by
Grip switch pressing the rising edge of Grip switch.
Instantaneous : cross-key and touch switch are valid only when Grip switch
is pressed.
Select from reading externally the screen data, and prohibiting from checking
Read Protection
"No protect/protect/protect (with password)".
Set the password when "Read protect" is set to "Protect(with password)". The
Password
password is set to half-width number up to 8 characters.
The display format settings of date/time in VT3 unit are selected from "YY/MM/
Date format
DD", "MM/DD/YY/", "DD/MM/YY/" and "YY/DD/MM".
The separators are selected from "/(oblique)", ".(full stop)", "-(hyphen)" and
Date and Separator
"""(blank)".
time
format *3 After selection, month display is changed into an English representation(Jan/
Display(Jan/Feb/...)
Feb/...).
Display "AM/PM"
After selection, hour display is changed into 12-hour display showing AM/PM.
(12 hour display)
Select display/hide for "Page Switching""Global Window Switching" etc state
Display “Changing Page”
messages displayed in VT3. (initial value: display)
Display “Cannot Change Select display/hide for "Disabling Page Switching by SW", "Disabling Window
Page” Display by SW" etc state messages displayed in VT3. (initial value: display)
WARNIN
Select display/hide for "Interlocking" etc state messages displayed in VT3.
G Display Interlocking
(initial value: hide)
Message
Executing PLC data folder/ Select display/hide for "Executing PLC Data Folder", "Transmitting Notes" etc
transmitting notes *6 state messages displayed in VT3. (initial value: display)
Executing worksheet *6
Standard
Select display/hide for "Executing Worksheet" etc state messages displayed in
VT3. (initial value: display) 12
Set the blinking speed of hardware blink and flash control (color inversion
Blink control
Speed 1 blink) of VT3 unit within the range of 0.1 to 2.5s in the increment of 0.1s.
RESOURCE
(reverse color) *4
Speed 2 The standard is fixed to 0.4s.
Blink control Standard Set the blinking speed of software blink (flash control (display/non display
Blink (display/non Speed 1 blink, color change blink) of VT3 unit within the range of 0.4 to 2.5s, in the
display/color increment of 0.1s.
change) Speed 2 The standard is fixed to 1.0s.
Set the blinking speed of system blink (blink and error prompt of cursor and
System blink speed parts in the active mode) of VT3 unit within the range of 0.1 to 2.5s, in the
increment of 0.1s.
The value of internal free
Backup device can also be After selection, the value of internal free device can also be maintained even if
internal maintained even if VT power VT3 power is turned OFF.
devices is turned OFF.
even if VT Lo Blk
Maintain the value of internal device of lower block(MW0100 to MW07FF).
is turn (MW0100 to MW07FF)
OFF Hi Blk
Maintain the value of internal device of higher block(MW0800 to MW0FFF).
(MW0800 to MW0FFF)
Device backlight color
After checked, backlight color of device can be used.
specifying
Small Specifying method Select backlight color specifying device from "Word device/bit device".
model Backlight color specifying
setting *7 Click "Browse" button to specify "Device setting" window.
device
Blinking speed of the backlight for VT3-W4M(A)/W4G(A) can be set up within the
Backlight blinking period
range of 0.4 to 2.5s in 0.1s unit.
*1 Don't set the page No. not yet created into initial display page No..
*2 For the settings of starting time of back light OFF, see the description in the next page.
*3 Use data/time display during alarm display and video capture.
Important • After read protect is set, the screen data in VT3 cannot be read and checked any longer. To cancel
memory read, the screen data must be transferred again. The screen data should be copied.
• However, when read protect "Protect(with password)" is set, you can read and check them
after entering password through VT STUDIO.
• The data in PLC data folder can be read and checked even if read protect is set.
The value of internal free device can also be maintained even if VT power is turned OFF.
Even if "The value of internal free device can be maintained even if VT power is turned OFF" is set, internal free
device will be cleared in the following cases.
• In the case of data transmission from PC of VT STUDIO->VT.
• When system settings are changed through VT STUDIO for differential transmission.
• When the settings maintained by internal device are changed through system mode.
Communication Condition
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->PLC communication conditions(C)
The communication conditions are set according to PLC to be connected.
PLC_A and PLC_B communication conditions are available when MultiTalk function is used.
Click "Confirm connection" to display PLC connection manual of vendor selected.
PLC No.
Item Description
Sets according to the PLCs to be connected.
12
RESOURCE
Sets address No. of VT3 when MlutiLink units, high-speed MlutiLink units and
VT No.
universal serial communications are used.
PLC I/F Sets according to the PLCs to be connected.
Baud Rate Sets the baud rate.
Data Bits Sets the data bits.
Stop Bits Sets the stop bit.
Parity Sets the parity.
Flow Control Sets the control mode.
CheckSum Sets the addition of checksum.
CR Sets the addition of CR.
LF Sets the addition of LF.
Changes the timeout, sending waiting, retrying frequency and register number of
Advanced settings monitors
(no change in common case).
Sets the devices to be used for confirmation of connection when there isnít
PLC communication Target word
communication within a fixed period.
special setting Device *1
No setting is required in common cases.
Cut off or reset the erroneous Once selected, the communication with an erroneous station is cut off. And this
station No. number is regularly monitored and re-connected once the error is removed.
Item Description
Set the devices (starting No.) to be used in system memory area.
System Memory Area *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
VT mode /
Select if the system memory area is used in VT mode, or in MT compatible mode.
12 MT mode *2
Details When VT mode is set, it's required to select again if various items are used.
Device No. Display device No. designated to various items.
RESOURCE
Number of words The number of words used in various items is displayed when VT mode is set.
Total number of words The total number of words of devices to be used is displayed when VT mode is set.
When MT compatible mode is set, it's required to select again if calendar timer set value is
Use PLC Date/Time
changed through the system memory area.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
MW0040(VT mode) and MW0000(MT compatible mode) are fixed in the case of universal serial communication.
*2 After VT mode is selected, you can set individually the availability of various items in the system memory area.
Please set to this mode in common case.
After MT compatible mode is set, you can set MultiDisplay MT-260/250/450 and compatible 16-word fixed
system memory area.
Password
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Password(W)
When the safety level is shown to be higher than currently displayed screen through page switching and window
display, the password entry screen is displayed. If no correct password is entered, "Password error" is displayed,
and the screen hideed. (The password entry screen is returned to original screen by pressing "Cancel" button).
When the safety level is shown to be lower than or equal to currently displayed screen, the password entry screen
isnít displayed. In such case, pages can be switched freely and the window displayed.
No password (Level 0) < Level 1 < Level 2 < Level 3 < Level 4 < Level 5
Point As compared to current screen, when the safety level of screen to be switched for display is:
• Higher : password entry screen is displayed. If no correct password is entered,
"Password error" is displayed, and the screen hideed.
• Lower or equal : the password entry screen isnít displayed, the pages can be switched
freely and the window displayed.
The safety level of screen is set through "Advanced settings" tab in "Create new screens" or "Screen attribute settings".
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Password Set the password for various safety levels. The digital password can be set up to 8 bits.
Notify safety level After selection, the safety level of currently displayed screens will be written to notify word device.
*1 Set the word device of notifying the safety level. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Notified word device
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
Point • The password (safety) is valid when page switching and window display is executed
through touch switch of VT3.
• When page switching and window display is executed at PLC and external equipments with
the help of system memory area, device-Basicd functional control and Global function
control, the password entry screen isn't displayed, the pages can be switched freely and
the window displayed.
• The password entry screen isn't displayed after VT3 is switched to operating mode. If the
12 safety level is set in Basic with initial display page No. and window "With initial display",
the password entry screen isnít displayed, and the screen displayed.
• When page switching is performed for VT3 in the operating state, and if you donít intend to
display the screen with safety level, the screen attribute of Basic set with next display page
RESOURCE
NO. and window ìWith initial displayî may be set to "Without password".
• When the window screen is created in the page to be switched, and also set to ìWith initial
displayî, the page cannot be switched if Basic screen has different safety levels from
window screen, and if no password with higher safety level is entered.
• The password entry screen may be returned to initial screen after 1 minute without any
operation. In addition, if the device with alarm detection has changed, the password entry
screen is returned to initial screen.
• The screen data is written to PC through "Communication(C)"->"VT -> "PC data
receiving(R)"->"All data(A)". The password can be confirmed if screen data is read from the
memory card. If the password shall be kept confidential, reading of screen data is disabled
through the following settings.
• The read protect is set to "Protect" through "VT system" in "VT system settings".
• "Read protect" is set through VT system settings in VT3 system mode .
• After "Prohibit transfer of system mode" is set through option settings in VT3 system
mode , the screen data of VT3 unit cannot be written to memory card since it's not
allowed for transfer to system mode.
• The content of password can be changed even under the system mode.
"5-3 VT System Settings", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Security
Screen Explanation
LevelStatus
Enter password
(Level 1 or higher).
1 2 3 4 5 BS EN
6 7 8 9 0 CLRCANCE
Modify End
Window display ON switch
Enter password
12
(Level 5 or higher).
RESOURCE
Only the password of level 5
is accepted as the entered
password.
******** Password entry screen
1 2 3 4 5 BS EN
667 78 980 9CLR0 CLR CANCEL
Monitor Screen
Window:
Level 5 Security level 5
Security
Screen Explanation
LevelStatus
12
RESOURCE
Initial Screen
OFF (level 0)
Monitor
Point When the screens with higher safety level are displayed, the screens with lower safety level
can be displayed freely. If you don't want the others to access the screen, don't maintain the
screens with higher safety level, but switch to the screens with lower safety level.
Parts
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Parts(A)
Set the behavior of parts.
Item Description
When entered through numerical keypad and keyboard in the
Key entry : Follow "Shift
Numerical displays/Text entry mode after selection, the parts are displayed on edge,
display" settings for poarts at
display similar to edge display (left-hand/right-hand) set in the
text entry position
"Settings" tab of numerical value display•character display.
Key entry : When apply key is
Numerical display
pressed without entering
values, return to display
If there isn't entered value in numerical display parts after
selection, it's returned to display mode after pressing "OK"
button.
12
mode
RESOURCE
Treat under flow of floating After selection, the floating point real number is treated as "0" in
point real number as zero the case of underflow.
Key entry : Do not change to After selection in the active mode, the display mode is not
display mode when apply activated, and active mode will be maintained even if pressing
key is pressed "OK" key entry switch.
If pressing "Switch Kanji conversion mode" key entry switch after
Text display Key entry : Kanji conversion
selection, it's switched to Kanji conversion mode.
After selected, even if there is no input character on the
Key entry : blank character
character display part, if you press "OK", NUL (00H) will still be
string may be input
written.
Select the scroll speed of message display parts and alarm
Message/Alarm display Scroll speed
display parts from "Low-speed/medium-speed/high-speed".
When multiple functions are set to switches and lamp switching
Switch/Lamp switch When are set multiple
parts, select from "Optimizing write PLC/processing as per the
part*1 functions
sequence of set functions".
It's not related to data length of Basic device after selection. The
Indirect reference Index address to be referenced is preset according to the value of Index
Independent on data length
action*2 device.
(Changed to the same behavior of VT3 if not selected.)
when PLC data folder is The buzz generated from PLC data folder can be canceled after
PLC Data Folder
excuted, buzter doesn't sound selection.
*1 After "Processing as per the sequence of set functions" is selected, the operation starts basically from the top.
But, the behavior shall be confirmed through commissioning.
*2 "6-8 Indirect Reference", page 6-43
Item Description
Use change display
After selection, you can use the switching function of display character strings.
character string function
Usechange Default display character
display Set the display character string ID displayed when VT3 power is turned ON.
string ID
character
Display character string ID
string After selection, switch character string ID through the value (0 to 7) of PLC device.
specification*1
function
Target word device*2 Set the word device specifying display character string ID.
Comment*3 Set the comment of display character string IDs.
*1 character strings will not changed over when values out of range are specified. When the unit starts, the
character string ID defaulted will be displayed if values out of range are specified.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
12 *3 The comment cannot be transferred to the main machine when target VT belongs to VT3 series. In addition,
the screen data written into memory card isn't included.
RESOURCE
Operation Log
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Operating log(G)
Set for operating log.
"11-11 Operation Log", page 11-44
KL
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->KL(K)
Set for KL.
Item Description
KL After selection, KL can be connected to RS-485 port(PORT4).
Send address Set the sending address(00 to FE)(only even number can be set).
Number of send addresses Set the number of sending address(00H to 100H)(only even number can be set).
Receive Address Set the receiving address(00 to FE)(only even number can be set).
Number of receive addresses Set the number of receiving address(00H to 100H)(only even number can be set).
Select the communication speed of KL from "156kbit/s", "625kbit/s", "2.5Mbit/s" and
KL
Communication speed
"5Mbit/s".
FINAL Select in the case of FINAL.
Select in the case of ERR HOLD(the value of output relay is maintained during off-
ERR HOLD
line error).
KL address setting software KL address setting software is activated by clicking "KL address setup software
tool start-up".
12
RESOURCE
Barcode
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Barcode(B)
Set the communication conditions according to the barcode to be connected.
For the communication settings of Vendons and models, refer to "6-3 Barcode Reader", VT3 Series Hardware
Manual.
Item Description
Barcode Connects barcode by using PORT3.
Baud Rate Sets the baud rate.
Data Bits Sets the data bits.
Stop Bits Sets the stop bit.
Parity Sets the parity.
Barcode
Read mode Sets auto identification or manual setting of header and delimiter.
Header Sets the header.
Delimiter Sets the delimiter.
CheckSum Sets the checksum.
Barcode is energized by PORT3 after selection.
Supply power to barcode
Please use it only in BL-80RK/210RK.
Memory Card
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Memory card(F)
Sets the file format and file name saved to the memory card.
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Hard Copy image
Image saving Select the file format for image saving from "Bitmap/JPEG".
Video capture images
mode Sets the picture quality when JPEG is selected.
form screen image
Ratio of consumed After selection, the ratio of utilization of memory size is saved to the set devices
Memory size
memory size *2 in the increment of 1%.
Mode*1 Select from "VT2 compatible mode/VT3 mode".
Alarm Log
Trend Graph Set if date/time and character string are added to the saved file names in VT3
Worksheet Related mode.
Save file name Video Capture The saved file names can be confirmed through preview.
form screen
Set if date/time and character string are added to the saved file names. The
Operation Log
saved file names can be confirmed through preview.
*1 The number of processable files increases considerably in VT3 mode than in VT2 compatible mode.
For the file folder structure and file name under VT2 compatible mode/VT3 mode, refer to "6-1 Memory
Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
Printer
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Printer(P)
Sets the printer.
Item Description
Printer Type *1 Sets the printer modes connected to VT3.
Select output targets from "Printer/memory card/printer•memory card". If
Output target *2 memory card is used, VT3 screen and form screen are saved to the memory
Common settings
Print Direction
Printer Type PictBridge : Sets the file format for printing.
Select the printing direction from "Vertical/horizontal".
Printer Color Mode Sets color printing or black-and-white gray printing.
RESOURCE
Black and white tone Sets if black and white colors are reversed for printing during black-and-white printing.
Print Quality Select the printing quality form "Standard/high-speed".
Select the printing size(printing magnification) from "2 times", "3/2 times", "1 time",
Print size "3/4 time" and "1/2 times". The selectable printing magnification may differ from VT3
models, paper size and paper direction, etc.
Top Sets the printing residual white(top).
Margin*3
Left Sets the printing residual white(left).
Alarm ID Sets alarm ID(0 to 3).
print settings
Alarm log
Enter the title character strings when paper printing is started. The character strings that
Title
can be entered may contain up to 36 half-width characters and 18 full-angle characters.
Print setting
Number of print Sets the maximum number of alarm history to be printed(1 to 512).
Display level Alarm level is displayed after selection.
*1 Refer to the following descriptions about printer types.
"6-6 Printer Unit" , VT3 Series Hardware Manual
*2 When "Printer type" is thermal printer and memory card is selected as "Output target", the form screen can
only be saved to the memory card.
*3 The setting range of residual white may differ from varied "Printer type".
Printer Type Setting range of residual white
ESC/P Raster Top 3 to 999mm Left 3 to 999mm
ESC/P Raster2 Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
LIPS IV Raster Top 6 to 999mm Left 6 to 999mm
PictBridge* Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
ESC/P-R Ether Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
ESC/Page Ether Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
* The set residual white and actual residual white may differ from varied printers.
Video
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Video(I)
Item Description
Sets the video capture trigger of video units (VT3-VD4/VD1) to capture targets 12
during video capture.
Capture target Internally : select the capture target.
RESOURCE
Externally*2 : specify the capture target (video entry) through the value (1 to 4) of
Video capture PLC device. RGB cannot be specified.
trigger Mode Select the image size captured from "Capture by display size/capture by initial size*3".
Display date After selection, date/time is overlapped on the captured images.
When this checkbox is marked, an image of placed parts also is displayed
Overlap parts
overlapped on the video display area during video capture.
Set if the images from video capture are saved to a memory card, or output to a
Video capture output destination*1
printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page.
*1 The following aspects shall be considered when the output target from vide capture is set to "Printer".
• Set the printer type in VT system settings to PictBridge, ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether.
• VT2-E2/P2, VT3-E3 is required.
• According to the display size of printers and video display parts, the edge of captured images may be cut
during printing.
• The printing direction of captured images may vary from different display sizes of printers and video display parts.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*3 The so-called initial size refers to the maximum dimension that can be set in the display area of video display parts.
VNC Server
Resources(R) -> VT system settings(S) -> VNC server(N)
To setup VNC server. Select a VNC No. to setup it.
Item Description
IP address To setup the IP address of VNC server.
Port No. To setup the port No. of VNC server.
To setup timeout value, password, and server image color in the "Advanced settings"
Advanced settings
window.
Advanced settings
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Timeout value To setup the timeout value (1 to 30s) for connecting with VNC server. (Default value: 5s)
Password Check it to setup password (max. 30 half-width characters).
Server image color To select the image color of VNC server. (Default value: 32768 colors)
Item Description
PLC When using the MultiTalk function, select the PLC to set its time.
Adjust the clock time of PLC to calendar
When selected, set the PLC time to the VT3 calendar timer.
timer
Set when to set the time.
Fixed cycle (initial value): The time is set at a fixed cycle.
Trigger
Up: The time is set when the device changes OFFON.
Down: The time is set when the device changes ONOFF.
When "Fixed cycle" is selected for the trigger, set the cycle to set the time.
• 1 minute
• 10 minutes
Fixed cycle Cycle
• 30 minutes
• 1 hour (initial value)
12
• 3 hours
• 8 hours
• 1 day
When "Up/Down" is selected for the trigger, set the device to determine when
Trigger bit device*1
RESOURCE
to set the time.
Up/Down When checked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes the
trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up": Reset when ONOFF
When the trigger is "Down": Reset when OFFON
When error of RTC voltage drop occurs in When checked, the PLC time data is repaired by setting the VT3 time data
PLC, the time of PLC is recovered when a time abnormality error occurs on the PLC.
Point • PLC time synchronization can only be used when the target PLC is KV-7000 Series,
KV-5500/5000/3000 Series and KV Nano Series.
• The repair function can only be used when the target PLC is the KV Nano Series.
• When a connection is possible with multiple PLCs, PLC time synchronization can only be
used for station number 0.
• PLC time synchronization cannot be used with a VT2 MultiLink slave station.
• PLC time synchronization cannot be used when connected over DT routed through
communication.
• Time synchronization is not executed during the following intervals.
• When switching to system mode (including displaying the system mode screen)
• During PLC data folder execution
• While data is being sent and received between the PC (VT STUDIO) and the VT3
• While using the remote COM port tool (when the VT3 communication is stopped)
• While displaying the password input screen
VT Timer
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Internal timer(T)
Sets internal timer.
12
Item Description
Select timer ID (0 to 3)
Timer ID
In addition, the target device for timer IDs is displayed.
Use timer After selection, use the timer IDs.
RESOURCE
Sets the maximum value of timing counter according to various timer IDs.
Maximum timer count
(1 to 65535)
Sets the cycle of timing counter (in the increment of 0.1s) according to various timer IDs.
Timer count period
(0.1 to 3600.0)
According to various timer IDs, select "Auto return/no return" from ring counter
Restart
(automatically returned to 0 when timing counter reaches the maximum value).
According to various timer IDs, you can control (run/stop) the timer through PLC device
Timer control
Timer after selection.
control Sets the timer control bit device according to various timer IDs. When the "Browse"
Control bit device*1
button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
According to various timer IDs, you can clear the timer through PLC device after
Clear Timer
selection.
Sets the trigger bit device for clearing timer according to various timer IDs.
Clear
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Timer
settings" window.
According to various timer IDs, the trigger bit can be reset through PLC device clearing
Reset trigger bit
timer after selection.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
Point Timing counter cycle may differ from actual period due to error caused by the influence of
VT3.
Reference
Count value 0 1 98 99 99
Restart is performed
Maximum timer count: 99
Timer count period: 1 sec
Count value 0 1 98 99 0
Other
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Other(O)
Set specified key entry targets, key repeat, notify Global window error, key protect, bit page switching device and
DATA BUILDER communication timeout, etc.
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
After selection, specify key entry parts switched to active mode through
Specify key entry destination
the value saved into PLC target word device.
Specify key entry Sets the word device of specified key entry parts switched to active
destination mode in key entry sequence. A device having 2 words is used. When
Target word device *2
the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
Key repeat Key repeat is allowable after selection.
Key repeat *4
Key repeat start time Sets the starting time of key repeat in the increment of 0.1s. (0.2 to 1.0s)
Global window the error relationship of Global window is notified to Notification bit
Global window Notify error device.
Notify error Sets the Notification bit device. Click the "Browse" button.
Notification bit device *2
You can set through "Device setting" window.
After selected, set key protection device, only specific VT3 key input is
Key Protection
allowed.
Key Protection *3
Key Protected Set key protection device (initial No.). Click (browse) button to set in
Device *2 [Device Setup] window.
Sets the device of bit page switching (starting No.) used for system
memory area is in MT compatible mode. When the "Browse" button is
Target word device *2
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
Bit page switching window.
Sets the word of bit page switching used for system memory area is in
Number of words
MT compatible mode. (0 to 16)
DATA BUILDER timeout Timeout time Sets the timeout of DATA BUILDER (4 to 30) when DB router is used.
When toggling pages, update
After selection, the drawing of every component is updated during page
Drawing processing drawing for each part
switching.
respectively
PLC_A/B
connection
After selection, PLC connection setting/connection state can be used.
PLC_A/B PLC No.
PLC connection settings
connection
setting/
PLC No. Target word Sets the device (starting No.) used in PLC connection setting/connection
Connection State *5
settings Device *2 state.
Updating
Sets the Updating cycle (5 to 120s).
cycle
Device transfer is with highly As compared to the others, the communication frequency of device transfer
Device transfer
priority during performing increases after selection.
12 Page/window switching
Page/window will be switched
after pressing touch control
switch.
After selected, page/window can be switched even if touch control switch is
pressed.
RESOURCE
Expansion of the image The upper limit of the image After this option is selected, the upper limit of number of available images
number number is expanded will be extended from 10000 to 20000.
*1 "Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices", page 6-17
*2 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*3 Key protection for multilink
"Chapter 19 MultiLink", "Chapter 20 VT2 MultiLink", and "Chapter 21 MegaLink" of VT5 Series/VT3
Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual
*4 For the details, refer to "Key repeat", page 12-32.
*5 For the details, refer to "PLC connection setting/connection state", page 12-33.
Key repeat
For example, if key repeat (starting time 0.5s) is preset when characters are entered into text display through
keyboard, "A" is entered when key A is pressed and released within 0.5s.
If pressing and holding key A over 0.5s, "AA•••" is entered repetitively until the finger releases.
For example, when alarm display (alarm history) is displayed through / ( scroll up/scroll down), one line scrolls
if key repeat (starting time 0.5s) is preset and / key is released within 0.5s.
If pressing and holding / over 0.5s, continuous scroll is performed within the hold-on time.
Description
Device No.
Station No. Description Higher-level word (15) <--> Lower-level word (0)
Leading No. +0 Connection State
0 to 15 Station No. 15 <--> Station No. 0
Leading No. 1 Connection setting
Leading No. 2 Connection State
16 to 31 Station No. 31 <--> Station No. 16
Leading No. 3 Connection setting
PLC_A
VT3
PLC_B
(1) PLC_B
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state DM00000
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state MW00D8
12
Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state DM00002
Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state MW00DA
RESOURCE
PLC_B
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state DM00001
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state MW00D9
Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state DM00003 (2) Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state MW00DB
Updating cycle
(1) The value of VT3 internal special device is written into PLC.
(2) PLC value is read into VT3, and reflected by the internal special device.
"VT internal special devices (word devices)", page 6-30
Point • Donít write into connection setting of internal special device when PLC connection setting/
connection state is used.
• The defaut value of device (MW00D0/MW00D2/MW00D8/MW00DA) in PLC_A/B connection
state is turned to the value of device (MW00D1/MW00D3/MW00D9/MW00DB) in PLC_A/B
connection setting.
• The station No. of specified screen data is reflected in the defaut value of device (MW00D1/
MW00D3/MW00D9/MW00DB) in PLC_A/B connection setting.
• Updating device (MW00D0/MW00D2/MW00D8/MW00DA) in PLC_A/B
connection state requires timeoutx(retry frequency+1).
• The fault of other station numbers sometimes cannot be detected in the case of
communication failure of 1 station No. However, it can be detected if the detected station
No. is shut through PLC connection setting.
Reference • Part that can be set with Windows fonts Text register
Log on the character to be used through
Text display
Windows fonts in the system setting.
Numerical value display, message display,
alarm display, meters, statistical chart, trend Automatically log on with character.
graph and XY graph.
• The type and size of Windows font to use is configured in each part.
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Back to edit screen Click to return to the edit screen.
Edit Display register character screen used for the selected register character IDs.
Cut Cut the contents of selected ID line.
Copy Copy the contents of selected ID line.
Paste Paste the contents of copied ID line to the selected ID line.
Delete Delete the contents of selected ID line.
Import *1 Import the register characters from other VTS files(*.vs* ,*.vu*) in all IDs or ID unit.
ID Display ID of register characters.
Comment Display the comment of ID. Double-click to shift to the register text screen with selected ID.
Available Windows font Click to display "Use level of Windows font resources", and confirm the fonts to be used and the
resources use level of fonts (KB) through the list.
Reference • Continuous lines can be selected by clicking ID line while key is pressed down.
• ID No. can be selected by pressing key + A.
• Discontinuous lines can be selected by clicking ID line while key is pressed down.
• Continuous lines in the dragging range can be selected by selecting and dragging ID lines.
Register character
RESOURCE
Item Description
Return to registered
Click to return to Windows font screen.
character list
Display the comment of selected ID. The comment cannot be directly entered (up t 31 half-width
Comment
characters).
Overall registration You can register entire character after selection.
Individual
After selection, you can enter individually the character in the individual register column.
registvation
Individual
Display the characters for register. You can directly enter the characters or drag and enter
registvation Individual
the text file. In addition, characters can be entered by reading text files when "register by text
register column
file" is used.
Character quantiy Display the character for register.
Conform registerd
Click to display "Confirm register character" window *1.
character
Click to display "Open files" window. Read automatically the text files selected by "Open
Register from text file
files" window, and display at ìIndividual register columnî.
Item Description
registered character You can directly enter the characters for register confirmation, or drag and enter the text file.
confirmation column In addition, characters can be entered by reading text files when "register by text file" is used.
Copy and paste the register characters from other VTS files ( * .vs * , * .vu * ).
Item Description
File Name Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When the register characters to be entered are in other files, click to display "Enter opened
Select file
files" window and select the files.
ID Display ID of register characters.
Comment Displays the comment of register character ID added on the entered files.
Point The register characters to be entered are overlapped on the same ID.
12
RESOURCE
PLC_B device
12 2 Click device transfer No. for setting from "Device transfer" on "System setting" tab in the workspace.
New device transfer No. is added by the following methods.
RESOURCE
• Click "Device transfer" on "System setting" tab in the workspace, and then click "New".
Select device transfer No. through displayed "Specified device transfer No." window.
Item Description
Back to edit screen Click to return to the edit screen.
Display the comment of device transfer No..
Comment
The comment cannot be directly entered (up to 31 half-width characters).
Set the startup trigger of device transfer.
Auto : VT3 automatically performs device transfer as per fixed
frequency.
Device transfer Bit device : device transfer is executed using OFF->ON change of bit device
setup of PLC.
Trigger Internal timer : device transfer is executed within the set time interval of starting
cycle.
Receiving : device transfer is executed when data is received from barcode
Device (when written into Link device).
transfer setup When device transfer startup trigger selects "Auto", the communication frequency is
Processing cycle selected from "High-speed (device transfer priority)/Medium speed/standard/low-
trigger speed (screen updating priority)".
When device transfer startup trigger selects "Bit device", the bit device for trigger is
Trigger bit
set. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
Device *1
"Device settings" window.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
Reset trigger bit
recognizes the trigger.
When device transfer startup trigger selects ìInternal timerî, the starting cycle is set in the
Startup cycle
increment of second (1 to 32767).
Date type Select the data type of data transfer from "Bit/word/two-word".
Transfer data Count Set continuous data.
register Transfer target Displays the transfer source device. After double-clicking, the transfer source device
device *2 can be set from "Device setting" window.
column
Transfer target Displays the transfer target device. After double-clicking, the transfer target device
device *1 can be set from "Device setting" window.
Add new data. No adding is allowed when 8 groups of transfer data have already
Add
logged on.
Delete Delete data of selected lines.
Up Move up the data of selected lines.
Down Move down the data of selected lines.
End bit
Device 1*1
When device transfer ends after selection, set the end bit device.
End bit
Notify end
Device 2*1
Reset end bit
before execution
When notifying end after selection, reset temporarily end bit device and then set up. 12
Error bit
RESOURCE
Device 1*1 If error occurs during device transfer after selection, set error bit device.
Error bit When device transfer ends normally, reset the error bit of error bit device.
Notify error
Device 2*1
Reset error bit When notifying error after selection, reset temporarily error bit device and then set
before execution up.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*2 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
• Summary sheet of device number and behavior when continuous number N is to be set.
Transfer source device Transfer source device
Date type Number of Number of Remarks
Device type Device type
devices devices
The devices outside of bit device
Bit Bit N Bit N
cannot be selected.
Word N
Word N 32 bits Superior word is often filled by 0.
N
Device (Example 1)
Word
Word N Superior word is deleted. (Example 2)
32 bits
N 32 bits Superior word is often filled by 0.
Device N
Device (Example 3)
Word 2N
Word 2N 32 bits
N Combine 2 words. (Example 4)
Device
double word
Word 2N Separate into two words (Example 5)
32 bits
N 32 bits
12
Device N
Device
Since the data type is set to word, and transfer target is 32bit device, the insufficient superior word
is filled by 0.
N N
Superior word is 0.
N N
The superior
word is deleted.
T0 0x01230123 0x00000123 T0
T1 0x45674567 0x00004567 T1
T3 0xcdefcdef 0x0000cdef T3
12
RESOURCE
N N
The superior
word is deleted. The superior word is 0.
DM2 0x89ab
N
DM3 0xcdef
2N Combine 2 words
0x89ab DM2
N
0xcdef DM3
Separate two
words into 2 words.
2N
Trigger bit
12
Read Write
Other Trigger Notify Notify Other
Communication reset
transfer transfer
communication end reset source data target data end communication
RESOURCE
Notify end
Notify end
VT3 reset
Specifications
• Up to 64 functions can be set.
• The settable functions are the same as "Device-Basicd functional control" in basic parts.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices", page 9-111
2 Set functions.
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Function Displays the already set functions.
Trigger bit device Displays the triggered bit device that runs the already set functions.
Comment Comment can be entered (up to 31 half-width characters).
Add Add functions.
Delete Delete functions of the selected lines.
Setting *1 Set functions of the selected lines.
Up Move up the functions of selected lines.
Down Move down the functions of selected lines.
*1 For the details, refer to "9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices", page 9-111.
• For the notices concerning settable functions, refer to "9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices", page 9-111.
• When page switching mode is set to specify page No. using page switching function:
The trigger is set to () when the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), and the Basic screen of specified page No.. is
still displayed.
12
RESOURCE
Displaying Cross-references
Resources(R) -> Cross-reference (R)
Displays as a list which target device (control or function) device Nos. are set as.
Item Description
Page No. Selects the page to be displayed as a list.
Window Selects the window to be displayed as a list.
PLC Select PLC when MultiTalk function is used.
PLC No. Select station No. in the case of Ethernet connection.
Device type Select the device type to display as a list.
When this checkbox is marked, only the leading device is displayed for settings that use
Show only start device
multiple devices.
Device No. Displays device Nos.
B/W B: Bit device W: Displays the word device.
Page No. Displays the page No. (global window No. ).
B: Basic 1: Window 1
Window 2: Window 2
G: Global window
3: Window 3
P: form screen. 12
Label Displays the label.
RESOURCE
When this item is clicked, the "Export cross-reference" window is displayed, and you
Export CSV file
export cross-references by "CSV file (MBCS)(*.csv)" or "Text file (UNICODE)(*.txt)".
Item Description
Result Displays the results of the data check.
Displays the total number of pages (maximum 1024 pages) of the file currently being
Number of pages
edited.
Displays the total number of global windows (maximum 1000 screens) of the file
Number of global windows
currently being edited.
Displays the total number of form screens (maximum 16 screens) of the file currently
Number of form screens
being edited.
12 Number of screens
Displays the total number of screens (maximum 1024 screens) of the file currently
being edited.
Detailed Description
The total number of images (max. 10000 or 20000) for the file currently being edited is
Number of Images
RESOURCE
displayed.
Displays the total size of the screen data of the file currently being edited. (unit:
Screen Data
Kbytes)
Image data Displays the total size of the image data of the file currently being edited. (unit: Kbytes)
Message data Displays the total message data size of the file currently being edited. (unit: Kbytes)
Screen data
Displays the total data size of overlapping objects of the file currently being edited.
Overlapping data
(unit: Kbytes)
Displays the total size of the system data of the file currently being edited. (unit:
System data
Kbytes)
Windows font Data Displays the data length of Windows fonts of the file being edited (unit: Kbyte).
Device comment data Displays the data length of device comment of the file being edited. (unit: Kbyte).
Displays the total size of the communications tables of the file currently being edited.
Communication table
(unit: Kbytes)
Displays the number of VT3 data blocks used by the file currently being executed.
Used data blocks
One block is 128 Kbytes
Details of restrictions
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14
Item Description
Displays the results of the data check. Displays the page No., global window No.or
Result
form screen page No. and items where restrictions are exceeded.
Reference data Displays the number of referenced data currently set to the screen.
PLC devices Displays the number of PLC devices currently set to the screen.
Number of control objects Displays the number of control objects currently placed in the screen.
Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit:
Key entry parts
bytes)
Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit:
Overlapping data
Detailed Description
bytes)
12
Screen data Displays the size of screen data currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Basic Displays the check results on the Basic.
Screen Window 1 Displays the check results on window 1.
RESOURCE
(Basic,Window Window 2 Displays the check results on window 2.
1 to 3) Window 3 Displays the check results on window 3.
System Displays the check results on the system.
Global window Window Displays the check results on the currently selected global windows.
Printer from Printer from Displays the check results on the currently selected form screens.
Displays the total check results of the Basic, windows 1 to 3and system (currently
Total
selected global windows and printerforms).
Point Numerical values displayed in red indicate items for which a restriction isexceeded.
Delete the number of placed objects from the page in which restrictions areexceeded so that
the number of objects is within the restriction.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14
12
Item Description
RESOURCE
Displays the results of the data check. Displays item swhere restrictions are exceeded in the
Result
event of an error. When there are multiple errors, displays one of these errors.
Reference data Displays the number of referenced data currently set to the screen.
PLC devices Displays the number of PLC devices currently set to the screen.
Number of control objects Displays the number of control objects currently placed in the screen.
Key entry parts Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Overlapping data Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Detailed Description
Screen data Displays the size of screen data currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Basic Displays the check results on the Basic.
Screen Window 1 Displays the check results on window 1.
(Basic,Window Window 2 Displays the check results on window 2.
1 to 3) Window 3 Displays the check results on window 3.
System Displays the check results on the system.
Global window Window Displays the check results on the currently selected global windows.
form screen form screen
Displays the check results on the currently selected form screens.
screen screen
Displays the total check results of the Basic, windows 1 to 3and system (currently
Total
selected global windows and printerforms).
Point Numerical values displayed in red indicate items for which a restriction isexceeded.
Delete the number of placed objects from the page in which restrictions areexceeded so that
the number of objects is within the restriction.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14
Reference • The following windows are displayed when there are many overlapping objects placed on screen.
Place the objects again so that there is not an excessive number of objects.
• When image attribute control(position control) and video display(with position control) are used, an
excessive overlapping data length shall be required.
• The following window is displayed when there are many indirect reference devices placed on
screen.
Set the devices again so that the number of devices does not exceed 64 perscreen.
• The following window is displayed when the setting of parts (device setting: cell)placed on screen is
incorrect.
• The following window is displayed when nonexistent page No. is specified by initial display page
No. of VT system in VT system settings.
12
RESOURCE
• The following window is displayed when there is unused station No. of PLC communication
conditions not set through VT system.
Item Description
To display data check result. Exceptional item will be displayed. If there are multiple
Result
exceptional items, one of them is displayed.
Data volume referenced To display reference data volume.
Contents
Version Check
[Resource (R)] -> [Data check (D)] -> [Version check (V)]
For the functions that are set up via VT STUDIO and the functions that are set up via the files saved through VT
STUDIO, please check if it is possible to set up under this version of system program.
Items Description
Version after checking Display the system program version after checking.
Result
Detailed Description
Display version check result.
Display contents when the result of version check is NG.
12
Export(E) Save version check result in text format.
RESOURCE
Check the following functions during version check.
• Screens (Basic, window 1/2/3)
• Global window
• Form screen
• VT system parameters
• Global function switch
• Device comment
• Trend chart
• Alarm
• Message
• Windows fonts
• Device transferring
• Global function control
• PLC data folder
• Worksheet
Batch-change Device
Resources(R) -> Batch change devices(B)
The device No. of target devices (currently set as objects) can be batch-changed.
Item Description
Date type Select from "Bit/word".
Continuous count The continuous device No. of already set quantity can be changed.
Charge device
Device before changing Set the device before the change.
Device after changing Set the device after the change.
Add Add the settings of changing device.
Delete Delete the settings of changing device.
After selection, the screen (entire page/current page/current screen(Basic/
Screen
window)) can be set as the change target.
VT system
When this checkbox is marked, VT system settings are targeted for the change.
12 parameters
Trend Graph
When this checkbox is marked, the devices currently used in the trend settings
are targeted for the change.
RESOURCE
When this checkbox is marked, the devices currently used in the alarm settings
Change target Alarm
are targeted for the change.
PLC Data Folder When this checkbox is marked, the PLC data folder is targeted for the change.
When this checkbox is marked, the devices currently used in the work sheet
Worksheet
data are targeted for the change.
Device transfer After selection, the device used in device transfer can be taken as change target.
Global function After selection, the device used in global function control can be taken as change
control target.
Item Description
Copy Copies the specified screen.
Cut Cuts the specified screen.
Paste Pastes the copied screen to the specified Basic screen, window screen, or form screen.
Deletes the screens on the specified pages, and moves the deleted screens to Trash.
Delete
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash.
Pastes screens currently saved to a different file onto each of the screens on
Import
specified pages.
Opens the "Screen attribute settings" window to change the attributes of the specified screen.
Attribute
Screen attributes can also be changed by double-clicking the screen ID or screen image.
Display Switches between the text display and image display.
Display entire page When this checkbox is marked, the entire page is displayed in the screen list.
When this checkbox is marked, the same screen list is displayed split into an upper
Split view
window and a lower window.
Selects the details to be displayed in the screen list from "Screen (Basic, Window 1/2/
Switch screen list 3)", "Global window" and "form screen". Form screen can not be displayed when
using VT3-W4T (A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Displays the page No. When this item is double-clicked, the "Move page" window
Page No.
isdisplayed and the page No. can be changed.
Screen list
Displays the comment. When this item is double-clicked, the "Page comment setting"
Comment
12
window is displayed and the page comment can be set.
Screen ID Displays the screen ID and the screen image (only during image display). When this
(Basic, Window 1,Window 2, item is double-clicked, the "Screen attribute settings" window is opened, and the
Window 3, Gwin, form screen) attributes ofthe specified screen can be changed.
RESOURCE
Displays deleted screens or screens that were overwritten and deleted. Screens in
Trash
Trash can be re-used by copy-and-paste.
Enlarge display Displays screens enlarged to their actual size.
Reset screen size according to
Change resolution to "VT model setting" when pages are imported after selected.
resolution *1
The screen configuration will also change when change of VT3 series model setting is performed between a model of
VT3-W4 series and a model other than VT3-W4 series.
"12-2 VT Model Setting", page 12-9
The same operations can be performed from Menu that is displayed by clicking thescreen list with the right mouse button.
Point With page configuration management operations, the previous operation cannot be undone.
New screen
When you double-click a "New" cell on the last line or an unset "Screen ID" cell, the "New screen" window is
displayed. Create a new specified screen.
"New Screen", page 12-2
2 Set the leading page No. and final page No. before the move.
Reference Direct change is also possible by selecting "Comment" CELL and pressing button.
About screen ID
When multiple character strings are set, the screen ID of already set display character string ID(0 to 7) is displayed by
Point • Window screens cannot be copied and pasted to Basic screens, or viceversa. (Pasting
between local windows and global windows is possible.)
• Copying and pasting between the form screen screen <-> common screens(Basic screen,
window screens) is not possible. (Copying and pasting between form screen screens is
possible.)
The "New screen" window is displayed when a screen ispasted to a "New" cell.
Sets the page No.When multiple pages are selected, set the leading page No.
• When a page exists and a pasted window No. does not, the screen of the window isadded to the existing page.
• When a page or screen to which a comment is not set is pasted to a page that isalready set with a comment, the
comment will not be deleted and will be left behind.
Reference Imported screens are displayed in red lettering. Screens or comments that havebeen copied or
moved, or whose settings have been changed are displayed ingreen lettering.The screen list is
switched, and "Page configuration management" window is closed.
When "Page configuration management" window is displayed again, the letter is turned to black color.
12-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
12-11 Screen Configuration Management
To copy screens:
Screens can be copied by dragging a selection of multiple "Screen ID" cells with the key held down, and dropping at
the "Screen ID" cell at the copy destination.
To move screens:
Screens can be moved (cut-and-paste) by dragging a selection of multiple "Screen ID"cells with the key held down,
and dropping at the "Screen ID" cell at the movedestination.
Importing screens
Copy and paste screens from other VTS/VT2 files.
1 Either click the button, or select "Import" from the menu displayed by clicking with the right mouse button.
The screen list is divided into two parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the
lower screen list.
12
When you are importing screens for the first time, the "Open Import File" window opens. When you RESOURCE
Reference
click the "Open" button, the screen list is split into two windows, an upper window and a lower
window, and the screen list of import files is displayedin the lower window.
3 Select the files to be imported into screen, and click "Open(O)" button.
The screen list is divided into two parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the
lower screen list.
4 Copies the screen ID from the screen list of import files, and pastes the screen ID at the target location in the
screen list in the upper window.
• How to copy, cut, paste and delete screen IDs is the same as operations in thesame file.
• When the display is switched or the screen list is switched, the screen lists at the upper and lower windows are also switched.
• Imported screens are displayed in red lettering. Screens or comments that have been copied or moved, or whose
settings have been changed are displayed in green lettering. If you switch the screen list, or exit the "Page
configuration management" window, the lettering will change color to black.
Point • Only the data of Basic screens can be copied to Basic screens, and only thedata of local
window screens of local window screens can be copied to localwindow screens.
12 • Global window screens and local window screens can be copied to globalwindow screens.
• Only form screen screens can be copied to form screen screens.
• VT files created by VT1 cannot be imported directly. Please read through VT STUDIO and
RESOURCE
Split view
When the "Split view" checkbox is marked, the screen list can be displayed split intoan upper window and a lower window.
This feature comes in handy when copying, cutting and pasting screens havingquite different page Nos. when there are many pages.
Trash
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash. Screens in Trash can be re-usedby cutting and pasting. The screens
in Trash can be completely deleted by clicking "Clean out trash" in Menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse
button.
12
RESOURCE
Item Description
Screens to call up Selects the target screen to be displayed as a list.
"Source" Displays the call source screen.
"Dest" Displays the call destination screen.
When the screen to edit is specified, and the "Edit selected screen" button is clicked, the
Edit selected screen
specified screen is ready forediting.
12
RESOURCE
1 Select [Resources(R)]→[Ladder monitor data(J)] from menu in order, and click "Ladder monitor" in "System
setting" tab of workspace.
2 Specify data save destination in "Ladder monitor data" window, and click "Generate" button.
Item Description
Internal memory Save destination of ladder monitor data becomes "Internal memory (ROM)"
(ROM) *1 when selected.
Memory card Save destination of ladder monitor data becomes "Memory card" when selected
Data storage location To select the memory card drive.
Drive
New a "\VTLDR folder" when no "\VTLDR folder" exists in selected drive.
To display drive and folder of memory card when "Data save destination" is "Memory card".
Folder The folder is \VTLDR folder of drive.
(e.g. D:\VTLDR is displayed when drive of memory card is D)
Ladder project Project name To display project name of selected ladder monitor data.
information Project comments To display project comments of selected ladder monitor data.
Delete To delete selected ladder monitor data.
Detail To display details of selected ladder monitor data
*1 The upper limit of ladder monitor data output is 2MB when using internal memory (ROM).
RESOURCE
Item Description
KV STUDIO currently being
To output project of currently started KV STUDIO.
started
KV STUDIO Project To specify and output project of KV STUDIO.
12 Item Description
Comment output To select the device comments to be output when common comments
RESOURCE
Output comments
setting and other program comments are all set
* Output sizes of disabled module, password-protected module and unselected module are "0" byte.
Point • For KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series PLCs whose ladder diagram cannot be
converted, no output will be possible.
• For KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series PLCs whose ladder diagram doesn't use
return mark, but a return is required, no output will be possible.
• The number of display rows of ladder monitor of VT3 is one circuit block. Ladder program
can't be output when exceeding 50 rows.
• One comment row is 50 rows. Ladder program can't be output when the continuous
comment rows in total exceed 100.
12
RESOURCE
2 Set up function.
12
Item Description
RESOURCE
To set up the switching mode of enable/disable of function switch and touch switch (Not use/
Operation switch Alternate (enable/disable upon pressing the switch)/Momentary (enabled only when being
pressed)).
Set up ON/OFF function of each function switch.
Settings The functions to be set is the same as the switch part.
"8-2 Setting Switches", page 8-9
Reference F1, F2, F5, and F6 can also be used for external output.
"I/O Specification (VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G))", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Item Description
PC->VT Send data The PC sends compiled screen data and others to VT3.
PC->VT Send screen data
The PC only sends the screen data differences to VT3.
differences
VT ->PC Receive data PC receives screen data from VT3.
PC <- -> VT Verify data Verify the currently compiled data and VT3 unit data from the PC.
Simulator Simulates edited screens for confirmation.
Point • The VT1 models cannot communication with VT STUDIO. Use VT BUILDER when making
or editing screen data for the VT1, or when sending/receiving or verifying data with the
VT1.
• The VT2 models can communication with VT STUDIO.
Ethernet Unit
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
The Ethernet components (VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3) need to be used for the communication between PC and VT3.
In addition, before the communication, settings associated with Ethernet like the IP address should be set on the VT3
side in advance. Set up the IP address and more in the System Mode screen on VT3 before the communication
between PC and VT3 over Ethernet.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Communications Settings
Communications (C)->Communications settings (C)
Communications port
Item Description
Serial port Select the serial port on the PC.
Communication Port
Point • To connect VT3 with PC through USB, you need install the USB driver on your PC.
"1-6 Installation of USB Driver"
• Be sure to set only unique IP addresses to each device within the LAN.
• When changing the port No., do not use numbers 0 to 1023 as the new port No. Also, take
care not to use another port No. that is already in use.
13
Sending
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Item Description
Page that is being
During a differential transmit, the pages displayed in VT STUDIO
edited through DT
are, after the differential transmit, displayed on VT3.
STUDIO
Page displayed after
Continue with the page The pages displayed on VT3 before the differential transmit
the differential sending
displayed by VT continue to be displayed after the differential transmit.
The pages that are set up from the "Initial Display Page NO." in the VT
Initial page series system are, after the differential transmit, displayed on the VT3
series.
Reference The pages that are set up from the "Initial Display Page NO." in the VT series system are, after the
differential transmit, displayed on the VT2 series.
Precautions when selecting the "Page that is being edited through VT STUDIO"
option.
• When compiling the Base screen, the page No. of the currently compiled Base screen becomes, after the
differential transmit, the No. of the page to be displayed.
• When compiling the local window, the page No. of the currently compiled Base screen that has the local window becomes,
after the differential transmit, the No. of the page to be displayed. In addition, the target local window is also displayed.
• When compiling the Global window, the initial display page + the Global window is displayed.
• When compiling the system settings and the ticket screen, the initial display page becomes, after the differential
transmit, the page to be displayed.
• When compiling the Base screen, the corresponding screens are, after the differential transmit, also displayed
when the "Overlapped with Other Screens, Display" is used.
• When compiling the Global screen, the corresponding Base screens are, after the differential transmit, also
displayed when the "Overlapped with Other Screens, Display" is used.
• Even the picture is not changed, the picture, after the differential transmit, is changed in the displayed page
compiled with VT STUDIO.
• When multiple windows are displayed based on the "Overlapped with Other Screens, Display", the currently
compiled page is displayed at the foremost.
• Terminate the displayed window, and display/not display it based on the settings made in the system memory area and device values.
Item Description
File Displays the currently selected file names in the connection destination list file.
Add When this button is clicked, connection destinations can be added to the connection destination list file.
Edit When this button is clicked, connection destinations in the connection destination list file can be edited.
When this button is clicked, connection destinations can be deleted from the connection
Delete
destination list file.
When this button is clicked, connection destinations can be selected from the connection
Select
destination list file.
2 Enter the name to give the new connection destination list file in the "File name" field using the keyboard.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
5 The newly made connection destination list file is displayed in the "Connection Destination List" window.
Item Description
Verify(I) Specify the folder containing the connection destination list file to be read.
File Name(N) Enter the name of the connection destination list file to be read.
File of type(T) Specify "connection destination list file(*.ali)."
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Item Description
Name Sets the name of the new connection destination to add to the list.
PLC type Set up the PLC model to be connected VT3.
Connection Methods This item cannot be changed.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the new connection destination to add to the list.
Port no. Sets the port No. of the new connection destination to add to the list.
Reference Any connection destination name can be set. Multiple VT3s can be differentiated by assigning to them
the names based on the purpose and setting location of the VT3s.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Connection Test
Click the "Connection Test" button in the "Communication Settings" window to display the "Communication Test"
window.
Connection can be confirmed by checking a response from another terminal (node) on Ethernet by the Ping
command or checking the communications path by the Tracert command. This is functionally the same as executing
the Ping or Tracert command on the MS-DOS prompt.
Item Description 13
You can confirm that the connection destination is operating normally by sending an IP packet to
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
the specified IP address and checking that it returned normally from that connection destination.
Ping
In addition, if the Ping command is used, the response time and packet loss are also displayed,
which, therefore, enables the speed to reach the connection destination to be evaluated.
This command displays the route between units. It also allows you to confirm the status of the
Tracert router located on the route up to the connection destination, and to find bottlenecks on the route
based upon the response time of each router.
2 The results of the ping command to be run are displayed in the "Ping Results" window.
Point • The Ping command sometimes cannot be used depending on the router setting. For
details, confirm with the network administrator.
• If there is a problem with the execution result, confirm with the network administrator and
remedy as required.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
2 The results of the Tracert command to be run are displayed in the "Tracert Results" window.
13
Point If there is a problem with the execution result, confirm with the network administrator and COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
remedy as required.
Item*1 Description
All data Send the screen data and PDF data to VT3.
Screen Data Only the screen data is sent to VT3
PLC data folder data Sends only PLC data folder data.
System Program Send the system program to VT3, and then modify the same.
The bitmap fonts are sent to VT3 to replace fonts.
System font
Generally, it is not necessary to send.
*1 When no PLC folder data is saved in the new file and the internal memory (SRAM) of VT3, the following
limitations may occur to the menu.
Selectable: "All data", "System program"
Not selectable: "Screen data", "PLC data folder data"
All data
• When you send alarm records / trend chart data / XY chart data / operation logs,
NOTICE
etc., the alarm records/trend chart (real time) data/XY chart data (real time)/operation logs,
etc. saved in the internal memory (SRAM) may be lost. Please save them to Memory Card
first.
Saving data on Memory Card
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• VT internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.
1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Send Data(R)"->"All Data (A)". Or click the button.
3 VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the send status being
displayed.
Item Description
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
Abort
When aborted, the VT3 screen data and PLC folder data are lost.
When the version of the system program is higher than the system program on VT3.
When the version of the system program if VT STUDIO is higher than the system program of VT STUDIO, the "Data
Transfer" window is displayed.
Click "Yes (Y)" and the system program of VT3 begins to be upgraded.
13
Do not turn the VT3 OFF or disconnect the PC connector cable while the system program is
NOTICE being sent. Otherwise, the VT3 system may be damaged.
Screen Data
13 1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "Screen data(S)" from Menu in that order.
2
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
The VT3 automatically enters the transfer mode, and a progress bar indicating how far Transfer has
progressed is displayed.
Item Description
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
Abort
When Transfer is aborted, the screen data on the VT3 is erased.
When the version of the system program is higher than the system program on VT3.
When the version of the system program if VT STUDIO is higher than the system program of VT STUDIO, the "Data
Transfer" window is displayed.
Select "Communications(C)" -> "VT -> PC Receive data(R)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" in that order, and receive
the PLC data folder data from the VT3. Then, select "Communications" -> "PC -> VT Send data" -> "All data" in that
order, and send all data to the VT3.
When the PLC folder data is not on VT3 but in a compiled screen data file
The "Data Transfer" window is displayed when the PLC data folder data is located not in the data saved on the VT3
but in the edited screen data.
Either select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" in that order, and send all the data to
the VT3, or delete the PLC data folder data, and send the screen data to the VT3.
Point • When the version of the system program of VT3 is not Ver.4.
The system program of VT3 Ver.1, Ver.2, Ver.3 cannot send the screen data created by VT 13
STUDIO Ver.4 or later to a VT3. Before the Transfer, please upgrade the VT3 system
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
program to Ver.4.
Otherwise, the "Data Transfer" window is displayed when you send the data.
Communications(C) -> PC -> VT Send data(S) -> PLC data folder data(D)
Send compiled PLC folder data to VT3
VT3 reads the PLC folder data sent to it. To change the data, the data is saved in a place
where it can be compiled with VT STUDIO (PLC Data Folder Compiling Tool).
To back up PLC data folder data, either select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send
NOTICE data(S)" -> "Screen data(S)" in that order and send only the screen data, or select
"Communications(C)" -> "VT -> PC Receive data(R)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)", in that
order to receive and save the data before you send new screen data to the VT3.
Point This item can be selected only when PLC data folder data saved to VT3 internal memory
(SRAM) exists in the edited screen data.
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" from Menu in that order.
3 VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the send status being displayed.
Item Description
13 Abort
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
When Transfer is aborted, the PLC data folder data on the VT3 is erased.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
When PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3
Only PLC data folder data cannot be sent when PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3. Select
"Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" in that order, and send both the screen data and
PLC data folder data.
System Program
Sends the system program to the VT3 and rewrites the system.
• Do not turn the VT3 OFF or disconnect the PC connector cable while the system program is
being sent. Otherwise, the VT3 system may be damaged.
• When the system program is sent to the VT3, the screen data and the PLC data folder data
is lost.
• Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" from Menu in
thatorder, and send the data again.
Alarm log/trend chart (real-time), data /XY chart (real-time) and data/operation log stored in
the internal memory (SRAM) will also disappear, please first save relating data to the
memory card, or send them to a PC.
NOTICE "Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• VT internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.
• When the version of the system program of the VT3 is Ver.4.5 or above, it is not possible to
transfer the system program of below Ver.4.5.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "System program(P)" from Menu in that order.
System Font
• Do not turn off power of the VT3 unit or pull out the connection cable when System font are
being sent. Otherwise, font data of the VT3 unit may be damaged, with the result that the
unit cannot operate normally.
• When font data of the VT3 unit is damaged or garbled characters are produced, select
[Communication(C)] -> [Send data from PC to VT(S)] -> [System font(F)] before sending
System font again.
• The screen data and the PLC data file folder data will disappear when System font are sent
to the VT3 unit.
• Alarm log/trend chart (real-time), data /XY chart (real-time) and data/operation data stored
in the internal memory (SRAM) will also disappear, please first save relating data to the
NOTICE
memory card, or send them to a PC.
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.
1 Select [Communication(C)] -> [Send data from PC to VT(S)] -> [System Font(F)] from Menu in turn.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Items Description
Standard fonts VT3 Standard System font. It is usually not necessary to send.
GB2312
The System font of Chinese. Be sure to send to VT3 when using VT3 series in China.
corresponding fonts
• When the data saved in VT3 is different from the compiled data and there is/is not the PLC folder data.
• When the data stored in the unit is the data created via Ver.1.
• After the alarm system setting is changed and when differential sending is performed for the
screen data, the alarm log data stored in the internal memory (SRAM) will be cleared.
If necessary, please first save data to a memory card, or perform receive operation for the
alarm log.
• After the trend chart system setting is changed and when differential sending is performed
NOTICE
for the screen data, the trend chart (real-time) stored in the internal memory (SRAM) will be
cleared.
13
If necessary, please first save data to a memory card, or perform receive operationfor the
trend chart. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
• When the screen data is differentially sent, the operation log data saved in the internal
memory (SRAM) is lost. If necessary, back up alarm log/trend graph data in advance on
Memory Card.
1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Screen Data Differential Transmit (D)". Or click the
button.
The VT3 automatically enters the transfer mode, and a progress bar indicating how far Transfer has progressed is
displayed.
Item Description
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
Abort
When Transfer is aborted, the screen data on the VT3 is erased.
Point • For the PC->VT screen data differential transmit, the differential of the PLC folder data
cannot be transmitted.
• The VT3 display after the differential transmit depends on the setting of the "Displayed
Page after Differential Transmit" in the Communication Settings window.
"13-2 Communications Settings"
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Point • VT STUDIO cannot receive data from the VT1 models. Receive this data on VT BUILDER.
• VT STUIDIO Ver.1 cannot receive data from the VT2 models that transmit data through VT
STUDIO Ver.2.
All data
1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"VT->PC Receive Data(R)"->"All Data (A)". Or click the
button.
VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the receive status being displayed.
Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.
Communications(C) -> VT -> PC Receive data(R) -> PLC data folder data(D)
Receives PLC data folder data on the VT3 on the PC. If necessary, first save the PLC data folder data currently being
edited as it is overwritten and deleted.
Reference PLC data folder data can be received even if read protection is set.
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "VT -> PC Receive data(R)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" from Menu in that
order.
The "VT STUDIO" window is displayed.
2 VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the receive status being displayed.
Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.
13
When the currently compiled data file is different from the target PLC of the PLC folder data of VT3, the "Data
Transfer" window is displayed. Change the target PLC of the file currently being edited so that it marches the PLC of
the PLC data folder data.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
When PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3
The "Data Transfer" window is displayed if PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3.
[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Operation record receive(O)]
Receive VT3 operation record data with PC.
Reference Even if read protection is set up for the operation log data, it is also possible to finish data receiving.
1 Select in turn from the menu [Communication (C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive (R) -> [Operation record receive
(O)].
Display "Operation record receive" window.
Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) name for saving operation record data.
File format Select the format in which files will be saved.
Date (YY/MM/DD)
Date/time Set up whether date/time and text string are added to the saved file name. The file
Time (HH/MM/SS)
name upon saving can be checked via the "File name" item.
Leading text string
If it is selected, the screen data will be received after the operation log data is
Receive screen data received. After it is received, the confirmation dialog box "Do you want to open the
saved screen data and operation log file?".
Display "Communication setting" window. 13
Receive(R) Receive operation record data.
Cancel(C) Cancel the receiving of operation record, return to edit screen.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Trend record receive(T)]
Receive VT3 trend chart data with PC.
Reference Even if read protection is set up for the trend data, it is also possible to finish data receiving.
1 Select in turn from the menu [Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Trend chart receive(T)].
Display "Trend chart receive" window.
Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) name for saving trend data.
Trend ID
Set up whether trend ID, date and time are added to the saved file name.
File Name Date (YY/MM/DD)
The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
Time (HH/MM/SS)
13 ID0 to 3
Leading text string
File name preview
Select the leading text string of the saved file name and the data format of the
saved trend data.
Data Format The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Alarm log receive(H)]
Receive VT3 alarm log data with PC.
Reference Even if read protection is set up for the alarm data, it is also possible to finish data receiving.
1 Select in turn from the menu [Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R) -> [Alarm log receive(H)].
Display "Receive alarm log" window.
Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) names for saving alarm log data.
Trend ID
Set up whether alarm ID, date and time are added to the saved file name.
File Name Date (YY/MM/DD)
The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
Time (HH/MM/SS)
Leading text string Set up the leading text string for saving file names.
ID0 to 3
File name preview The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
Display "Communication setting" window.
Receive(R)
Cancel(C)
Receive alarm log data.
Cancel the receiving of alarm log, back to edit screen.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Screen image receive(C)]
Capture screens displayed on VT3.
Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) name for saving captured images.
File format Select the format in which files will be saved.
Image quality Screen quality can be set up when JPEG is selected.
The captured screen will be stored to the folder specified by "Output destination folder" according to the format of "Screen
data name_page ID_date (YY [2-digit] +, MM+DD) time (hh+mm+ss).bmp (jpg).
Point • When a file with the same file name exists in the "Output destination folder", screen image
receiving will be cancelled due to an error.
• When the following functions are performed, it is not possible to receive screen image.
• BMP file switching
• Vedio capture
• Execute printing
• Form print
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Point • Data verification cannot be performed between the VT1 models and VT STUDIO. Receive
this data on VT BUILDER.
• Data verification cannot be performed between the VT2 models that send data through VT
STUDIO Ver.2 and VT STUIDIO Ver.1.
All data
1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Verify Data (V)"->"All Data (A)". Or click the
button.
VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically. The verification results are displayed after data is received.
Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Read Protect
"VT System", page 12-12
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Screen Data
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC <-->VT Verify data(V)" -> "Screen data(S)" from Menu in that order.
VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically. The verification results are displayed after data is received.
Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Read Protect
"VT System", page 12-12
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Communications(C) -> PC<-->VT Verify data(V) -> PLC data folder data(D)
Verify the PLC folder data compiled on the PC with the data of the VT3 unit.
Reference PLC data folder data can be verified even if read protection is set.
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC<-> Verify data(V)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" from Menu in that order.
VT3 changes to the transfer mode automatically. The verification results are displayed after data is received.
Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
1 Connect PC to VT3.
• When using the Simulator via the serial port or USB port
"PC Cable", VT3 Series Hardware Manual, page 1-12
VT3 PC
Point • When the simulator is used, please set the "System Startup Delay Time" in the VT System
Settings window to 0 second.
If not, the simulator cannot be used.
"VT System", page 12-12
• When serial communications are used, the simulator cannot be used.
Starting Up Simulator
Communications -> Simulator
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Status Bar
Item Description
Title bar Displays "Simulator".
Menu bar Displays the Simulator menu.
Tool bar Displays available tools. Faintly displayed tools are currently unavailable functions.
Simulator screen Displays the currently registered devices, current states, update date/time, etc.
Status bar Display the button name, VT3 communication status, and page No..
Simulator Menu
Item Description
Open(O) + Open the CSV files (*.csv) saved with the simulator.
13
File Save as(A) Save the simulator screen information in the CSV format (*.csv).
Exit Simulator(X) Exits the Simulator.
Start(S) Starts Simulator communications.
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "Communications port settings(T)" from Menu in that order.
The "Communications port settings" window is displayed.
2 To use the serial port from the tool bar, select the button. To use the USB port, select the button. To
use Ethernet, select the button.
Item Description
Serial port Select the serial port on the currently connected PC.
Serial port
Communication Port
13 Starting communications
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Item Description
Device Displays device Nos. indicates the bit device. Indicates the bit device. indicates the 32-bit device.
Display the device data. For bit devices, ON or OFF is displayed; numeric values are displayed for
Data
word devices.
For bit devices, bits are displayed. For word devices, select from "binary/octal/decimal (±)/decimal/
hexadecimal/floating number/character string".
Display format Float can be selected only in the case of 2-word (linked) data.
Text strings can be selected only when multiple word devices are linked.
(±): Signed
Final update Displays the date and time when the device data was last updated.
Displays the device attributes.
R/W : Read/write device
R/W
R : Read device
W : Write device
Displays the registration source of the device.
VT Device : Devices that are read by VT3 and registered automatically
Explanation
User Registration : Devices that are registered using the simulator.
Linked device : Linked devices
13
Reference The display details can be sorted by clicking each of the items in the Simulator screen.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
VT2 Models
Normal With an Ethernet connection
VT3 Models
Normal Ethernet or thermoregulator (1:N) connection
Changing data
Item Description
Device Displays the device.
Select the data format from "Binary/Octal/ Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Hex/Float/String".
Signed decimal format numbers are handled as 2's complement. Float (real numbers) can be
Data selected only for 32-bit word devices and 2-word (jointed) devices.
Text strings can be selected only when multiple word devices are linked. Numerical values also
can be entered.
Linking devices
13 This feature is handy when using 2-word data or text string data.
1 Select the device No. of the start device, and select the range of devices to be linked with the left mouse
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
button clicked.
Or, select the device No. of the start device, and select the range of devices with the " " key held down.
Point Devices can be linked only when they have been sorted in ascending order.
Redisplaying devices
The following procedure shows how to redisplay devices that have been hidden by selecting "Device(D)" -> "Hide(B)"
from Menu in that order.
1 Select the devices above and below the device No. of the hidden device so that the hidden device is included
in the selection.
For example, when DM00001 is hidden, select DM00000 and DM00002. The method to select a device is the same
as the "Connection of Device"
DM00000 select
(DM00001): hidden
DM00002 select
Adding devices
Item Description
13
Device(D) Enter the device.
Device type(M) Select device type from "Bit/Word/32-bit".
Select the data format from "Binary/Octal/ Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Hex/Float".
Data (L) Signed decimal format numbers are handled as 2's complement. Floating numbers can be
selected only when the device type is 32-bit. Numerical values also can be entered. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Page(P) Specify the page to add the device to.
Point Devices registered on the Simulator are not reflected in the screen data on the VT3.
Deleting devices
2 Either select "Device(D)" -> "Delete device(D)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.
Option Settings
Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, communications is started automatically after Simulator
Automatically connect
has started up.
Display format setup Select the initial display format of the word device.
Exiting simulator
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Point For KV-7000 Series KV-5500/5000/3000 Series or KV Nano Series PLC models, data can be
sent and received without use of Remote COM Port Tool if communications are configured
through KV STUDIO network.
For details, please see Remote COM Port Tool User's Manual.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
MEMO
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
VT mode
PLC Data
MT mode
PLC Data
Important When the System Memory Area is used for other purposes than data reading and writing, the
VT3 display may disappear and the page may be changed suddenly. Never should the System
Memory Area be used for other purposes.
14 In addition, to use the functions of VT3, please fully understand the System Memory Area.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
MT Compatible Mode
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
VT Mode List
Important When setting up, please only check the necessary items. After being checked, the assigned
device No. is displayed on one side of the checked item. The PLC continuous word devices
corresponding to the number of checked items should be occupied.
2 Printing*2, 6
3 Reserved
4 Video play/pause*3
5 Memory Card is being accessed. *6
6 Memory Card usable state *6
Status
7 to 9 Reserved
10 Window 1 display state
11 Window 2 display state
12 Window 3 display state
13 Window 1 display specified state
14 Window 2 display specified state
14 15
0
Window 3 display specified state
Device Monitor screen currently displayed
1 Save log data to Memory Card screen currently displayed *6
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
3 to 7 Reserved
8 Video display/Hide *3
9 Clear Memory Card access error *6
Control
10 Window 1 display
11 Window 2 display
12 Window 3 display
13 Window 1 specified display
14 Window 2 specified display
15 Window 3 specified display
Reserved -
Interrupt Window - Display interrupt window
Interrupt window No. - Page No.0 to 8999 of interrupt window (BCD/decimal)
Interrupt window position (X-axis) -
On the upper-left hand of the window (binary0)
Interrupt window position (Y-axis) -
*1 Also change to 1 (ON) when the auto-backlight OFF.
*2 Also change to 1 (ON) under the ìMemory Card Saveî mode.
*3 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved.
*4 For the ìMemory Card Saveî mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/V7R cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/ P2) and Ethernet unit
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
*5 For VT3-V7R, the buzzer turns to ON.
*6 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*7 It becomes reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
When the LCD has turned OFF by "Display ON/OFF", and the backlight has turned OFF by "Control"
14
Reference
bit 0, both the LCD and backlight turn OFF in both cases.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Details of VT Mode
Set the leading No. of the system memory area in the system memory area setting screen.
"Setting System Memory Area", page 14-3
Important • The PLC area specified in the System Memory Area should not be used for other purposes
than the communication between VT3 and PLC. Otherwise, an error may occur.
VTMode
• Users cannot use the reserved area. Otherwise, an error may occur.
MTInterchange
Mode
Point When setting up, please only check the necessary items. After being checked, the assigned
device No. is displayed on one side of the checked item. The PLC continuous word devices
corresponding to the number of checked items should be occupied.
Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12
Point Once being set to ON, the bits (4 to 6, 11) associated with abnormal communications continue
the ON state under the Run mode. To turn them to OFF, you can temporarily turn off the power
of VT3 or change to the system mode and re-enter the Run mode, thus eliminating the error.
To turn the ON state of bit 1 OFF, clear Memory Card access error in "Control" by turning the
OFF bit ON.
bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Reserved (normally 00) Year (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99)
bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Status (VT->PLC)
Read the states of VT3
*1 Bit 0 "Backlight OFF state" turns "1" (ON) even when Auto-backlight is OFF.
About Auto-backlight OFF
"VT System", page 12-12
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Point Bit 4 "Video play/pause" notifies the video display state of channel 1 or RGB.
When both Channel 1 and RGB are available, the video display state of Channel 1 is
displayed.
VT Mode
MTInterchange
Mode
*1 When the window is displayed, the device monitor is not opened. Under the system mode, it is opened when the window is displayed.
*2 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*3 This is not opened when setting "Maintain the Run State of the Remote COM Port Target Device".
*4 Reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12
Reference The "Page Change Mode" option in the system mode of VT3 can be set to either "PLC and Switch" or
"PLC or Switch". Pages that are created not with VT STUDIO cannot be specified.
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching"
14
OFF FFFF Hex
ON Value other than above
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Setting "Display ON/OFF" to "0" by touching the screen during screen display OFF.
After being checked, when the LCD and backlight are turned off through "Screen Display ON/OFF", you can open
LCD and backlight by touching the screen of VT3.
With the Bit 0 of "Controls" being set to 1 (ON), when the backlight is turned OFF, you cannot
Point
turn ON the backlight by touching the screen of VT3. Please set the Bit 0 of "Controls" to 0
(OFF) before turning ON the backlight.
Reserved Years (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Point Rewriting of the calendar timer will not be executed unless correct values are set to year/
month/day/hours: minutes.
Reference • When the clock change mark is ON, the setting value of the clock, if changed, also changes to the
current value.
• Clock Adjustment
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Control (PLC->VT)
Sets the various controls on the VT3.
*1 For the "Memory Card Save" mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/V7R cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/P2) and Ethernet unit
VT Mode
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
MTInterchange
*2 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved. Mode
Video images are displayed at all times when "Control" is not used.
*3 For VT3-V7R, the buzzer turns to ON.
*4 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12
14 VT3-X15
Vertical
screen 0 to 767 0 to 1023
Horizontal
0 to 799 0 to 599
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
screen
VT3-S12/S10
Vertical
screen 0 to 599 0 to 799
Horizontal
screen 0 to 639 0 to 479
Unsigned decimal VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G)
Vertical
screen 0 to 479 0 to 639
Horizontal
screen 0 to 319 0 to 239
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/
Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A Vertical
screen 0 to 239 0 to 319
Horizontal
screen 0 to 319 0 to 127
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)
Vertical
screen 0 to 127 0 to 319
8 Communications error
9 Overrun error
Leading No. +2 Display error state
10 Framing error
11 Parity error
12 PLC communications state error
13 Time-out error
14 Checksum error
15 Reserved
Leading No. 3 Date/Time (Disp) "yy/ mm" - "Year (lower two digit)/month" (BCD)
Leading No. +4 Date/Time (Disp) "dd/ day" - "Day/day of the week" (BCD)
Leading No. +5 Date/Time (Disp) "hh/ mm" - "Hours/minutes" (BCD)
0
1
Device Monitor screen currently displayed
Save log data to Memory Card screen 14
currently displayed*5
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
14 Reference When the backlight has turned OFF by "Display control" bit 2, both the LCD and backlight turn OFF.
Set the leading No. of the system memory area in the system memory area setting screen.
"Setting System Memory Area", page 14-3
Important • The PLC area specified in the System Memory Area should not be used for other purposes
than the communication between VT3 and PLC. Otherwise, an error may occur.
• Users cannot use the reserved area. Otherwise, an error may occur.
Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12
Point • Bit 3 "Video play/pause" notifies the video display state of channel 1 or RGB. When both
Channel 1 and RGB are available, the video display state of Channel 1 is displayed.
• With VT1, when Interrupt Window is displayed (ON), Bit 12 "Display Window 3" turns to 1
(ON). With VT3, however, it doesnít turn to 1 (ON).
Bit
0 Reserved
Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)
14
1 Reserved
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
2 Memory Card access error *1 Error occurred during accessing of Memory Card No abnormality
3 to 7 Reserved
One of following communications errors
8 Communications error No abnormality
occurring:
9 Overrun error Overrun error No abnormality
10 Framing error Framing error No abnormality
11 Parity error Parity Error No abnormality
12 PLC communications state error Communications error on PLC No abnormality
13 Time-out error Time-out error No abnormality
14 Checksum error Checksum error No abnormality VT Mode
15 Reserved MTInterchange
*1 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved. Mode
Point Once being set to ON, the bits (2, 8 to 14) associated with abnormal communications
continue the ON state under the Run mode. To close the ON state of the bits (2, 8 to 14), you
can set the Clear Error control (the initial number + 10) of the display from OFF to ON.
Alternatively, you can clear an error state by temporarily turning off the power of VT3 or first
entering the system mode and then re-enter the run mode.
Year (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99) Month (01 to 12)
*1 Not opened when the device monitor is displayed in the window. Under the system mode, it is opened when
the window is displayed.
*2 VT3-W4T(A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*3 This is not opened when setting "Maintain the Run State of the Remote COM Port Target Device".
*4 It becomes reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12
Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12
15 Execution of interrupt window display Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window
*1 For the "Memory Card Save" mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
*2 "Other", page 12-31
*3 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
Point • For the MT Interchange Mode, the video display/hide (only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8)
controls are not available. The normal display state is available.
• When VT3 is set to Vertical Picture, a bitmap file, when being opened on the PC, that is
saved to Memory Card through "Start to Print" of Bit 0, is rotated 90 degrees.
VT Mode
"Print", page 8-20
MTInterchange
Mode
Year (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99) Month (01 to 12)
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Here, as shown in the above picture, we'll take the PLC’s Data Memory DM0000 (for KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,
Data Memory DM00000; for KZ-A500, Data Register D000000) as the device whose page No. is to be changed.
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Contention in page switching by page switching by PLC and page switching by switch
The page No. currently specified by the switch is written to the device of the switching page No. on the PLC when the
switch to which the page switching function is set is selected. From then on, the page No. is written to the device
having the currently displayed page No. in the system memory area after the specified page is switched to.
Page 0 Page 10
14 Switch Page 10
Specify: page change
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Write
The currently
displayed page No. 0 0 10
Write
Switch to a new
0 10 10
page No.
A
When a numerical value is written to the switching page No. by the PLC after A in the example A on the previous
page, the page No. written by the PLC is switched to immediately after the page No. specified by the switch is
displayed. (Page switching by PLC is given priority.)
When performing page switching by PLC, page switching by switches is no longer possible when numerical values
are continuously written to the switching page No.
Page 10
Write Write
The currently
0 10 0
displayed page No.
Write Read
Switch to a new
0 10 0 0 0
page No.
To prevent page switching by switches from being disabled, write the numerical values to the switching page No.
when the page switching conditions are satisfied when the page is switched by the PLC.
14
**** #00002 DM0000
LDA> STA> SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
How to prevent contention in page switching by page switching by PLC and page
switching by switch
There are two ways of preventing contention between page switching by PLCs and page switching by switches.
• When performing page switching by touch switches on the VT3, manipulate the internal relays of the PLC with the
switch function as a bit set, and create a ladder program taking this relay as the page switching condition relay.
• When performing page switching by touch switches on the VT3, set the page No. (numerical value) for switching to
the device of the switching page No. of the PLC with the switch function as a word set.
14 Point Contention by page switching by PLCs when using function controls by device (page
switching) on basic part devices is the same as contention with page switching by switches.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
The following explanation is for an example when the control device is set to the PLC's data memory DM0000 (in the
case of the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, data memory DM00000, or in the case of the A500, data register
D000000) as shown in the above screen.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
For example, to set Window 1 to Display ON from the PLC, set Bit 13 (Window 1 Display Specify) and Bit 10 (Window
1 Display) to 1 (ON). On the contrary, to set Window 1 to Display OFF from the PLC, set Bit 13 (Window 1 Display
Specify) and Bit 10 (Window 1 Display) to 0 (OFF).
Reference Window display changes as follows when the window display bits (10 to 12) are in the following states
when the window display specified bits (13 to 15) change state to OFF:
When the window display bit is ON: The window display stays ON.
When the window display bit is OFF: The window display turns OFF.
DM0000
Contention between window ON/OFF by PLCs and window ON/OFF by switches does not occur as the PLC can
control which of the PLC or switches turns the window display ON or OFF in this way.
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Auto operation
Point When an interrupt window display is turned ON while a global window is displayed, the
following happens if the number of devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, size
of overlapping data, and other restrictions are exceeded.
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.
It is possible that even all the Global windows are Display OFF, the Interrupt Window can still
14 not be displayed. (at this time, ìGlobal Window Display Errorî is displayed on VT3). In such a
case, Window 3 which is used as the interrupt window display is beyond the restrictions
established for the interrupt window. The restrictions established for the interrupt windows
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
Descriptions from here on are given assuming that the interrupt window device is set to data memory PLC DM0000
(in the case of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, to data memory DM00000, and in the case of A500 to data register
D000000) and the interrupt window No. device is set to PLC data memory DM0001 (in the case of KV-5500/5000/
3000/1000/700, to data memory DM00001, and in the case of A500 to data register D000001) as shown in the screen
above.
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Specify the page No. of the window 3 screen to be displayed as the interrupt window by the device of the interrupt
window No.
MOV H0001 D2
H,specify a hexadecimal constant
14
"VT System", page 12-12
To cancel the interrupt window, store numerical value "0" to data memory DM0000 (in the case of KV-5500/5000/
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
3000/1000/700, data memory D00000, and in the case of A500, data register D000000).
Reference The display position when the interrupt window is displayed can be specified using "Interrupt window
position".
"Interrupt Window Coordinate (PLC->VT)", page 14-10
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Start End
Data editing
CSV files
output
CSV files
input
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Write*2 Write
Install
Read*2 Read
Start End
Data editing
CSV files
output
CSV files
input
*1 Data is stored in the memory card (OP-42254) in the VT3-specific file format (VTDVC **.WD3) (“**” denotes
the file No., which is a numerical value 00 to 99).
*2 With the FTP server, data can be read from/written to the memory card via Ethernet. The Ethernet components
are needed (VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3).
"8-5 FTP Server Function”, VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-5 Ethernet Components”, VT3 Series Hardware Manual
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Create the screen from which PDF is executed. "15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder", page 15-22
Connect VT3 with PLC to transfer data. "VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC
15 Connection Manual"
PLC DATA FOLDER
Reference The PDF data saved on VT3 can be sent to the PC through the VT -> PC data receive.
The PLC data formats and storage methods vary depending on where they are saved.
Please refer to the following table.
Save Destination Action
Internal memory
Saved as one part of the VTS file (*.vs4,*.vu4).
(SRAM)
Memory Card File is saved to the \VTDVC folder on the Memory Card as PLC data folder data
(OP-42254) (VTDVC**.WD3).(“**” stands for file No. 00 to 99.)
A file can read or write the following number of PLC devices (including VT3’s internal devices and link devices) at the
most:
When it is saved in the memory card : 65,535 max.
When it is saved in the internal memory (SRAM) : 12,779 max.
(A mixture of word devices and bit devices is allowed.)
The number of files, PLC devices and records that can be saved is restricted by SRAM and Memory Card capacity.
Details of restrictions
"Size of PLC Data Folder Data", page 15-8
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Records
65535 max
recorded data
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
With the VT3 series (Run Mode and System Mode) and VTSTUDIO (the PDF editing tool), we can do the following.
Operation Availability
Item VT3 Run mode VT3 Run mode VT STUDIO
(Run mode) (System Mode) *1 (PLC data folder editing tool)
Writing of data to PLC x
Reading of data from PLC x
Verification with PLC data x x
Changing of record data *2 x
Changing of PLC device x x
Addition of PLC device x x
Deletion of PLC device x x
Changing of record comment *2
Addition of new records
Deletion of records x
Copying of records x
Making a new file x x
Deletion of files x
( Memory Card only)*3
Copying of files x
( Memory Card only)*4
Changing of file comment x x
Save as the CSV format and
x x
read a CSV file
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Reference On the VT1, the size of internal memory (SRAM) "for storing PLC data folders" was 100 Kbytes.
Item Description
D Number of devices
R Number of records
F Number of files
Memory size (internal memory
153,600 bytes (76,928 bytes in the case of VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A))
(SRAM))
When SRAM is used, the number of devices and records that can be saved in a single file decreases when the
number of files increases as the area is divided in advance by the number of files.
[Example] In case of two files of roughly 75 Kbytes per file, and ten files of roughly 15 Kbytes per file
List of number of devices and records in PLC data folder data that can be stored to
internal memory (SRAM)
In case of 1 file (capacity 150K bytes)
Number of Number of
Remarks
devices records
Limit of number of records that can be saved to internal
1 2739
memory (SRAM)
10 1666
25 1000
100 337
363 100
1000 35
15 12779 1
Limit of number of devices that can be saved to internal
memory (SRAM)
PLC DATA FOLDER
Point • The PLC data can be saved only when the total storage capacity of the files is not higher
than the storage capacity of the memory card.
• When screen data or image data captured from video is saved on Memory Card, the size of
memory in which PLC data folder data can be saved decreases proportionally.
• When a file is saved with the PDF editing tool, the restriction on its storage capacity is:
Size per file = 16,000,000 bytes (approx. 15.2 Mbytes)
On VT3, a WD3 file which has a storage capacity higher than the above value can be
created by running the PLC. But you cannot edit/save (can be saved as the csv format) this
file although you can open this file with the PLC editing tool.
• When Memory Card is formatted, the usable capacity may differ depending on the OS.
• The above formula can be used to calculate an approx value. When used, a marginal
memory space should be kept.
List of number of devices of PLC data folder data, number of records and number of files available in
a 128MB memory card (OP-42254)
In case all files have the same number of devices and number of records
15
10000 29 100
26481 10 100
65535 1 100
PLC DATA FOLDER
Point When capacity of a file exceeds about 15.2MB, PLC data folder edit tool cannot be used for
editing. So, please divide into several folders (reduce the storage capacity of one file) to
reduce the capacity of each file.
Reference List of number of devices of PLC data folder data, number of records and number of files
available in a 16MB memory card (OP-34936)
In case all files have the same number of devices and number of records
3142 10 100
10000 1 100
12608 1 100
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
• When a PDF is run, the communication between VT3 and PLC is occupied by it.
• All parts (switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/graphs, etc.) placed on screen do not function when PLC data
folders are executed.
In addition, the video capture trigger of the video components (VT3-VD4/VD1) cannot work.
• When a comment is written into a device or a PLC device is specified for a comment, the character string writing
(displaying) and specifying need a longer time. When writing a comment into a device or specifying a device for a
comment, please use an internal word device (MW).
• When the record specify mode is set to comment specification, comments are specified only when the record
comment completely matches the text string data of the comment specified device.
When multiple records having the same record comment are saved to PLC data folder data, it becomes uncertain
which record data will be written or read.
• In case of the following situations, an error may occur. When an error occurs, the error notice device which is set
by running the PLC is ON.
• The specified file number, record number, or comment data is failed to be saved to the internal memory (SRAM)
and memory card.
• When a file storage position is specified in the memory card, the memory card, however, is not installed on the
VT3host.
• To write (write back) PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3) to Memory Card by FTP server functions, also write the 15
multiple files (VTDVCM**.ID3, VTDVID**.ID3) that were also generated at the same time after editing by the PLC
PLC DATA FOLDER
data folder editing tool in addition to PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3).
The files that were also formed at the same time after editing are sometimes not displayed depending on the
settings of your PC as they are hidden files.If they are not displayed, change the display settings of your PC.
Operation is sometimes incorrect if only PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3) is written (written back) to the
Memory Card.
• An attempt is made to set the number of target station on which the PDF is run with the device-based controls over
the Ethernet or thermoregulator (1: N) link.
A PLC cannot be run on more than one different station simultaneously.
• When a VT3 model is changed into a VT2 model, the PDF data stored in the internal memory in the VT3 model,
which is set with the target PLC_B, is deleted.
Reference On the VT1, PLC data folder data execution did not function during VT command serial communications
or Simulator execution.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-11
15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Edit PLC data folder data using the PLC data folder editing tool.
1 Either select "Resources(R)" -> "PLC data folder(P)" from Menu in that order, or click "PLC data folder" on the
"System Settings" tab in the workspace.
2 Specify the data save destination and the file No. to be edited in the "PLC Data Folder" window.
Item Description
Save data to Select the save destination of the PLC data folder data from "SRAM/ Memory Card".
Select the drive for the memory card.In the case that there is no the "\VTDVC file folder" in the
Drive
selected drive, create the \VTDVC file folder.
Displays the drive and folder of the Memory Card when "Save data to" is set to "Memory Card".
Folder The folder becomes the \VTDVC folder in the drive.
(for example: When the D disk drive is selected as the drive for the memory card, D:\VTDVC0)
Starts up the PLC data folder editing tool for editing the device and record data of the PLC data
Edit folder data of the specified file No. data can be printed or exported as csv format files or
UNICODE text files. In addition, data can printed or exported as the csv format files.
Cut Cuts the PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
Copy Copies the PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
Paste Pastes the copied PLC data folder data to the specified file No.
Delete Deletes the PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
Paste the PDF data in other VTS files/VT2files (*.vs*,*.vu*,*.vd*,*.vd*u,*.vx*,*.vx*u) and other
Import
memory cards to a specific file. This only applies to the internal memory (SRAM).
No.*1 Displays the file No. of the PLC data folder data.
Comment Displays the file comment of the PLC data folder data.
Size Displays the file size in Kbytes.
Device Displays the number of PLC devices in the PLC data folder data.
Record Displays the number of records in the PLC data folder data.
PLC*2 Displays the number of target PLCs in the PLC data folder data.
Either click to select and click the "Edit" button, or click the "Paste" button to display the "Sets
15
New Files*3*4 PLC data folder file No." window.
PLC DATA FOLDER
Creates new PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
*1 In the case that the storage capacity of one file is exceeded (number of devices, number of records) when the
"Internal Memory (SRAM)" is selected as the destination storage position, “ “ will be displayed in the front of
the file, with the message "*Over-big File Size: Please reduce the number of files or the size of the file" being
displayed. Please reduce the size of the file (number of devices, number of records). Or first delete this file, and
then replace it with a file with the applicable size.
*2 In the case the different PDF data is pasted or entered into the target PLC, “ “ will be displayed in the front
of the file number. Please check or change the device settings with the PLC editing tool, and update the data.
*3 In the case the size (number of devices, number of records) of a file is over big, the file cannot be created when
the "Internal Memory (SRAM)" is selected as the destination storage position. No more files can be added.
*4 When the MultiTalk function is used and the target PLC_A/B is different, the file numbers and target PLCs can
be set from the "Set the PDF PLC File Numbers" window (when the internal memory is selected as the storage
destination). When the memory card is selected as the storage destination, the target PLCs should be set up
with the PDF editing tool.
Point The PLC data cannot be directly inputted from the VT1 files.
Please read the VT1 files with VT STUDIO and saved as the VTS files, then input them.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Status Bar
Item Description
Title bar Displays the PLC data folder editing tool and data save destination.
Menu bar Displays the menu of the PLC data folder editing tool.
Displays available tools.
Tool bar
Currently unavailable menu items are displayed in gray.
File No. Displays the file No. of the PLC data folder data currently being edited.
Enters and displays the file comment of the PLC data folder data currently being edited.
SJIS : Up to 63 1-byte or 31 2-byte characters can be set.
Comment
UNICODE : Half and full-width characters with a max size of 31 can be selected.
File comments and record comments are handled in the same text code.
Devices Display the number of the PLC devices in the PLC data.The number is selectable.
Records Displays the number of records in the PLC data folder data.The number is selectable.
Displays the target PLC of the PLC data folder data currently being edited.
When "Save data to" is set to "Memory Card":
15 PLC
Select the PLC manufacturers/models connected with VT3.
When "Save data to" is set to "Internal memory (SRAM)":
Cannot be changed.
VT2 models: same as the target PLC models that are set with VT STUDIO. *1
PLC DATA FOLDER
VT3 models: same as the target PLC models that are set from the "Set the PDF File
Numbers" window.
Displays the numerical value of each record of the currently registered PLC device.
Data edit screen
Numerical values can be edited by clicking this screen.
Status bar Displays button explanations and methods of operation.
15
View(V) BCD Displays the record data in BCD format.
HEX (H) Displays the record data in Hex format.
To display recorded data in single-precision float (real number).(only for using
Single-precision float(F)
PLC DATA FOLDER
*1 If ISF exists in the file being edited, the "Assignment of "Input Support Information"" window will be displayed
in which ISF assigned to each device can be modified.
*2 The following precautions should be observed for the SJIS -> UNICODE converting.
Compared with Shift JIS, comment characters that can be processed in the UNICODE format are
comparatively lower. As a sequence, the excessive characters may be deleted.
Comment
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool", page 15-14
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Item Description
Display registered PLC devices, internal devices (MB, MW ), and link devices (LNB, LNW).
Double-clicking this item displays the "Device settings" window. You can change devices in
this window.
Device
The character following the device indicates the type of device: "B" standard for bit device, "W"
for word device, and "2W" for 32-bit (2 words) word device. "S" before "W" stands for signed
decimal display, and "B" following "W" stands for "BCD". "H" stands for Hexadecimal.
Import support To display import support information. This option can be displayed after import support
information information exported from the "Sensor settings batch transfer settings" of KV STUDIO is read.
Displays the record No. and record comment.
Record No./ comment Double-clicking this item displays the "Enter record No./comment" window. You can change
record Nos. and record comments in this window.
Display the numeric values of all the records in an edited PLC device. For the bit devices,
display "ON" or "OFF".
Data display
Click to edit it. When ISF is used, a value can be selected for modification.
"H" appended to numerical values stands for Hex.
New device Double-clicking this item enables addition of new devices.
New record Double-clicking this item enables addition of new records.
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Change device
Item Description
Select the data type of the PLC device from "Bit/1-word/2-words".
Data type
When the data type is set to "2-words", two continuous word devices are used.
Device type Sets the type of PLC device.
Device No. Sets the device No. of the PLC device.
Select the data format of the PLC device from "Unsigned decimal/ Signed decimal/
Data format BCD/HEX" when "Data type" is set to "1-word" or "2- words".
Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
Num Sets the number of devices to be created using a continuous number.
Max num Displays the maximum value that can be set to the "Num".
Parameter name To display ISF of this device No.
Display format To display the display format (Signed binary, Unsigned binary, BCD, HEX, Float).
Input Enum. item If this option is checked, the value is displayed as a name.
Support Setting range To display the range of settable values and candidates.
Information Clear "Input
Support To delete import support information of this device No.
Information"
When this checkbox is marked, the device becomes a spare device.
When "Data type" is set to "1-word" or "2-words", the device becomes a reserved
Reserve
(word) device.
When "Data type" is set to "Bit", the device becomes a reserved (bit) device.
*1 Can be displayed only import support information is read.
Change the record No. and record comment of the PLC data folder data.
To display the "Enter record No./comment" window, double-click the record No. or comment display.
Item Description
Record No. Sets the record No.
Sets the comment.
Comment SJIS : Up to 31 1-byte characters or 15 2-byte characters can be set.
UNICODE : Half and full-width characters with a max size of 15 can be selected.
Changing data
Find
Item Description
Target Select the search target from "Record/Device/Value".
Find range Select search range from "All/selected range".
Find next Finds the next record, device or value that matches the target.
Close Ends the search and closes the "Find" window.
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Item Description
Select the input format of search value from "Bit/Unsigned binary/Signed binary/
Input format
BCD/HEX/Float".
Find data To enter or select the search value.
Find range Select search range from "All/selected range".
Find direction To select whether a row or column has the search priority.
Item Description
Data direction Select which of devices and records are to be set to lines and columns.
To set up output range (All, Selected part, Specified range).
Output range When "Specified range" is selected, the start and end of devices and records should to be
specified.
Export after adding
import support When this option is checked, import support information is added and then exported.
information*1
*1 Once import support information is added in the exported CSV file, import will be impossible.
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Specify the destination folder to save the file and file name, and click the " Save (S)"button.
Specify the folder (directory) containing the exported file or UNICODE text files and the file name, and click the
"Open" button.
Point • Only import the files that are edited with the PDF editing tool.
• For the CSV files that are edited with the spread sheet applications such as Excel and
exported with the PDF editing tool, please only edit (change) the cells of the values. Once
other cells, lines or columns edited (changed), deleted, or moved and saved in the
spreadsheet software can no longer be imported to the PLC data folder editing tool.
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Point Execution of PLC data folders is reserved if it is attempted during the following operations.
After operation is completed, PLC data folders are automatically executed.
• Printing
• Video capturing
• During saving to Memory Card and reading from Memory Card (saving of record data to
Memory Card, PLC data folder, etc.)
• Components (including the OFF delay function) that are currently in the ON mode (a
switch, lamp switch, or key is pressed and held on during this time).
• Switches (the instantaneous setting) that cannot execute OFF (communication delay)
• The cross button is continuously pressed during this time.
Write DF
The data of record No.0 in file No.0 is written to the PLC when the state of the VT internal bit device (MB01000) of the
trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up).
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches" 15
VT internal bit devices
PLC DATA FOLDER
Write the data of file No.0 to the PLC with the record No. specified.
Record No.
CANCEL ENTER
Numeric 23
value display
Write DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Of the records in file No.0, the data of the record No. specified at the VT internal word device (MW0110) of the record
No. specified device is written to the PLC when the state of the VT internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit
device changes from OFF to ON (Up).
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
Display the numeric value of the internal word device (MW0110) of the record number specifying device. Check the
PLC DATA FOLDER
"Key Entry", allowing the numeric small keypad to be used for numeric value entry.
"9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Set as follows when displaying the record comment of the specified record No. on the VT3.
Text display
Record No.
CANCEL ENTER
Numeric 23 Ԙ ԙ
value display
Write DF DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
The above setting example is for function control by device (DF) (2).
Example of setting function control by devices (DF) (1)
"To write a specific record No. to a PLC", page 15-24
Of the records in file No.0, the record comment of the record No. specified at VT internal word device (MW0110) of
the record No. specified device is written to comment written devices (MW0120 to MW012F).
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
The text string data of the record comment stored to VT internal word devices (MW0120 to MW012F) is displayed.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
To write data of a matching record No. after searching for a record comment
Search for a record comment in the data of file No.0 and write the data of matching record Nos. to the PLC.
Write DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), VT3 searches
character string data stored to the internal word device (MW0110 to MW011F) of the device specified by the comment
and record No. data that matches the record comment and writes it to the PLC.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
The internal word devices (MW0110 to MW011F) hold the character string data of the record comments to be found.
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Of the data of file No.0, read the PLC data to a free record No.
Read DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), PLC data is read
from the smallest record No. with an open number of the File No. records. A character string stored as a record
comment to the internal word device (MW0110 to MW011F) of the device specified by the comment. When "Specify
Comment" is not checked, strings are stored without comments.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
The internal word devices (MW0110 to MW011F) hold the character string data of the record comments to be saved.
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Read DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), read the PLC data
from Record No.0 in File No.0. Save the character string data stored in he comments specifying devices (MW0110 to
MW011F) as the record comments. When the "Specify Comments" is not checked, they are saved without modifying
the comments.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
The internal word devices (MW0110 to MW011F) hold the character string data of the record comments to be saved.
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Record No.
Numeric 23
value display
Read DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), read the PLC data
from the record specified with the record number specifying device MW0110 in File No.0. Save the character string
data stored in the internal word devices (MW0120 to MW012F) of the comments specifying devices as the record
comments.When the "Specify Comments" is not checked, they are saved without modifying the comments.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
PLC DATA FOLDER
Display the numeric value of the internal word device (MW0110) of the record number specifying device. Check the
"Key Entry", allowing the numeric small keypad to be used for numeric value entry.
"9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Save the desired character string data of the record comments into the internal word devices (MW0120 to MW012F).
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
To read PLC data to a matching record No. after searching for a record comment
Search for a record comment in the data of file No.0 and read the PLC data to a matching record No.
Read DF
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), the records in File
No.0 on VT3, together with the character string data and record comments data in the internal word devices
(MW0110 to MW011F) of the comments specifying device, are written to PLC.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
Stores character strings of record comments used to search on an internal word device (MW0110 to MW011F). Enter
a check to Key Input to enable the keyboard to be used to input characters.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
MEMO
15
PLC DATA FOLDER
16
WORKSHEET
Point The processing time (response time) taken to execute (calculate) worksheets cannot be
guaranteed. For this reason, worksheets cannot be used for processes that require values to
be written back in real time to the PLC or processing of calculations that are related to
control.
Worksheets OverDisplay
Worksheets comprise multiple cells. Constants, PLC devices, calculations and functions are set to each of these cells
in advance.
A total of up to four worksheets can be used, each of which is classified by an ID (0 to 3).
Cell
Worksheet ID(0 to 3)
• The worksheet is executed when a worksheet startup trigger set in the worksheet system settings turns ON.
• Worksheet execution is performed regardless of the currently displayed screen.
• The cell value is reflected(displayed) in parts when the cells are set to target(reference) device of parts (numerical
value display, etc).In addition, when cells are set in write word device of parts (numerical value display), the values
entered in VT3 screen are written into specified cells.
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
• The cell value is written into PLC device. In addition, the value of PLC device can be read into cells.
16
WORKSHEET
PLC of makers
Enter from
Cell
parts Read
reference
Output
ABCD
1234
Read
Output
KL
• Setting Worksheets
Set pre-prepared functions, etc. to each individual sheet called a "worksheet" that comprise multiple cells.
16
WORKSHEET
Worksheet Restrictions
The number of sheets and cells in a worksheet are subject to the following restrictions.
Number of sheets : 4 (ID0 to ID3)
Number of cells : 1000 cells per sheet
20 columns (A to T) x 50 rows (1 to 50) = 1000 cells
Point The number of cells that can be set is dependent on screen data size or worksheet memory.
Refer to the following restrictions.
The following table shows the restrictions that apply to the number of reference data items, PLC devices and
worksheet memory that can be set in worksheets. For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Worksheet ID (0 to 3) Total
Reference data Max. 2048 devices
PLC devices Max. 768 devices
Worksheet memory 1000 blocks
Screen data 128 Kbytes
Screen data
The size of screen data decreases as worksheet setting data is saved as part of the screen data.
About the size of screen data
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Number of reference data items, number of PLC devices, and worksheet memory
Constants, PLC devices, calculations, and functions are counted as follows when they are set to cells.
16
WORKSHEET
Title bar
Menu bar
Tool bar
Edit screen
Status bar
Item Description
Title bar Displays the Worksheet editing tool.
Menu bar Displays the Worksheet editing tool menu.
Position of cell Displays the currently selected cell.
Formula= When this checkbox is marked, the "Cell" window is displayed.
Displays the constant, calculation formula or function set to the currently selected cell.This item
Formula
is also used for setting constants, calculation formula or function to the currently selected cell.
Data type Displays the data type of the result.
Output to PLC device Displays the setting whether or not to output to PLC device.
Option, Match The settings "Update value only if true" and "Output value only if true" are displayed in the case
of an IF function.These settings can also be made.In the case of a MATCH function, the "Match
condition condition" setting is displayed.These settings can also be made.
Edit Screen A cell can be edited when it is clicked.
16 Sheet
Select the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to set.Comments up to 16 1-byte characters can be
entered.Either double-click the worksheet ID, or select "Edit" -> "Sheet comment setting" from
Menu in that order.
The status bar displays the following details:
WORKSHEET
16
WORKSHEET
Item Description
Position of cell Displays the position of the currently selected cell.
Select the item to set to the cell from the following:
Type/function*1 • Not used • Comment • Constant • Cell • PLC device
• Write from parts • calculation • functions(ABS,AVERAGE,CHOOSE,...)
Reference • Text in cells to which comments are set is displayed in dark green.
• Cells whose result data format is set to bit are displayed in light red.
• Cells whose result data format is set to word are displayed in white.
• Cells whose result data format is set to text string are displayed in light yellow.
• PLC device is displayed below when MultiTalk function is used.
DM00000_A
Device type Device No. _PLC_A/B
16 For details on how to enter text strings, refer to "Direct entry format" in the description for each setting item from here on.
Not used
WORKSHEET
Comment
Item Description
Comment Enter the string for the comment using up to 64 characters.
Constant
Bit (constant)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".
16
Item Description
WORKSHEET
Select ON/OFF.
Constant ON : The value of the cell becomes ON when the worksheet is executed.
OFF: The value of the cell becomes OFF when the worksheet is executed.
Word(constant)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Constant Set the numerical value.
Constant Data Select the data format of the constant from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/HEX/Float". Of
Format the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
String(constant)
The following describes an instance where text string is selected as "Data type of result".
16
WORKSHEET
Item Description
Character length Displays the number of characters entered to text strings.
Constant Sets the text string. (max. 64 characters)
When using " (double quotation marks) in text strings, ""enter the range between two continuous marks.
[Example] Entry "AB""CD""EF" => Display "AB""CD""EF"
Cells
Bit(cell)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Sets the position of the cell to reference. Click the "Select" button to
Cells
select the position to the cell.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
device Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
1-byte alphanumerics are entered for cell position, and uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for
alphabet characters on columns.
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for b.
Word (cell)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Sets the position of the cell to reference. Click the "Select" button to
Cells
select the position to the cell.
Cells
Select the data format of the cell from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button
Device Name
device is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
1-byte alphanumerics are entered for cell position, and uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for
alphabet characters on columns.
[Example] To output the value of cell "A1" (word) to DM1000 as 2-wordsigned decimal
=> Display A1=> "DM01000.w2s"
String (cell)
The following describes an instance where text string is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Character length Displays the character length of cells to reference
Sets the position of the cell to reference. Click the "Select" button to
Cells
select the position to the cell.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse"
Output to PLC
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.
1-byte alphanumerics are entered for cell position, and uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for
alphabet characters on columns.
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for s.
[Example] To output the value of cell "A1" (text string) as four devices starting from DM1000
(UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower bytes ON)
=> Display A1.s=>"DM01000 - DM01003.s (UniRev)"
PLC devices
Set a PLC device to a cell.This is used to read the value of PLC devices to a cell.
Item Description
Sets the target device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Device Name
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: The value of the cell becomes ON when the value of the PLC
Read device device is ON. The value of the cell becomes OFF when the
Mode value of the PLC device is OFF.
B contact: The value of the cell becomes OFF when the value of the
PLC device is ON. The value of the cell becomes ON when
the value of the PLC device is OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device
settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
16 PLC devices cannot be entered directly on a keyboard.Set PLC devices in the "Cell" window.
The "Cell" window is displayed by entering.
WORKSHEET
To output the value (A contact) of relay 1000 after it is read to relay 1001 as an A contact
=> Display "01000.b(A)" => "01001.b(A)"
Item Description
Sets the target device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Device Name
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Read device Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
To output the value (2-word signed decimal) of DM00000 after it is read to DM01000 as 2-word 16
signed decimal
WORKSHEET
Item Description
Displays the text string.
Character length When text string is shiftjis : character length=number of device2-1
When text string isUNICODE : character length=number of device-1
Sets the target device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Device Name
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
Read device When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Output to PLC
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.
[Example] To output four devices' worth of text strings (UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower
bytes ON) starting from DM00000 after it is read to four devices (UNICODE supported,
swapping of upper/lower bytes ON) starting from DM01000
=> Display "DM00000 to DM00003.s(UniRev)" => "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
16
WORKSHEET
Input
Set the cell for writing from parts.This is used to write values to the cell from parts on the VT3 such as numerical value
displays, text displays, and switches.
Bit (input)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Initial value Select the initial value from "ON/OFF".
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device
settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
When INPUT(<initial value>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
[Example] To output the value entered from a part to relay 1000 as an A contact
=> Display INPUT(ON) => "01000.b(A)"
Word (input)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Initial value Sets the initial value (numerical value).
Initial value Select the data format of the initial value from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/HEX/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
[Example] To output a value entered from a part to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display INPUT(0) => "DM01000.w2s"
String (input)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Character length Sets the maximum value for the number of characters to write from the part.
Initial value Sets the initial value (text string).
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Output to PLC
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.
16 At <character length>, set the value of the number of characters to be written to the cell.When this value is omitted,
the number of characters at <string> is usedas the number of characters in the cell.
WORKSHEET
[Example] To output the value entered from a part to four devices from DM1000
=> Display INPUT ("ABC",4) => "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
Calculation
Bit (calculation)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Calculation formula Set calculations by clicking "<Calculation formula>" button. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Output to PLC Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is
Mode
OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
16
WORKSHEET
Word (calculation)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Calculation formula Set calculations by clicking "<Calculation formula>" button. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
*1 "Calculation formula", page 16-23
16
WORKSHEET
Calculation formula
If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window is displayed. Set the calculation formula
in this window.
The method of setting calculations in worksheets is the same as that described in "6-9 Calculation".
Pay attention to the following points.
Point • The maximum number of variables (A to P) that can be set in calculations in worksheets is 16.
• Select the data type of the variable from "Const/Cell".
To use the value of PLC devices in a calculation, for example, set “PLC device” temporarily
to a different cell, and then set so that that cell is referenced by a variable.
"PLC devices", page 16-14
• When "Data type of result" is set to Bit, the variable in the calculation can be selected from
"Bit/Word/String". However, when String is set, only comparison operator "=" can be set.
1 Set "Calculation formula" using variables and operators on the "Key pads".
Click the field for setting "Bit/Word/String" and press the button to select from "Bit/Word/String".
• When "Data type of result" is set to Word, "Word" can be selected as the variable in the calculation.
Next, click the field for setting the device, and press the button. The "Parameter" window is displayed.
16
WORKSHEET
[Example] •To set the comparison A(cell "A1")>=B(cell ìB1î) of cell values (value)
A1.wu>=B1.wu (when data format of cells A1 and B1 is unsigned decimal)
•To set the comparison A(cell "A1")=B(cell "B1") of cell values (text string)
A1.s=B1.s
•To set calculation formula A(cell "A1") * B(cell "B1")+C(cell "C1")-D(Const: 100)(A to D: variables)
A1.ws*B1.ws+C1.ws-100u
(when data format of cells A1, B1 and C1 is signed decimal)
[Example] To output the result of the calculation formula to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display Calculation formula => "DM01000.w2s"
Point "Calculation Precision and Data Format Conversion Rules", "Cautions Relating to
Calculations" relating to calculations
"6-9 Calculation"
16
WORKSHEET
There are other rules in addition to the above for handling bits in calculations.
16
WORKSHEET
*1 A worksheet execution error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data
format.
*2 Incrementing of digits is ignored when 9999 (99999999 when manipulating two words) is exceeded.
*3 A worksheet execution error occurs when the result of calculation is a minus number.
*1 A worksheet execution error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data
format.
Float Use as it is
conversion*1 conversion*1
*1 Values are not written to the cell when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data
format.
Item Description
Result Displays the results of the data check.
Displays the number of Referenced data items currently set to the
Reference data
worksheet.
PLC devices Displays the number of PLC devices currently set to the worksheet.
Worksheet memory Displays the worksheet memory currently set to the worksheet.
Detailed Displays the size of the screen data currently used on the worksheet in
Screen data
Descript bytes.
ion Sheet ID0 Displays the check result of sheet ID0.
Sheet ID1 Displays the check result of sheet ID2.
Worksheet Related
Sheet ID2 Displays the check result of sheet ID2.
Sheet ID3 Displays the check result of sheet ID3.
Total Displays the total.
Point Numerical values displayed in red indicate items for which a restriction isexceeded.
Change the settings so that they fall within allowable ranges.
"Worksheet Restrictions", page 16-4
Reference When "Tool(T)" is selected and the "Error check during editing(E)" checkbox is marked, the following
data checks are executing periodically during editing:
• Whether or not a reference destination cell exists
• Whether or not the self cell is being referenced
• Whether or not the data type does not match the reference destination cell
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • The following window is displayed when a cell is being referenced cyclically.
• The following window is displayed when the data type of the cell result does not match the data
type of the result of the cell referencing that cell.
16
WORKSHEET
Item Description
Sheet ID Select the sheets to display as a list.
Device Displays the currently placed device Nos.
B/W Displays the device type (B: bit device, W: word device).
Cells Displays cells to which PLC devices are currently set.
When this button is clicked, the "Batch change devices" window is displayed
Batch-change device
so that you can batch-change the device Nos. displayed in the list.
16
WORKSHEET
Batch-change device
The device Nos. of PLC devices (set to cells) currently displayed in the list can be batch-changed by clicking the
"Batch change devices" in the "Device list" window.
2 Set the device No and continuous data changed in "Batch change devices" window, and click "OK" button.
If the device range of device No. changed in step 1 is selected, the device No. or continuous data is reflected when
ìBatch change devicesî window is displayed. However, the selected devices must belong to the same device type.
16
WORKSHEET
Short-cut key
The following table introduces handy shortcut key commands that are not provided in the Worksheet editing tool
menu.
Short-cut key Description
Sets the selected cell to the Direct entry mode.
+ Turns the setting of the selected cell into a comment.
Fixes the entry and moves one cell down.
+ Fixes the entry and moves one cell up
Fixes the entry and moves one cell to the right
+ Fixes the entry and moves one cell to the left
Cancels direct entry.
+ Displays the "Cell" window for the selected cell.
Moves to the topmost/bottommost/leftmost/rightmost position of the cell where the cursor is
+ / / /
currently located.
+ / Move to the cell at leftmost/rightmost position in the worksheet.
16
To insert multiple columns, select the column Nos. of the same number of columns you want to
insert from the column to the right of the location where you want insert the column and click with
the right mouse button, and select “Insert column(I)”.
This item can be selected when a column No. (A, B, C...) is clicked with the right mouse button.
WORKSHEET
To delete a column, click on the line No. of the column to delete with the right mouse button, and
Delete column(L) select “Delete column(D)”.
To delete multiple columns, select the multiple columns to delete, click with the right mouse button,
and select "Delete line(L)".
Fill handle
The auto fill function can be used by using the fill handle.When a
constant (word) has been set to a cell, continuous numerical
values can be made to an adjacent cell range by dragging the fill
handle with the c key held down. The same operation is possible when a constant is set to the parameter of a
function.
Prefix line Nos. or column Nos. with a 1-byte $ mark if you do not want to change line Nos. or column Nos. even if the
auto fill function is executed, for example, when a cell is set to the parameter of a function.
Other
All cells in a sheet can be selected by clicking the top left corner of the sheet.
All cells in a selected column can be selected by clicking the column No. (A, B, C,...)
All cells in a selected line can be selected by clicking the line No. (1, 2, 3,...)
16
WORKSHEET
If you move the cursor to between a column No. (A, B, C, ...), the cursor changes to the pointer. Dragging the
mouse pointer in this state changes the cell width.If you double-click the mouse pointer in this state, the cell width is
automatically adjusted.
Importing Worksheets
Copy and paste worksheet settings from other VTS/VT2 files.
1 Click " " button in the workspace, and select "Import" from right-button menu.
The "Import worksheet" window is displayed.
Item Description
File Name Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When this button is clicked and the settings of the worksheet to import are located in another file,
Select file
the "Open Import File" window is displayed. Select the worksheet file to import in this window.
Worksheet ID Select the ID of the worksheet to import.
Reference "Open import file" window, other than "Import worksheet", is displayed during first import. "Import
worksheet" window is displayed when selecting files and clicking "Open" button.
16
WORKSHEET
Item Description
File location Select the drive and folder storing the file to be opened.
File Name Select the name of the file to be opened.
File type Select file type. Please select "WD3 file (*.WD3)".
Movement Click "Move" button to move to the specified foler or recently used folder.
4 Select the ID of the worksheet to import from the worksheet IDs in the "Import worksheet" window, and click
the "OK" button.
Point When a worksheet is imported, only the settings of the worksheet are imported. Worksheet
system settings are not imported.
16
WORKSHEET
2 Set the Trigger of worksheet start etc. in the worksheet system settings screen.
16
WORKSHEET
Item Description
Sets the worksheet startup trigger.
VT timer(auto) : A VT3 timer is used to start up the worksheet.
Trigger of worksheet Bit Device : The change in state of bit devices on the PLC from OFF
start to ON is used to start up the worksheet.
Trigger of The trigger bit device is reset after VT3 recognizes the
worksheet trigger.
start When "VT timer (auto)" is selected as the Trigger of worksheet start, select
Process cycle*1 the process cycle from "High (worksheet renewal priority)/Standard/Low
(screen renewal priority)".
Sets the bit device to be used as the trigger when "Bit device" is selected as
Trigger bit device*2
the Trigger of worksheet start.
Worksheet execute Sets whether to always continue processing after worksheet processing, or
Execute permission to process only when the bit device (enabled bit device) is ON.
permission
settings Sets the execution enable bit device for worksheet processing when
Enabled bit device*2
"Specified by bit device" is selected at "Worksheet execute permission".
When this checkbox is marked, the fact that worksheet processing has
Notify end
ended is notified.
Sets the notified bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Notify end Notified bit device*2
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Reset notify bit before When this checkbox is marked, the notified bit device is reset before
execution worksheet processing is clicked.
Notify error When this checkbox is marked, the worksheet processing error is notified.
Notify error Sets the notify bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference
Notify bit device*2
bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
*1 For details, see the description on the following page.
*2 "PLC device" selectable
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
16
WORKSHEET
VT3
12345
PLC of various makers
12345
ABCD
Device monitoring
cycle in VT:T
Monitored target
Monitored target A
···
Monitored target A
Processing cycle
Processing cycle Description
Priority is given to updating of monitored target A.For this reason, the
Low (screen renewal priority)
update (worksheet execution) cycle of monitored target B becomes longer.
16
Standard
Gives priority to updating of monitored target B.For this reason, the update
High (worksheet renewal priority)
(worksheet execution) cycle of monitored target A becomes shorter.
WORKSHEET
(2) If "Output to PLC device" is set, writing to the target device is executed even if an error occurs. The value that
is written when an error occurs is the value before thatwas active before the error occurs.
(3) If an error occurs during "Cell data format", "PLC device data format" conversion during output to the PLC, the
error is notified as a cell error even if the error is not occurring during cell calculation.
This error occurs only when the data type of the result is "Word". Though the value of the cell remains at the
calculation value when an error occurs, "0" (zero) is written to the output destination (target device).
(4) The following message is displayed at the bottom right of the screen when an error occurs during cell
calculation processing.
16
WORKSHEET
Other
• Note that the correct value will not be returned if, in the case of functions (AVERAGE, COUNT, COUNTIF, MAX,
MIN, SUM, SUMIF) in which trends can be set as the parameter, "Overwrite old trend" is selected as processing at
memory over, and the trend storage area becomes full. Attentions shall be paid.
• When a value has been written from a part (switch, numerical value display, text display, etc.) to a cell other than a
cell set with "Input", the written value will be reflected until the worksheet is next executed, however, the value of
the worksheet processing result will be overwritten at execution.
• When the worksheet is set to cycle execution (trigger of worksheet start: VT timer (auto)) and the execute
permission setting is set to "Always", the worksheet will be executed once at initial page display for applying the
worksheet default when the Run mode is moved to. At this time, the message "Calculating worksheet..." will be
displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
This message disappears when worksheet execution is completed. This message is displayed only at initial page
display, and will not be displayed at the second execution onwards.
• While the "Calculating worksheet..." message is displayed, the initial display page screen is displayed, however,
the touch switches do not function.
• During printing, saving on Memory Card, and page/window switching, worksheet execution is continued. However,
it takes longer to process worksheets.
• When the triggers for multiple worksheets turn ON simultaneously, which worksheet the trigger was executed from
is not assured.
• When multiple worksheets are used by a trigger of worksheet start: VT timer (auto), set the processing cycle of
each worksheet to the same cycle.
16
WORKSHEET
List of Functions
Acquires and returns minimum value from the range of specified cells or specified
MIN 16-77 IF
trend data.
Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from the LARGE
SMALL 16-79
smallest number from a range of specified cells.
LARGEPOS
Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order counting
SMALLPOS 16-81
from the smallest number from a range of specified cells. MATCH
Acquires and returns the sum of the range of specified cells or the sum or specified
SUM 16-83 MAX
trend data.
Acquires and returns the total value of cells matching conditions from a range of MIN
SUMIF 16-85
specified cells, or the total value of matching cells from the data of specified trend graph.
SMALL
SMALLPOS
SUM
SUMIF
16
WORKSHEET
ABS Acquires and returns the absolute value of constants, values of cells to
reference, and result of calculations.
Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Const/Cell/Calc".
Constan : Set the numerical value.
Nume
Cell : Sets the position of the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell
rical
to reference. The cell position can also be selected by clicking the
Parameter 1 : const
Parameter "Select" button.
Number ant
Calculation : If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Data Select the data format of the parameter from ìSigned decimal/Floatî. Of the data
format formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputt the target device on
Output to PLC device
the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for ABS (<parameter 1>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
ABS
When ABS(<parameter 1>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device". CHOOSE
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
COUNT
[Example] To output the result of the ABS function to DM1000 as float (real number) COUNTIF
LARGE
"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17
LARGEPOS
MATCH
Application example
MAX
MIN
A B SMALL
1 "DM00000.ws" =ABS(A1)
SMALLPOS
SUM
PLC devices ABS function
Value of DM00000:-10=>"A1" Value of SUMIF
When the worksheet is executed, the value (-10) of DM00000 is read to "A1".
The value of "B1" becomes 10.
Point When the data format is signed decimal, a worksheet execution error occurs as the absolute
value of the lower limit value (-2147483648) in 2-word signed decimal exceeds the allowable
range for 2 word signed decimal (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
16
WORKSHEET
AVERAGE Acquires and returns the average value of the range of specified cells, or
the average value of the specified trend data.
Item Description
Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend".
Cell : Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range
Parameter 1: The cell range can also be selected by clicking the “Select” button.
Parameter Trend : Sets the trend ID and trend No.*1
Range
Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Format BCD/Float".Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for AVERAGE (<parameter 1>).
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
AVERAGE
CHOOSE
[Example] To output the result of the AVERAGE function to DM1000 as float (real number)
COUNT
=> Display AVERAGE(<parameter 1>)=> "DM01000.w2f"
COUNTIF
LARGE
LARGEPOS
Application example
MATCH
MAX
A B C MIN
5 "DM00005.wu"
SUMIF
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
16
The value of "B1" becomes the average value of "A1" to "A5" (DM00001 to DM00005).
WORKSHEET
The value of "C1" becomes the average value of the data of trend ID0/trend No.0 recorded to VT3 internal memory
(SRAM) before worksheet execution.
Point It takes a long time to process this function when “Trend” is selected for parameter 1, and
there is a lot of recorded data.
CHOOSE Acquires and returns the value of a cell at a specified position from a range of
specified cells.
Item Description
Data Type of Result Select the data type of the result from "Bit/Word/String".
Bit (CHOOSE)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter 1: Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter Sets the K (position) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const : Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: Position
Cell : Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Output to Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for CHOOSE (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
• "Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
• "Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the position of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed decimal,
so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter ì->ì instead of "=>". CHOOSE
COUNT
[Example] To output the result of CHOOSE function to relay 1000 in the A contact mode
COUNTIF
=> Display CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)=> "01000.b(A)"
IF
LARGEPOS
MAX
MIN
A B C
SMALL
1 "01000.b(A)" =CHOOSE(A1:A5.b,A6)
SMALLPOS
2 "01001.b(A)"
3 "01002.b(A)" SUM
4 "01003.b(A)"
SUMIF
5 "01004.b(A)"
6 "DM00001.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, ON(1)/OFF(0) of relays 01000 to 01004 is written to "A1" to "A5". The valueof
DM00001 is also read to "A6".
The value of the cell at "A6" (4)th position from among "A1" to "A5" is returned to "B1".
Point A value of 1 or more is valid as the position of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution error
occurs.
Word (CHOOSE)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter 1:
Range Select the data format of the cells in the specified range from "Unsigned decimal/
Data
Signed decimal/Float". Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
Format
Parameter complement.
Sets the K (position) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const : Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: K
Cell : Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
cell position can also be selected by clicking the “Select” button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When “Float” is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
complement.
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for CHOOSE (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.
device". AVERAGE
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
CHOOSE
[Example] To output the result of the CHOOSE function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal COUNT
IF
"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17
LARGE
LARGEPOS
Application example
MATCH
MAX
MIN
A B C
SMALL
1 "DM00001.wu" =CHOOSE(A1:A5.wu,A6)
2 "DM00002.wu" SMALLPOS
3 "DM00003.wu"
SUM
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu" SUMIF
6 "DM00001.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 and DM00100 are read to "A1" to "A6".
The value of the cell at "A6" (2)th position from among "A1" to "A5" is returned to "B1".
Point A value of 1 or more is valid as the position of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution error
occurs.
String (CHOOSE)
The following describes an instance where character is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Displays the maximum number of characters in the text strings in the range
Character length
selected by parameter 1.
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter 1: Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter Sets the K (position) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const: Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: Position
Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
Swap upper/lower When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text
bytes string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting from the target
Number of devices
device.
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for CHOOSE (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.
device". AVERAGE
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
CHOOSE
[Example] To output the result of the CHOOSE function as four devices starting from DM1000 COUNT
(UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower bytes ON)
COUNTIF
=> Display CHOOSE(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)= "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
IF
LARGEPOS
MATCH
Application example MAX
MIN
SMALL
A B C
SMALLPOS
1 "ABCDE" "DM00001.wu" =CHOOSE(A1:A5.s,B1)
2 "FGHIJ" SUM
3 "KLMNO" SUMIF
4 "PQRST"
5 "UVWXY"
Point A value of 1 or more is valid as the position of parameter 2.If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution error
occurs.
COUNT Acquires and returns the number of data of specified trend ID from the trend
data saved into internal memory.
Item Description
Parameter
Parameter Trend ID*1 Select the trend ID (0 to 3).
1: Range
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"
Reference 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for COUNT ( parameter 1).
[Example] To output the result of the COUNT function to DM1000 as 1-word signed decimal
=> Display COUNT(parameter 1)= "DM01000.wu"
Application example
A B C
1 =COUNT(trd"1")
COUNT function
Value of "A1":NO. value of record
When the worksheet is executed, the number of data items in trend ID1 recorded to VT3 internal memory(SRAM)
before worksheet execution is returned to "A1".
Point The number of data items currently recorded when worksheet execution is started is
acquired.
ABS
AVERAGE
CHOOSE
COUNT
COUNTIF
IF
LARGE
LARGEPOS
MATCH
MAX
MIN
SMALL
SMALLPOS
SUM
SUMIF
16
WORKSHEET
Acquires and returns the number of cells matching conditions from specified
COUNTIF cell range, or acquires and returns the number of data matching conditions
from specified trend data.
Item Description
Setting range.
Cell : Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
Parameter 1: The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Range Trend : Sets trend ID and trend No. *1
Parameter Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
format BCD/Float. Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's complement.
Conditio
Parameter 2: "Device setting" window is displayed when clicking "Conditional formula" button. Sets
nal
Condition the conditional formula (calculation formula).
formula*2
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Output to Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from ”Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Float”. Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"
*2 The variable X in the conditional formula (calculation formula) in the worksheet refers to the various data in the
range specified by parameter 1.
16 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for COUNTIF (<parameter 1>, <parameter
2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells ABS
"Constant", page 16-9
AVERAGE
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11 CHOOSE
[Example] To output the result of the COUNTIF function to DM1000 as 1-word signed decimal SMALLPOS
=> Display COUNTIF(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) = "DM01000.wu"
SUM
16
WORKSHEET
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" COUNTIF(A1:A10.wu,40<=X&X<=70)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
6 "DM00006.wu"
7 "DM00007.wu"
8 "DM00008.wu"
9 "DM00009.wu"
10 "DM00010.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00010 are read to "A1" to "A10".
The number of cells (in this example, “4”) whose value is 40 or more or 70 or less from among cells "A1" to "A10" is
returned to "B1".
Point It takes a longer time to process this function when ìTrendî is selected in parameter 1, and
there is a lot of data of the recorded trend.
16
WORKSHEET
Sets conditions, and judges whether or not the conditions have been
satisfied before processing is performed.
IF • When the condition is True, the value when the result is true is acquired
and returned.
• When the condition is False, the value when the result is False is acquired
and returned.
Item Description
Data Type of Result Select the data type of the result from "Bit/Word/String".
The following describes an instance where text string is selected as
"Data type of result".
Character length
The larger of the number of characters in parameters 2 and 3 text strings
is displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is updated only
when the result is True. If the result is True, the value of the cell is
Update value only if true
updated regardless of whether or not the cell value has changed state
from the previous state.
Option*1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target
device on the PLC only when the result is True. If the result is True, the
Output value only if true
value of the cell is output to the target device on the PLC regardless of ABS
whether or not the cell value has changed state from the previous state.
AVERAGE
*1 The option settings can also be made at the checkboxes that are displayed in the worksheet setting tool during
CHOOSE
direct entry.
COUNT
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"
COUNTIF
IF
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result". LARGEPOS
MATCH
MAX
MIN
SMALL
SMALLPOS
SUM
SUMIF
16
WORKSHEET
Item Description
Sets the conditions.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
Parameter 1: constant
position can also be selected by clicking the ìSelectî button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window
is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Sets the value when the result is True.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Parameter 2: Value if Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
Parameter
true position can also be selected by clicking the ìSelectî button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window
is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Sets the value when the result is not True.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Parameter 3: Value if Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
false position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window
is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Output to Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
16
WORKSHEET
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for IF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>). AVERAGE
• In the case of "Output value only if true", directly enter "--" at parameter 3, and then append ".o" MATCH
MIN
When outputting to a PLC device
SMALL
When IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>". SMALLPOS
SUM
[Example] To output the result of IF function to relay 1000 in the A contact mode
SUMIF
=> Display => IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>=>
To output the result of the IF function to relay 1000 in the A contact mode only when the result
is True
=> Display IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,- - ) .o=> "01000.b(A)"
A B C
1 "DM00000.wu" =IF(100<A1 & A1<200,ON,OFF)=>"01000.b(A)"
2
Word (IF)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".
Item Description
Sets the conditions.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
Parameter 1: Condition
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Sets the value when the result is True.
Const: Set the numerical value.
Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
Value if true
cell position can also be selected by clicking the ìSelectî button.
Parameter 2: Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
Parameter
16 Value if not
true
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Select the data format of parameter 3 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data
HEX display/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
WORKSHEET
Format
complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
PLC
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for IF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>). SUM
• Format when setting constants to cells
SUMIF
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
• When "Update value only if true" is set, directly enter "--" at parameter 3.
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,100u,- - ) => Display =IF(A1.b,100,- - )
b: Bit, u: Unsigned decimal 16
• In the case of "Output value only if true", directly enter " - - " at parameter 3, and then append ".o"
WORKSHEET
[Example] To output the result of the IF function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display =>IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)=>"DM01000.w2u"
To output the result of the IF function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal only when the result is True
=> Display IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,- - ).o=>"DM01000.w2u"
Application example
A B C
1 "01000.b(A)" =IF(A1.b|A2.b,4000,0)=>"DM00000.ws"
2 "01001.b(A)"
When the worksheet is executed, the value of relay 01000 to 01001 is read to "A1" to "A2".
As the conditional formula is True, the value when the result is True is returned to "B1".
As “Output to PLC device” is set, the value of "B1" is written to DM00000.
Item Description
Sets the conditions.
Const:Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
16
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference.
Parameter 1: Condition
The cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Parameter
WORKSHEET
Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output to PLC device
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the “Browse” button is
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text
Swap upper/lower bytes
string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting from the target
Number of devices
device.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
ABS
AVERAGE
CHOOSE
COUNT
COUNTIF
IF
LARGE
LARGEPOS
MAX
<result>=IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)
MIN
<result>=IF(<condition>,<value if true>,<value if false>)
<result>=IF(<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>) SMALL
SMALLPOS
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,"ABC","XYZ") => Display =IF(A1.b,"ABC","XYZ") b: Bit
SUM
Entry IF(A1.b,B1.s,B2.s) => Display =IF(A1.b,B1.wu,B2.wu) b:Bit,s:text string
SUMIF
Entry IF(A1.wu>10u,"ABC","XYZ") => Display =IF(A1.wu>10,"ABC","XYZ")
u,wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.s,B2.s) => Display =IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.s,B2.s)
wu: Unsigned decimal
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for IF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
16
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
WORKSHEET
[Example] To output the result of the IF function as four devices starting from DM1000
=> Display
CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)="DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
To output the result of the IF function as four devices starting from DM1000 only when the
result is true
=> Display
IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,- - ).o"DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.ws" =IF(A1=A2,"ABC","XYZ")=>"DM01000 to DM01009.s"
2 "DM00002.ws"
When the worksheet is executed, the value of DM00001 to DM00002 is read to "A1" to "A2".
Since the conditional formula is false, the false value is returned to "B1".
Since "Output PLC device" is set, the value of "B1" is written into DM01000-DM01009 in the form of SJIS code.
16
WORKSHEET
7. IF function for "Output value only when it's true", with "Output to PLC device"
AVERAGE
Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false).
CHOOSE
The value of the cell is output to the PLC device only when the condition is True.
8. IF function for "Output value only when itís true", with "Output to PLC device" (Output only when value changes). COUNT
Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false). COUNTIF
The value of the cell is output to the PLC only when the condition is True and the value changes.
IF
*6 and 8 perform the same operations.
LARGE
• In IF function set with "Update value only when itís true" and "Output value only when itís true", the cell value is LARGEPOS
MAX
MIN
SMALL
SMALLPOS
SUM
SUMIF
16
WORKSHEET
LARGE Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from
the largest number from a range of specified cells.
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
1:Range Select data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/
Data
Parameter
floating real number". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
Format
complement.
Sets the K (Parameter) in the range set by parameter 1.
Parameter Const: Set the numerical value.
K
2: K Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
PLC
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
complement.
[Example] The results of LARGE function are output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display LARGE <parameter 1>, <parameter 2>=""DM01000.w2u"
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =LARGE(A1:A5.wu,2)
ABS
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu" AVERAGE
4 "DM00004.wu"
CHOOSE
5 "DM00005.wu"
COUNT
COUNTIF
PLC devices LARGE Function
DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":400 IF
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3" LARGE
DM00004:500 =>"A4"
DM00005:400 =>"A5" LARGEPOS
MATCH
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5". MAX
The 2nd largest value from among "A1" to "A5" is searched and returned to "B1". MIN
SMALL
Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2.If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
SMALLPOS
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs. SUM
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
SUMIF
example, priorityis as follows:
A Priority A B C D E F G
1 30 (5) 1 30 20 30 50 50 40 60
2 20 (7)
3 30 (6) Priority (5) (7) (6) (2) (3) (4) (1)
4 50
16
(2)
5 50 (3)
6 40 (4)
WORKSHEET
7 60 (1)
LARGEPOS Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order
counting from the largest number from a range of specified cells.
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
1:Range Select the data format of the cells in the specified range from "Unsigned decimal/
Data
Parameter
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
PLC
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
[Example] The results of LARGEPOS are output to DM1000 as 1-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display LARGEPOS(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)=>"DM01000.wu"
Application example
A B C D
1
2
ABS
3 "A" "DM00001.wu" =LARGEPOS(B3:B7.wu,1) =CHOOSE(A3:A7.s,C3)
4 "B" "DM00002.wu" AVERAGE
IF
MIN
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "B3" to "B7". SMALL
The cell of the largest value from among "B3" to "B7" is searched and its position returned to "C3".
SMALLPOS
The value of the cell at "C3" (4)th position from among "A3" to "A7" is returned to "D3".
SUM
"CHOOSE", page 16-46
SUMIF
Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs.
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
example, priorityis as follows:
1
A
30
Priority
(5) 1
A
30
B
20
C
30
D
50
E
50
F
40
G
60 16
2 20 (7)
WORKSHEET
MATCH In the case of multiple same values, the top/left cells are at a priority level,
as shown below:
Item Description
Data type of compared value Select the data type of compared value from "Word/text string".
Select reference conditions from "Matching/below/above"
Matching: returns the position of cells matching the compared value from the range of
specified cells.Returns "0" in the absence of matching cells.
Below: returns the position of cells of values (below the compared value) closest to the
reference conditions *1,2 compared value from the range of specified cells. Returns "0" if no cells
matching the reference conditions are found.
Above: returns the position of cells of values (above the compared value) closest to the
compared value from the range of specified cells. Returns "0" if no cells
matching the reference conditions are found.
*1 When entered directly, the reference conditions can be set through the check box displayed in worksheet
setting tool screen.
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"
*2 The "above" and "below" in the text string are coded according to characters.
Word (MATCH)
This describes the situation when "Data type of compared value" is word.
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
1:Range Data Select data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/floating
16 Format real number".Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
Parameter
2: Lookup
value position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
value
Calc: "Device setting" window is displayed by clicking "Arithmetic formula"
button. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
device
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
COUNT
[Example] Entry MATCH(A1:A10.wu,100u,0) => Display =MATCH(A1:A10.wu,100,0)
wu: Unsigned decimal COUNTIF
Reference • If MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)is half-width character, it has no MAX
Application example
A B C
1 100 INPUT (100) =MATCH(A1:A5.wu,B1.wu,0)
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500
Write 300 into "B1" from parts (numerical value display, etc).
When the worksheet is next executed, the position of the cell matching "300" from "A1" to "A5" is returned to "C1".
A B C
1 100 INPUT (100) =MATCH(A1:A5.wu,B1.wu,-1)
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500
Write 250 into "B1" from parts (numerical value display, etc).
When the worksheet is next executed, the position of the cell ("A2") of value "250 or less" closest to "250" from "A1"
to "A5" is returned to "C1".
16
WORKSHEET
String (MATCH)
This section describes the situation when "Data type of compared value" is text string.
ABS
AVERAGE
Item Description
CHOOSE
Parameter Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
1:Range The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
COUNT
Sets the compared value
Parameter COUNTIF
Lookup Const: Sets the numerical value.
2: Lookup
value Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Specify the position of cells by clicking "Select"
value IF
button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device LARGE
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
LARGEPOS
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC
MATCH
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
SMALLPOS
complement.
SUM
Reference • If MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)is half-width character, it has no
difference in terms of uppercase characters and lowercase characters.
• Reference conditions are entered by: above: 1; matching; 0; below: -1.
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
[Example] The results of MATCH function are output to DM1000 by 1-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)=>"DM01000.wu"
Application example
A B C
1 "ABC" INPUT ("ABC") =MATCH(A1:A5.s,B1.s,0)
2 "DEF"
3 "LMN"
4 "PQR"
5 "XYZ"
16
WORKSHEET
MAX Acquires and returns maximum value from the range of specified cells or
specified trend data.
ABS
Item Description
AVERAGE
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend".
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10 CHOOSE
Range
Parameter
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter Trend: Sets the trend ID and trend No. *1 COUNT
1:Range
Select the data format of cells in specified range from "Unsigned decimal/signed
Data COUNTIF
decimal/BCD/floating real number".Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
Format
handled as 2's complement. IF
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device LARGE
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device LARGEPOS
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC
MATCH
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
MAX
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. MIN
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
SMALL
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement. SMALLPOS
Reference • If MAX(<parameter 1>)is half-width character, it has no difference in terms of uppercase characters
and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =MAX(A1:A5.wu)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, the value of DM00001-DM00005 is read to "A1" - "A5".
The maximum value is searched in "A1" - "A5", and returned to "B1".
Point • It takes a longer time to process this function when “Trend” is selected in parameter 1, and
there is a lot of data of the recorded trend.
• When “Trend” is selected in parameter 1 and there isn’t data of target trend, it’s returned to
"0".
16
WORKSHEET
MIN Acquires and returns minimum value from the range of specified cells or
specified trend data.
ABS
Range
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button. COUNT
1:Range Trend: Sets the trend ID and trend No. *1
Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/ COUNTIF
Format BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
IF
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution. LARGE
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
LARGEPOS
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is MATCH
device
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
MAX
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. MIN
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's SMALL
complement.
SMALLPOS
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
SUM
"10-4 XY image Settings"
SUMIF
Reference • If MIN (<parameter 1>) is half-width character, it has no difference in terms of uppercase characters
and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When "Trend" is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD
[Example] The results of MIN function are output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display MIN (<parameter 1>)=>"DM01000.w2u"
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =MIN(A1:A5.wu)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
The maximum value from among "A1" to "A5" is searched and returned to "B1".
Point • It takes a longer time to process this function when "Trend" is selected in parameter 1, and
there is a lot of data of the recorded trend.
• When "Trend" is selected in parameter 1 and there isn't data of target trend, it's returned to
"0".
16
WORKSHEET
SMALL Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from
the smallest number from a range of specified cells.
ABS
floating real number". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
Format COUNTIF
complement.
Sets the K (Parameter) in the range set by parameter 1. IF
Parameter Const: Set the numerical value.
K
2:K Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference. The LARGE
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
LARGEPOS
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution. MATCH
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes. MAX
Output to PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device
Reference • If SMALL (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) is half-width character, it has no difference in terms of
uppercase characters and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.
[Example] The results of SMALL function are output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display SMALL(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)=>"DM01000. w2u"
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =SMALL(A1:A5.wu,2)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
The value smaller than the 2nd one is searched from "A1"-"A5" and returned to "B1".
Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs.
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
example, priorityis as follows:
A Priority A B C D E F G
1 30 (2) 1 30 20 30 50 50 40 60
2 20 (1)
3 30 (3) Priority (2) (1) (3) (5) (6) (4) (7)
4 50 (5)
5 50 (6)
16 6
7
40
60
(4)
(7)
WORKSHEET
SMALLPOS Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order
counting from the smallest number from a range of specified cells.
ABS
AVERAGE
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10 CHOOSE
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter COUNT
1:Range Select the data format of the cells in the specified range from "Unsigned decimal/
Data
Parameter
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device MAX
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is MIN
device
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
SMALL
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. SMALLPOS
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's SUM
complement.
SUMIF
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for SMALLPOS (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed decimal, so
either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.
[Example] To output the result of the SMALLPOS function to DM1000 as 1-word signed decimal
=> Display SMALLPOS(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)=>"DM01000.wu"
Application example
A B C D
1
2
3 "A" "DM00001.wu" =SMALLPOS(B3:B7.wu,1) =CHOOSE(A3:A7.s,C3)
4 "B" "DM00002.wu"
5 "C" "DM00003.wu"
6 "D" "DM00004.wu"
7 "E" "DM00005.wu"
8
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "B3" to "B7".
The cell of the largest value from below "B3" to "B7" is searched and its position returned to "C3".
The value of the cell at "C3" (3)th position from among "A3" to "A7" is returned to "D3".
"CHOOSE", page 16-46
Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs.
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
example, priorityis as follows:
16 1
A
30
Priority
(2) 1
A
30
B
20
C
30
D
50
E
50
F
40
G
60
2 20 (1)
WORKSHEET
SUM Acquires and returns the sum of the range of specified cells or the sum or
specified trend data.
ABS
AVERAGE
Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend". CHOOSE
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter
Range
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button. COUNT
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device LARGE
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device LARGEPOS
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC
MATCH
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window. MAX
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. MIN
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed SMALL
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement. SMALLPOS
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for SUM (<parameter 1<).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When "Trend" is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD
[Example] To output the result of the SUM function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display => SUM(<parameter 1>)=>"DM01000..w2u"
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =SUM(A1:A5.wu)=>"DM00100.wu"
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
Calculate the sum of "A1"-"A5", and return to "B1".
As "Output to PLC device" is set, the value of "B1" is written to DM00100.
Point • The worksheet is executed falsely when the sum exceeds the representable range of data
format of the cells.
• Even if the representable range of data format of the cells is exceeded during calculation,
no error of worksheet execution will occur when the calculated results are controlled in the
range.
• It takes a long time to process this function when “Trend” is selected for parameter 1, and
there is a lot of recorded data.
16
WORKSHEET
Acquires and returns the total value of cells matching conditions from a
SUMIF range of specified cells, or the total value of matching cells from the data of
specified trend graph.
ABS
AVERAGE
CHOOSE
COUNT
Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend". COUNTIF
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range IF
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
Parameter
Conditiona "Device setting" window is displayed by clicking "<Conditional formula>" button. MATCH
2:
l formula*2 Set the conditional formula (calculation formula) in this window.
Condition MAX
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device MIN
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device SMALL
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is SMALLPOS
device
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
SUM
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. SUMIF
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, “Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"
16
WORKSHEET
*2 The variable X in the conditional formula (calculation formula) in the worksheet refers to the various data in the
range specified by parameter 1.
Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for SUMIF (<parameter 1>, <parameter
2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
[Example] To output the result of the SUMIF function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display SUMIF(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)= "DM01000.w2u"
Application example
A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" SUMIF(A1:A10.wu,40<=X&X>=70)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
6 "DM00006.wu"
7 "DM00007.wu"
8 "DM00008.wu"
9 "DM00009.wu"
10 "DM00010.wu"
DM00004:58 =>"A4"
AVERAGE
DM00005:44 =>"A5"
DM00006:23 =>"A6" CHOOSE
DM00007:61 =>"A7"
DM00008:15 =>"A8" COUNT
DM00009:75 =>"A9"
DM00010:98 =>"A10" COUNTIF
IF
When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00010 are read to "A1" to "A10".
LARGE
The SUM of cells whose value is 40 or more or 70 or less from among cells "A1" to "A10" is returned to "B1".
LARGEPOS
MATCH
Point • The worksheet is executed falsely when the sum exceeds the representable range of data
format of the cells. MAX
• Even if the representable range of data format of the cells is exceeded during calculation,
no error of worksheet execution will occur when the calculated results are controlled in the MIN
range. SMALL
• It takes a long time to process this function when “Trend” is selected for parameter 1, and
there is a lot of recorded data. SMALLPOS
SUM
SUMIF
16
WORKSHEET
16 In the system setting of worksheets, set the worksheet startup trigger to internal timer (auto).
Sorting and display is performed according to the change of superintendents and production capacity.
WORKSHEET
Setting Worksheets
A B C D E
Superint
1 Production quantity N-th Position N-th superintendent N-th production quantity
endents
2 "Tanaka" "DM00001.wu" =LARGEPOS(B2:B4.wu,1) =CHOOSE(A2:A4.s,C2) =CHOOSE(B2:B4.wu,C2)
3 "Suzuki" "DM00101.wu" =LARGEPOS(B2:B4.wu,2) =CHOOSE(A2:A4.s,C3) =CHOOSE(B2:B4.wu,C3)
4 "Sato" "DM00102.wu" =LARGEPOS(B2:B4.wu,3) =CHOOSE(A2:A4.s,C4) =CHOOSE(B2:B4.wu,C4)
5
16
WORKSHEET
Distribution chart
100
50
0
-40 -20 0 20 40 Execution
16
WORKSHEET
To record the measured value, the trend graph (real-time) shall be set.
"10-3 Setting Trend images"
In the system settings of worksheets, the worksheet startup trigger is set to bit device.
Set the device of trigger bit device the same as the target device of "Execute" switch.
Set the measured value as the value recorded in trend ID0 and trend No.0.
Setting Worksheets
A B C
1 Variability (degree) Set value
2 '(Set value-measured value)<-40 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",<-C2<(-40)) "DM00100.ws"
3 '-40<=(Set value-measured value)<-20 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",(-40)<=X-C2&X-C2<(-20))
4 '-20<=(Set value-measured value)<0 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",(-20)<=X-C2&X-C2<0)
5 '0<=(Set value-measured value)<20 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",0<=X-C2&X-C2<20)
6 '20<=(Set value-measured value)<40 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",20<=X-C2&X-C2<40)
7 '40<=(Set value-measured value) =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",40<=X-C2)
• When the worksheet is executed, the value of "B2"-"B7" becomes the number of data matching the conditions.
• In the trend graph parts (work), the values of cells are displayed by bar graph since "B2"-"B7" are set in reference
cells.
Setting Worksheets
A B
1 Week "MW0013.wu"
2 Hours "MW0018.wu"
3 'Minute "MW0019.wu"
4 'Condition B1.wu=5&B2.wu=17&(0<=B3.wu & B3.wu<1)
5 'Setting =IF(B4.b,ON,OFF)->"01000.b(A)"
• In the system setting of worksheets, set the worksheet startup trigger to internal timer (auto).
• Set comment in "A1"-"A5"
• Set internal special device of VT3in "B1" "B2" "B3".
MW0013:Week (number, 0: Sunday-6: Saturday)
MW0018:Hour(unsigned decimal,0 to 23)
MW0019: Minute(signed decimal,0 to 59)
"6-6 About Devices"
• Set ìB4î as parameter 1 (conditional formula) of IF function of "B5" in the calculation.
Sets such that the value of cell is turned ON at 17:00 on Friday, or turned OFF at 17:01.
• ìB5î is set as relay 01000 is turned ON when the conditions of "B4" are matched, or is turned OFF otherwise. In
addition, set as output (output only when the value changes) to PLC device (relay 01000).
Point When the worksheet is executed by internal timer(auto), the execution time of worksheet is
uncertain.
In the above-specified examples, the conditions of "B4" are set to comprise second/hour.
Within the time of JUST (e.g. 17:00:00), the worksheet isn’t executed sometimes, and the
relay isnít turned ON.
Particular attentions shall be paid to process the time in the worksheet.
16
WORKSHEET
Barcode reader
49123456
Text display
Set cells in reference word device KL
and write worksheet word device of (16-dot output cell)
text display
For example, the output targets consistent with logged barcode data are correlated below.
Assumed that the connected KL is a 16-output unit and assigned with LNW0000 (LNB00000 to LNB0000F).
When the value read from barcode reader is 49000003, bit 2 of LNW0000 becomes ON.
• About KL link
"Chapter 7 KL Link", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Barcode Reader
"6-3 Barcode Reader", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
In the system setting of worksheets, set the worksheet startup trigger to internal timer (auto).
Setting Worksheets
A B C
Output
1 ‘Range Input value from barcode(compared value)
value
2 0 INPUT("Input",8)
3 1 "49000001"
4 2 "49000002" Position of consistent cells
5 4 "49000003" =MATCH(B3:B10.s,C2.s,0)
6 8 "49000004" =IF(C5=0,1,C5.wu+1)
7 16 "49000005"
8 32 "49000006" Search for the output value of LNW0000
9 64 "49000007" =CHOOSE(A2:A10.wu,C6)=>"LNW0000.wu"
10 128 "49000008"
16
WORKSHEET
17
ETHERNET CONNECTION
Overview
"Ethernet connection" refers to communications between the VT3 and PLC viaEthernet.
If the Ethernet connection is used, up to 16 PLCs can be connected to a single VT3.
You can build a network(1: N) where the PLC connected to the VT3 is assigned PLC No. 0 to 15.
Communication between VT3 and PLC is based on the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet which operates at 10Mbps
to 100Mbps, thus enabling high-speed communications.
VT3
(VT3-E3/VT2-E1/E2)
Ethernet
Up to 16 stations
17
ETHERNET CONNECTION
For PLCs manufactured by other vendors that can be connected to Ethernet, see VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series
PLC Connection Manual.
Point NOTE When an Ethernet-enabled target PLC is selected not using the PLC Model Settings
window, the window in Setp 2 is not displayed. Display the Common PLC Communication
Setup Window.
17
ETHERNET CONNECTION
Item Description
PLC No. Selects the PLC No. (0 to 15) to be used.
IP address*1 Sets the IP address of the connection destination PLC (marked PLC No.).
Sets the port No. (1024 to 65535) of the connectiondestination PLC (marked PLC
Terget PLC Port No.*2
No.).
Selects the connection destination from the connection destination list file, or adds
Connect to*3
connection destinations.
VT port No.
(for PLC Sets the port No. (for PLC communications) (1024 to65535) of the VT3.
communications)
ETHERNET
Setting Timeout Set up timeout (1 to 9999 seconds).
Send Wait Set up the send wait time (0 to 9999ms).
Number of retries Set up retry times (1 to 99 times).
Device for
connection Target word Used to set up a device that troubleshoot Ethernet connections.
confirmation is device*4 Normally no need to be set up
specified
*1 Be sure to set only unique IP addresses to each device within the LAN.
IP addresses are expressed as XXX.XXX.XXXX.XXX (XXX is a number within the range 0 to 255).
*2 When changing the port No., do not use numbers 0 to 1023 as the new port No. Also, take care not to use
another port No. that is already in use.
*3 Click the "List of Connected PLCs" button to display the "List of Connected PLCs" window.
Lists of PLCs connected with VT3 can be created through the List of Connected PLCs "window". you can
distinguish connection destination PLC by appending them with any name, connections with the PLC can be
made easier by simply selecting the desired PLC from the list file.
*4 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*5 Configure this setting only when required for a target PLC, as described in VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series
Reference For details about "Connection target list" window, please see "List of Connection Destinations",
ETHERNET CONNECTION
page 13-5. Although the operation modes are different, VT3 list file for PC (VT STUDIO)
communication is described here. So, PC (VT STUDIO) here indicates VT3 and VT3 indicates PLC.
Reference • References Inform the internal devices "MW00D0 to MW00D8" of Ethernet connection problems.
• Ethernet connections can be set up in the internal devices "MW00D0 to MW00D8".
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
[Example]
VT3
Based on the control setup of the device,
the number of the station that runs the PLC
data folder is set to "1"
Run the PLC data folder
with the PLC Station 1.
(VT3-E3/VT2-E1/E2)
Ethernet
Based on the control setup of the device, the number of the station that runs the PLC data folder is set to "1".
_<PLC_/B>, displayed when the MultiTalk function is used.
For other setups, please see the "Execute PLC data folder", page 9-117
17
ETHERNET CONNECTION
18
LADDER MONITOR
PLC
or
OP-42254
VT STUDIO
KV STUDIO
Supported PLC
For additional information about how to connect VT3 and PLC or communications settings, see VT5 Series/VT3
Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual.
KEYENCE CORPORATION
Series
CPU Connection method Object PLC
name
Direct link with PLC port
KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V
KV-L20V/L21V KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V<XYM>
(KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode
KV-3000 KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)
KV-LE20V/LE21V/EP21V
KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)<XYM>
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)
KV-LM20V/L21V
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)<XYM>
KV-L20V/L21V KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V
(KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode) KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V<XYM>
KV Direct link with Ethernet port KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)
KV-5500/5000
KV-LM20V/L21V/EP21V KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)<XYM>
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)
KV-LM20V/L21V
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)<XYM>
KV Nano Series [KV-N*]
Direct link with PLC port
KV Nano Series [KV-N*]
Additional cassette KV-N10L/N11L
<XYM>
KV Nano Series
KV Nano Series [KV-N*] (Ethernet)
KV-NC1EP KV Nano Series [KV-N*] (Ethernet)
<XYM>
Point • Ladder monitor function isn't supported by VT2 multi-link slave station.
• Ladder monitor function can't be used for through communication connection of DR
router.
Point • Ladder monitor function isn't supported by VT2 multi-link slave station.
• Ladder monitor function can't be used for through communication connection of DR
router.
18
LADDER MONITOR
Install memory card on VT when the save destination "6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware
of ladder monitor data is memory card. Manual
18
LADDER MONITOR
APPENDICES
Please reduce the number of files or size of PLC data file exceeds the upper or save PLC data file to memory card.
the size of each file to 75KB or less limit. "Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
before changing VT model.
Text is not set. Enter 1- byte correctly set when the key entry Set one 1-byte character or 2-byte
character or 2-byte character. destination is a numerical value display character number/character.
or a text display in key entry.
Active Edit
Operation Log
System Setting
Workspace
Part Catalog
Device Comments
In the Simulator
Help
APPENDICES
"+" in a short-cut key command indicates that the two keys are pressed at the same time.
*1 The screen can be scrolled when a part is not selected.
*2 When display individual ON/OFF, switch over selected ON/OFF of lamp, lamp switch, graph attribute control.
The selected animated cartoon part is regenerated.
*3 Create new screen at cursor position.
Start up PLC data folder edit tool and excel when cursor is in the PLC data folder or excel.
*4 Display screen attribute setting at cursor position.
*5 Display "page comment setting" window when cursor is at page ID position; display "page change" window
when cursor is in global window.
*6 Switch ON/OFF status for the selected indicator, indicator switch and image attribute control when some one
is ON/OFF.
Display is possible when animation component is selected.
APPENDICES
1-byte characters
2-byte characters
NECSpecial characters
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
Message display
• Add "Windows font"
X
• Changing display text strings supported
Alarm display
• Add "Windows font"
X
• Changing display text strings supported
• Support external designation of channels
• Support 260,000 colors
(screen: in case of no undersize RGB: irrelevant with size)
Video display
• Support simultaneous display of screen and RGB X
• Support overlap screen display
• In case of VT3 type edit, when screen display part could
only be configured to full size of even number coordinate,
only even number Þeven number size could be set.
Basic Add a new rule
Animated cartoon display X
part
Execute PLC • Add "PLC" X
data folder • Add "File comments" (display-only)
Transfer comment
of PLC data folder
• Add "File comments" (display-only)
Scale Display
• Change to zoom in • zoom out via Ctrl key + mouse roller
operation
Meters/
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X
Graphs
Data • Add "Display range" X
• Add "Pointer category"
DISPLAY
• Support image instrument
• Add "Image frame" X
Fan meter
• Add image in "Alarm"
Scale • Add "Scale position" X
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X
Setting • Add "Image frame" X
Statistical graphs
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X
• Modify maximum value (800 -> 900) to be set via "Display
Data X
data number"
Display range • Add "Display range" X
• Add "Image frame"
Trend Graph Graphs • Add "Alarm lower limit background color", "Alarm upper X
limit background color"
Scale • Add "Windows font" in scale value X
Store date/
• Add "Non-display value" X
Display control
XY chart Add a new rule X
Table Add a new rule
• Support switch, lamp switch, lamp
Overall edit of part attribute setting
• Perform overall edit via switch function unit
• Prompt display (image frame)
OTHER • Alarm display (image frame)
• Strip/round statistical chart (image frame)
FUNCTIO
Part Designer • Strip/round/fan shaped instrument (data part/image frame/ X
NS alarm)
• Orientation chart (image frame)
• XY chart (image frame)
Device Comments Add a new rule
Operation Log Add a new rule X
APPENDICES
Data check • Modify limit value (1280 -> 1536) of "Number of PLC
device" (Base + total local windows)
• Modify limit value (32768 -> 49152) of "Overlap data X
capacity" (Base + total local windows/total Global window,
interrupt window)
• Improve display content of inspection result
Communi Inconsistent image data: display which image is inconsistent
PC VT Verify data X
cations Inconsistent system setting: display inconsistent setting via
classification unit of work space
• Add new "Docking navigator"
Edit Screen
• Add new "Automatic conceal function"
*1 To edit VT2 type, use/do not use add function
APPENDICES
Item Description
Import screen • Add "Import screen" to file menu
File • To add check function to check ladder data and projects stored in the
Check ladder monitor data
memory card and internal ROM.
• Paste to the corordinate position of copy resource component when pasting
Copy
to the different pages with copy source
• Even if switch or light and numerical value display are included, the
Rotate/reverse
Edit configuration can also be inverted.
Device transferring
• When "High" speed of "Processing period" of "Device transfer start trigger"
Resourse is changed to "Medium" speed, "High" speed will further be increased
Global function control • "Page move (+1)" and "Page move (-1)" is added
PLC data folder • Data capacity for VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is added
Ladder monitor data • To add generation function to generate the ladder monitor data.
Data check Version check • The function of checking screen data and system program version is added
PC -> VT Send data • It can be changed to be able to send fonts corresponding to GB2313 required for China.
PC -> VT Send screen data differences • Ease the limit when sending differentials
Receive operation program • The function of receiving "Operation record" data is added
Communications
VT -> PC Receive Receive trend chart • The function of receiving "Trend" data is added
data Receive alarm log • The function of receiving "Alarm log" data is added
Receive screen image • The function of capturing and receiving screen displayed on touch panel is added
• Change to "Double click", and "Screen attribute setting" window can appear
• It can be changed to scroll screens in editing by dragging mouse under the
Edit Screen staus of right-clicking.
• Add the function of "Smooth reset size" to keep the surfaces of components
from damage when zooming in/out components.
• Applicable to Windows Vista(32bit)
Others • Change to that internal device list can be referred when setting up device
• Improve style selection method
*1 When VT model is changed between VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A) and VT3/VT2 series other than that, items of
which settings have been changed will exist, and in some cases, change cannot be performed.
The items to be changed when changing from VT3/VT2 series to VT3-W4T (A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Item Description
Stroke fonts • Change stroke fonts on components to bitmap fonts.
Form screen • Form screen will be deleted when form screen is set
VT system setting (buzzer volume) • When volume of the buzzer is set to "High", "Medium" or "Low", it will be changed to "High".
PLC model setting • PLC connection port is disabled
PLC communication conditions • Communication speed will change to 115.2kbps when exceeding the speed of 115.2kbps.
MultiTalk • All devices set to PLC_B with MmltiTalk will become unset devices.
Barcode • The selected status of "Bar code" for "VT system setting" can be removed by selecting it.
VT model can not be set to VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) when the capacity of PLC data folder exceeds 75k bytes.
Item Description
• When the switch area is set below 16 x 16 points, it will be initialized to the default switch area (16 x 16 points).
Switch Area
• Please initialize according to configurated components when changing switch areas.
Backlight color • Initialize backlight color setting.
PLC model setting • Change connection port to Port2 on PLC. (Port4 when using Megalink)
APPENDICES
Item Description
• Menu-only import function is expanded to include the import of system
Import settings etc, the name is changed from "Menu Import" -> "Import" (the
File model is only limited to VT3 series)
Set printing • Add global function key as the object
• Add "System Setting"in the "Search Scope"
Search
• Add"Selected Object" in the "Menu"of "Search Scope"
Registered as initial setting
• Add "Registered As Initial Setting of the Part Attribute"
of the Part Attribute
Edit
• Add dimension of the parts in the "Part Attribute"
Option settings
• "Nameplate"in the "Part Attribute" is divided into ON/OFF nameplate
• Add settings on the pattern modifier for switching whether nameplate
character attribute is changed
• Name is changed from "Directory" to "Part Directory"
Part directory • Add button onto the pattern modifier for switching whether nameplate
character attribute is changed
Menu directory • Add "Menu Directory"
View
Toolbar
• Add "Function Key" in the "Switch Indicator Lamp"
• Add "Menu Directory" in the "View"
• Add "Multiple ON""Multiple OFF" in the right-click menu of "Character
Work area
String List"
• Add "VNC Key Switch"" Expanded Command Communication" into switch
function
• Add "Sensor Setup Backup"" Sensor Setup Restore"" sensor monitor" in
Switch indicator lamp "System Menu Call" of the switch function
• Add"VNC Key Switch"" Expanded Command Communication" into the
Part "Key Input" of switch function
• Add"Function Key"
• Add "Expanded Command Communication" into "Device-Based Function
Basic part Control"
• Add "VNC Display" part
Form part • Improve operability of the form part
• Add "PLC time synchronization"
VT system settings
• Add "Upper limit of extended number of images" in the "Other"
Global function switch • Add "Global Function Key"
Resource
• "PLC Data Folder Edit Tool" supports the reading and display of input
PLC data folder auxiliary information
• "PLC Data Folder Edit Tool", so imporve operability
System memory • Add "Displaying Sensor Setup Backup Menu""Displaying Sensor Setup
Expansion state
area Restore Menu""Displaying Sensor Monitor Menu"bit
Safety/PL method
Barbola
measures
• Change the design according to the up-to-date specification
Operating • Add Windows7(32 bit) support
Support OS
environment • Delete Winodws98SE/Me support
Item Description
VT system • "ESC/P-R Ether" and "ESC/Page Ether" printer types were added (for use
Resources Printer
settings only when the VT3 series and printer are connected via Ethernet)
• Windows 8 support was added
Operating environment
• Windows 2000 support was removed
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
E G
Edit Apex ..................................................................... 4-30 Global Function Control....................................3-28, 12-43
Edit base ..................................................................... 5-25 Global function control check ....................................12-50
APPENDICES
X
XY image Precautions............................................... 10-84
XY image Settings..................................................... 10-62
XY image settings ..................................................... 10-64
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2008 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 1509E 1116-18 1509E Printed in Japan